u- ' ^^ ' '
r,;.;^'' '<^^;v" ^^^^\, ^ ^ ^* .^
IN MEMJOmAJA
J. Henry Senger
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2007 with funding from
IVIicrosoft Corporation
http://www.archive.org/details/firstbpokingermaOObranrich
FIRST BOOK IN GERMAN
CONTAINING
THE ACCIDENCE AND SYNTAX OF THE AUTHOR'S
GERMAN GRAMMAR, NEW INDICES, AND
LODEMAN'S EXERCISES
By If. C;-^! BRANDT^
HAMILTON COLLEGE, CLINTON, N.Y.
Sagton
ALLYN AND BACON
!N MEMORfAM
Copyright^ 1884, by G. P. Putnam's Sons,
* » ,'» -3
Coi>yright^ 1888, by AUyn &> Bacon.
PREFACE.
AT the suggestion made by several teachers, Part I.
of the Grammar and Lodeman's Exercises with the
complete English-German Vocabulary have been here
bound together for use in secondary schools, whose
younger pupils had been first put into one of the many
short grammars. I should have liked to include the
chapters on Accent and on Word-Formation from Part II.;
but there are practical objections to this. The indices
of the Grammar are added to this unchanged.
PREFACE TO THE FOURTH EDITION
OF THE GRAMMAR.
npHIS is the first thoroughly revised edition. Of the criti-
-^ cisms of this work, I have been able to accept and embod}^
especially those of Prof. A. L. Ripley, of Yale College, and
of Prof. George O. Curme, of Cornell College (Iowa), to both
of whom I express my sincere thanks. The strictures made
upon my classification of nouns and upon the standard of
pronunciation I do not think well founded. The classification
of nouns is historical and scientific. If the standard pronunci-
ation should finally settle upon M, jh (§ 375) for g and not
upon h (surd stop), nothing would please me better. " Hard "
g, except after n, is a bitter pill for a North German. To the
IV PREFACE.
objection that the work is too concise, let me sa}^ that I have
worked hard to make it concise. The Accidence and Part II.
were once as large again as they are now. The first contained
too much syntax, until, following the excellent method of the
French grammarians, I resolved to separate entirely inflection
and syntax. I have in this edition transferred several para-
graphs from Part I. to Part II. Part II. is a historical founda-
tion broad enough for Part I. to rest upon. It is not intended
to be a minute historical reference-grammar for teachers and
specialists onl}^
The word-index has been very much enlarged. With the
demand for the traditional list of irregular verbs, "which no
grammar should be without," I have complied so far as to
include all the irregular verbs in the word-index (see introduc-
tory remarks on page 271). I wanted to make the German-
English vocabulary cover all the sentences and words, but
found that it would swell the book too much. It is complete
only for Part I. (see page 271).
The list of reference-books has been omitted at the sugges-
tion of Professor Ripley.
It ma}' not be out of place to enumerate the distinguishing
features of the grammar: (1) the complete separation of in-
flection and syntax ; (2) the historical treatment of the latter,
which should make it a welcome aid in the reading of 16th, 17th,
and 18th century Literature ; (3) the attempt to treat German
grammar with regard to the present stage of Germanic philol-
ogy ; (4) the scientific analysis of German sounds and accent.
The Author.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PAET I. SECTION 1.
PAGE
ACCIDENCE 1-47
Pronunciation with Alphabets 1-5 .
The Articles 6-7
Declension of Nouns 7-17
Declension and Comparison of the Adjective 17-21
Numerals 21-23
Pronouns 23-30
Conjugation 30-47
Weak Verbs 35-37
Strong Verbs 37-43
Anomalous Verbs 44-47
SECTION 2.
SYNTAX.
SPECIAL SYNTAX 51-130
Articles 51-55
Nouns 56-74
Gender 56-62
Singular and Plural 62-64
Cases 64-74
Adjectives 74^80
Numerals 80-82
Pronouns 82-96
Personal Pronouns „ 82-85
Reflexive and Reciprocal Pronouns QQ
vi TABLE OF CONTENTS,
PAGE
Possessive Pronouns ., 86-88
Demonstrative Pronouns 88-91
Interrogative Pronouns 91-93
Relative Pronouns 93-95
Indefinite Pronouns 95-96
Verbs 97-118
Classification of Verbs 97
Auxiliary Verbs 97-99
Modal Auxiliaries , 99-102
Voice 102-104
Tenses 104-110
Moods 110-112
Infinitive 113-116
Participles 116-118
Gerundive 118
Adveeb 119
Pbeposition 119-130
Conjunction 130
GENERAL SYNTAX 131-154
The Simple Sentence 131-135
The Compound Sentence 135-147
Coordinate Sentences 135-137
Subordinate Sentences 137-147
Substantive Clauses 137-138
Adjective Clauses 139
Adverbial Clauses 140-147
Word-order 147-154
Abbreviations and Symbols 265
Subject-Index 266-270
Word-Index and German-English Vocabulary 271-286
Exercises for Translating into German, prepared and
arranged to accompany the Grammar by A. Lodeman 1-87
FIRST PART.
FIRST SECTION.
ACCIDENCE.
THE GERMAN ALPHABET.
1-2.
German type. German script. Name. German type. Gennan script. Kame.
^ a ^ -^
S c ^-^
® b ^yli^y
(g e
^ f
@ g
3^ t
^ !
S \
all
bay
tsay
day
(b)ay
ef
gay
hah
e
yot
kah
el
'..' . c* V .
dt X
X t
U u
5' /^
c/
oh
pay
koo
tay
(t)oo
fou(l)
vay
Ix
ipsilon
tset
Ue uU
iu
ah-umlaut
(h)ai(r)
oh-umlaut
oo-umlaut
^ „ ^ au-umlaut
(-oi)
cX
C
tsay-hah
tsay-kah
es-tsay-hah
(::.8h)
PEOJSrUNCIATION^. [3-
PRONUNCIATION.
The German sounds are here only very inaccurately represented by
English words and letters. A fall analysis is found in the second part,
p. 160. The following description, with a few key- words, will suffice for
the beginner ; biit it is lacjint to be only a popular description. As soon
as tlie ^udent beg^ns> ^ read, be ought to study Part II., p. 160-174.
* 3. ,fi\es'.m':Mn^. father: ^(dtx,^al, S^i}U a, not in Eng.,
bttt SiEiilai^ to SOotcii a as in Sc hand, land: 'Slann, £ant>,
4. 6 = Eng. b, but surd ( =^) at the end of words: Sube,
§aube, Sieb, Saub*
5. if = Eng. k : Sari, Sade, Siicfer*
6. ^^ not in Eng., but in Scotch as in loch, A single guttural
sound. Two kinds : 1. Palatal (forward) after palatal vowels,
viz. : e, x, o, u, a, ti, m, and in the suffix ^(^en, e. g,, i^, SCac^ter,
33lec^, mod)te, tuij, ©eriic^t, melc^, SBatd^en, SKamad^en* 2. Back-
guttural after the other vowels, a, 0, u, m, e. g., ac^, ^a&j, Soc^,
Suc^, Saud^ (betrog in N. G.). In S::^arfrei'tag and in foreign
words = k: E^ara'fter, S^or; also like f^ in foreign words:
e^ampa'gner, (^angie'ren, finance*
7. b = Eng. d, but surd (= t) finally: bu, boc^, 35at>, lub.
8. c, long, similar to Eng. a, ay, as in pay, pate, rate ; short,
like Eng. e, as in met, e: gel^n, 33eet, ttJert; e: rec^t, SBette*
9. f = Eng./: l&offen, ipafen, fii^ren, gtagge.
10. g = Eng. g, but surd (=^) finally: glauben, ^^lagen,
graben; but 2:ag, 3ug, fragte, trug, 23alg.
IL ]^ = Eng. /i if it stands initially : iputtt), ipofe, ipafe*
After a vowel and after a t it is silent : ^e^n, fe^(e)n, fa^, t^un,
a^ot, S^al See the dropping of ^, p. 159.
12. i similar to Eng. i : bin, flnbe, brtnge,
I or ie = Eng. ee uifeet : 'oitx, ftegen, mir, 'tit, 3gel, Siber*
24] PRONUISrCIATION. 3
13. I similar to Eng. y: {ung, Jagen, S^gi**
14. f , if = Eng. k: ^a^e, Sacfe, ipalen.
15. I similar to Eng. I : Sage, kc^ett, too^, ©aal, kit)*
16. m = Eng. m ; SUJolc^, @aum, f(^n?tmmen.
17. n = Eng. n. 1. Initially, finally, and before a den-
tal: ?lagel, nun, fein, feni^en, gant, gunb* 2. In the stem-syllable
before t, and combined with g like Eng. ng in sm^, smgrer ;
3lnfattg, ©anger, ginger, 33anf, fenfen, 6linlen; but an^ge^fommen,
ttn^jge^euer*
18. B = Eng. o, oa, in hold, foal : Sole, Soot, tot, rot, Soo^,
lo^, ^l^on (clay), o not in Eng., but short Sc. o; e, g.: SBo(^e,
So(^, (Btod, 9lo(l (not at all like Eng. stocky rock, but see p. 164).
19. ^ = like Eng.p; ))Iagen, ^appt, 2:rapper, ©alo'p))*
|jf = p +/; 5)funt), 9la))f, ®um))f, tapfer* In Eng. only in
accidental juxtaposition, e. g., " a cap for him," " stop for me."
p^ in foreign words only =/; ^^^ilologie', Xtk^xa'p)^.
20. q always followed by n, similar to Eng. qu: quer,
Dnafl, Duart, fcequem*
21. X unlike Eng. r. 1. Trilled: Slegen, Slac^e, fern, f5urt,
treu* This is the standard r. 2. Uvular or guttural in K G.^
very much like the guttural (^, but sonant.
22. f, ff, §, § = Eng. surd s: ipaug, ^aufe, Staffer, glu§,
SJZn^e, fein ; but initially and after a vowel it begins surd and
ends sonant, as in N. and M. G. Standard unsettled. But
see p. 175.
23. f c^ = Eng. sh (surd) : fc^iden, f(!^en!en, l^afc^en, ©(i^tange.
24. f}, f)j = fc^t, fc^^i initially in the standard pronuncia-
tion and in S. and M. G. But in the middle and at the end
of words, in N. G. also at the beginning of words = Eng. st,
sp; \6^t, f^p: ©tein, ©trage, ©tu^l, ©pag, fprtefen; st, sp: ^a%
toiifte, berften, SBurft, SSefpe, ^afpeln. N. G.: ©))ie^, ©toct.
4 PEONtJNCIATION. [25-
25. i, «) = Eng. t : ^t, ^atte, Zi^at, Sfla^t.
26. it = Eng. 00 in too : iput, SCut, Slume, Suc^, S3u^le,
u = Eng. u in j9w^ ; Sutter, (lu^en, ©utoen*
27. t) = Eng./ in German words: SSater, grei^el, ijteU ti =
German It) in foreign words: ^ita'x, i^inbijie'ren, SSafa'n^*
28. HI like Eng. v dento-labial : SBettcr, SBaffer, marnen.
After f ^ labio-labial like u after c|, but not quite like Eng. w :
(B6^m\kx, (S(imeig, (B6^mUt. But see p. 170.
29. y in foreign words and ^§, ^f = Eng. x : 2llexant)ev,
2Ba4^, guc^^, giic^pn, fe^^*
^ = ii^ which see.
30. J, ^ = Eng. ts, as in ca/s, ra^5 : 3««9^ S^^^flr SBarac,
c in foreign words before e, if'f^/azzz ts : cerebral, Safu'r, Sifa'be,
S^Ho'p; but the spelling is unsettled: 3^9^'^^^/ 3^^^^^^/ 2t^ti\VL'x^
31. Modified Vowels (TTmlauts).
tt long = Eng. ai in fair: SSater, 0lat)er, jla^Iem*
a short = Eng. and Ger. c : ^ant>e, 2Cant>e, fatten.
B not in Eng. It has the lip-position of o, the tongue-
position of c: long in Vo]t, lofert, ^er^bge; short in Setter, ^Mc,
(Serotte.
ii not in Eng. It has the lip-position of n, the tongue-
position of i: long in SWii^le, Sutler, ^ii^teln; short in SJZiitter,
Siinbe, Siittel.
^ = ii^ as in S^a'tt, S^pre'jfe, only in foreign words.
32. Diphthongs.
ai (rare) and ci = Eng. i in find: ^ai\tx, ^ai, (eife, mi^,
Weiben* an = Eng. ou in house : blau, ipau^, 'Man^.
au and ctt similar to Eng. oi in exploit : Wd\x\t, lauten, S3eute,
leute*
37J PEOKUNCIATIOIT. 5
ftuantity of Vowels.
33. Vowels are long in an open syllable, e» g.y 2;a^ge^,
jo^gen, 33u^4cr. They are also indicated: 1. By doubling, but
only in the case of a, e, o: ®aal, ©eele, 50^oo^» 2. By I) after
the Yowel and after t : ipa^n, ^%m, i|n, 3;l)ran, Z^^x. 3. By c
after i: Uefc, ZiiXf ^ieL 4. a and e are generally long before
r, rt, rt) : t»ar, rar, l)er, njert, tverDen, jart, 5>fert), Short in fertig
(< Sci^rt), aSarte, (S^arte, §era, ©(^mera.
34. The vowels are short before more than one consonant:
35. 6 counts as a single consonant ; it becomes ff medially (see
'* Rules," § 12), 6. g., ^lug — gluffe^, gluffe ; flief en — flo§, gefloffen. The
vowel remains long before inflectional endings, e.g.y lokn, hl^, gelobt
(but ge'^abtf gentoc^t); also in a closed syllable, when the stem- vowel stands
in an open syllable under inflection, e. g., Xag, J^a^^ge^; B«9' Bu^ge^* But
see p. 175.
Since ^ cannot be doubled, there is no telling the quantity of the pre-
ceding vowel from the mere looks of the word: 6.^., long in S3uc^ —
S3u(^e<3; Xuc^ — 3:u($c^ ; brac^ — hac^en; but short in 23ad) — S3a(^e5 ; lac^em
wac^en. As a rule, shortness may be expected.
36. The division into syllables differs somewhat from the English
custom. The " Rules " § 26 show how words are divided at the end of a
line. The following examples will illustrate sufficiently; ^^^Betl^ fuc^^te,
be^^c^rettf S3ee^re» ijer^lrrett, ge^irrt, SSafsfer, (Stra^fe, lo^fc^en, roster, ^tn^gcr (but
see 17), ^e^xe, SBci^jen; ^it^je, ^ar^))fen, :6e=^o5^ac^tcn, nati^fa^gen, be^glau^
I>i^gen»
37. German orthography is now regulated by the government, and the student
who is to write German should provide himself with the official, 9JcgeIn unb SBorterwers
aeic^ni§ fur Me beutfd)e 9Jec^tf^relBung tn ben preu^ifji^cn ©(^ulen. 33erltn. It is a small
convenient guide of 46 pages, with a quite full word-list See 361, 2.
THE AKTICLES.
[38-
THE ARTICLES.
38. The definite article is ter, Me, tia^ + the ; the indefinite,
cin, eine, tin + one, an, a.
The definite article declines:
maec.
fern.
neuter.
common gender.
Sing, N. Ux
tie
ta^
Plu,
tie
G. te^
ter
beij
ter
D. ^em
feer
tent
ten
A. ten
Me
U^
tie
e indefinite article declines:
Sing, N. etn
eine
em
G. etne^
einer
etne^
D. einem
einer
einem
A. einen
eine
ein
39. The articles are unaccented.
The definite article is the weakened demonstrative pronoun, which
has chief stress. It retains the short original forms of the same. The
indefinite article is the weakened numeral ein^ which also has chief stress.
To mark the demonstrative pronoun and the numeral, they are some-
times printed spaced or with a capital letter : ^ux Slnen ©d^ritt; fo bifl t)U
fret, F. 4563 ; but ©^ ttjar einmal ein ^onig, F. 2212. ^er Wla^x !ann ge'^n
(Sch.). (£<5 t^ut mh Un' fc^ott m^i bag \^ tid^ in b e r ©efeHf^aft \i\)\ F.
3470-1.
40. Owing to their lack of accent both articles suffer aphseresis and
apocope, and contraction with the preceding word, most frequently with a
preposition : bent andba^ are, according to good usage, combined with the
following prepositions : an, auf^ ki, bur(^f fiir, l^inter, in, uOer, urn, nnter, ijon^
ijor, and ju; e. g., ant, an^, auf^r in^, um^, ^om, etc. In general, contractions
with dissyllabic prepositions are rarer in the classics, common in the
spoken language, which allows the contraction of ben whether dative plu-
ral or accusative singular masculine with the above and also with other
prepositions. Some such are even in the classics : in = in^n, F. 2429, win
©eJTel/" Lessing's Nathan, „in 'BaCt," „m ^o'pf," t,m S^ag." Sn, uin contain
43] DECLEl^SION OF NOUl^S. 7
long (see 389,5) consonants and the article is not absent, as is generally
explained. In conversation is heard: um ^xm, »Ott Saunten, aufn ^elbern,
tttit^n ^anbettf burc^^tt 2Balb» The apostrophe in auf^^ iikr^^, etc., is not at
all indispensable. 2)er, dative singular feminine, combines properly only
with ju into jur*
41. Attractions of the definite article, especially of the neuter, to pre-
ceding words other than prepositions are common in the spoken lan-
guage, e.g., M ttJitt'i3 S3u^ f^oXtn,'' „tx ^at ftc^'^ S3ein gckod^en*" wSBinbV^
g)ferb ^aug an" (G.). „Unb ^a^'^ ^ujTen »erlcrttt« (F. 4485).
1. The aphaeresis of „ein" common in the spoken language is also
found in the written, e. g., «aBarf auf ^nen ^i\x\ji bie ^anbf(^u^^"(Uh.). Bold
abbreviations are these in Chamisso's, ,/^ t»ar mal ^ne ^a^enfontgin*" The
dropping of ein before mai is not unusual : „%^ war xaoX ein ^aifer ;" «^U(^
tt)ar mal ein 5r^t« (Bii.). Notice fo'tte for fo eine. The early N. H. Q. (16th
century) etm for eittem (comp. M. H. G. eime for eineme), einn or ein for
einen occur still in some South German dialects. In M. H. G. the aphae-
resis of ""ein" is unheard of, while the definite article is much more
pliant than in the present classical language. Apocope of the same is
still allowable in certain S. G. dialects.
DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
42. There are three systems of Declension, the
Strong {Vowel, Old), the Weah (Consonant, n-Beclension
or Jfew), and the Mixed.
The strong declension {see 43, 1) has (e)g in the geni-
tive singular ; the weah has (e)n in all cases, singular
and -plural, except in the nominative singular ; the
mixed has (e)0 in the genitive singular, (e)tt in the
whole plural.
General Rules.
43. 1. Feminine nouns never vary in the singular.
2. The only case-endings are (e)^ for the genitive singular
and (e)n for the dative plural.
3. e in the case-suffix ought to stand in nouns ending in
\, ?r \^, a, ^ i, ii*
6 DECLEl^SION OF NOUNS. [44-
e is always dropped after el, en, em, er, c^en, lein. In other
cases it is optional. If tlie genitive singular has t^, then the
dative singular has e as a rule: ipaufe^, ju §aufe*
a. Distribution of nouns among these declensions according
to gender:
1. The bulk of feminine nouns belong to the n-declension.
No neuters at all.
2. To the strong declension belong mainly mascuhne and
neuter nouns, and a few feminines.
3. The mixed declension includes a few masculine and
neuter nouns.
Strong Declension,
44. We distinguish for practical reasons four classes,
according to the formation of the plural :
1. No sign unless it be umlaut: ba^ SEunter, Me SEunter; Ux
aSater, tie Sdter.
2. -t without umlaut: ter Sag, tie Sage; ta^ So^, Me Sofe.
3. -e with umlaut : ber ©o^n, tie ©o^ne ; tie ^raft, tie
^rafte.
4. -er always with umlaut: ta^ Sat, tie Satcr; ta^ ^au^,
tie ipaufer*
45. FmsT Class. — a. No sign:
Sing. N. ter (Spakn tag ®ewerk ter Sngel
G. teg ©jjateng teg ©eujerbeg teg gngelg
Plu. D. ten ©paten ten ®emer6en ten Sngein
All other cases singular and plural like nominative singular.
b. With umlaut:
Sing. N., D., A. ter gaten ter Sruter
G. teg %attm teg Sruterg
Plu. N., G., A. tie Saten tie Sriiter
D. ten gat en ten Sriirern
48] DECLEJS^SION" OF NOUKS. 9
46. To this class, which never take e in the G. and D.
sing., belong:
1. Masculine and neuter nouns in -el, -n, -en, -d^en, -lein,
-fel, e. g., ter §eBel, Der Mttcx, t)er 23ot)en, ter ipopfen, tia^ ^punticben,
Da^ ^tolein, ra^ 3^atfeL
2. Neuters of the form (53e-e, e. g,, ba^ ®etrette, Oefcbmetbe*
3. The names of kindred in -er: SSater, Sruber, 2;o(^ter, ^Ulutter,
©d^mager, all with umlaut. Also l:er ^dfe»
4. Certain nouns, if they take -n in the nominative singu-
lar, as they may according to usage: ter gelfen, tier SSrunnen, tev
Zxop\m, ter (Sc^reden (these so generally). The following not
so frequently in the written language: ^er gun!e(n), 23al!e(n),
griei?e(n), ©et)an!e(tt), ®efaae(n), (53Iaube(n), §aufe(n), 5^ame(n),
(Same(tt), @d)at)e(tt)-
47. 1. 5ltem (Dbem), SSrobeni/ Stbatrtf SSrofam stand isolated. The plural,
if it occurs, is the -e of the next class. SBrofamen, 1, is more common
than SBrofame. See 501.
2. All nouns sub 4, except ^riebe, ©efaEc, and ®eban!e, were weak in
M. H. G., and are not yet fully established in the strong declension.
Since usage is unsettled, they might all be put under the mixed or weak
declension.
48. 1. The nouns of this class that take umlaut, besides the names
of kindred in -er, are :ber 5lpfel + apple, ^dtx + acre, SBoben + bottom,
soil ; ^abeitf thread (bie %ahtn + fathoms), ®arten + garden, ^a^n, harbor,
+ haven ; jammer + hammer, JBaben ( ?), shutter, shop (store) ^ 9JJangel, .
want, S^agel + nail, Dfen + oven, stove ; ©attcl + saddle, <B^ahm, harm
(but e^ ift @(^abe, it is too bad); ©(^nakl beak, S^wager brother-in-law,^
^o^df bird, + fowl. Two neuters take umlaut : Mo^tx + cloister < L.
damtrum, and ^a^tx{?), camp.
2. In none of these is there any cause that could produce umlaut as in
i and jo stems or before ~ir. Umlaut has arisen from analogy with these.
Skater, 3)lutter, S3riiber, Stockier had umlaut already in M. H. G. This way
of forming the plural is on the increase, because it is so convenient and
some way of indicating the plural seems necessary. Sagen, Imager, etc.,
still sound objectionable, but have no worse and no better claim to cor-
rectness than the above.
10 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. [49-
49. Second Class. — Plural
-e, no umlaut.
Sing, N.,A. $unt)
Me X;rangfal
bad 3a^r
G. U^ ipunte^
^er Drangfal
bed 3at)red
D. ^em ipun^e
ter Dran^fal
t)em 3a^rc
^Zw. N.,G.,A. ipunk
£rancifale
3a|re
D. ipun^en
'Erangfalen
3a:^ren
50. To this class belong:
1. A small number of feminines in -nid and -fa(, e, g., tie
Drangfal, ^^riibfal; tie ginflernid, Setriibnid, pi. -niffe.
2. Many masculines; some caj)able of umlaut, but without it.
These may be considered exceptions to the third class: ber
5lal+eel, 2lar eagle, 2lrm + arm, Sefu(^ visit, 2lm6o§ + anvil,
£)a(^d badger, I^o^t, wick, @rab + degree, §a(m, blade, + haulm,
ipuf + hoof, §unb dog, + hound ; SadJd salmon, Saut sound,
Suc^d + lynx, 5)fab + path, fun!t + point, @^u^ + shoe, Za^ +
day, @toff material, + stuff; Z\^xon + throne, 3Serfu(^, attempt,
and a very few others.
3. Masculines in -ig, -{i)6^, -ing, -ling, -(e)nb, -at, -id, -id)t,
e. gr., Uv greuttb + friend, ©dnferidj + gander, ^aMcbt + hawk,
Bering + herring, 3^tid (pi. 3Itijye) pole-cat, SungHng -{-youth,
MnxQ + king, 50^olA salamander, SJionat + month,
4. Many neuters, among which monosyllabics ; those with
the prefix ®e-; in -nid, -fal : ba5 3a^r+year, @ef(^en! present,
(13efdngmd (pi. -jTe) prison, (Sd^idfat fate.
51. The group sub 2 is on the decrease, because we cannot tell on
the surface whether a noun has umlaut or not. To avoid the diflSculty,
several nouns form very anomalous plurals : ber fdau, bie SBauten instead
of S3aue* Of Wloxh, pi. 2JJorbe is rare, rather 9J?orbt|aten; of ©c^mutf, pi.
<B^mudt is rare, rather ©c^mucf fac^en ; ®(^luc!, pi. @(^Iu(fe is seldom used,
since it stands in the singular after a number, e. g., breiv^^lud Srannt"
min. See 173.
56] DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 11
52. Third Class.— Plural
-e, with umlaut.
Sing. N., A. t)er ©tamrn
W ^yx\
bie Sraut
G-. De^ (Stammer
Der ^u^
t)er Sraut
D. l)em (Stamme
t>er ^u^
ter Sraut
^w. N..A.,a (Stammc
^ii^e
Sraute
D. ©tdmmett
^ii^eit
Srauten
53. To this class belong :
1. The majority of strong masculine nouns, mostly monosyl-
labics : ter ©efang + song, ®e6rau(^ use, SaU + ball, (53aj^ +
guest, @o^rt + son, etc.
2. A number of feminine nouns : bie 9lttgfi + anxiety, 5lxt
4- axe, 33an! + bench + bank, Srunft, heat, lust ; Sruft +
breast, gauj^ + fist, grui^t + fruit, ®an5 + goose, ®ruft
vault, §attt) + hand, S^dwi + hide, ^luft + cleft, ^!unft in
compounds as in Sinfunft + income; iayx^ + louse, Suft air,
Suft desire, ^a^t + might, ^Wagb + maid, servant ; ^au^
+ mouse, 5la(^t + night, 5^a^t seam, ^lu^ + nut, ®au + sow
(Sc^nur string, ©tabt city, S3ant) wall (of a room), SBurfi
sausage, Z\xn\t guild ; 3lu^fluc^t evasion, Slrmkufl cross-bow,
®efdjtt?ulfl + swelHng.
54* Only two modern neuter nouns belong here, the last
of which is of doubtful gender, viz.: ^a^ glo§ raft (429, 1);
ter or r^a^ (E^or + choir, chorus.
55. No neuters belong here really except 0. H. Q-. men, ba^ 9J?eer, bie
Mtixt, now according to 2d Class, ^er and ba^ S|or, borrowed from
church Latin '* chorus," has joined the group sub 2. %<x^ S3oot, bie 336tc
because it was also ber S3ootf a modern borrowed word < D. ®ie S3oote
is more elegant. !^a^ 9lo^r, bie 9?o^re is not good. Besides there is bie
9io^re, feminine singular, the pipe, tube.
12
DECLENSION OF NOUNS,
[56-
56. Fourth Class. — ^Plural -er, always with umlaut:
Sing. N., A. tad 3lati
D. tern 3flate
Flu. N., G., A. 9lal?er
D. Un 9lat'em
Strtum
te^ 3t*rtumd
tern Sfi'tume
Srrtumer
ten Si'J^tiimertt
57. To this class belong:
1. About sixty neuter monosyllabics : t)aS 3lag C^]^^), ^l(itt,
^aij, gad), etc.
2. All in -turn, whether masculine or neuter: ta^ iperjogtum,
ter 3f^eic^tum.
3. Some mascuhnes, viz.: ter SbfettJtc^t*, T)om*, ©eifl, @ott,
Mh, '^ann, Drt*, 3^anD, ©traud)*, 23ormunt, SBalt), 5Burm.
4 A few neuters, with the prefix ®e- : tae (S^emat^, ©emiit,
®efd)lect)t*, ®eft*t*, (^efpenfl, ®emant*.
58. Only neuters had this plural -er at first. Of the sixty
sub 1, some twenty form a different plural, and usage is unset-
tled; so do those sub 3 and 4 marked with a *. In the fol-
lowing a distinction is made in meaning between the different
forms of the plural:
Subl,
2,4,-
ta^ Sant),
33ant)e, ties,
Sanger, ribbons.
Denfmal,
-male, monuments,
-maltv, figurative sense.
Xing,
Swinge, things.
Dinger, coll., e, g., girls.
(53eri*t,
®eftd)te, visions.
©eftdlter, faces.
®en?ant),
®eirante (poetic).
©emanter (comnrionly).
SanD,
Sante (poetic).
Santer (commonly).
^i*t,
gic^te, candles (only),
2id)ter, lights.
edji(r),
masc. ©diilte, shields,
©(j^il^er (sign-board).
©tift,
masc. (Btifte, pencils,
(^lifter, institutions.
2:ud),
Zuijt, kinds of cloth,
^^ii^er, cloths, shawls.
SBort,
3Borte, words (their mean-
^Sorter, parts of speech
62] DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 13
Sub 3 —
ter^Jlanit, Wlanmn, retinue, 9Jlanner, men.
Drt, Drten, D. pi. only, Derter, places, towns.
59. J^rummer occurs in the plural only. But a weak plural Strummertt
occurs in the classics. Singular Xrumm + thrum. «^au^ten;" as dative
plural, is isolated in ,/ju ben ^aupten." SRann was originally a cor^^-stem,
^rnann- (see Kluge's Diet.). The form 3)^ann in fiinfjtg 9)?ann is the real
nominative plural of the co/i^-stem. SJJertfc^ was originally neuter, being
an adjective 0. H. G. mennisco. ^a^ 3)lenfd), bie WliX[\6)ix, now implies a
slur, speaking of woman = strumpet (see Kluge's Diet.). 3Bic^t in S3ofe*'
tov^i was also once a neuter, + wight. See 431.
60. In early N. H. G. many of the neuters still occur without -er.
^inbe^ ^inb tcerben beinc Serf preifen (B.). ^inber unb ^inbe^ ^inb (erjd^len)
»on bent |)olf no(^ unb feinen ®(^aren (Sch.).
The plural in -i is not elegant. (Ba^el^r Sungen^, f^rauen^, i^rautein^
are more than colloquial, tliough found in the classics. Tiiis -^ is strictly
Low German, and identical with English s. The parts of speech are
used with <3: bie ^6)^, bie 5lber^, bie 2Benn^.
Weak or u-Declension.
61. Characteristics: (c)tt in the plural and also in the sin-
gular of mascuhne, except the nominative.
Masc. Fern.
Sing. N. ^er Sote Whole sing, 3unge
G. te^ SSotett
All through sing, and plu. Whole plu, ^nno^tn
Only feminine and masculine nouns belong to this declen-
sion.
Like 3wttge decline all feminines, except : 1. SiJlutter and
2;o(^ter. 2. The few in -ni^ and -fal (see 50. 1). 3. The
strong of the 3d class (see 53, 2).
62. Of the masculines belong here:
1. All of two or more syllables ending in t, except ^afe and
the doubtful strong ones sub 4, 1st class (see 46).
14 DECLEISrSTON OF KOUKS. [63-
2. The following whicli generally do not show the e, which
belongs to them: t)er SSiir, Sauer, Surf^, giirft, ginf, (^td, ®efet((e),
®raf, ^ageftola, ipelt), §err, §irte, Snfaffe, ?[Renf(^, ?!}lo^r, ^axv, Dc^fe,
5)rin3, 9)fau, (Spa^, @|)ro§, ©teinme^, 2:^or (fool), SSorfa^r*
3. Many nouns of foreign origin, which are difficult to tell
from strong nouns, many of them names of persons and ani-
mals. They generally end in -t, -nt, -ft, with the suffix -Qxap^,
-ax&i, -txat, -Io9(e), -nom, e. g., '^ot't, Sanl»i't, 3^i^tteli't, 5)citrio't,
5lr(^lte'ft, ^ome't, 9)Iane't, ^onfona'nt, ©tuDe'nt, g)^anta'ft, Selegra^^,
©eogra'p^, 9)atria'rd), ^ona'rd^, 3lutofra't, l^emofra't, 5ljbolo'g(e),
9)^i(oIo'ge, 2lftrono'm, Defono'm (pohte for " farmer ") ; also
Zi^xa'nn.
4. Some names of nationalities in -ax, and -er, e. g., ter
Wn^ax, 33ulga'r(e), ^ata'x, SSaier, g)ommer, Gaffer.
5. The adjective used as a noun when preceded by the arti-
cle (see 220).
Kemark.— An isolated form is now „auf Grben." Grbe was either weak or strong.
But „in (S^ren," „mit ^^reuben" are old datives plural (see 434, 1). Notice the spelling
^onigin, pi. ^oniginnen.
Mixed Declension.
63. Characteristics : G. sing, (e), the whole plu. (e)n.
Only mascuUne and neuter nouns belong to this declension,
and very few have not double forms for genitive singular and
for the plural. The following generally belong here :
1. 5luge, Sett, Sttbc, ^e^atter, §em^ ^orbeer, ^a^ muM, D^x,
g)anto'ffeI, (Bc^mera, (See, ©tad^el, ©taat* ^a6>h<ix, Untertt)an, ^Setter
sometimes retain in genitive singular the (e)n of their former
declension. S3auer, peasant sub 62, 2 is sometimes classed here.
"La^ ipera inflects G. te5 iperaen^, D. bem ^erjen, A. ta^ §era;
allowing for its being a neuter, which always has nominative
and accusative singular alike, it really comes under 1st Class,
strong, sub 4 (see 46). (Si^merj rarely has (SdJmerjen^. I^er(Sportt,
64] DECLEKSION^ OF NOUKS. 15
te^ ©porn^, has taken an -n in the singular, but the old weak
plural (Bpoxtn is still the rule, though (Spornen occurs, ^l^ronett,
borrowed in M. H. G. < Gr.-L. thronos, is very rare. The
plural of Dom is either X)ortte (old) or generally l)ornen ; also
The mixed declension is quite modern, and does not exist in M. H. G,
2. Foreign nouns in -or (o long and accented in the plural,
short and unaccented in the singular), e. g,, X)tx X)o'ftor, lit
Dofto'rcn, tcr ^^rofe'jjor, tie 3)rofeiTo'rett» Also 3tt|Vft, Sntere'fle,
3ume'I, (Statu't, and others.
Colloquially one hears sometimes -n after nouns in -eX and -er: bic i&umaicrn, lobsters;
©ticf ein, boots ; but they are not to be imitated.
Declension of Foreign Honns.
64. Those which are fully naturalized come under the
declensions already treated of. It remains to speak of those
not at all or partly naturahzed, and their inflection is very
irregular and complicated.
1. Those that retain their foreign inflection, €» g., 3^fu^
(£^riftug,3efu SWfti; 'Maxi' a, 'Sftame; 9»ot)ug, pi. 9Robt ; Safu^,pl.
€afug ; €^eru6, pL SfceruHm ; Sonto, pi. Sonti ; ©aefulum, pi.
©aefula; Sorb, pL £orti3; S^empu^, pi. Zempoxa, Their number
is decreasing.
2. Those which take a German plural ending, -en for
instance, and do not inflect in the singular, e. g. : ta^ T>xama,
pi. Dramen ; Z^tma, pi. ZUmm ; 3ttbii?i't)uum, pL 3ttt)iiJtt)uen.
©lobu^, ^i^t^mn^* But these are also found with -^ in geni-
tive singular, and then come under the mixed declension.
3. Nouns whose foreign plural ended in -ia take -ten;
<&tiit)ium, pi. ©tnMen ; ©i^mnaftum, pi. ©i^mnaften. The ending
of the singular may have been lost, and they have -^ in geni-
tive singular, as 2lt)iJc'rB, 3^artici')>, Semitta'r^ SKinera'I, Sofftl, pL
16 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. [65-
2l^i)erBien, goffiUen, etc. Notice 5)ri'ma5, fxima'ttn ; Wi\a^, Sltk'n^
ten; ,^rifi^, ^rifen* On the whole, there is a great deal of ir-
regularity, and therefore freedom, in the inflection of foreign
words.
Declension of Proper Nouns.
65. 1. The names of nations and peoples are inflected both
in the singular and plural. Those in -er (except Sater and
5)ommer, where -er is not suffix, denoting origin) go according
to 1st Class (strong). All the others go according to the
jt-dedension : Der hamburger, ^e^ ^amburger^, etc., D. pi. Un
^amburgem* But ter ^a6^\t, De^ @adjfen; Der fxtn^t, u^ $)reu^en,
etc.
2. Certain geographical names (see 147), which always
have the definite article, are treated like any common noun,
e.g., t)er Difeein, De^ ^^nn^, laC^ gtc^telgebirge t)e^ -e^; ta^ Sp§/ ^^^
(JlfaffeS; tie ©^n^ei^, ter S(^tx>ei3, etc.
3. Names of persons are uninflected if preceded by the arti-
cle (an adjective or title between article and name makes no
difference), e.g.,t)Z^ ^arl, te5 ^aifer^ ^arl, tern grogen grietrid).
If the title follows the name, or if the name in the genitive,
modified by an adjective, stands before the noun upon which
it depends, then the name takes -^, e. g., U^ 3^etd) Sut)tt)ig^ te5
grommen, U^ gropen griecrid)^ ^enerale.
4. Names of persons, places, and countries without an arti-
cle take a genitive in -c^x ®oet^e, ®oet^e^; Snglanti, Snglant'^;
^Unna, ^Inna^* But names of males ending in a sibilant, if
inflected at all and an apostrophe is not preferred, and femi-
nine names in -e, form a genitive in -m^,e. g., Sfflax^n^, gran^en^,
Wlaxkn^, ©op^ien^. Surnames in a sibilant certainly prefer an
axx)strophe, e.g., 9J^ufau^' 5)oI!^mard^en, Dpiid' S5er!e, (3an^' 3:ot.
Names of places in a sibilant are constructed with i)on : tie
3letc^^frei^eit ^on ^o'ltjlanj, i^ie Sefefligungen ^on ^axi'^.
69] DECLENSI0:N^ of AJDECTIVES. 17
66. A dative and an accusative in -en of names of persons are liardly
in use now, as e.g., (Sc^illcrn, ©oet^ettf ^lopfiotfen. Christian feminine
names retain them more easily than masculine, e.g., ^ajl bu 3)krien
9efprod)en ? See 68, 3. Such genitives as 9)?utter^ 2:ob, 2:antett^ ©e^itrt^tag
are hardly proper.
67. Plurals of names of persons are formed in various
ways. The general rule is : -e for masculine and -e(n) for
feminine names, e. g,, ipetttric^e, ?0^arieu ; but also Srun^tlte,
Slifakte* -5 forms the plural of masculines ending in a vowel
and of feminines in -a: 5lnna^, §ugo^.
68. 1. Here also belongs the plural of surnames denoting the mem-
bers of the family, formed by -^ if ending in a consonant not a sibilant ;
by -(e)n if ending in a vowel or a sibilant (occurs only in familiar lan-
guage however), e. g., ©teinbruggettf the Steinbriigges ; ©ul)Iing^/ the
Suhling family ; ^M^* Other endings for the plural, generally of for-
eign names however, are -ne, -nen t Sato, Satone; ©cipionen/ Dttone, and
Dttonen ; but the first n belongs to the stem of course. Compare L.
Scipio, Scipionis, This ^ was perhaps originally a G. sing.
2. Biblical names retain foreign inflection : S^angelium 2)lattjaet, itt Scftt
e^rijlOf lariat |)eimfuc^un9»
3. It should be borne in mind that the rule in the classical writers
before Goethe's death is not the rule now. Lessing wrote be0 Sutf)cr5, bed
SJlelanc^t^on^ ; Goethe, Seiben be^ jutiQen SBert^er^. The dative and accusa-
tive in -en are the rule in them, the exception now, |)al)en 8ie ^arlcn
gcfc^riekn, 2Bil^cImen gefu(^t ?
DECLENSION OF THE ADJECTIVE.
69. The adjective is inflected according to two sys-
tems of declension, the Strong and the Weak. It is
inflected strong when there is no limiting wordy before
it ; lueah, when there is an article or demonstrative
pronoun. It is uninflected in the predicate.
18
DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES.
[70-
1. Strong :
masc.
fern.
neuter.
common gender.
Sing. N. guter
gute
gute^
Plu. N. gute
G. gute5
guter
guted
G. guter
D. ^utern
guter
gutem
D. guten
A. o;\xitXi
gute
gute^
A. gute
2. Weak:
masc.
fern.
neuter.
Sing. N. t>er
gute
tie gute
ta^ gute
A. t)ett gutcn
bie gute
ba^ gute
All other cases, sing, and pZit., guten.
Notice that the nominative and accusative singular of the
feminine and neuter forms are alike.
70. After ein, letn, and the possessive pronouns the adjec-
tive is strong in the nominative singular of all genders and in
the accusative singular of feminine and neuter, since it is like
the nominative. The whole pi. is weak.
Sg.'^. ein grower Dic^ter, eine rote ^trfc^e, tin l^errltcbe^ (^et)t(^t
G. eine^ grofen !Di(fcter^, etner roten ^irf^e, eine^ ^errltc^en ©ebtc^te^
D. einem grogen ^ic^ter, einer roten ^irfc^e, einem ^errlid^en ®et)i^te
< A. einen grogen 2^ic^ter, eine rote ^irfc^e, tin ^errli(^e^ (Setic^t.
71. Adjectives ending in -cl, -er, -en as a rule drop the c of these
suflBxes when inflected, sometimes however the e of the case-ending -en,
e.g.y ebcl, ebler, cblc, eblc^; magerr ntagrer, magre, magre^; cigen, eigner, eigne,
cigne^ ; but ^eitern and ^eitren, eblen and ebeln. Those in -er like to retain
both e's: :^etterer, l^eitere, l^eitere^. Note therefore: ©in magrer Dc^fe, cined
tttagern or magren £)dbfen, etc. ; ber l^eitere or '^eitre |)immet, bc^ ^etterettr '^eltreit,
or :^eitern ^immel^, etc. ; mein etgnc^ |)au0, meine^ eigenen or cignen ^aufea, etc.
For |o(5^, :^o:^er, |o|er ^e^eg see 490, 3, h.
72. The genitive singular masculine and neuter, -i^, is now so regu-
larly replaced by -en, that this should perhaps appear in the paradigm.
Though strictly according to rule, -e^ has become the exception ; -en has
prevailed since the 17th century. Voss, Klopstock, and Grimm opposed
it. Goethe favors it. Sinr fein, the possessive and the demonstrative
pronouns never allow -en for -e^; never f einen 2)^anne^, biefen S3uc^e^.
75] COMPARISON^ OF ADJECTIVES. 19
COMPARISON OF THE ADJECTIVE
73. Adjectives are compared by means of the inflectional
suffixes -er and -(e)ft, e, g, :
(ositive.
comparative.
superlative.
iung
iiinger
iiingfl
fdsbrt
fdjbner
fc^i3nft
rei*
reii^er
reid)i^
Those in -el, -en, -er lose this e before the comparative -er ;
but retain it and lose the e of -ejl in the superlative, e. g,,
mager, magrer, magerft; tjunltl, bunfier, bunfelft* e in -eft is as a
rule retained after ti, t, ^, fe, 3, rc^, §, and ft, but not necessarily,
e, g., lautefte, gemiffefte, fii^ejle* ©ropte alone is classical, but in
the spoken language fii^te, ^etpte, !ur3te, etc., are heard. „§od)"
retains the former ^ in the comparative ^o^er, and ^ in na^e
becomes 6^x tidc^ft* See 490, 3, b.
74. The umlaut generally takes place, but it is very diffi-
cult to tell when it does not. A not small number are doubt-
ful, e. g,, bla^, gefunt), fromm, etc. No umlaut in : 1. Those
with the stem- vowel au, e.g,, lau, Blau, etc. 2. Foreign ones:
6rai), noBel, etc. 3. Participles: Befud^t, genjantt, etc. 4. Deriva-
tives : flraf6ar, f(!^atf^aft, langfam, unglauBIid), etc. 5. Sunt, Manf,
t)um))f, falf(^, flac^, fro^, ^o^l, ^ol^, fa^I, liar, la^m, la§, lo^, matt,
morfd^, platt, )jlum|), rafd^, ro^, run^, fanft, fatt, fc^laff, fdjlan!, fcbrojf,
(larr, ftol^, flraff, toG, ^oE, wa^r, s^i^m, gart.
75. The comparative and superlative forms are dechned
just like the positive. Examples :
©rbgerer ©pag, cjrogereg or gr5geren ©page^, etc. ; ber gro^ere
©pag, ^e^ gro^eren @pa§e^, etc. ; tin grbgerer ®|jag
^larfte^ 3Baflfer, ba^ flarjie SSaffer, eitt Harfte^ ffiaffer.
©Dlerer ^O^antt, ber eblere mam, ein et)lerer 9Hann; eitelfter Surf^,
ber eitelfle Surfcb, tin eitelfter 33urfc^.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
[76-^
§eifrer (Banger, ber ^eifrere ©anger, etn ^eifrerer ©anger, G. eine^
l^eifreren ©angers, etc. ; ter ^etferfte ©dnger^
76. 1. Irregular Comparison.
By the use of different stems :
Positive. Comparative. Superlative.
gut + good beffer, adv. kg + better beft + best
ijiel me^r + more meift + most
mel^rer me^rfl
gering or menig minter mintefl
®ut and i)ie( are never compared regularly. SRe^rer and me'^rji
are due to double comparison. „?!}^e^rft," tbougli occurring in
Goethe and Schiller, is not classical. SHefcr and mtnber are really
not adjectives, but are used adverbially and substantively. „33ag„
(me^r, very, much) is now archaic. „To^ k§ ^e^t it)n ^er tinfe
^ann'' (Bii.). giirtag (onward); „Bag" also means fe^^r, ftarl: „X)ad
mac^t, er t^i ft(^ kg ^erijor'' (Sch.). „Urtt) mart) nicbt me:^r gefel)n"
(G.). SJlorgen ein me^rere^ = to-morrow (I will write) more.
2. Defective and Redundant Comparison.
a. There is a class of adjectives derived from adverbs and
prepositions :
Adv. or prep. Comparative. Superlative.
(auger) auger augerft
(Winter) Winter ^interjl
(inner) inner innerjl
(ntet)er) nieter (rare) niet)erfl
(ob[er]) ober okrft
(unter) unter unterjl
(^or, fort) ijorter Dor^erjl;
For the derivation of these adverbs, see 551, 3. The
superlative suffix -ft is added to the comparative. This is
due to their former full comparison, as for instance, O. H. G.
pos. Idntaro, comp. hintaroro, superl. hintarSst. The pres-
77J
NUMEEALS.
21
ent comparatives ^tntere, oBere are not even now felt as real
comparatives ; duf er has a spurious umlaut ; „oberfte" and
„\oxUx\k" are colloquial ; „^ort)er'' comes from „fort/' O. H. G.
fordar ; compare Eng. further, which has nothing to do with
far.
Comparative.
mtttler
(e^er, adv.) + ere
Positive.
(mlttel) + middle
(e^e, conj.)
(lap + late)
(fiir)
(ftoer, adv.)
Superlative.
mittelft
erft + erst
le^t + last
giirft (subst.) + first
The first compares regularly like an adjective in -eL The
positive occurs only in compounds now, and the comparative
has the force of the positive.
NUMERALS.
77. Cardinals.
eitt^, + one
^xozx, + two
trei, + three
i)ter, 4- four
fiittf, + five
fecbd, + six
fteben, + seven
a&i, + eight
neutt, + nine
ge^tt, + ten
elf, ei(f, olf, + eleven
gwelf, gnjolf, + twelve
treije^n, + thirteen
tJter^c^n, + fourteen
fiinfae^n, + fifteen
\t&i{^)lt^xi, + sixteen
awanaig, + twenty
cin unt) stpan^ig, -p twenty-one
3met uttD smanjig, + twenty-two
Ixtx unt) smanjig, + twenty-three
treipig, -f thirty
ein unb Iret^tg, + thirty-one
ijteratg, + forty
fiinfaig, funfatg, + fifty
fed)^aig, fec^atg, + sixty
fteB(en)aig, + seventy
acbtaig, + eighty
neunaig, + ninety
^untert (ta^ §unt>ert), + a huD-
dred
{ixn) ^unbert unt) etn(^), + a hun-
dred and one
(cin) ^untert unt) imx, + a hun-
dred and two
(tin) ^unbert (unb) yt^n, + a
hundred and ten
22 KUMERALS. [78-
(eitt) ^unt)ert nn'ti ^toan^i^, + a hundred and twenty
(etn) 6untert tin unt) atx>an3ig, + a hundred and twenty-one
(ein) ^un^ert ac^t unD ac^tjig, + a hundred and eighty-eight
gnjei^utttert, + two hundred
trei^untert fec^^ unt) fieBatg, + three hundred and seventy-six
taufent) (^a^ ^aufent), + a thousand
(ein) taufent) unt) ein(^), + a thousand and one
(ein) taufent) t)xd unb ijierjig, + a thousand and forty-three
(ein) taufent) ein^untert or elf^untiert, + a thousand and one
hundred
ein taufent) ad^tfeunbert brei unb ac^t^ig or ac^tge^n ^unbert ^rei unb
ad^t^ig, + one thousand eight hundred and eighty-three
brei(mal) ^unbert taufenb, -f three hundred thousand
tim ^iUio'n, + a million
eine SJlittia'rbe, a thousand millions
eine 23ilIio'n, -j- a billion
78. Inflection.
Fully inflected are only tim, jttjet, brei, as follows :
Masc.
Pern.
Neuter.
N. einer
eine
ein(e)^
G. tint^
einer
tim^, when used substantively.
N. ein
eine
ein, like the indefinite article
when used attributively.
„^^ war etner bem^^ ju ^eqen ging" (Ch.) ; „dn^ »on beiben/' one
of two things.
N. gwei
G. jmeier
D. gnjeien A. gmei
N. brei
G. breier
D. breien A. brei
79. Older inflections were masc. jtr>cen, fern. jttJO. 3»ei, the neuter,
has crowded out the masculine and feminine forms, which may still
be found in the older modern classics, and still in use in the S Q-.
dialects. 3Ba^ imkn rec^t tjl, ift breien ju enge, ^urc^ jweier Beugen 2??unb
t»irb attcr»artd bie Sa^r^eit funb (F., I. 3013). Bwecrtf bie mit mir iikrfu^ren
81]
PRONOUNS.
23
♦ ♦ . . (Uh.) 3tt)D ^ofen eine^ 3:u(3^^f cut from the same cloth. «3tt)o
Sungfern in ben beilen Sa^ren" (Gellert). The plurals jwcie and breie are iu
analogy with the strong noun and adjective declensions From 4-13
the e in the plural represents O. H. G. i when they were ^-stems, fiinfe <
fimfi. The only other case in which these numbers are inflected is the
dative plural (in -en): auf aHen S3ieren friec^enf aUe SJiere ijon fic^ ftrecfen; mit
(Bec^fen fa|ren; su 2)reiett« ^mm, jtDeien are according to the adjective
inflection.
80. Ordinals.
The ordinals are formed from the cardinals by adding -te
to the numbers from 2-19, and -fte from 20 on.
(Der) erfle, + first feihfte, + sixth
imxit, + second l^^^e^nte, + sixteenth
^ritte, + third S^anatgfle, + twentieth
»ierte, + fourth l^unbertfte, + hundredth
fiinfte, + fifth taufeti^fte, + thousandth
Their inflection is that of adjectives ; jit^eiter, ter imik, eitt
jweiter; G. einee jn^eiten* See 438, 1.
PRONOUNS
81. Personal Pronouns.
Special forms for gender in the
Common gender.
Bingular.
I.
II.
III.
III.
Masc. Fern.
Neuter.
Sing, N. icfi
U
er fie
e^
G. meiner
Reiner
feiner
feiner i^rer
feiner
(mein)
(ijcin)
(fein)
(fein)
(fein, e^)
D. mix
tir
ficD
i^m i^r
i^m
A. mid^
ti(^
ft*
ifett fie
e^
Plu. N. n?ir
fte
G. unfer
euer
—
iferer
(uitfrer)
(eurer)
D. un^
iniij
ft*
i^nen
A. utt^
euc^
ft*
He
24 PROl^OUNS. [82-
The first and second persons and the plural of the third
person are of common gender. The singular of the third
person has a form for each gender.
82. In the genitive singular the longer forms in -er are
common; the others are now archaic and poetic, e, g., „2$er^ip^
meinnic^t'' (the flower). „3c^ UnU ^Eein/' etc. (G.). The length-
ened forms eurer, unfrer are not yet sanctioned, though common
in the spoken language, and, especially eurer, not very rare in
the classics, e. g,, „(2Ci^ ^^) B^t Za\d Surer felbft nic^t ac^tet" (Sch.).
,,'^ann feetiarf e^ unferer ntc^t,, (Sch.). The genitive singular neu-
ter „e^" occurs still in certain constructions, generally called
an accusative: „(5r i)at eg feiiten $e^( tag ♦ . . ." (Sch.). 3c^ Hn
eg mtoe* gg nimmt mic^ 2Bunter. (See 183, 199, 2.)
83. Reflexive Pronouns.
For the first and second persons the personal pronouns
serve as such, e. g., ic^ fiircbte mtdj, toix freuen ung, i^r fc^eut euc^.
For the third person the forms are made up of the personal
and the old reflexive pronouns :
Maec. and neuter. Fern. Common gender.
Sing, G. feiner (iker, pers. pron.) Plu, (ifcver, pers. pron. )
D., A. ftA fic^ W
84. The reciprocal pronoun has no special form ; as such
are used ung, eu(^, ftc^, einantier, meaning "each other,'' "one
another." Ex.: 3^r |Wai]t cud). STnr [(^elten einant)er nic^t.
The Possessive Pronouns.
85. The possessive pronouns are: metn + my; letn + thy;
fein,his, its; il)r, her; unfer -f our; euer + your; t^, their; 3^^*^
your ; tcr meine + mine ; ter teine + thine, etc. ; Ux meiuige +
mine; ter teinige + thine, etc.
They are inflected like adjectives (see 69); but the first
87] PROKOUi^s. 25
group, meitt; Mn, feiit, etc., like the indefinite article (see 38),
in which the nominative singular masculine and the nomina-
tive and accusative singular neuter are uninflected. e ,g, :
Neuter. Feminine.
Sing. N., A. meitt Zuii teine 9lid)te
G. metne^ Zuift^ Reiner ^iiiitt
D. meinem Zu6^t teiner 9lid)te
Flu. N., A. mtim ZMtt teine S^t^tett
G. meiner ^u(Ser teiner 5^id)tett
D. meinen S^ii^ern teitten S'iii^ten
For the declension of ^er meine, ter mtinxQt, see the weak
adjective, 69, 2. The rest stand uninflected used prediea-
tively and when they follow the noun (now archaic), e, g,,
3Bae mdn ifi, ta^ ift Uin nnr) tua^ tein ift, ta^ ijl mein (B.). Du
Ibaft ta^ Jperje mein fo gan^ genommen ein (Song).
86. Sucr, (Sure, ©ctncr, ©ctnc are often abbreviated into @nj., ©r., ©e. : ©e, SDZajeftat,
©ttj. SBol^lgeBoren. 3^ro is archaic, e. g., 3^vo ©naben. It is an imitation of the old
G. bcro (see 89). It does not occur before the seventeenth century. It stands for mas-
culine and feminine singular and plural : ^f}xo ©naben, ©mlnenj, ®ur(i^tau(i^t.
87. The possessive pronouns form certain compounds with m^tn,
f^alhtxif tx>itlen/ and gleic^ett. Ex. : metnetwegen, i'^rettDcgen, mtmt^alhzn, \^xt^^
gleti^en, cure^gletc^eti* The compounds with wegen and l^alben are really
D. plu. meinen iDegen, betnen ^alben. After n sprang up the excrescent t =
ttteinentwegen, beinent^alkn, current in the sixteenth century. These became
the now classical meinctwegcn, beinet^alben, though the longest forms are
still heard ; also meintl^alknf even ntcint^l^al^en^ occur, but they are not
good. SD^einetwtllen < ntementtt)itlen < mcinentt)illen are original accusatives,
e. g., urn ntetnen tvtilen = for my sake.
The origin of i^re^gleic^en^ etc., is not so clear. ®Iet(^tn is vrithout
doubt the adjective used as a noun and governing a preceding genitive,
which was at first the genitive of the personal pronoun and became later
the possessive pronoun agreeing with gleic&en (M. H. G. ^ne gelichen).
But whence d ? Is it the genitive sign -e^ in compound nouns, Siek^^
Brteff Si)?ittag^jhinbe, which was looked upon as a mere connective ? (See
618, 2.) In IVL H. &. was a Gen. mines, dineSy which with miner , stood for
26
PRONOUKS,
188-
m%n, almost exclusively before aeUbes. But beinc^glcic^cn is not old enough
to connect with M. H. G. dines selbes.
Other compounds with the possessive, like meine^teiU, meincrfeit^ (see
652), are clearly genitives.
Demonstrative Pronouns.
88. These are : 1. ter, ^ie, bag + the, that ; 2. Vxt\tx, biefe^
Mefe^ + this ; jener, jene, jetted, that, + yon. The first, when
used with the noun, differs only in accent and not in declen-
sion from the article (see 39). When used substantively
(without the noun) it declines :
Masc
Fern.
Neuter.
Common gender.
Sing.'^. Uv
bie
tag
Flu, tie
G. U^m
beren
teffen
teren
beg
ber
teg
terer (ter)
D. tern
ter
tern
benen
A. X)tn
tie
tag
tie
89. The spelling-
of
,,be§« for
,,bc^'
' is unwarranted.
It implies that
it is an abbreviation of ,M\ftn," which it is net,
^2)ero'' is the O. H. G. form retained in certain phrases, as in bero
©naben* T>txtntmo,tn, ^^Ikn, etc., are forms like meiuetnjegen, etc. , but .
rarely lose the it before t. For their explanation see 87.
Masc. Fern. Neuter.
90. tiefer tiefe tiefeg and tteg + this
jener jene jeneg -f yon, that
These are declined Hke strong adjectives, and stand adjec-
tively and substantively: tiefe geter, tiefeg Sintenfa^, jener Saurn.
3eiteg tort ift mein 35uc^.
91 Another group of demonstrative pronouns, sometimes
called " determinative," consists of :
Masc.
Fern.
Neuter.
terjenige
tiejenige
tagjenige, the, that
tierfelbe
MefelBe
tagfelbe, the same
terfelMge
tiefelbige
tagfelMge, the same
felber, felbjl (uninflected), felbiger
felbtge
felMgeg, the same
faldj(er)
fo^(e)
fo((^(eg), + such
92] PRONOUNS. 27
1. The inflection of the first three is that of „ter" and a
weak adjective, e, g,, berjenige, te^ienigen, t^emienigen, etc. Their
composition is apparent, -ig is the usual adjective suffix (see
525, 1).
In the 16th century bcr is still separated from felb-, \i\\-, and earlier
the latter were even declined strong, ber jcncr, bcm felkm, but they soon
followed the n-declension. „2)er icne," from which wberienige" developed,
becomes obsolete in the 17th century. wDerfclMge'' < ,/berfelbe.". Accent :
be'rienige, but berfe'lk,
2. ©elBer is a stereotyped form like iJoHer, and felbfl is a geni-
tive singular of felB, M. H. G. selhes. The excrescent t appears
first in the 16th century.
3. ©old) is inflected like any adjective, even with -en in the
genitive singular, e.g,, foI(^enfali^, folc^eu ®IauBen5» It may be
uninflected. always if followed by iin and generally if followed
by another adjective. An apostrophe after foI(^ is uncalled
for. (Sold) ein W^iaxm, folc^ f(^one Slurnen* ^xnt folc^e SSeleiDigung
!ann x6) nic^t ijergeffen. 2(U er folc^e^ fa^ . ♦ > . (B.).
92. Interrogative Pronouns.
2Ger -f who ; nja^ -f what ; tvelc^cr + which ; todi fiir dxif
what sort of.
1. 2Cer declines :
Masc. and fern. Neuter.
N. mx xoa&
G. iDcffen, ttje^ wejfen, ttjed
D. n^em
A. mn tra^
Sc§ or ttjef^: n)ea as befTen t bed. See 89. The genitive lengtheneQ
by -en like bee > beffen was not yet established in the 16th century,
2Be^ is now archaic, except in compounds, e. ^., we^l^al^, t^e^wegen. For
weffentl^alBen, see beffent-, berent^alkn, 87, 89.
2. S3el(^ 4- which, what, declines strong. Before „cin'' it is
28 PROisrouKS. [93-
always, and before an adjective it is often left uninflectecl,
also in poetry when used adjectively: SCeld) ®etummel ^tragen
auf ! (Sch.). aCeld) eln ©efii^I (F. 1011). ffiei^ev mann mx e^ ?
3. 2Ca0 fiir, tua^ fiir ein, what, what kind of. „Sin'' alone is
inflected like the indefinite article if used adjectively; like a
strong adjective if used substantively: „3Ca^ fiir Serge, roa^ ]\xx
SBiiften ♦ . ♦ . trennen un^ ^enn nod)?'' (Le.). S3a^ fiir ein 33aum
tjl ta^ ? 2Ba^ fiir Dinte ifl Die5 ?
93. Relative Pronouns.
1. !Der, ^ie, la^, which, + that, who, declines like the demon-
strative, but the genitive plural is never ^erer : Reiner ftegte nod).
ter nidjt geftritten ^at (Bo.).
2. SBelc^er, trelc^e, trelc^e^, + which, who, that, always declines
strong: "Da^ Su^, tt?el(^e^ ic^ gelefen babe.
3. SBer, + who, whoever. The inflection is the same as that
of the interrogative: 2Ber e5 (auc^) fei, whoever it be.
4. 2Ba5, + what, whatsoever. The inflection is the same as
that of the interrogative : 2Ba^ er (au(^) fagen ma^, no matter
what he says.
Indefinite Pronouns and Indefinite Numerals.
94. winterer, ant)ere, anbere^, -f other, different : ^er anbere,
tic ant>ere, ba^ antere, bte anberen* Declined like any adjective,
used substantively and adjectively.
95. Siner, eine, eine^, + one, the numeral with its deriva-
tives !eitt, none, and einige, generally only plural " some."
Sin- is always strongly inflected and stands only substan-
tively. Standing adjectively it is declined like the indefinite
article (see 39). With del art. : ber eine, Me einen^
,^etn is inflected like the indefinite article, but standing
substantively is dechned feiner, feine, tm{t)^ : Reiner ttjirl) aU
SKeifter geboren (Prov.).
09] PRONOUNS. 29
96. Stiicb-, some; etira^, anything; mv, anybody; toa^, any-
thing, something; mel(^-, some, any.
Stltd)- and mi6)j- are always inflected strong. The singular
of etli(^is rare, having the force of "tolerable," "some": mit
etUcfeem Srfotge, with some success.
97. Compounds with {e: iet)er, every, each; {eglicfe, {et)ti?et)er
(z= ie^er) stand adjectively and substantively; jetermann, every-
body; jemant), anybody; niemant), nobody.
3et)er, jeglic^-, jet) metier, each, every, are declined like strong
adjectives. 3 ^9^0^ and jetittJeDer are not common now ; they
have the same meaning. 3^^^^ntann has only a genitive singu-
lar in -^. S^ntan^ and niemanD decHne:
N. {emanD
G. iemant)(e)^
D. iemantem, -tieit
A. jemanben
The accusative and dative are N. H. G., taken from the
adjective inflection. Though the classics are full of these
cases, the best usage for the spoken language favors no case-
ending for accusative and dative.
98. ^an, one, any one. It is only nominative. The other
cases are made up from ein- or voir. ?Dlan is old spelling for
?0^ann, from which in M. H. G. it was not distinguished. Its
corresponding possessive is fein : 'SHan QlanU i^m ni(^t. '^an
lann feinen eigenen ^Ojjf ni^t efen (Prov.).
99. ^i&ii^, nothing, allows of no further inflection. It is
itself the genitive of M. H. G. niht = ni-wiht and nio-miht
Compare Eng. naught = na-wiht. 9li(^t5, the genitive,
stands for the emphatic combination nihtes niht, "not a
thing" = gar ntd)t^.
3u ttic^te, mit nidJten, "not at all," show still that ntcbt was
once a noun fully inflected: ^Seffer etwa^5 tenn nid)t^ (Prov.).
30 COISTJUGATIOK. [100-
100. As indefinite numerals it is customary to classify
atl + all; MU + both; beiDe^ + each or either; o^an^, whole;
lauter, " nothing but; " man^ + many; me^r + more; me^rere,
several; lit meiflen + most, the majority; Die me^rften (= Die
meiften) ; eiit paax, a few, Ht. " a pair; ' famtlid^e, all, altogether;
ta^ ubxi^t, t)te iiHgen, the rest; "oid, much, many; menig, Httle,
few; eitt njenig, a little.
Of these, aU, ganj, mattc^, ^tel, njenig may stand uninflected.
Otherwise they are inflected like adjectives: 2?ie( (Btelne gab^^
lint) toentg 33rot (Uh.). Oanj ^Deutfd^Iant) lag in @4mac^ unt>
^d^mer^ (Mosen). Da^ gan^e ®entfd)Iant) foil e^ fein (Arndt).
£auter, me^r, ein paar, ein n?enig are indeclinable.
CONJUGATION.
101. The verb varies for person and number; for tense
(present and preterit) and mood (indicative and subjunctive).
From the present stem are formed the imperative and the
noun-forms of the verb, viz. , the infinitive, present participle
with the gerundive, and the past participle in -(e)t. Accord-
ing to the formation of the preterit we distinguish two great
systems of conjugations, the " strong ' and the " zveak.*' The
strong verbs form the preterit by substituting a different stem-
vowel from that of the present, e, g., geben — gab, tragen — trug ;
the weak, by adding -(e)te to the stem, e, g., loben — lobte,
glauben — glaubte*
102. The infinitive, the preterit, and the past participle
ai*e generally given as the " principal parts " of a verb. The
infinitive represents the forms with the present stem. Know-
ing the preterit or the past participle, one can tell whether a
verb is weak or strong. If the preterit ends in -(e)te the past
participle ends in ~(e)t ; if the preterit is strong, the past par-
ticiple ends in -en, e. g., fagen, fagte, gefagt; faugen, fog, gcfogen.
105]
COIfJUGATlOK,
31
The infinitive and the past participle help form the compound
tenses.
103. The following paradigms show the various inflections:
WEAK.
PRESENT. PRETEBIT.
STRONG.
Ind.
x&i lobe
er loBt
xoxx loben
i^r (oBt
pe loben
Ind, andsvJt^,
(obe lobte
lobefl lobtefl
lobe lobte
loben lobten
lobet lobtet
loben lobten
PRESENT.
Ind. Sub).
finge ftnge
ftngt fmge
jingen ftn^en
fln^t ftnget
^n^txi (tngen
2. sg. lobe (tu)
1. pZ. loben mtr
1 loben @ie
Inf,
loben
Geruiidwe.
lobenD
Past part.
gelobt
Imp.
2. sg. ftng(e) (tu)
1. pi, ftngen ttjir
2.i9Z.-lP"^(')^(^^')
( finqen ®ie
PRETERIT.
/we?. SvJbj.
fang fange
fangjl fangej^
fang fange
fangen fangen
fangt fanget
fangen fdngen
Inf.
fingen*
Pres.part.t
Gerundive,
ftngent
Past part.
gefungen
104. The personal suffixes are:
Sg. 1. p. -e, except for strong preterit.
2. p. -(e) ft for both tenses and moods.
3. p. -(e) t for the present indicative. In the pres. subj.
and in the pret. ind. and subj. the 3. p. is like
the first.
PL 1. p. -(e)n for both tenses and moods.
2. p. -(e)t for both tenses and moods ; also for the im-
perative.
3. p. -(e)n for both tenses and moods.
Th^ retention or rejection of the thematic or connectinjr voweJ -e- is treated later.
See 118,
105.. Imperative. The 2. p. sg. ends in -e in all verbs
excepting those strong ones that have the interchange of
82 C0NJFGATI02!f. [106-
e — i or c — ie in the 2. and 3. p. sg. pres. ind., e. g,, Zxant, j(^aue,
kte, Htte, grabe, t)ebe, but fprtd), fn§, nxmm.
106. Infinitive. It always ends in -en except in those
weak verbs in which it is preceded by -el, -er : it^antieln,
a>antent ; also in fein, t^nn, which are non-thematic verbs.
See 449, 2.
107. Participles. The present pari and the gerundive
always end in -ent: ^offeut), ^elfent), etn Siebent)er, ein ^u kmeifenter
©a^, a proposition to be demonstrated. They are declined
like adjectives.
The past participle is formed by the prefix ge-, and the suf-
fix -(e) t for weak verbs, the suffix -en for strong ones: liekn —
gelieBt, bidttern — geHdttert, tragen — getragen, fingen — gejungen*
108. (^e- does not stand:
1. Before t)et§en, laffen, fe^en, ^elfen, lernen (?), le^^ren (?), ^oren,
when an infinitive depends upon them in a compound tense:
3d) ^abc i^n ge|en ^ei§en, fommen lajjen, fagen ^i3ren. For ternen
and lebren, gelernt and gelekt are better usage.
2. In the preterit-present verbs (= modal auxiliaries, see
134) which form similar past participles, viz., fbnnen, tiirfen,
mbgen, miiffen, follen, mUm, SJian ^at ta^ tt)Ute ^ier nidjt fangen
!onnen» See 113.
3. In the past participles of verbs having inseparable pre-
fixes, e. g., ijerlaffen, entfagt, ktedt, getad)t, except fveffen < ^cx +
effen and verbs in which h and g are no longer felt to be the
prefixes be and ge (see 543), e.^., gefreffen, geblieben < bleiben^
geglauM; geglii^en < gleic^en. See gegejjen, 128.
4 In verbs with the foreign ending -i'eren, e, g., ntar|'d)ieren —
marfd)tert ; proMeren — proHert. Even when these are com-
pounded with separable Germanic prefixes, they take no ge- :
au^marf(^iert, cinfturicvt.
5. 2Corren < tper^en never takes ge-, when it is an auxihary
in the passive voice, e, g., gr ift geloBt trorten.
lllj
CONJUGATION.
33
Compound Tenses.
109. These are formed by means of the auxiliary verbs
ijdbm, \t\n, trerten ; the last in the future active and the whole
passive; ):)ahm and fein in the active voice. As a matter of con-
venience the simple tenses of these auxiharies are given here.
110.
PRESENT.
Ind.
i(^ ^aBe
er %^i
fie ^aBett
Subj.
l^abe
^abet
PRETERIT.
Ind. Subj.
Imperative.
2. sg, %aU (uu)
1. pL ^aBen trir
2
^atte
^atteft
^atte
fatten
^attet
fatten
Inf.
l^aBen
Icitte
pttefl
^atte
fatten
^attet
fatten
PRESENT.
Ind. Subj.
PRETERIT.
( 5aBen (5te
Past part.
fei
feiejl
fei
feten
fetet
feien
Imperative,
%sg, fei (tu)
1. p?. feten mir
( feien @ie
Bin
Btft
jtnt)
feiD
ftn^
Ind.
toax
ttjarjl
n?ar
n?aren
n?aret
maren
Subj.
torn
n?drefl
tr>dre
irdren
njdret
tvdren
PRESENT.
ic^ mxtt mxU
In n)irfl merbefl
er n?irb ttjerl^e
mir merten tt^erben
i^r ttjerbet n)ertet
fie tverten n^erben
ge:^aBt
PRETERIT.
Ind.
taaxX), murte
roaxt^, njurbefl
njart), wurte
tt)urt)en
twurtet
tpurten
Inf.
fein
Fres. part,
feient
Fast part,
genjefen
Subj.
murt)e
mMefl
n?iirt)e
njiirben
ttJiirlet
ttjiirt)en
ive.
n^ert'e (tu)
mert'en mtr
( trertet (i^r)
1 n?ert)en ^ie
iH/. ii^erten
Fast part, njotten
2. sg.
1.J9/.
111. 1. -f)akn has contracted forms for the 2. and 3, pers. sing.: ^a|!
< Mst < Jiabest ; !^at < M^ < A«&6^. The pret. has undergone the same
contractions : ^atte < Mte < habete, etc. The pret. subj. has umlaut due
to the influence of strong and pret.-pres. verbs. In dialect the old con-
34 COKTUGATIOiT. [112-
tracted forms with a, prevailing through the whole present, are still
heard. In M. H. G. hdben as auxiliary has the contracted forms ; as an
independent verb, the uncontracted.
2. SBerben is a regular strong verb of the 3, class. It is the only verb
that has retained the two pret. vowels, generally the vowel of the sing,
prevailing over that of the plural. 2Barb is more common as independent
verb ; tt)urbe, as auxiliary. In elevated style warb is preferable.
112. Tlie Perfect is formed with the present of ^aben or fein
and the past participle, e, g., t(^ ^abe getragen, I have borne; t(^
Un gefaferen, subj. id) fei gefa^ren, I have ridden. Perfect Infini-
tive: gctragen i)ahn, gefa^ren fein, to have carried, ridden.
The Pluperfect is formed with the preterit of l^abm or fein: id)
^atk getragen, subj. t(^ I)atte getragen, I had borne; ic^ irar gefa^ren,
subj. i&j mxt gefa^ren, I had ridden.
113. The past participles without ge- accompanied by an infinitive
(see 108, 1, 2), the modal auxiliaries and weak verbs which followed
their analogy, form such tenses as these : 3(^ ^ctk t|n ge'^en f)d^tn, I have
ordered him to leave, ©te ^aben einen fRdd mac^en laffen, you have had a
coat made or ordered a coat to be made, ^cr ^ndht ^at bie Seftton nic^t
lernen fijitneiif the boy has not been able to learn the lesson. (£r ^at e^ nur
fagen I)5reit, he has only heard it said. !I)cr 9?ad)bar ^at ben S3ettler arretteren
laffen woHen (or tt)olfm arretteren laffen), my neighbor wanted to have the
beggar arrested.
114. The Future ind. and subj. is formed with the present
of mxUn and the infinitive, e, g., i(^ merbe tragen, ic^ werte fafcren,
I shall carry, ride.
The Future Perfect is formed with the present of merl^en and
the perfect infinitive, e. g., ic^ merte getragen '\^ahm, id) mx'tt
gcfa^ren fein, I shall have carried, ridden.
115. The first Conditional is formed with the preterit
subj. of mxlm and the infinitive, e. g,, i(^ tt>uri)e tragen or
fal^ren, I should carry or ride.
The second or perfect Conditional is formed with the pre-
terit subj. of ji?erten and the perfect infinitive : id) timU getragen
)>abm or gefa^ren fein, I should have carried or ridden.
118] CONJUGATION. 85
Passive Voice.
116. The passive voice is formed by werben and the past
participle. The tense of the auxiHary with the past participle
of the verb forms the corresponding passive tense. SBerDcn
forms its compound tenses with feitt and tr^erlen.
Present : i(^ mxU geloBt, I am praised, am being praised.
Preterit : i(^ mv'D or rt>mU geloBt, I was praised.
Perfect : t(!^ Un geloBt n?ori:en, I have been praised.
Pluperfect : ic^ mar ge(o6t moreen, I had been praised.
Future : x&) merbe geloBt werDen, I shall be praised.
Future perfect : i6:i n?erte gelobt itJOrtien feiti, I shall have been
praised.
1. Conditional : id) tt>urt)e gelobt tt?ert)en,I should be praised.
2. or Conditional perfect : i(^ mtoe ^elobt mort)en fein, I
should have been praised.
IiMPERATiVE : fet (t>u) gelobt, be (thou) praised.
feten ©ie gelobt )
Infinitive : ^tUU ti^erDen, to be praised.
c^elobt vooxUn fein, to have been praised.
Weak Conjugation.
117. The weak conjugation forms the principal parts by
suffixing -te or -ete in the preterit: loben, lobk, rcttcn, rcttete; by
prefixing ge- and suffixing -t or -et in the past participle:
^dcUf gerettet* For the simple tenses see 103, for the com-
pound, 112-115.
1. Verbs of this conjugation are with few exceptions derivative verbs, and most of
them can be recognized as such by certain marlcs of derivation, such as suffixes (-cin,
-em, -tg€n, -ieren, -jcn, -fc^en) or umlaut. (But there are a few strong verbs with
umlaut: Ifigen.. trugen, gcbaren, etc.).
118. 1. The connecting vowel always stands before t, whether per-
sonal sufBx (3. p. sg. and 2. p. pi.) or in the participle and preterit, if the
stem ends in b or t (t^)j if the stern ends in m and n, preceded by another
36 CONJUGATION. [119-
consonant which is not m or n, e.g,, er rebct, i^r melbet, xoix walteten* getrojlet,
cr atmete^ i(^ seic^netc.
Those in m and n have lost an c before these consonants. Compare them with their
noirna : Sttem, !^tx6i^Xi. Those in n are often treated like those in el, er, to which they
really belong (see sub 3) : jeic^cnte, regente. But these forms are not elegant.
2. The connecting vowel stands in the 2. p. sg. present ind. also after
stems in f, \6). f, \\, i, ^, besides the stem-endings sub 1, e.g., bu rebejl,
njaltejlr fd)mad)tej^, rec^neft, reifejl, ftfc|e|l, fpa^e)!, faffefl, njibmejl, kijeft, jlu^efl.
3. Verbs in -citt and -ertt rarely show the connecting vowel e, e. g. , \6)
^anbclte, er '^anbett, gelac^elt, xoxx iDanberten, In the 1. p. sg. present ind. and
subj., in the imperative 2. p. sg. they generally lose their own e, e,g,, \^
toanble, tvanbre, [d^meic^le (bu)*
4. In solemn diction and in poetry any verb may retain the connecting
vowel. On the other hand, the poet and the people take many liberties
in the omission of it (sub 1 and 2). For instance, t)<x^ neiie ^au^ t|l aufge^
rid^t't (Uh.). ©eib mtr gegrit^t, kfreunbHe ©c^aren ! (Sch.). O^eb^ftbu »on einem
ber ba le&et? (id.). ®egru§et feib mtr, eble^errn! ®egru§t t|r, fd^one ^amen
(G.). See F. 3217, 3557. In fact though such full forms as bu ftfd)e|l,
rafejl, fajfejl* pu^ejl, etc., are written, one generally hears bu fifc^t, raft, fa§tf
pu^t, etc. This applies also to strong verbs, e. g., bu n)af(^t, j^o§t, rei^t*
5. The present subj. nearly always shows full forms, but the preterit
ind. and subj. have coincided : bag bu Uek|l, i|r Ite^et; ^a^ x6) WtWt rebete*
Irregular Weak Verbs.
119. There are two groups of these verbs. One has a dif-
ference of vowel which looks like ablaut, the other has besides
different vowels also a change in consonants.
1. The stems show nn or nb:
Inf.
Pret. ind.
Subj.
Past participle.
Brennen
brannte
Brennte
gebrannt
fenben
fanbte
fenbete
gefanbt
Here belong Brennen, + burn ; fennen, to be acquainted
with, + ken; nennen, + name; rennen, + run; fettben, + send;
tventen, to turn, + wend, went. The last two have also a pre-
terit ind. fentete, n^en^ete.
121J cokjugatio:n". 37
2. The stems show n!, ng* Here belong :
Inf.
Pret, ind.
Subj.
Past participle.
tenfen
taiijte
l^cic^te
geDad^t
biinfen
( t^euc^te (naudjte)
( t>un!te
teu(^te
geDeuc^t
^uttfte
ger>un!t
bringen
^xa6:jk
Brad)te
gebra(^t
Strong Conjugation.
120. Strong verbs must have different stem- vowels in the
preterit and present, since in this way difference of tense is
expressed. But the vowel of the past participle may coincide
with that of the present, as in geBen, Qob, gegeben v, fa^ren, fu^r,
gefa^ren vi, l)alten, l)ie(t; ge^alten vii; or with that of the preterit,
as in fceigen, Bi^, gebiffen i, btegen, bog, gebogen n, glimmen, glomm,
geglommen vin. The past participle ends in -en, and has the
prefix ge-, e. g., geftoMen, gerufen* For simple tenses see 103.
121. The personal suffixes are the same as in weak verbs.
Compare lieBte, IteBteft, (tebte, etc.; fa^, fa^fl, fa^, etc. The imper-
ative 2. p. sg. has no ending when the present ind. has inter-
change of e-i, ie, e, g., ic^ berge, tu birgft, er birgt ; imp. birg ; brec^en
— bridj; effen — 1§* This interchange of e-i, ie occurs in in 3,
IV, v; in verbs which do not have it there is no difference of
stem- vowel in the imperative and the present, e. g., ^alten —
^alt ; fc^njtmmen — f(^tt>imm^ But often e is added in analogy
with weak verbs, always when the verb is either strong or
weak, e.g., rufen — rufe vri ; f4(ai\en — f(^Icige vi ; always trebe,
ben^ege, ern^cige viii. In the last group there is of course no
interchange of e-i, e. g., tu bett?egft, er ben?egt. When the stem
ends in t, -tet in the 3. p. sg. is contracted to single t, if the
stem-vowel changes. M. H. G. giltet > gilft > gilt* K g,,
getten — er gilt; feAten — er ft(^t; raten, rat; but rettet, fc^neitet.
Special mention is made of these peculiarities under each
class and verb. The preterit subj. always has umlaut and
38 COl^JUGATIOl^. [122-
fhe 1. and 3. p. sg. end in e, e. g., id) \oX), bu \a^i, er fal), etc. ;
but id? \c\X)t, tu fal)eft, er fa^e*
The verbs are best classified according to the ablaut- series,
(See 393.)
122. I. Class. Ablaut : ei i, ie i, ie.
1. Division : ei i u
The stem ends in p (jf), \, d), t, M*
Examples: Bei^en, Big, geMffen ; fc^leifen, fd)tiff, ^efc^liffen ; fdjreiten,
fc^ritt, gefd^ritten; weic^en, n?ic^, gen?i(^en; leiten, litt, gelitten*
The following verbs belong here : Bet^en, + bite ; Heic^en (intrans.), +
bleach, but also weak, always when trans. ; fic^ befleigen, to apply one's
self; gletc^erif to be + like, strong since the ITtli century, in the sense of
+ liken it is still weak, a N. H. G. distinction, M. H. G. only weak ;
filei^eii; + glitter, nothing to do with the rare gleifcn < gelihsen, to
deceive, or entgleifett; to run off the track < ®eleife, track ; gleiten, + glide ;
greifenf to seize, + gripe ; greinen, + grin, rare and generally weak, grinfcn,
its derivative, has taken its place ; feifen, to quarrel, is strong or weak, <
L. G. ; !netfen, to pinch, L. G. > N. H. G. ; fretfc^en and frei^eu/ to scream,
are related, both weak and strong, not H. G. ; leiben, to suffer, + loathe ;
^jfeifeitf to whistle, + pipe < L. pipare ; ret^en^ to tear, + write, draw ;
rciteitf + ride on horseback ; fc^letc^en, to sneak ( ^- slick and sleek) ;
fd^Ietfen, to grind, + slip, weak in the sense of ** to drag, raze" ; f(|Iei^en,
+ slit, split ; fc^mei§en, + smite, throw ; fc^neibett, to cut ; [c^reiten, to stride ;
fpleifen, + split, L. and M. G. ; jlreic^en, to wipe, cross, + strike, etc., with
very varying meanings ; jlreiteitf to strive ; tveid^ettf to yield ; compare
ttjeid^r + weak, wicker ; weak, it means to soak, soften.
2. Division : el ie te>
Examples : getei^en, g^t'te^, gebie^en ; reiben, rieB, gerteBen*
Here belong : Bleiben, to remain ( + leave) ; gebcil^ert/ to thrive, the part,
has a doublet, gebie^eitr thriven, gebiegen, solid, pure ; lei^en, to borrow, +
lend ; meiben, to avoid ; pretfeUr + to praise, strong only since the 15th cen-
tury, < 9)ret^ < M. H. G. pris < O. Fr. pf%s < L. pretium, analogous to
Fr. priser ; reiben, to rub ( + rive) ; fc^eiben, to separate ; fd^einen, + shine ;
fc^retben, to write ( + shrive) ; fc^reienf to scream (?) ; f^iDeigeit;. to be silent,
weak in the sense of "to still a child"; fpeien, to spit, + spew; jleigen,
to climb; treiben, + to drive; Jueifen, to point out, in the 16th century
still weak ; jei^en, to accuse ( + indict).
125] CONJUGATION^. 39
123. Notice the interchange of b-t in the first division, e.g.^ fc^neiben, f(^nitt,
gefc^nitten ; but not in the second, viz., mciben, mieb, gemieben ; jcl;eiben, jc^icb, gefc^teten.
(See 416.) When the stem ends in ^ or ^, the 2. p. sg. present ind. is heard merely as
ending in ft, whether spelt so or not. The full form -eft stands only in elevated diction,
e.g.., bu f(^mei^t, Bei^t, Beflei^t \}i6) ; bu weifeft and toeift, bu preifeft and preift. (See 118,
4.) Notice also the doubling of t and f in fc^reiten, f^ritt ; ftreiten, flritt ; f^Ieifen, fc^Iiff,
etc.
124. II. Class. Ablaut : ie (it, (k\x) i, o o, o*
1. Division : ie (au) o 6*
The stem ends in p (ff), c^, f.
Examples : flte^en, flof , gefloffen ; trtefen, troff, getroffen*
Here belong : ijerbrie^ett, to disgust, vex ; fitepen, + flow ( + fleet) ;
gief ettf to pour ; friei^en, + to crouch, creep (?) ; gentef en, to enjoy ; ried^en,
to smell, + reek ; fc^iepettf + to shoot ; fc^liefen, to slip, rare, supplanted
by its derivative fc^litpfen; fc^Ue^ett/ to close, lock ; fprlepen, + to sprout ;
triefen, + to drip ; faufen, to drink (of animals); fieben, see index.
2. Division : ie, it, au o 5*
Examples: fliegen, flog, geflogett ; tritgen, trog, getrogen; fattgen,
fog, gefogen.
Here belong- : 1. In tc J ^icgcn, to bend ; Meten, to offer, + to bid ;
fliegen, + to fly ; flie^en, + to flee ; frieren, + to freeze ; fUekn, + to
cleave, split ; f(^ieBen, + to shove ; jltekn, to scatter ; ijerlieren, + to lose;
jie^en (jog, sejogett)), to draw.
2. In ii t fitren (fiefen), + to choose ; litgcit, + lie ; tritgen, to deceive.
3. In an J faitgen, + to suck ; fc^nau^en (fc^meBen), to snort, L. and M. G.;
fd^rauben, to screw (+ ?), L. G. > late M. H. G.
2., 3. pers. sg. pres. show archaic forms sometimes Jn cu : fteu^t, freu(i^t, jTeugt. (See
406.) Of those in au only faufen has umlaut, viz., fftuffl, f&uft. The stem ending in ^,
the 2. p. sg. may be bu f^lc^t, gcnie^t. Notice the interchange of ^-g in jie^en, 3pg,
gejogen, but ^ is silent. (See 416.) Notice also the doubling of f : faufen, foff, etc.
125. m. Class. Ablaut: c, i a fi, 6.
1. Division : i ol VL,
The stem ends in n + cons, (t), g, f)*
Examples : btnben, knt, gebunkn; fpringen, frrang, gefprungen*
40 COIfJUGATION-. [127-
Here belong : binben, + to bind ; bingeitf to hire, originally and still at
times weak, the isolated weak past part, bebingt is a regular adjective ;
bringen, to penetrate ; ftnben, + to find ; gclingen, to be successful ; flingen,
to be heard, resound ; rtngen, to struggle, + wring ; fd^tnben, + to skin,
pret. fd^unb; fc^Ungertf to twine, + sling, it also has the force of the now
lost fc^Unbettf to swallow ; fd^winbenf to disappear ; fc^tcingen, + to swing ,
jtngen, + to sing ; jinfen, + to sink ; fpringen, + to spring ; jlinfen, + to
stink ; trittfen, +to drink ; winbenf + to wind ; jmingen, to force.
2. Division : i 5 o.
The stem ends in mm and nn*
Examples: fpinnen, fpann, subj. fpdnne and fpbnne, gcfponnen;
fdjn^immen, f^n^amm, f(^mdmme and f(^momme, gef(^mommen.
Here belong: begittnett, + to begin; rinnen, to flow, + run; jtnnen, to
think ; [c^tt)immen/ + to swim ; fpinnen, -i- to spin ; gcn)innen, + to win.
3. Division : e-i a o»
The stem ends in I, r -f cons, except trefc^en*
Examples : ^elfen (Silft), l^alf (^iilfe, ^dlfe), ge^^olfen ; n^erfen
(mtrft), warf (miirfe), getuorfcn*
Here belong: krgett/ to hide, + bury, burrow; Berjleit/ + to burst;
brefc^en, + to thrash ; gelten/ to be worth, pass for ; ^elfen, + to help ; fd^elten,
+ to soold ; (lerbcn, to die (+ starve) ; »erberbett/ to spoil (intrans.) ; »cr^
berbett (weak), to corrupt ; mxltn, to enlist, woo ; wcrbcn, to become, +
worth (see 110) ; ttjerfen, to throw ( + warp).
126. Notice the double preterits snbj. (See 464, 3.) Sub 2, rtnnen never haa
„r&nne." The 3. division has generally and better u, because you cannot tell „t)alfe"
from f/'^ctfe" by ear. <Srcf(^en and berften, once belonging to the next class, have
brof^e — brSfc^e, birfte — Borfte.
The 2. and 3. p. sg. present ind. have i instead of e. (See 403.) As to the sufllx,
berjien has bu birft, birfteft, er birft; getten, bu giltft (pronounced gilft), ev gilt; toerben, bu
trirft, er roivb; fd^clten like geltcn.
127. lY. Class. Ablaut : a,e,e —i,k a o, o.
The stem contains I, r, m after or before the root-vowel.
Examples: Bredben (Brtdbft), braft (bra(^e), gebroi^en; fte^len
(ftie^lft), flaM (fta^le, fto^le), geftofclen.
129] CONJUGATION. 41
Here belong : ln6:)m, + to break ; gebcirettf + to bear, bring forth ;
befe^IcHf to command ; em^fe^len, to recommend ; erfc^rerfen (er[c^ra!), to be
frightened; ne^men, to take, + nim ; fprec^en/ to speak; |led)en, + to stick,
stab ; j^e|len, + to steal ; treffen (traf ), to hit ; fommen, !am, ^efommeu; + to
come. (See 489, 1.)
SSefei^Ien and empfe^Ien beloDged to the III. Class, and have double subjunctives,
5ef5^Ie — hi\af)k, etc. So has fte(}Ien, ft5l)te — fta^te. The umlaut in gebaren is only
graphic for e < e. Those in -f)l and gel3aren have ie in 2. and 3. p. sg. present ind. :
empftel;lt, geHert. The rest have i : triffft, jprid^ft ; bu Jommft, er Jouimt are quite common,
but not elegant.
128. V. Class. Ablaut: i, e, e — i,k a l,e.
The stem ends in any sound but a liquid.
1. Division : e,e — t, ie a ^, I*
Example : gekn (gieBjl, #|l), gaB (gaBe), gegeben*
Here belong : eJTen, + eat ; freffen, + eat (said of animals) ; gekn, +
give ; genefen, to recover ; gef^e^en, to happen ; lefen, to read ; meffen, + to
measure, + mete ; fef)en, + to see ; treten, + to tread ; ijergeffen, + to for-
get ; (njefen) war, QCivefen, to be, + was.
2. Division : x,xt a t, h
Here belong: Mtten, bat, gekten, to ask, + bid; Uegen, lag, gelegen, + to
lie ; fi^en, faf , gefeffen, + to sit.
The form of the 2. and 3 persons sg. of the present ind. of verbs ending in \\ is -^t;
of those in S is [t for both persons : bu, cv x^t, wergip, fri^t ; bu, ev Ue[t. But geuefen, bu,
er geneft, has no ie, probably because genieft would have coincided with gcnie^t < genie^en,
gcno^, n. ; bu fi^eft may be contracted > fi^ft, pronounced merely ,,\\})i." The participle
of effen, viz., gegeffen, has gc- twice, because gecften was contracted into geHcn very early.
This is now colloquial. (See F. 2838, 4415.) Notice bu tvittft, er tiitt ; bu titteft, er bittet.
129. VI. Class. Ablaut : a, a-d u ^,0..
The stem-vowel is short before more than one consonant ;
also in 6u!^
Example: ba(!en,(ba(l|l),bu!(bule), ^il([din.
Here belong : Ibad en, + to bake, in N. G. generally weak ; fa:j>ven, to ride,
+ fare ; graben, to dig; laben, to Invite, and labcn, + load ; laben (strong).
42 CONJUGATIO]^. [130-
+ to ]oad, and labcn (weak), to invite, have been confounded since early
N. H. G.; they are of different origin ; [(^affeu (fc^uf), to create (weak, "to
work ") ; fc^Iagen, to strike, + slay ; tragen, to carry ; n)ac§fen, to grow, +
wax ; ttjafc^en, + to wash ; {flt))tn), jlunb, Panb (jliinbe, fidnbe), gepanbcn, + to
stand, jlunb is still common in S. G.
Here belonged also formerly : ^ekn (^eBjl), 'i)xib, Qt'f^oUn, to raise, +
heave; fc^Woren (f(|n)orfl), \6^tonx—\^\x>ox, gefc^woren, + to swear, ^ragen
(frcigjl), frug (but never gefragen), ** to ask," are frequently heard ; also jagett
(jcigft), jug, **to chase." The forms are still frowned upon by gram-
marians because they are "wrong," but the people use them just the
same.
In the 2. and 3. p. present ind. a is the rule excepting f^affen, f(^affjl, which is under
the influence of the weak verb. Notice bu and er trac^ft, bu njaj(^ft (pronounced wafc^t).
Isolated participles : gema'^Ien, ground ; maljlen is now weak, mal)len, ma^k, Qemaf)\t,
to grind ; ev^al)en, lofty, < er^eBen, er^oBen.
130. VII. Class. Characteristic is ie in the preterit,
which is no ablaut, while the past participle always has the
vowel of the infinitive.
For convenience we make two groups.
1. Division. The seeming ablaut is : a, a ie &, a*
a before more than one consonant, ie = short t before -ng*
Examples: fangen (fiingft), ften^, gefangen; Braten (Mtft, brat),
briet, gekaten.
Here belong : Blafen, + blow, + blare (?) ; :6ratett, to roast, fry ; fallen
(ftel), + to fall ; fangen (rarer fa'^en),, to catch ; (ge^en)/ Qteng, gegangen, + go,
went, gone ; ^alten, + to hold ; ^angeitf + to hang ; laffen, + to let, cause ;
raten, to advise ; fc^Iafcn, + to sleep.
Umlaut is the rule in the 2. and 3. p. present ind. Notice bu ritjl, cr rat ; bu, er Blcijl ;
bu ^aitft (pronounced „^al[t")/ ^r pit ; bu lifteft or bu, er lafjt. The umlaut in this whole
class is late ; in later M, H. G. they have it rardy. The " Rules " prefer the spelling
i to ie, viz., :^ing, fing, ging.
131. 2. Division : au, ei, 5, u ie an, d, o, u.
Here belong : '^antn, '^ieb (6 < tti), ge^aucn, + to hew ; laufcn, Hef, gelaufen,
to run, + leap; ^el^en, ^ic§, gejeipen, to call, command, + hight; flopen
(jliep), to kick, thrust ; ritfen (ricf)/ to call.
133] C0NJUGATI013". 43
Only fio^en and generally taufen take the umlaut: bu, er flop; bu ISuffl.
©(^eiben, once of this class, has gone into i; „ge^ie^en," according to i, is some-
times heard, but must still be rejected as incorrect. Of this class there are a great
many isolated participles of verbs that have changed conjugation, e. g.^ fcejc^eiben,
modest (but bef<i)ieben," ordered "j ; cjefcljiotcu, rough-ground ; gefalsen,-f- salt ; gefpaltcn,
" split " ; gewaljen, rolled, etc. 3?ufen, ruftc, geruft is not correct.
132. VIII. Class. Characteristic is o in the preterit and
past participle, long or short according to the following con-
sonants.
The verhs belonging here are stragglers from all the other ablaut -
series. There must be therefore a number that are still afloat ; that is,
according to the usage of the period in which they are taken, they be-
long to their regular class or to this. Present usage in the spoken lan-
guage always favors o — 0, e.g., \^tomxi, fd)iDor, gefc^moreu/ vi ; brefd)en,
brofc^^ gebrofc^en, in ; l^eben, l^ob, ge^oBen, vi, which have been assigned by us,
however, to their proper classes, li^ugen^ ii, and triigcHf ii, have sprung
from Uegen and tricgen under the influence of the nouns l^iige, %x\\^. They
might be classed here ; as also fitren, ii, for fiefen ; compare the noun
^ur(^furft), elector.
133. The vowels of the present may be z, i, a, a, o»
The ablaut is most frequently e o»
We count here : kUctt (bellt, biHt), to bark, in ; fc(J)tm (ft($tfl, ftd)l), + to
fight, IV, III; fled)ten (flic^tft, pronounced [lid)ft, \[\d)\), to braid, iv, in;
Vflcgen, to carry on, undertake, v, iv, in the sense of *' to be accustomed,^'
** to care for," always weak ; melfen (melft and milft), + to milk in ; qucllen
(quiflt), to swell, gush, in ; fd)ellen (f*ittt archaic), generally f^allen the weak
verb, **to resound," weak = to cause to resound, ring, in ; [(^mcljen
(fc^miljft, fc^milst), + to melt, in ; fc^^meKen ([c^wiltt), + to swell, in ; n)ebeu
(raebft), strong and weak, + to weave, v; &ett)egen (bewegjl), to induce,
weak = to move, v ; glimmen, to glow, in, 2 ; fUmmen, + to climb, in, 2 ;
garen (gdrt), to ferment, also weak, iv; ermagen (crmagft), to consider; trdgen
or wiegcn (if te, ii), n)dg|T, tt)teg)l, + to weigh (-n)dgen, njiegertf -megeit are in
M. H. G^. the same word, v) ; rdc^en (rd^t), + to wreak, sometimes has rod),
gercc^en, but is generally weak, iv; erlofc^en, intrans., to die out (of a flame),
(erUfd)ejl, erltfd)t), but trans. lofd)cn, to extinguish, in ; ^crn?trren, to confuse,
III, is generally weak, but has an isolated participle, i)en»orren = intricate,
complicated; fc^eren (fd)ierfl, [d)iert) + shear, iv, is sometimes weak.
44 A]SrOMALOUS VERBS. [134^
ANOMALOUS VERBS,
1. The Preterit-Present Verbs.
134. To this group belong the modal auxiliaries and n^iffett.
They are originally strong verbs, whose preterits are used as
presents. New preterits, past participles, and infinitives were
formed weak. The infinitives, the present plural, and the new
strong participle have the same vowel, sometimes with an
irregular umlaut : fonnen (inf.), n;)ir Bnnen, Bnnen (past part.).
The different vowels of the present in the sg. and pi. \vd^,
\vi\\cn ; the subjunct., with umlaut, ma^, mo^e ; the lack of t in
the 3. p. sg., er mag, are still traces of their strong conjugation.
The weak preterit was formed without connecting vowel, and
has umlaut in the subjunctive : rno^m, mo&ik, mo6)k, gemoc^t*
(See 119, 2, and 454, 3.) The strong participle in -en stands
in the compound tenses, when an infinitive depends upon the
auxiliary: t(^ 'hah fd)rei6en miiffen, but id) l)ak gemu^t. An im-
perative, the meaning permitting, is made up from the
subjunctive, e.g.^ n?oIIe, moge.
135. 1. SSijJen, i, to know, + to wit (wot, he wist).
Inf. Pret. ind. Subj. Participles.
«lffe« m^tc mlU {^^^'^^^
The pres. ind. inflects: t(^ a^et§, tu tt?ct§t, er mi^, tt?tr njtffen, t^r
mi|f(e)t, fte miffen. Subj. : i(^ triffc, n^iffeft, miffe, etc. Imp. : tcifl'e,
mijfet, iinffen @te.
2. J)urfen, m, to be permitted.
Inf. Free. sg. Pret. ind. Subj. Past part.
tiirfen tarf lurfte burfte |^?"^^^
Pres. ind. : barf, barffi, tarf, biirfen, tiirft, tiirfen* Subj. : biirfef
tiirfeft, t'lirfe, etc.
136] ANOMALOUS VERBS. 45
3. ttonnen, in, to be able, + can.
Inf. Pres. eg. ' Pret. ind. Subj. Past part.
Knnen lantt fonnte fbnnte |^„
Pres. ind. : fantt, fannft, tamt, lonnen, etc. Subj. : fonne, fonneft,
fi3nne, etc. Imp. : Vonnt, fbnnt, fbnnett ®ic*
4. Wo^m, V, IV, to be able, + may.
Inf. Pres. sg. Pret. ind. Subj. Past part.
( qemo(^t
mogen ma^ moc^te moc^te i ^
. mogert
Just like fonnen.
5. ©oHen, iv, + shall.
Inf. Pres. sg. Pret. ind. and subj. Past part.
foHen [on follte ^ ^^^"^^^
Pres. ind.: foil, foUfl, foU, follen, etc.
( foEen
Tills is almost entirely weak now. The vowel-difference in the pres.
has been levelled away. Comp. Eng. shall, should.
6. ^Jliiffen, vi, + must.
Inf. Pres. sg. Pret. ind. Subj. Past part.
miiiTen mug mu^tt mu§te |Sm
Pres. ind.: mu^, mufft, mug. Subj.: miiffe, etc.
This too is almost entirely weak.
7. SCoHen, i, + will.
Inf. Pres. sg. Subj. Ind. and subj. Pret. Past part.
tDoaen n?ia mlit ti^odte UeiroUt
( n?o(Iett
Pres. ind. : luitt, ttJtttft, toiU, tooUm, miit, Gotten. (See 472, 2.)
n. The verbs ge^u, + to go, flel^tt, + to stand, t^un,
4- to do.
46 ANOMALOUS VERBS. [137,
136. 1. ®eKe)n.
Pres. ind. : i6:i ge:^e, Uu ge^fl, er get)t, jrir c^t^n, % ge^t, fte gelm.
Subj.: id^ ge^e, tu ge^eft, er gel)e, etc.
Imp. sg. : gel); pi., ge^^t, gel)en @ie* Part.: ge^ent)*
Pret. ind.: id^ gieng. Subj.: i(^ gienge*
Part.: gegangen* According to vii ; from a stem ''gang."
2. ®teHO«*
Pres. ind. : i6:i fte^e, tu fte^jl, er fle:^t, n?tr fte^n, i^r j^t% jte jle^^n*
Subj. : i(^ fte^e, t)u fte^^ef^, er fte^e, etc.
Imp. sg. : fte^; pi., fte^t, fte:^en <Ste* Part.: fle:^ent>*
Pret. ind.: ic^ ftant) (ftunt))» Subj.: ftante (ftuttbe)^
Part.: geftant)en» According to yi ; from a stem ''stand."
3. Z^nn.
Pres. ind. : i(^ t1;)m, t)u tbuj^, er ftut, n?ir tfeun, i^r t^ut, fie t^un*
Subj. : i* t^ue, t>u t^uefl, er t^ue, n?ir t1^m, i|r t|ut, fie t^uen>
Imp. sg.: t^u; pi., t^ut, t^un ®ie* Part.: t^uent).
Pret. ind. : i(^ t^at, t)u t^atft, er t^^at, n?ir t^aten, i^r t^tet, fte
t^aten. Subj.: x&) t|dte, bu t^ateft, er H^att, etc.
Part.: get^an^
The full forms with c of these three verbs are not used in the indica-
tive. The ^ is merely graphic, and is not pronounced, e. g., i^ gel^e is not
ge-l^e, but ge or gc'c.
137. The compound verbs are not inflected differently from
the simple verbs. Notice the position of the separable prefix,
and ge- in separable compound verbs: \6^ fdjreibe art, f(^rie6 an;
imp. fcfereibe (tu) an, id) Ijak angefi^riekn, id) merbe anfc^reiBen*
The separable prefix stands apart from the verb in the simple
tenses (pres. and pret.), but only in main clauses; ge-, gu- stand
betvreen prefix and verb, angefd)rieBett, ansufi^reiben. Ex.: 3^
fd)reik, fd)rieb Den Srief ab, but mii^renD id) ten Srief abf(^rteb
(dependent clause). In inseparable compounds notice the
138] ANOMALOUS VERBS. 47
participle has no ^e : ict^ i^erfte^e, i?erjlant), ^aBe ^erftanbeti, mxU
ijerfte^tt. (See 108, 3.)
1. Notice a class of inseparable compounds derived from compound
nouns. These have ge» They can be easily recognized by the chief
stress falling on the first element: ha^ ^^rit'^jlitc!, verb fru'l)ftu(fen, frul)ftucftef
gefrii^jlucft, to breakfast; ber 9f{a'tf(%la9, verb ra'tfc^lagen, ratWlagte, geratfc^lagt,
to take council.
138. Example of a reflexive verb, e, g., ftd) freuen,to rejoice:
Pres. i(^ frcue mi(^, tu freuft t)idj, er freut fid), mv freuen un^, i^r
freut eucb, fte freueu ft*; i6> freute mic^, ^abe mi^ gefreut, n?ert)e mic^
freuen, n^er^e mi^ (^efreut i)ahn.
FIRST PART
SECOND SECTION.
SYNTAX
142J SYiTTAX OF THE AETICLE. 51
SYNTAX.
139. For practical reasons we divide the Syntax into
Special and General Syntax.
The Special treats of the function of the word, inflected or
uninflected, in a sentence.
The General treats of the combination of words into a
sentence, of the word-order, and of the combination of
clauses into a compoimd sentence.
It is of course difficult to keep these two divisions separate, as in fact all the differ-
ent branches of grammar. Thus the separation of inflection and function, of phonol-
ogy and inflection, of word-formation and syntax is a violent one. The division into
special and general syntax is the custom of French grammarians, who have succeeded
best in freeing their grammatical system from the strait-jacket of Latin and Greek
grammars.
SPECIAL SYNTAX.
The parts of speech are treated here in the same order as they are in the Accidence.
Syntax of the Article.
140. The use of the demonstrative pronoun as definite article is
much older than that of the numeral „m" as indefinite article, //©in"
was used where the definite article could not stand ; hence the plural of
cin ^am is still Scanner. In O. H. G. the article is still lacking ; its use
spread in M. H. G. , so that now it is almost a necessity.
Some General Cases of Absence of the Article.
141. Proper names, names of materials always when pre-
ceded by nouns expressing quantity and measure, have no
article. Ex. : @oet|e erreic^te tin l^o^e^ 3llter. ©chiller ^axh 'otv^
Wtnima^xQ juttg, S3(ei ij^ ttjei(^er aU ®oId. gin 5)futtt) Budfer.
142. No noun preceded by a genitive can take an article:
Deg T)en!eng %ciDtn ijl aerriffen (F. 1748). £et alten ©otter Bunt
©ettJtmmel (G.).
52 SYKTAX OF THE ARTICLE. [143-
143. There is no article before nouns (connected by nnX),
It^eter, no(^ or unconnected) in certain set and adverbial phrases;
in an enumeration of objects belonging to the same class or
genus. Ex. : ®e(t unl) ®ut» $au^ mt) ^oU ^it ®ott fiir ^onig
unt) 3SaterIan^» 3n @au^ nnX> SSrau^* (Bxnn unt) 35erftanr) i)erlier^
id) fdjier (F. 2504). 5^1*1 trt)if(^ ij^ te^ J^oren Siratt! no* @peife
(F. 301). ©on ic^ nttt ©rtp, ^eipel, geter fcbreiBen? (F. 1732).
Ura^ne, ®ro§mutter, ^ntttx unD ,^tnb in bumpfer 6tube beifammen fint)
(Schwab). 3^^ ^if*' 3« S^tte, ipau^ an ^an^, <Btnn auf @tetn, na*
Djien, gen ©ii^en, »on 5^ort)en (but notice im Dften, im (BixUn, etc.
144. All pronouns exclude the article^ except foI(^, mand),
njelc^, ma^ fiir, which allow an indefinite article after them, and
aE(e), which allows the definite article after it; e, g. : 5Ba^ foil
aU tier ©c^rnerj unb Sufi (G.). SBelc^ etn gef(^aftig 33ol! etit tin unt)
au^ (id.). 3Ba^ fiir ein Sanb^mann Bijl bu, 3&9^^^ (Sch.).
145. An abstract noun, and any noun denoting profession,
rank, position have no article in the predicate after neuter
verbs; e.g.: 5)^ilo!te't,ber gan^^atur ift, feringt au(^ ben 9leoptoIe'm
ju feiner ^^latur trieber juriicf (Le.). ^ei^e ^Wagtfter; :^etge S^octor
gar (F. 360). (3c^) bin ©olbat, fomme niemal^ trieber (Sch.),.
Eng., I am a soldier.
146. 1. In technical phrases some nouns and adjectives used as
such take no article : (S($retber biefe^, the writer of this ; Md^tx, plaintiff;
S3efagter; ®cbac^ter; DMge^; f^olgenbe^, etc. In headings: Ue^er Slttmut unb
Sitrbe (Sch.). (£afu^le{)re, f^Ienon^le^re.
2. In folk-lore and folk-songs : OJotfappc^ettf Little Red Riding-hood ;
(B^mtmttdjcn, ^mU fprac^: tc^ breeze bi(^. Slo^lein fprad^t ic^ jlec^e btc^ (G.).
2:pr(^ett fnarrt, Wtan^ltin pfetft.
Article with Proper Nouns.
147. The rule is: no article before proper nouns just as
in English.
1. Names of persons may take an article when the bearer is
149J ARTICLE WITH PROPER NOUN-S, 53
well known and his name has become a common noun; to ex-
press familiarity and intimacy, also contempt; to mark gender
and case more clearly (this applies also to names of places
and countries) ; when tiie author's or artist's name is used for
his work; before names of planets, of ships, of the characters
of a play, of titles of books taken from a person. Ex. : (£in
^af^ington, Ux SBelfe, t>ie Dttoneju Schiller's Tell and Wallen-
stein, Goethe's Gotz and Lassing's M. you Barnhelm are full
of examples of the second use (famiharity, etc.). !Die Sitfte be^
(Bofrateu. ^ar'i^ tern gertiinant) gemefen, tt>a^ Dcta^io mix wax . . .
(Sch.). Sagt ftd) nennen ben ffiallenfieitt (Sch.) (contempt).
I^e^rient fpielte ten '^at^an. 2Jletn greunt) 1))at ^en Sorot »er!auft
(painting by Corot). 2)er §erMe^ ift Befc^aMgt*
2. Names of countries and provinces which are not neuter
take the definite article. Most of these are feminine and a
few masculine, viz., compounds : ^er Srei^gau, 3lfeeingau, ter
(Suntgau; also ber ipaag ( + the Hague); ber, ta^ Slfa^. Femi-
nines in -ei: Me ZMti\ SQaKadjet'; in -an x tie ^oltau, W
SBetterau ; in -mar! : Me Wnmaxl, bie Dftmarl ; bie Sauft^, Me
®d)tt)ei§, Ik ^rimm, tie S!:t'oank, bte ^\al^. Some neuters in -lanb j
ta5 Sogtianb, ba^ S3enbtlanb, bie 5^ieberlanbe, pi.
3. Names of oceans, lakes, straits, rivers, mountains, and
forests always have the definite article, e, g.^ ba^ SWittelmeer, bie
Dftfee, ber SoDenfee, ber Selt, ber (Bum, ber 0l^etn, bie t)om\i, let
^ara, ber @pejfart, bie Sllpen, ber ©{^njar^n^alb*
4. Names of the seasons, months, days of the week, of the
streets of a city: „T)tx SBinter ift ein &}xmmann'^ (Clauilius).
3m S^ttuar, U^ ©onntag^, auf or in ber ^aiferftra^e, im grii^Ung.
148. Appellatives have an article as in English : tie 2:^rane
quidt, bie @rbe ^at mi^ mieber (F. 784). For exceptions see
141-146.
149. Abstract nouns have no article when they denote a
characteristic or state of mind: ?i}lut jeiget au(^ ber 9}?ameluc! ;
54 SY2!n?AX OF THE ARTICLE. [150-
@e|or|am ifl m S^riften (Bijmud (Sch.). greut>e war in Zxoia'^
ipatten (id.) ^rieg ijl emig stt)tfd)en Sift un^ 2lrgwo^n (id.). But
when they denote an act or motion they are treated as appel-
latives. They may also take the article that has generahzing
force, e. g,, Der Sot) ift t)er eiinben @oIt> (B.). "tk 2BaM ftet)t ttr
uo(^ fret (Sch.). Die ^unft ift lang unt) furj ift unfer Seben (F.
558-9). \Die Sctfd)aft ^orM4 tro^I, aUeitt mir fe:^lt l)er ®IauBe
(F. 765). T;a5 war ein ©^up ! (Sch.).
150. Names of materials have the generalizing article,
which denotes the whole kind or substance, or an article that
singles out a certain kind or quantity, e, g., ^tx SBein erfreut
te3 mcn]6^m iperj (B.). "La^ ®olt ift foftBar. "Lit (BtdnhW ift
\6^m^v^ out Braun. Without article: (Si(6er unt) ®o(t) :^a6e ic^ ni(^t
(B.). Stut ift gefToifeit (Sch.). Sa^ mir ten beften Seeder ffiein^ in
purem ©olfe reic^en (G.).
151. Collective nouns take an article except when taken
in a partitive sense: 3Ba5 rennt tae SSol!? (Sch.). SBeit t>a^inten
war nod) la^ gu§i)oI! (id.). 2Bir ^akn gug^ol! unt) 3fleiterei (id.).
152. All classes of noims qualified by an adjective, by a
genitive, by a relative clause, etc., take an article in the singu-
lar, excepting names of materials and nouns in the vocative, in
the predicate or in certain adverbial phrases. The plural has
the definite article or none. Ex. : J)er fleine ®ott t)er SBelt Heibt
jlet^ »ott glei(^em ©cblat] (F. 281). Ter ®ott, tcr Sifen wa(^fen
Ue§ . ♦ ♦ (Amdt). I^te §auptftaDt ^on gran!rei(^. But ((Btc)
fprad^en laut ^od (^oI)en @inne unD ©efii^Ie^ (G.). 9lacb alter ^^eife.
(£5 gab fdsbiire 3^iten a(5 tie unfern (Sch.). J:er alte Sarkrojfa
(Uh.).
153. The genitive preceding a noun always has the article
except a proper name : 3« te^ 'ilD'iarmor^ falte SBangen (Sch.).
3nt)e^ SBalte^ ?IJlitte (id.). Schiller's „an Ufer'^ S^lant)" Goethe
would have made a compound, ,,Ufer grant.'' Comp^ „Sergee^
Ifeo^le" and other compounds of Goethe.
158] EEPETITIOK OF THE AKTICLE. 55
154. The definite article stands for an Eng. possessive
pronoun, when the possessor cannot be mistaken. There
may or may not be a personal pronoun as object in the sen-
tence. Ex.: Ser ^opf t^ut mix \o tot^ (Song), ^abt i^r mtr Un
ginger Blo^ genommen? (Sch.). (@te) xix^xt xbm leife tie ©d^ulter
(H. and D. 4, 63). See 243, 3.
155. 1. In S. Gt. the definite article is always applied to members of
the family instead of the possessive pronouns. In N. G., as in Eng., no
article is necessary: ®ru§^ ten ^akx unb SJater^ 33ritber 1 (Sch.).
2. As with proper names so names of materials and abstract nouns
often have the definite article in the genitive and dative merely to show
the case : ber 1Slil6) Saffer 'oox^k^tn*
156. The definite article is used in German for the indefi-
nite in English in a distributive sense : Sutter foftet anbert^al^
Waxt l^a^ 9)funD, a pound ; Mefe^ Znd) foftet 90 3)fenttig(e) Die SUe;
fiinfmal ba^ 3^^^ or im ^a^xt. This " a " in Eng. represents the
preposition " on/' and is not the indefinite article.
157. Sin can stand in German before certain indefinite pronouns and
neuter adj. where it does not stand in Eng.: ein jeber^ ein jegltc^er, ein fDld}er,
etn man(^er (better mant^ ciner); ein ft^t^, = a fixed sum ; ein me^rere^r =
more ; ein njenige^, =: little. 3^ fc^reibe na(^|len^ ein me^reres^.
Repetition of the Article.
158. Before each of several nouns of different gender the
article must be repeated if it stand at all: Der 3?ater, t)ie 9Jlutter
bie gin^eit ijor ^e^ ipauptmann^ $au^ (Song). If two nouns, con-
nected by unb, denote different persons the article should be
repeated : T)er Dnfel unt) fatl^t be^ ^inbe^ tt^ar M ber 2:aufe
^ugegen (one person). But ber Dnfel unb ber ^ai^t . ♦ ♦ (two
persons).
Both rules are often offended against by Luther, Goethe, and Lessing,
and frequently in the spoken language : 2Benn man ben ^akx unb Did^ter mit
cinanber ijergleid)en will . . . (Le.).
The article before an apposition is treated as in English.
56 SYNTAX OF THE GEITDEB. [159-
SYNTAX OF THE GENDER,
159. The grammatical gender of nouns is threefold, mas-
culine, feminine, neuter. As to living beings, the nouns de-
noting males are masculine, and those denoting females femi-
nine. Ex. : ter gu(^^>, iom, Ux gute 3Kantt, 5^effe, ^uc(^t, Dd)^,
Sod; Ik ^u|, 3tege, Safe, fc^bne "SRa^l, W (Ban, (Btnk.
1. Exceptions : nouns denoting the young of animals, diminutives,
and ha^ SBeib, ba^ Mm\^ (see 59), ba^ ^rauenjtmmer are neuter. Ex. : ha^
%txkl, %mtn, ^alb, mm^n, ^xauldn.
2. Any grammatical gender is ascribed to the names of the species
without regard to sex. Neuter: ba^ ^^ferb, ba^ ^^mm, ta^ ©(^af, ba^
«Rc^. Fem. : bie S^ad^ttgaH, ^meife, S3iene, Wlau^, 0latte. Masc. : ber %i\d),
160. Where the grammatical gender does not coincide
with the natural, the following rules may be of service, based
on the meanings of nouns and on their derivation. See 159, 1.
Gender AccoRDiNa to meaning.
1. MascuHne are :
The names of the points of compass, of the winds, seasons,
months, days of the week; of mammals (a few small ones Hke
Me ^an^, t)ie 3flatte excepted), most of the larger birds, most
fish, and stones.
Ex. : ter 5^ort) or ^^lor^en; ©ommer; %tixmx, Slugu'fl; 9Hontag,
(SonnaBenl); t>er Sfel, Some, Slefant ; kr ©traug, 9lMer, <Stor(^ ; ter
§at, 5lal, ^arpfen (all compounds with -fifd); of course, as ^ev
3Balftfc^, ^Uppenfifd)) ; ^er ^iefel, "Liama'nt, gel^fpat*
2. Feminine are :
The names of most rivers, trees, plants, and flowers (in -e),
insects, small singing birds, and nearly all derivative abstract
nouns.
161] GENDEE ACCORDING TO DEEIVATIOI^. 57
Ex. : l?ie S>efer, DDer, Sl6e ; tie gid)e, :^attne, Suiie ; Me 9lel!e,
9^ofe, Mbe, 5^effel, ^artoffcl; t)ie Slmeife, ffianje, Siene; tie 9lad?tigaII,
@(^mal6e, Serd^e; also tie ^ra^e, Sule^ Die 2ie6e, 2:ugent), Suflent),
I^emut, greuntlid)!ett, etc.
3. Neuter are :
The names of places and countries except those always hav-
ing the article (see 147, 2), collective nouns (particularly those
with ®e-) ; most names of materials including metals, of the
letters of the alphabet; other parts of speech used as nouns,
particularly adjectives not denoting persons (see 169).
Ex. : „ta5 fcfeone ©panten/' „eitt fletn '^axi^/' ta^ SSolf, ^eer, ®e^
birge, ®efcl)ug; tae §0(3, §eu, ^d)mala, Dbft; U^ ^x)tn, Slei, ^wpfer,
3tnn; ta^ 2B, g); ta^ Summein, „i:a^3 S^enn uuD ta^s ^Iber/'ta^
®ute, ta^ SBa^re, ta^ ©d^one*
ReiuAEK.— So many rivers are feminine because they are compounded with -aha
( + Lat. aqua) : SGJeicr and SBerra < Wesera(h), Werraha; fcie ©alja(d)). But notice ber
Di^ein, SlRain. S)ie ©d^roeij, SEiirfel have the article really on account of their exceptional
gender. American rivers are masculine : ber ^ubjon, ber 'iSflof)av>t.
161. Gender according to derivation and endings.
1. Masculine are :
Most monosyllables by ablaut, e, g., ter (Spru(^, ©prog, ^ti6!i,
@d)irm ; those in -tx, -Ux, -ner (denoting agents) ; in -et (denot-
ing instrument) ; all in -ling ; many in -en ; dissyllabics in -z
according to the n-declension (denoting living beings) ; in -ic^.
Ex.: itx (Bd)xcikx, Mn^Ux, Wt'tner; tcx "Detfel, ^ebel, ter ?5remt)^
ling, (S^iinftUng, @dugling; t)er (^ec^en, £)egen; corresponding to
Eng. -om, ^ufen, Sefen; ter ^mU, i'om, 33ote; ®anferic^, SBiite:?
rid), gitticb.
2. Feminine are:
Many dissyllabics (by ablaut, see 496) in -e ; abstract nouns
in -e, mainly from adjectives ; in -ie, mostly foreign; many in
58 SYNTAX OF THE GENDER. [162-
-t; all in -ei, -in, -uttg, -l)eit, -feit, -ft^aft; some in -ni^ and
-fal; foreign ones in -age (see 163, 5).
Ex.: Me ®ro^e, Jpb^e; Ik (Sprac^e, ®aBe: tie ^^^ilofop^ie, ©alari;?
terie ; tie ipaft, ^a(^t, ,^raft; tie S^ig^^^i/ Surifterei, S}telotei; tie
greuntin, 2el)rerin ; tie Dultung, SBitmung; tie greifceit, grbmmig^
feit; greuntfc^aft; tie SBiltiti^, gaulni^; tie Slamage, Sourage.
3. Neuter are:
All in -(^en, -leiit ; most in -\d, -fal, -ni^, -turn ; nearly aU of
the form ®e-e or @e- without e; some in -eL
Ex.: ta^ ipiintc^en, ^naHein ; ta^ 3f^atfel, UberBleibfel; ta^ ©c^ic!::^
fal, ^abfal; ta^ ©etac^tnic, SSerma^tni^; ta5 ^ouigtum, S^riftentum
(only two masc, ter S^eic^tuitt and S^^tum); tai: ©efilie, ©emiilte;
ta5 (55eHlt, Q^efc^id ; ta^ Siintel, ©efintel, and the S. G. diminu-
tives ta^ 3^itttel, Siibel, etc.
On the whole the gender of noans has changed very little in the history of the lan-
guage. Ex. of changes are: bie <Sitte < O. H. G. der situ, already M. H. G. sometimes
diu site. "Die 23Iume was O. H. G. both masc. and fern. ®ie Z-a\)Vi<i was O. H. G. der
fano.
162. The following groups of nouns have varying genders,
though some are of the same origin and have the same mean-
ing. They should be fully treated in the dictionary, to which
the student is referred. Only a few examples are given in
each group.
1st group. The same form and meaning, but double gender (m. and
n.) ; ber and ba^ 9)letcr, 2:^ermome'ter, S3arome'ter, SSereic^, (Bdjxtdtn, Beug, etc.
2d group. Double gender (m. and f.) witb varying forms, but the
same meaning and origin : ber <B6^mi — bte Sd^iirje; ber Xrupp — bie Xruppe;
ber DueK — bte DueUe ; ber ^palt — bte (Spalte.
Bd group. Double gender, the same form in sg. and pi. if the plural
be formed of both genders, but of different meaning and sometimes of
different origin (the latter with *).
163]
GENDER OF FOREIGN WORDS.
59
woman ; pi. iDie C2)utcn*
ber ^eibe, heathen
btc |)elbc, heath
pi. bie |)eiben
*ber SSuKe, bull
bie 33uIIe (document)
bie SuHen
ber ^xU, heir
bas^ dxbc, inheritance
bie ©rben
ber ilJerbienj^, earnings
ha^ SJerbtenjl, desert, merit
bie ^erbienjle
*ber ©etfel, hostage
bie ©eipel, scourge
bie ®ei§eltt
-feln
*ber differ, measurer
H^ s»?effer, knife
bie 9)?effcr
There are perhaps forty in all.
4:th group. Double gender, double plural, but different meaning and
sometimes different origin (the latter marked *). Perhaps a dozen or
more.
ber SBanb/ volume pi. SSdnbe ba^ sBanb, ribbon pi. S3anber
*ber S^arfc^, march SD^arfc^e bie Max\^, marsh SOiarfc^en
ber (B^iih, shield Sc^ilbe ba^ Sd^ilb, sign-board (Sd^ilber
*ber Xf^ox, fool 2:^oren ba^ X^or/ gate
Gender of foreign words.
163. Foreign words retain generally the original gender :
bie ^ein < L. poena, later pena ; ba^ ^tofter < L. claustrum ;
ber Verier < L. carcer{em).
Many have changed gender for various reasons. They were
fully Germanized and followed German models according to
ending or meaning, or they followed French (Romance) rules.
Some changes are difficult to account for.
1. Examples of neuter nouns that became masculine, masculines that be-
came neuter, and f eminines that became neuter : ber ^ala'\t, < palatium ;
ber 33alfam, < halsamum ; ber SJjantet, < mantellum ; ber 9)rei^, < pre-
tium ; ber 9)unft, < punctum. Neuter nouns in -at : ba^ ^onfula't, < con-
sulatiis ; \>0i^ %oxma't, formatum or -us; \>a^ fRu^, < V. L. risma (f.) ; ba^
^reuj, < c/ruc{em) (f ).
2. Examples of nouns that have changed gender in analogy with Ger-
man words similar in meaning and ending : ber Biegelf < tegula ; ber
60 SYl^TAX OF THE GENDER. 164-
5)?armor, marmor, n., on account of ber (Stein (see 160, 1) ; ber ^orper, <
c&iyus, n. ; ber ^aba'ijcr, < cadaveVy n., on account of ber Seib, ber 2eic^^
nam, and the many masculines in -er; bie 3^uinmer, < numeruSy since bie
3a^l» ©uropa, ©parta, 5lt^en, Zx^sk, now all neuter (see 160, 3}.
3. Nouns in -arium, -orium, -erium^ -arCy became all masculine in
analogy with H. G. words in -er, < cere < ari : ber Sllta'r, < altare ; ber
teller, < cellarium ; ber 5)faUer, < psalterium ; ber SSet^er, < O. H. G.
wiwdri < vivarium ; ber ^iafkx, < It. piasira, f., < V. L. plastrum.
4. Neuter nouns, whose plural ended in -a in Gr. or L., became
feminine in German from analogy with feminines in -e, < dy and also
through Romance influence : bie S5iBel, < hiblion, V. L. bibUa ; bie Drgel,
< orgamim, -a ; bie ^^frunbe, < V. L. provenda (pi.) ; bie 8tubie, <
studium ; bie '^xmxtt < prcemivm.
5. Words in -a'ge, masculine and feminine in French, are all feminine
in G., e. g., bie SBaga'ge, bie SSlama'ge, bie Soura'ge, etc. ^ie Sd)rift, < scrip-
turn, bie 3^ac^t, < pactum, are due to analogy with G. nouns in -t, viz.,
bie ^va(^t, <Si(|t, (B^x6)t, ^a6^U etc.
Gender of compound nouns.
164. Compound nouns have the gender of the last noun :
ter ^Sirnbaum, t)ie §auotl)ur, ra^ ©(^il^er^au^, t)a^ grauenaimmer
(lady).
Exceptions : a. Many compounds with -mut : bie S)entut, bie 3Be^mut,
bie (Banftmut; but ber ^oc^mut, ber ?5reimut, etc. They are, however, only
seeming exceptions, -mut going back to compounds with O. H. G. and
M H. G. -muoty m., and -muoti, f. This has given rise to the double
gender of the same noun : 0. H. G. 7i6hmuoti, f. only, but M. H. G.
hochmuete, liocJimuoty f., and liochmuot, m. ; bie X)emut/ < M. H. G.
diemuete, diemuoty always feminine: ber ^leinntut, bie 5lnmut, bie ©ropmut;
also ber ©ropmut; always ber |)0(^mut» For 5lrmut, which is no compound
with -mut, see 511, 2, a.
1). ^tT 5I6f(^eu seems an exception, because bie ©c^eu is old and more
common than ber <S(^eu.
c. Names of cities and places are neuter even if ending in nouns of
different gender : '^Oi^ fd^cJne ^.imBiirg, ^Giine^urg, Olnnabcrg, etc. ; but bie 3Bart^
l&urg, ^^errenburg, because these are castles, = SBurgen, f., and not towns.
168] COKCOED OF GEKDEES. 61
d. !Der 5D'?ittn)Dc^ (2Bo(^e, f.) appears by the side of the legitimate bie
WlxXiXOQ^, already in M. H. G. It lias followed the other days of the
week, which are all masculine. (See 160, 1).
e. !I)ie 3litttr)Drt had double gender in 0. H. G., but the neuter was
more common. Luther has still bie and ba^ 3lttttt)ort,
CONCOKD OF GENDERS.
165. This subject can be best treated under the head of
concords as between noun and adjective, noun and pronoun,
subject and predicate. The general rule that adjectives and
pronouns take the grammatical gender of the noun to which
they refer is only set aside when the grammatical gender does
not coincide with the sex. In that case the pronoun or adjec-
tive can take the natural gender.
166. ?!??ab(^en, 9J?agbIetn, 2Bei&, f^rciulein admit of this construction ac-
cording to the sense, most commonly ; not so, ^inb, i^rauenjtmnter, 5)^ann*
lein, ©M)nlem, and the other diminutives : Unb f^neE tt)ar i^re (S^ur ijerlorenr
foklb ba^ 3)?abd)en Slbfc^ieb na'^m (Sch.)- 3ene0 5Hab($en \^^^, ba^ ijertnekne,
bie bu gema^It ^ajl (H. and D., IV. 210). !I)u geknebeiete unter ben 2BetBern(B.).
<Sie un(^Iu(flic^er» (Sie unglucflic^e, you unhappy man, woman. The adjective
therefore also agrees with the sex.
i^raulein and the diminutives of names of females have «bte" sometimes
in colloquial language : bie ^rciulctn, bie ®op^te'd)en, bie 3)ortd^en (Dorothy).
But „3^re ^5raulettt 3:od)ter" is quite common and correct : 3^re f^rciukin
3;o^ter . . . ttjar au^gelaffen (unrestrained) (G.).
167. Names in the predicate, not capable of forming a feminine from
a masculine, like ^el^rerin < ;2e^rer, S5orfle^ertn < 35orfle^er, of course retain
the grammatical gender, no matter what the sex of the subject : ©ie
warb ♦ . ♦ %\t\6) nttt Befonberer 3Id)tuncj da ©aft Be^anbelt (G.). But even pre-
dicate nouns capable of forming a feminine by suffix if used in the ab-
stract sense, and not the personal, form an exception, e. g., ^err, ^ix^tx fein
or merben, " to be or become master of." 2)entt ici^ Mtt euer ^onig (Sch.).
©ie mar ber SJer'brec^er (id.).
168. The neuter pronouns (e^, {ete^, ba^, aHeg, etc.) may refer
to a masc. or fem. noun, even to the plural and to a masc. and
62 SYNTAX OF NUMBER. [169-
fern, noun together : (Bie fommen ^eri^or ein S3eiB ba, ein ^Wann
. ♦ , fa^ re:lt nun,e^ mid ftd) erge^en fogleic^, t)te ^noi^el gur 3fluttt'e,
= they stretch their bones for the dance, eager to enjoy them-
selves (in Goethe's „^otentana"). 5llle^ rennet, rettet, pd)tet (Sch.).
X)a ma^ t)enn ©d^mer^ nnt ®enn§, ®e(tngen nnt Sertrng mit etnanter
we(^feln mie e^ !ann (F. 1756-8). (Stillfcfctreigent) Morten fte (three
persons) ju, innem jete^ in ftc^ felbfl ^uritdfe^^rte (G.).
169. When adjectives are used substantively, the mascu-
line and feminine denote sex, the neuter an abstract noun or
thing : ^er ®utt, tie (Bnk, the good man, woman; ta^ ®uk, the
good (abstract), ^omm^ ^nab, o ^olbe ®(^bne, unb 'otxla^ bein
ftolae^ ®^lo§ (Sch.). 5)u ^a\t iperrli(^e^ i^oUbrat^t (id.). X)ai3 Sofe,
bag i(^ nic|t n?ill, bag t^ue icfe (B.).
SYNTAX OF SINGULAR AND PLURAL.
170. Names of persons and materials can take a plural
only when they denote several persons, species, or kinds, viz.,
Die §einricbe, Ut Sert^ag, bie Die (the various kinds of oil), bie
©rafer, Ht %tttt, bie @alge»
171. Abstract nouns do not as a rule admit of a plural,
but as in English the plurals of such nouns were once
quite common, viz., ^Ulinne, ®nat)e, SSonne, §ulb, S^re* Some
of these plurals are left in certain phrases: in S^ren, ^u (S^ren;
i)on (55otteg (Snaben ; px (Scbulben lommen (affen, to be guilty of;
®it>. (13naben ; bie §errfcf)aften» Compare Eng. thanks, loves (in
Shakspere), favors, regards.
172. To the sg. -mam in composition corresponds often -leutc, pi.
only, which, in sense really corresponds to 9)Jenf(^, 5j)?enf(^en, without regard
to sex. Examples : (Sbelmann — ©beHeute, gentry ; ^Ganbmann, peasant, —
lOanbleute, country folk : (£^emann, married man, — (S^elcute, married people ;
but the pi (S^emcinner means " married men " ; ^u^rmann — f^u^rleute, driv-
ers, carters ; ^aufmann — ^aufleute, merchants, etc. But 23iebermann, hon-
177] SYNTAX OF SINGULAR AND PLURAL. 63
est man ; (S^renmann, man of honor ; (Staat^mann, and a lew more, form
only the regular plural in -er»
173. For certain nouns which form no plural, plural compounds are
used, some of which have also a singular. — E.g. :
\iCi^ %tVitx
bie i^euer^Briittflc
ber Slob
bie Slobeafdttc
ber mi
bie Olatfd^ldgc
ber Dan!
bie S)an!raptt9en
174. Nouns only used in the plural are :
a. Diseases : 23lattertt; SJ^aferit, Oioteln*
h. Certain dates : Djlerm ^Jftngjlenr 2Bei^na(^ten, ^erien, ^aften, iit 2Bo(^ett
= in childbed.
c. Names of relationship : ©Item; ©e^ritber, brothers, as ©ebriiber ©rimittf
the brothers Grimm, but generally only in the names of firms ; ®efd)tt)ifter,
brothers and sisters, rarely in the sg. — brother and sister ; other nouns
as ©eftlbe, Binfen, a3rieff(^aften, ©infitnfte, etc.
175. Masc. and neuter nouns denoting quantity, weight,
extent, preceded by numerals, stand in the singular, but fern,
nouns (except SKarf) in the plural as in Eng., e.g,, 6 ®la^ 23ier,
10 ga§ SCein; „att bie treimal ^untierttaufent) ?iKann" (Song of Prince
Eugene), 5 gu§ tief, 3 ^ar! 70 5)fenntg(e), 70 x 7 = ftebenaig
md fte^en mal (B.). Feminines : 3 5[ReiIen breit, 10 §(af(^en ^^xi^
mixi, 12 ©tutt^en^ The coins, ba^ 3al)r, ber ^onat, ©c^ritt gener-
ally stand in the plural, e, g,, 50 5)fenntge ma(^en 5 ®rof(^en,
3 Dufatett, 20 @^rttte lang; yet also sing., „90 3a^r— geMdft gum
Sobe"; 7 mmai{t) alt; but gefen mart
176. In older German the plural was used in all genders just as in
Enor. That the singular was ever used came from the analogy of masc.
nouns and " diu mare" with the neuter nouns, in all of which sing, and
pi. would not be distinguished. See 431, 2. The fem. of the n-declen-
sion never followed this analogy. For ^ann see 59. Compare the Eng.
** a ten-year-old boy," now colloquial. ** Year " is an old plural just like
3a^r. In the D. pi. the coins, etc. , in 175 almost always have en»
177. Notice the use of the singular in German for English plural in
64 SYNTAX OF THE CASES. [178-
such phrases as : unter bem ijterten «nb fitnften ©rabe norblic^er 33reite (Hu.) ;
ber erfle unb ber fiinfte ^m tvurbe(n) gefungen; ble brei (Sd)uler miiffen jur ©trafe
bte ^anb auf ben SfWunb legcn; 'oitU ^akn ba^ ^^ekn ijerloren, many lives were
lost or many lost their lives.
SYNTAX OF THE CASES.
Nominative.
178. The nominative is the case of the subject and of
direct address: 9)letn greunl), tie ^ntm ter SSerciangen^eit ftnD nn^
tin Suc^ tttit fteten Siegeln (F. 575-6). ^it cn&j, $err Doctor, au
[pa^tereit ifl e^^renijoll unt) ift Oeioinn (F. 941). Absolute N. 297.
179. Neuter verbs and verbs in the passive voice which
govern two accusatives in the active, are construed with a
predicate nominative. See 270.
Such are : 1. (Seitt, ti?erben, Heiben, biinfen, fd^etnen, l^ei^en (to be called),
gelten, n?a^fen, jlerkn, etc.: T)t^ ^tmmel^ f^iigungen ftnb immer bie kjlen (Le.).
SlUer ^ob mxh neue^ Seben (He.), ©r mxb ein grofer 5^rinj M^ an fein (Snbe
fc^einen (Sch.). 2)a^ atlein mad)t fc^on ben SSeifen, ber ftc^ jebcr biinft ju fem(Le.).
These verbs denote a state or transition. Preceded by aU the construc-
tion may be called an apposition : ^(tein er jlarb al^ (£§ri)l (F. 2953). 3^
fomme aU ©efanbter be^ ©ertd^t^ (Sch.). Sr gilt aU ein Teid)er ?D^ann, = He
passes for . . .
2. Verbs of calling, thinking, making, choosing, scolding, viz.,
^enannt, gebac^t, angefe^en, o^tma^t, betrad^tet, ^miit^lt, 9efcl)Dltcn tverbcn, and
others: SBil^elm i)on Dranien tt>trb ber ©c^melger genannt, SStl^elm ijon*bef
^iJormanbie, ber (Sroberer. ©r tDarb ein !Dieb gefi^olten, aia ein 3;augemd^t(3
betra(|tet» 3(^ barf mi^ nic^t be^ &lMt^ ;2ieMin9 Welten (Korner).
Genitive.
180. The genitive is used chiefly as the complement of
nouns and adjectives, bat also of the verb (object). The gen-
itive with nouns expresses the most varied relations. The
principal ones are briefly given and illustrated below. Ger-
man does not differ from other languages.
181] SYNTAX OF THE CASES — GENITIVE. 65
1. G. of origin, cause, autliorsliip, relationsliip : ©a^ 2Bunbcr i]! be^
©laubene Uel))le^ ttnb (F. 766). ©oet^e^ %<x\x^. 2)ie ^riid^te be^ S3aume^*
2. Subjective G.: X)te Stebc ©otte^r tt)el($e p^cr ifl benn aHe S^ernunft (B.).
®er ©efang ber ^ogeU !l)a« tjl bcr ^amjjf ber 3?ferbe itnb gif(i)e (Hu.).
3. Objective G.: I^er ^Inblid biefer ®egenb (Hu.). !Dte Srjtnbung ber S3u(^^
brucEerfunjl,
The personal pronoun is rarely found in this construction. Instead of
«bie £tek feiner" stands bie £ie6e ju i^m, gegen i^n.
4 Possessive G : De^ f^atum^ unftc^tbare ^anb (Sch.). Der Garten be^
tontg^. "Dod^ beffer ijl'^, t^r faUt in ©otteg ^anb alC in (bie) ber S^enfc^en (Sch.).
Sometimes the possessive pronoun is put after the G. in colloquial lan^
guage. Lessing has it several times : !Da^ f(^ien ber alten 5lrti)lett i^i
®efd)ma(f nid^t ju fetn (Le.). See 242, 2.
5. G. of quality oT characteristic: !Der SimgHng eblen ®efu|Ie^ (H. and
D., IV. 66).
This G. and the preceding stand also in the predicate after neuter
verbs : 8eltg jtnb, bie reined ^erjen^ ftnb (B.). ©tner SO'Jeinung fetn; be^ Slobe^
fetn. Sin folc^er Safferjlanb war alfo e i n e ^ 5llterC mtt ben ro^en 2)en!malern
ntenfc^Iic^en 5t'unftflei§e^ (Hu.).
6. Appositive or specifying G.: Der i^e^ler be«3 ^Irgnjo^n^; ba^ iGajler ber
2;runffu(^t; bie (Bimbe ber Unban!6arfett* ^ax\ er|ieU ben SSeinamen be^ ®ro§en.
This G. and that of characteristic are frequently supplanted by ijon +
Dative : Sine (£td)e ijon ^o^em Sllter »)urbe »om S5U|e getroffen* ^kh ijon (einem)
SSebienten; 3:eufel »on SBeibe (Le.). See Prepositions, 303, 15.
7. Partitive G., dependent upon nouns of quantity, weight, measure;
with numerals, various pronouns ; comparative and superlative. Ex. :
St^ut nii^to (= no matter). Sr (ber 5)?antel) t)at ber Slropfen nte^r (Le.). 9?unt)er
Sefd^etben^eit genug (id.). !Dem reid^te fte ber ®aben kfie, ber S3tumen aHerfd^onfle
bar (Sch.). ^itnf nnfer^ Drben^ njaren fc^on . ♦ ♦ be^ fii^nen 5Wute^ Dpfer
njorben (id.). Safjl ntir ben ^e|!en SBed^er 3Bein6 in ))urem ®olbe retc^en (G.). 2)u
fd^Iugft bt(^ bur^ mtt ^unbert ac^tjtg Mam hux^ i^^rer Slaufenb (Sch.). Unfer etner
fann ft(^ ba^ ni^t teiften, = ** One like (of) us cannot afford that."
181. In the spoken language and also in the classics (excepting
poetry) this partitive G. has passed into mere apposition ; especially
after nouns of weight, measure ; after numerals ; after nt^t^, nt^t, and
the indefinite pronouns. Ex. : Sin 9Jfunb %i)tt ; brei (Sc^effel ^orn» Stma^
<Sd)one^, ntd)t^ S3ofe^, 'old ®ute^ are no longer felt as genitives. The adjec-
66 SYNTAX OF THE CASES— GENITIVE. [182-
tive used as noun is governed independently of the pronoun or numeral.
Ex. : Beigt ha^ ijerfdlfd^te fdiatt mijt, man tuoEe ju nid)t$ ®utem un^ ijer^inben ?
(Sch.). !Daa fonnte ju etwa^ ©d)re(flid^em fit^ren (id.). From Luther to Lessing
this G. is still quite frequent, and it still remains in certain phrases, e. g.,
^ier ijl meine^ SSleiOen^ nic^t, " I cannot stay here." fSid ^uf|et)en^ mad)en,
"to make much ado." SBenn t^ nttt S^Jenfc^en^ unb mit SttgeljuttQcn rebete unb
pttc ber 2ie6e ntc^t * ♦ ♦ (B.), literally "and had nought of charity." It is
supplanted by ijott/ (lU^, itnter + D. See Prepositions, 303. SSer »on m^,
unter un^ ?
Genitive Dependent upon Adjectives.
182. It stands after adjectives denoting possession and
interest or lack and want; fulness or emptiness; knowledge or
ignorance; desire or disgust; guilt or innocence; e. g., fa^tg,
^a^a}t, ftc^er, teil^afttg, unfa^tg ; kr, *Iog ; *»on, *fatt, leer, quitt,
^erluftig; fun^ig, *getDa^r, utt!unt)ig; *mute, Begterig; fc^ultig, Iet)tg,
etc. Ex.: T)e0 (angen S)alM mfee (Bii.). "De^ SeiBeg Mft tu ler^tg
(id.). X!e^ ®ertd)t^ fd^ulttg (B.). (^;engfte) Begterig be^ ®tallei3 (H.
and D., VI. 313). (Bit fmt) 'ooU fiigen 5Cein^ (B.). Du Bift e5 t)0(^
gufrieten, diitkx ? (Le.).
183. The adjectives marked * and others not given admit also of
the accusative. In the last illustration „e^" was felt as A., and therefore
wba^" is much more common. See Pronouns, 199, 2. E. g., 3d) Mn ba^
fatt, miibe, "I have enough of it," " am tired of it."
The prepositions ttad^, ijOH; etc., + D. frequently supplant the geni-
tive, e.g., wkgierig m^ bcm <StaEe" would be commoner; »ott, rein fein »on
ettt)a^.
Genitive after Verbs.
184. It may stand as nearer object, as remoter object, and
adverbially.
As direct object after verbs with meanings similar to the
adjectives in 182; also ac^ten, marten, barren, fpotten, Iad)en, f(^onen
gentef en, fterBen, }jflegen, tenfen, ijergeffen, lo^nen, i?erfe^ten, Braud^en,
and others.
187] SYNTAX OF THE CASES — GENITIVE. 67
Ex. : 1>ai IBergtf memtti(^t» 3d) benfe betn (G-.). iJunger^ jlerBen. 2)a^ lol^nt
ftd^ ber Mxi^t md)t, = It is not worth the trouble. S^ ftnb nii^t allc fret bie
i^rer tetten fpotten (Le.). ©ekauc^t ber Beit, [te ge^t fo f(|nett ijon ^innen (F. 1908).
185. After verbs governing an A. of the person the G. of
the thing stands as remoter object, such as judicial verbs, those
with privative meaning, verbs of emotion ; after many reflexive
verbs with meanings similar to the adjectives in 182, e,g., gei^en,
ijerllagenj'rcifpre^en, bef(^u(r?tgen, berauben, entlaben, entlaffen, entbinten,
iiber^eben; i^erfic^ern, be(el)ren, ma^nen, and others ; fid) freuen, h^k^
nm, erinnern, fc^amen, beflci^en, erfrec^en, ft(^ tne^ren*
Ex. ; ©ntlafft tttid^ meiner Sl^nen^jrobe, i(^ iriU eud^ eurer tt)teberum entlaffen
(Le.). 2Ber fann mi^ einer ©iinbe jeil^en ? (B.). Semanb be^ Sanbes^ ijermeifen ;
eine^ ^txhn^^tn^ anflagen, iiberful^ren, etc. (Sntfc^Iage bi^ aller f(^n)arjen ®ebanfen
(Le.). X)u barfjl bic^ beiner SSa^l ni($t fd^amen (Sch.). But many of these gen-
itives are supplanted by anff iiber + A., and by A. alone.
186. Certain impersonal verbs expressing feelings, which
are construed with the A. of the person feeling and with the
G. of the cause and object of the feehng.
Ex. : (£a e!elt mt(|, t^ rent, erbarmt, jammert, ijerbriegt mt(^ ; e(3 lo^nt jt(|*
^arob erbarmt ben |)trten be^ alten ^o^en ^mn (Uh.). Unb ba er ba^ 35ol! fal^e,
{amnterte t^n beffelMgen (B.). But the nominative supplants here the A. of
the person, and the A. the G. in the spoken language as a rule; „e^" was
again felt as A. See 183. Ex.: 2)a^ ^ereut mi($, bauert mi(§» 2)er ©erec^te
erbarmt ftd^ feinee SSteJe^ (B.).
Adverbial Genitive.
187. It expresses place, time, manner, and other adverbial
relations.
Ex.: Place: linfer ^anb, red^ter f)anb, aller Drten, "everywhere." 3^
moc^te (it is not likely that . . .) biefe^ SBege^ fobalb ntc^t n?ieber fommen (Le.).
Time : biefer Za^t, be^ 5lbenbi3, M^ Wtoxg,tn^ in ber ^^rit^e."
Manner: trocfnen i^u^e^, dry-shod; |le()enben ^u§e^r immediately; ijer^
niinfttger 2Beife, reasonably. (Bie famen un^errid^teter <Ba<i)t lUxM, they re-
turned without having accomplished their object.
68 SYNTAX OF THE CASES— DATIVE. [188-
A large number of these genitives have passed into adverbs, e. g., flug^;
For genitive after Prepositions, see 302.
Genitive in Exclamations.
188. Interjections are followed by a genitive only when it
denotes the cause or occasion of the exclamation. 5Bol)l and
tre^(e) have often a dative of the person and a genitive of cause
or origin: D t^e^ gran^ofcn, ter feinen Scrftan^, btefe^ ju iikrlegen,
!etn iperj tiefe^ ju fii^Ien ge^abt \)OiX (Le.). D t)e^ @lu(llid)en, t)em e^
ijergonitt ift, ei n e 2uft mit eucb 3U atmen (Sch.).
Dative.
189. It is the case of the indirect object, less remote than
the genitive. The nearer object can also stand in the dative,
but is more remote than the nearer object (the direct one) in
the accusative.
190. The dative stands as nearer object after intransitive
verbs denoting: 1, approach and removal, similarity and dis-
similarity; 2, pleasure and displeasure; 3, advantage and dis-
advantage; 4, command and obedience; 5, yielding and re-
sistance ; Q, belonging to, agreement, trust, etc. A large
number of these verbs are compounds, viz. , those with ent-,
^er-, oA-, an-, auf-, Bet-, tin-, mx^-, nad^-, ^or-, i?oran-, it>i^er-
JU-, and those with noun, adjective, or adverb: leiD t^un, nJO^l^
mollen, fauer n^ert^cn, guftatten !ommen, mx^ madden, gu tetl n?ert)en, ba^
^^ort terpen, "to defend,'" etc. 1, na^en, nad^ge^^en, begegnen,
gleid)ett, d^neln, pfel)en, entfprccfcon, feWen, entgekn, naifte^en; 2,
gefat(en,tan!en, geniigen, Bel)ac|en, l)uli:igen, tnigfallen, fc^metdjeln, laffen
(to look), i^ro^en, grollen, fludjen; 3, ^elfen, nii^en, ^ienen, betfte^en,
frommen, m^jxtn, fc^aten; 4, gebieten, Befe^k«/P^^«/9^^^^^^J^/f'^^3^^;
5, treid)en, triUfa^ren, miterfte^en, ttJtterftreBen, tro^en ; 6, antmorten,
ernjiet)em, gefebren, etgnen, kiftimmen, auret)en, trauen, glauben, ux<^
trauen*
194] SYNTAX OF THE CASES — -DATIYE. 69
Ex. : ^e^ ;0e6en« ungemifc^te greube waxh feinem ©terblic^ett ju teil (Sch.).
©traflofe ^rei^eit fpric^t ben ©Uten ^o^n (id.). X)u rebefl i^m ba^ 2Bort, anftatt
il)n anjuflagen (id.). !Dae @te|en n)trb it^m \antx, It is hard work for him to
stand. 1. 2)u glet(^|l bem ®et|l, ben bu kgretf|l; ni(^t mir (F. 512). Da^ jn)ing|l
bu t^r (ber ^ainx) nic^t a5 mit |)ebeln unb mit <S(^rauBen (F. 675). 2. (Sinem
SBirte ld§t nid)t^ itbler aU 9^eugterbe (Le.), Nothing looks worse in a host than
curiosity. <Bo flu(^^ id) aUnn, toa^ bie ©eele mit ^od^ unb ©aufeln^cr! umfpannt
(F. 1587). 2)er Sanbijogt QvoUte bem 3:eII. 3. (Sie) ti)e|ret ben ^naben, she
restrains the boys (Sch.). 2)er ^nappe folgt bem 9fiitter. ®ott ^ilft benen, bie
ft(^ felkr ^elfen* 4. (SoE i(^ ge^ori^en jenem 2)ran9 ? (F. 631). 2)u folgj! mir
boc^ Mb na^ (Sch.). ©e^orfl bu bir ? (id.). 5. Unb bie ©ebilbe ber 5?ad)t \Dei($en
bem tagenben 2xd)t (id.). 2Bo:^l mi^i bu, ba§ id^ beinem Born ntd)t tro^e (id.). 6.
Slraue, fc^aue t»em. S[Bem eipet ®ott (Le.), To whom does God belong, =
Who possesses him exclusively ? Compound verbs : 3^ |abe bir ni(^t
nac^gejleUt (F. 1426). ©e^r gem fte^t ^axh^ bem gJiini'fter nac^ (Sch.). !£)ie
^onigin fa^ bem ^ampfe ju (id.).
191. After transitive verbs the indirect object stands in
the dative and the direct in the accusative (see 198): 5)eri)utle
mir ta^ iroi]enDe ©eDraugc (F. 61). Da^ 9Kenf(^enre(^t, t)a^ tl}m
5^atur ^ergonnt (F. 136).
192. A dative still farther removed from the verb is the
ethical dative, or dative of interest (on the part of the speaker
or hearer). It is generally a personal pronoun.
Ex.: ®e^t mir, ni^t^ tueiter baijon (Sch.), "Go, I tell you, no more of
that." Wix m ^te6e, for love of me. 3|m ju (S^ren. (8ie) jinb bir gar
Icrfere, leic^te ©efeKen (Sch.). T>k U^x fc^lcigt feinem ®lucfltd)en (id.).
193. After impersonal verbs: e5 al)nt, MkU, ddt, ^tl)t, fcMt,
(;ekid)t, e^ graut, graufet, gelingt, Itegt (mir) an dwa^, fommt (mir auf
ttwa^) an, fd^au^ert, f^trin^dt, traitmt, ^kmt, and many verbs in
190 can be counted here : T)em 35ater ^raufet^^ (G.). S^ Itegt
mir i^iet taran, I care much for it. X)em ^aifer tvarb'^^ fauer bei
W wttb 6ei ^alte (Bu.).
Dative after Adjectives.
194. These have meanings similar to the verbs in 190,
e, g., angencto, al)nlid), eigcn, fcinb, folgfam, Henftkr, gnatig, t)oIi^,
70 SYNTAX OF THE CASES — DATIVE. [195-
ttad)teilig, i^erfcun^en, autra^li^* Ex.: I^asJ f!e|t i^m al)nlid^ =
that's like him. 3(u(^ mar ^er ^Infang tl)ren Siinf^en l)olD (Sch.).
"Lk meiften fint) mix jugetfcan (id.), "devoted."
195. Substitution of preposition + case, both after verbs
and adjectives.
%m, auff an, gegen, iikr + accusative, ntit and ijon + dative may replace
the dative : 3^ jiirtte auf btc^, i(^ glauOe an hi6^, ijertraue auf i^n; ^in freunbll(5&
gegen bic Strmen. 2)er Qlnjug (suit) ift fe^r palTenb fiir bid), etc.
196. Verbs with unsettled constructions.
With a number of verbs usage is either unsettled or the classics still
show two cases, while the spoken language has settled upon one, e. g.,
now only e^ baud)t mix, but e^ biinft mic^, classics have D. or A. after either,
©laukn with D. only, or an + A.; but F. 3438: 3d) glaub' i§n (®ott) md)t,
S^ efelt mir and mi(^. 3)lan beja'^lt ben ^ned)t (person), ba^ 33rot (thing), bem
SScider ba^ S3rot. 3(^ rufe bir, I call out to you ; ic^ rufe bid^, I call you, etc.
197. The few reflexive verbs after which the reflexive pro-
noun stands in the dative are really transitive verbs, and the
pronoun is the indirect object: Sr biltet fic^ etma^ ein, " he imag-
ines sometiiing," "is conceited." 3d? ^^^H niir fc^meid)eltt (Le.);
but see 190, sub 2: 3^^ ^^n!e mir bie ©ac^e fo.
ACCUSATDTE.
198. The accusative is the case of the direct object after
transitive verbs, including many inseparable compounds of
intransitive verbs with 6e-, ent-, tx-, ^tx-, itx-, Duri^-, l)inter-;
liber-, wnter- urn- ijott- tiJte^er-; such as Befa^ren, Befol^en, Be;?
feu(^ten, cntfraften, entfd^ettien, erfa^ren, erftnben, ijerfac^en, ^ertreiben,
jerftreuen, rur(^fe'geln, Mnterge'^en, iikrfe'^en, umge'ben, ^ollki'ngen,
mieber^o'Ien.
Ex.: %x fe^t etnen ^JJ^ann n?te anbere me^r (F. 1874). S^crad^te mtr SJernitnft
unb 3[Bif7enfd)aft (F. 1851). t)k OJitkn l)af*en mx^ vertriekn (Folk-song). (Soof
^at bte 5Belt umfcgelt. S3. Sta^Ior ^at ben f^aitf! iiBerfe^t.
199. Two accusatives may stand, one of the person and
one of the thing, after verbs meaning to ask for, to inquire,
201] SYl^TAX OF THE CASES— ACCUSATIVE. 71
teach, to cause to do a thing or have a thing done, and simi-
lar ones, e.g., fragen, le^^ren, {affen, Htten* Ex.: 28er le^rte M(^
tiefe gemaltlgen 2Corte ? (Le.) Se:^re mid) t^un na(ft tieinem 5Bo^(^
cjefallen (B.) (t^un = second ace). SSoHen ®ie ben Slrjt nid)t
fommen lajfen ?
1. After fragen, Mtten, uberreben, kreben, the two accusatives stand, as a
rule, only when the accusative of the thing is a neuter pronoun, e. g., x^
Vim, frage bic^ etma^, xd^X^, ijieL If the pronoun is lacking, then fragen
m^ + D., bitten urn + A., itberrcben ijon or ju + D. or the G. without prep-
osition is the prevailing construction : ^afl bu m6) i|m gefragt ? 3c^ ^abe i^tt
barum gebeten»
Siigen ftrafen, SBunber ne^men govern an A. of the person : ^a^ nimmt
mi(^ SBunber, " I wonder at that."
2. But these pronouns, baS, nic^tS, wiel, stand for old genitives which were felt as
accusatives. The construction was : 2Bunt>er nimmt mic^ be§ or beffen, wonder seizes
me on that account. (See 186.) Sftgen is probably a G. of cause : ^emanb tregen ber
Sugen fti-aten. Sernen for Ier)ven, though found in Goethe, is wrong.
200. Notice a choice of construction in certain cases, when
the personal object is further defined by another case or prep-
osition and case. The verbs that concern us here are such as
fdjlagen, treffen, treten, ftec^en, and similar ones.
1. Dative of the person and accusative of the affected part:
3c^ ii^af^e mir tie S^^imlt or meine ^anbe*
2. Dative of the person and preposition + A. : 3(^ h'ete t^m
auf ben gu^, fc^Iagc i^m in'g %t\x6^i.
3. Accusative of the person and preposition + A. : SSir fdjlagert
i^en geint auf'^ §au|jt. SCnr treten bie ©djlange anf ben ^opf. The
choice is between 2 and 3. But 2 is preferable after intran-
sitive verbs; 3 after transitives.
201. These accusatives are both object-accusatives, but
after verbs meaning to name, scold, regarding, and others of
similar meaning, the second accusative is a predicate or facti-
tive accusative, while the first is direct object, e, g., after nennen,
fd^elten, f^lmpfen, glauben, taufen, ^cigen (trans.).
72 SYKTAX OF THE CASES — ACCUSATIVE. [202-
Ex. : 3n tiefiler <Btdt fc^merjt m\^ ber (Spott ber ^remblinge, bie un^ ben
Sauernabel fc^elten, " who call us by the nickname of ' peasant nobility ' "
(Sch.). Die Zxtm . . , i\t icbcm SDienfc^en mt ber mdjftt SBlut^freunb, al^ U)ren
9fiac^er fii^lt er fic^ geboren (id.), ^o^ fuf)k ic$ mi(^ benfelben/ ber i^ toax (id.).
3d& ad^te i^n al(^ einen S^renmann.
202. 1. After laffert + fein and werben a predicate A. by attraction is
found instead of the predicate nominative, but the latter is the prefera-
ble construction, e, g., Sag ba^ 33uc^lein beinen i^reunb feui (Gr.). Sa§ biefe ^atte
felbft hiXi ©c^aupta^ werben (Sch.).
2. For the passive construction, see 179, 2. The verbs in 199, 1,
may retain the accusative (pronoun), also le^ren. This would also admit
an accusative predicate noun in the passive : DasJ (Bc^limmjle, tt)a$ un^
i\)iberfa§rt, ba^ iverbcit tDtr ^om Slag (^ele^rt (Gr.). 3<^ ti^erbe ben J^anj gele|rt.
But it is best to avoid all these predicate accusatives. They sound
pedantic. Better say : 3i^ l)a6e 2;attjumerrid)t, S^an^ftunbc. 3ic^ tx)erbe immer
tvicbcr barna(^ Q^fragt, barum gektem
203. The inner or nearer object stands in the accusative
called the "cognate." The noun has the same meaning as
the verb. Its idea is generally included in the verb : Stnen
guten ^ampf ^abe x6ii gefampft (B.). (Sine @d)la(^t jWagen, feeige
2:l)ranen weinen, etc. ; Garten fptelen, @c^Itttf(^ul) laufen* ®ar fc^one
(Sptele fpieP id) mtt rir (G.).
204. Notice that the noun is sometimes replaced by an indefinite
pronoun, wa^, e^, ettivv etc. Compare Eng. " to lord it," the unclassical
"to come it over somebody." ^Ibcr bie Siferfu^t iiber Spanien gewann e^
bie^mal itber blefc politifi^e ©\)mpatT)ie (5?ch.). 1)ie hotter fatten e^ niit ben 2;apfer*=
jlen (id.) ; |i<^ wa^ red)te6 (yirec^te) laufen, fprtngen, \axi\zxi, '* to run, etc., a great
deal.'* Siigen (Ste ntir etned auf eigene ^tec^nung Por (Le.). Sd) fc^ma^e ein^ mit
(Le.). See also F. 3416.
205. After many impersonal verbs and some other verbs
the logical subject stands in the accusative (see 186). The
verbs denote states of the body and mind : e^ tiirftet, l}ungert,
f^ldfevt, wuntert, !rdn!t, tieitriegt mi6^.
Here belong also e^ gibt, e^ |at, e^ fe^t, e^ gilt : !DergIetc^ett (Btimmen gtbt^^
(Sch ), " There are such voices." ©^ ^at ®efa^r,tt)enn n?ir nid^t ge^en, '* There
2081 SYNTAX OF THE CASES — ACCUSATIYE. 73
is danger . . . ". (£s3 fe^t §tekf ^dnhd, Sc^lage, There is a fight, a quarrel
going on, somebody is being whipped. Comp. French U y a. See 236,4.
206. After reflexive verbs the pronoun generally stands in
the accusative : gntf^liege ^id), Sefinne ^id) n?o lu bift (Sch.).
But see 185 and 197.
Adverbial Accusative.
207. It denotes measure (amount), time, and place.
1, It denotes measure after verbs like miegcn, foften, gelten;
after adjectives like lang, Breit, l)od), a(t, mert, etc.
Ex.: Die S^u^e beine^ ^reunbe^ gilt e^, " is at stake " (Sch.). !Die ti|!e
tDtegt brei ^ilogramm, im\ Bentner, fitnf S^tii, etc. Die S3rii(fe ift me^rere 2;aufettb
gu§ lang, ^unbert fec^jtg ^od^ unb ad^tjig gug breit Da^ Dorf liegt eine ©tunbe (an
hour's walk) ijott ber (Stabt* ^riebri(^ ip einett '^al^en topf Qroper al^ Dietric^.
The usage as to the case of the person with „fDflen" is unsettled : Der
<S(^erj foflet m^ or mir m\ ®elb. Grimm's Dictionary favors the A.
2. It stands with verbs of motion to express the distance
and the way, the noun being often followed by an adverb.
Ex. : 3Bei(^e feinen ©d^ritt prucf- 3wei SBanberer fte'^t er bie ©trage jie|n
(Sch.). (£^ jte^t ein ^aufe ba^ ob're Sl^al |erab (Uh.). Der ^el^ roEte ben S3erg
^inab. ?0t;t leifen (S^ritten fc^U(^ er feinen bofen S©eg (Sch.).
The A. of measure and distance supplanted the G. of an older period ;
that denoting the way is old. The G. still occurs frequently. See 181.
208. The accusative of time denotes the duration and the
moment of an action. The former is often followed by an
adverb, (ang, turd), liber* Ex. : ^er 93ote fann ten ^lu^enHicf ^ier
fein (Sch,). (£r fc^lift ten ganjen ^Korgett* 2)u l^afl eg 3<i^i^^ Icmg
betai^t*
1. Compare the G. of time (see 187), which denotes a repetition of the
action or a custom. The A. denotes a definite point of time or fixed
period: (!£)er)(ie§ S3etftunb^ ^alten be^ 2}lorgen<3 9leid)(Sch.). Sonnaknbi3 S'^ac^^
mittag^ ^aben t»ir feine ©d^ule (= custom). S^Jci^fien 5DZittn)0(| ^aben it)ir feine
^^vXt. S^loc^ biefe 5^ac&t mu§ er flJlabrib i)erIa|Ten (Sch.). The G. denoting
duration of time is rarer now : ©in ®ift bag neun ganjer 3a^re baucrt (Le.).
This may be partitive G.
74 SY1S"TAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. [209-
Absolnte Accusative.
209. This is generally accompanied by an adverbial phrase,
and denotes that with which the subject is provided. Ex. : Qn
I^ion^^, tern X^rannen, fAlicb Wovo^, ten Dolc^ tm ©emante (Sch.).
<Sd^on ben ^aU mthib^t, tnkV x6^ auf meinem ^Wantel (Le.).
SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE.
210. The adjective may be used attributively, predica-
tively, and substantively: ber reic^e 5^a(^bar; ter 5^ad}bar ift reic^;
ber 3fteid)e*
Attributive Use of the Adjective.
211. Some adjectives are only or mostly used attributively,
as : 1, the superlatives and ordinals; 2, certain adjectives de-
rived from adverbs: ^teft^, ^ortig, feitbevig, In^S^crig, e,g,, bie ^iefige
3citun9, but not tie B^-'i^^^^^l ^f^ WH I ^j many adjectives in -tf4,
-lid) -en : norttfcb, irtifd), ta^l\6>, anfangli(^, enrltd^, (joffen, fetben,
ftlbern, glcifern; 4, the comparatives and superlatives in 76, 2.
1. If they do stand in the predicate, they must be inflected, and the
noun may be understood, e> g., bie ;Sicfcrung ill eine fiunbli(^e, not ftiinbli(^»
For the adjectives in -en and -em, ^on 4- noun is substituted, e.g., etn
S3e^er ijon purem ®olbc. But in poetry the adjective is found: 2)er @tul;l
i|l elfenbeinern (R.).
212. The attributive adjective is inflected and agrees with
its noun in gender, number, and case : W.\i filler ^oft m\^
frifdem (Sd)aum ^at er mid inol)! gena^;ret (XJh.). It may stand
uninflected, however: 1. Before a neuter noun in N. (and A.)
(very rarely before a masc. or fem.) : '^}unne ?QZutter ^ai mand
giiltm (S)emant) (G.). S^ ift eln putelnarrif(^ 3:ier (F. 1167). Fre-
quently in certain phrases like „bar ®elt)", *' cash " ; „anf gut
%\M\ Bare : (l)ro§ m^i^i m\^ ml Sift (Lu.). Xa^ 2llter \^ ein
^ofli(^ ?0^ann (G.); ,,freml nnt fremter @toff'' (F. 635.). 2. When
it stands after the noun, mainly in poetry; commonly after
coins, weights, and measures: Xer §auptmann fii^rtim ©d)ilt) tin
214] SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 75
3fto0lein rot ^on ®oIte nn)^ einen Sber mil^ (TJh.). Sin @(^n?arm ^m
®a\kn gro^ um Mn (Bii.). S^t^n gu^ rbeinifd^, fiinf ?>fun^ pmifd)*
In prose also, when the adjective or participle has adjuncts:
"tovt dn gutarttge^, gertttete^ §antel^i)ol!, fd^ii^elgent) »ott Un iippigen
grud)ten tint^ gefegneten gletpe^, trac^fam auf ®efe^e, tie feine 3Bot)l::^
t^ater it^aren (Sch.). 3. Of two adjectives the first stands unin-
flected in certain set phrases; when the two express one idea;
in poetry, very frequently in Schiller : "Lit grop^erjoglidj kt)ifcbe
3flegierung; t)a5 foniglid) ^reupifd^e B^^^^^"^^* SBel? tern, t)er an ten
n?toig alten §au^rat i^m rii^rt (Sch.). £:en falfd) ^errdterifc^en '^at
(id.). „3tt He meit unt» Breite 2Belt" (G.). Schiller has ^tranrig
pnftrer ^Irgiro^n"; „iT?eItItd) ettle $)o^eit"; „D ungliidfeltg jammer^ol^
ler Zag^^' ; „mit graufam tenfeltfc^er Suft/' etc.
1. Sauter, and generally eitcl, both in the sense of "pure," *' nothing
but," also the adj. in -er, 507, 2, are undeclined : 2)a^ ij^ lautcr Unftnn.
©ffet eitel unQcfciuert ^rot (B.). 2)er Joiner !Dom»
213. The attributive adjective is inflected weak after cer-
tain limiting words, viz., after the definite article and pronouns
declined like it; after ein, lein, and the possessives, excepting
the N. sg. of all genders and the A. sg. neut. and fern. Ex. :
ber gute ^Ipfelbaum (Uh.); ^ur gliidli(^en Stunt e ; p {enem frokn
%t\k; eine^ fdjonen ^aj}e^ ; an einem langen ^tjle (Uh.); fein griineg
^am (id.); eine arme Sauerin (N. and A. sg.); ein feit)ene^ ^(eit)
(N. and A. sg.).
214. The adjective is therefore declined strong, when not
uiiinfiected (see 218) and when not preceded by any of the
above Umiting words, mentioned in 213, e. g,, §oIte (Sefenfud^t,
fii^e^ $offen (Sch.). ©tumme fitter toter ©cba^e (Platen ?). Also
after the uninflected pronouns n?eld), foIc6, i)iel, menig, me^r, tixoa^,
nic^t^, and after uninflected numerals. Ex.: Sr o^i^i ^em treuen
^irten man^ Blanfe^ (Stiid (piece of money) ba^on (Uh.). 5l>eld)
reic^er §immel (G.). ©oli^ treffli^er ^Jlonard^ (Sch.) (see 216, 4;
221).
76 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. [215-
215. The syntactical distinction between strong and weak inflection of the adjec-
tive, though very old, is by no means clearly drawn even now. The oldest inflection
of the adjective is the so-called " uninflected," identical with the strong noun declen-
sion. When the pronominal endings spread over the adjective declension, forming
the present strong adjective declension, the adjective probably was still declined
strong even after a pronoun (ind. article). Of this there are traces from O. H. G. down
to the nth century. The u-declension of the adjective is a characteristic of the Ger-
manic languages. Having less distinctive and fewer endings than the strong, it is natural
that the adjective should be declined according to it, when preceded by a word which
had the strong endings. This has given rise to the syntactical distinction and to the
feeling that two strong forms should not stand side by side. When an adjective be-
came a substansive or was used as such, it was always inflected weak, with or without
article. This explains 221, 1. In Gothic the present participle and the comparatives
were always inflected weak. In O. H, G. appear only a few strong comparatives and
superlatives.
216. Unsettled usage as to strong and weak forms.
!♦ The strong genitive sg. m. and n. turned weak in the 17th cen-
tury, and this is now the prevailing form : w^o^e^ ^)l\it^" (Bii.); blut^gert
9{u^m^ (Uh.). „2Borte fii^eu ^and)^" (Sch.). The pronouns always remain
strong, except itntx, jeber, of which a weak form is rare, e. g., jeben ^olU
(Uh.) ; jenen Xa^^ (Bii.). This weakening is due to the feeling, that two
strong forms should not stand together. Se3 215, 217.
2. After personal pronouns the rule is strictly the strong form, as the
pronoun is not a limiting word. But as early as M. H, G. weak forms
begin to appear. Usage now favors : after tc|, bu, er (in address), mt^,
t)i(| only the strong form, e. g., «bu fiarfer ^oitig^fo^n" (Uh.) ; i^ armer 2)?ann;
after mir, bit mostly the strong form ; after wir, t^r the weak (if fern,
always), e,g., 2Ber nie fein SBrot mit 2;i)ranen ap ♦ ♦ ♦ ber fennt eu(^ nic^t, i|r
^immlift^en !Wac^te I (G.). In w^cgrit^t i^x, fd)cne 1)amen ! (G.), the comma
makes a difference. After un^ and zu^ (A.) strong and weak are equally
frequent. After itn^ and eud^ (D.) strong and weak coincide of course :
9J?an foHtc euc^ fd^Ied)te terle ^eijlecfen (arrest) laffett. (£ud^ faulen S3urf(^en ift je^t
ber SBrotfor^ fjo^er ge'^dngt.
3. In the vocative the rule now is strong form both in sg. and pi.,
e.g., Un^crfdydmter ! n)ennbt(^ jcmanb ge^ort ^dtte (G.). t)u, armer ®etft (Sh.).
The plural is still found weak, but rarely, as : ;Cieben ^reunbc, c^ ^ab Beffre
Beitcn aU bie unfern (Sch.).
In O. H. G. the weak form was the rule ; in M. H. G., the strong in
the sg.
4. After certain pronouns, pronominal adjectives, and indefinite
219] SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 77
numerals, sucli as folc^e, mX^t, citttge, etltc^e, aUe, manege, feine, and others,
there stands in the N. and A. pi. very frequently the strong form against
the rule, but rarely in the G. pi. This strong form is the older. Even
after biefe and jene strong adjectives may he found in the classics. Ex. :
©er SBlutttenpnbler ^at feme f^one Oiofen me^r. So ^a^ bu folc^e ^db^^^erfaulte
23irnett gefauft ? After the G. pi. imkx and breier the weak adjective is fre-
quent, hut in the spoken language these genitives are very rare : ber
^nfauf »on imi neuen ^aufern or imi neuer ^ciufer, and not jweier neuen (or -er)
^aufer*
217. If two or more adjectives hold the same relation to the noun,
they have the same inflection. If the second adjective, however, he more
closely related to the noun, forming a joint idea, then it usually stands
in weak form in G. and D., not in N. and A It can often he formed into
a compound noun, and has less accent than the first adjective : (£r traftierte
Utt^ mit fc^Iec^tem roten Seine (= 9flottt)ein); bie ^olgen ^lutiger l)itrgerlt(|en ^riege
{= SSurgerfriege).
1. After certain adjectives like folgenber, oBtger, ertr»a^nter, gebac^ter, etc.,
the second adjective, as a rule, is inflected weak in all cases : ©enannte^
unumjlop^e 9)rittjipf oMger anerfannte <Sa^,
The Adjective in the Predicate.
218. The predicate adjective is uninflected. If it stand
inflected in the predicate, the noun is supplied and the adjec-
tive is looked upon as attributive: Die ^raft ift fc^ti^ad), aClein Die
Suft ift gro^ (F. 2203). T)dn ®ef(^aft ift tin [(^mierigeS (supply
"one"); ,,De^ 9>oliaiften So^ ift fein gliitfli^e^."
The adjective (or participle) is also uninflected when it is
an appositional or factitive predicate : ffiir famen gliicfli(^ an*
^m, ta^ ftni? id) tumm (F. 961). IDer Olaube mac^t felig (B.).
219. Certain adjectives are only used predicatively. Some
of these are really nouns, like feint), frennt), ^eil, fi^a^e, not, nii^e,
fc^ulD* Others, originally adjectives or past participles, have
been restricted to this use, like ^abt^aft, ab^olt), getrojl, anftd)tig,
^erluftig* All of them have not yet become full adjectives;
and many, if with adjective form, are of late derivation :
abfpenftig, ab^oli?, abmentig, au^fint)ig, ^anbgemein* Ex.: Cttilie
78 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. [220-
fonnte Dem SJ^atc^en nic^t feint) fein (G.). Sin fd^oner 3Wann, cine
fd)one grau! ift ^er X1re!tor ^ludlid) genug^i^rer ^ab^aft ju n^erDen,
fo . ♦ ♦ (id.). S)ie ^nec^te mur^en ^antigemeim
1. In O. H. G. the adjective in the predicate is still inflected, though
not always. In M. H. G. it is rarely inflected. In N. H. G. roller and
^aibtx are stereotyped strong forms used for both numbers and all gen-
ders : ^ie 9^a(^t \\t ^al6er l;iu (coll.) ; ,,be^ ^ad)t^ urn ^alkr 3tt>Hf" (student
song). ^oUtx ©d^merjctt unb ^ranf^cit (B.).
Substantive Use of the Adjective.
220. The adjective when used as a noun is inflected ac-
cording to the rules already given for the adjective proper :
^Qlit ^leinem fangt man an, mit ®ro§em ^oxt man auf (Prov.). "Ln
(B6>mxt an meiner 2in!en (Korner). tit Srften merten ^ie Se^ten
fein (B.). For gender see 160, 3. No inflection is the rule in
certain set phrases: ®(eid) un^ (Sleid) gefedt fid) gem (Prov.).
3ung uni) 2llt, ®ro^ unt ^lein, 9lei4 unr 5Irm, Don ^lein an, t>on
3nng auf; also in the names of languages : Snglifc^, granjbftfcb ;
mein geliebte^^ Xeutf^ (F. 1223). SBie feei^t i^ie^ auf Stalienifc^ ? gr
^at i)on .^int) auf 9lorn?egif^ gefonnt. Also of colors: ®vm, 33(au.
221. Usage admits of many irregularities.
1. The weak form in the plural when no article precedes as ©ebtentett,
SSeamteUf ©(^onen, 3ungen, or rarely the strong form in the singular like
any feminine noun, invariable in the sg. : ber <Sc^one, instead of ber ^(^onen
(G. sg.). See 215.
2. The strong or weak plural after alle, ctntgc, tilx6^t, etc. ; aHe ©ele^rtc,
eiiiige ©efanbte.
3. After toa^, tttoa^, ijtel, etc., the weak form is rare. See 214.
4 If an adjective precede an adjective-substantive and is inflected
weak, the latter is of course weak ; if the adjective is inflected strong,
then the substantive may be either strong or weak. The latter form is
perhaps more common for the neuter, the strong certainly for the mascu-
line nouns-: ^m, fte (ba^ SBetb) i\i, o ^olbe ©c^onen, jur ©efeUigfeit gema^t (Gr.).
']Dk armett S^ewanbten ftnb gemo^^nlid) nlAt tinafommen. |)oc^gejleEte SBeamte finb
eutlafTcn. 2)er neue 23ebiente ^at ein angene^me^ 5tu§erc. See F. II. 6842.
223] SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 79
a. Do not confound baa 9Jefbt, law— ba^ 0Jec^te, the right thing ; ba^ ®ut,
property — bae ®ute, the good (abstract) ; (ba^) (Sc^marj, black (the color)
— 'ti^^ ^d^marje (the bull's eye of a target), etc.
Syntax of Comparative and Superlative.
222. These may be used just like the positive, only that
the superlative is never used predicatively, i, e,, uninflected,
excepting aUerlieBft, e, g,, tie SSIume ift allerliebft* If it stands in
the predicate, it is always weak, being preceded by the definite
article: !I;iefer Saum ift t)er ^cd)fte or t)icfer Saurn ift am l)bc^ftett.
These two should not be used indiscriminately, however, as
they too generally are in the spoken language. The first is
the strictly relative comparison; it can be strengthened by
aEer- e, g,, ber ^od^fte tjon alien, t)er allerl)b^fte* The prepositional
superlative should only be used when not so much the objects
themselves or different objects are to be compared, but the
same objects under different circumstances of time and place.
This is generally the " absolute '' superlative, expressed by an
adverbial phrase: "Ltx @tar!e ift (im mat^tigfteti allein (Sch.),
" The strong man is most powerful standing alone, unimpeded
by the weak." "Die Spfel fint) auf t)er fonnigen @eite U^ ©attend am
reifften. %U Soot^ 3Hicfcelieu fpielte, tvar bai5 2;^eater am ^oBften.
1. The ** relative" superlative is generally preceded by the definite
article, the *' absolute " has, as a rule, cin or no article. Goethe is very
fond of such an absolute superlative : (£in aHerUebile^ ^inb, a most lovely
child. S)ie^ beutet auf ein fpateflc^ (a very late) S'iaturereigni^ (G.)- Notice
also : xotxV^ bie SBenigjlcn fonnen (G.), because very few know how; ber
^itrft, bie <£ltern, bic ncueren (Bprad^cit, and other examples. They show
absolute comparison with the definite article. The absolute superlative
is best expressed by an adverb + adjective in the positive. The more
common adverbs used are : fe^r, rc(^t, ^0(^|1/ duger)!, iiberau^r e. g., eine ^oc^jl
aiiQcne^me Uberrafd^ung, ein rec^t bummer Sunge.
223. Any adjective can be compared by -er, -efl, except
those that are never used attributively (see 219) and a few
whose form seems awkward, like fneifttifd); krrifd), but the latter
80 SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS. [224-
are not absolutely excluded. Mm, mi^ ®ott, fie war me^r f(^uto
ate ic^ (F. 2960).
224. When two qualities belonging to the same object are
compared, me^r, meniger, mtntier are now used, but the classics
are still full of the comparatives in -er*
According to Lelimann (L. Spraclie, p. 206) Leasing uses nte^r only
once : 2)tefe ^Tu^rufuttgen ftnb r^etortfc^er aU griinbli^ (Le.). Present usage:
Der ©efctte ijl weniger ^eimtiitfifv^ aU bumm, ©er (©olbat ijl mtf^x tapfer aU flug*
225. Logically the superlative cannot be used of two objects, but it
is so used much more frequently in German tlian in English, e. g. , 3tt)Ci
(Sol)ne, tt)Otton fte ben cilteften * . ♦ nut einem S^feile erf(^o§ (Le.).
1. For the conjunctions benn, al^, after the comparative, see 333.
2. Notice the bold comparative in H. and D., IX. 311 : 9'?unf tjl ba^
SJleine nteiner al^ iemal^. Such forms as ber ^einigjle, etc., at the end of
letters are rare. Seiber is a comparative of kib (adj.), which became a
noun very early. Dfterer occurs in Lessing.
SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS.
226. The cardinals, used attributively, are indeclinable
now, except etn, tmt, ein. The G. and D. of 3it>et and tret now
and then occur still : '^'^zSjix ^tVi<^tXi 9Runt m^M aHe SBa^rtjett
futtt» (Prov.). (Here ,,3meier" shows the case; jmet 3^W3^« SWunt)
would not be cleai\) ^^t i)on eln^ Bi^ l)un^ert»
1. To express the year the cardinal is merely added to „tm
3a:^r(e)'' or to ,,itt/' as im 3a|re ^k^ii^n ^unt ert txa Vixi^ cidjtatg, or
shorter, in 1813* The cardinal shows the year, the ordinal the
month : ®ot^e ftarb ten 22ten SQlarg 1832. ^anno^er, ten (!♦) erften
5luguft 1881 ♦ The ordinals used only attributively, see 211.
2. The time is expressed in various ways. Answering to
such questions as: ©ie^iel U^r ifl e^, treld^e '^t\i ift e^ or ^aben
njtr ? mie ifi e^ ^Xi ter 3^tt ? we say : ©^ if^ ^molf t^orbet, afcer noc^
nic^t ein^. (E^ ifl zvx SStertel tret or auf t)ret,or txn SStertel n^^ (iiber)
3»ei (all mean a quarter past two). S^ ijl trei Siertel trei or auf
229]
SYNTAX OF THE l^TUMERALS. 81
txtx or tin 35iettel ijor Wx, = a quarter of three. SiJ ij^ ^att jtrolf,
= half past eleven, on the same principle as i>ierte1^aI6 (see
229). We can say: 20 9Hinutett nac^ i^lxt (past ten), ^mn^iQ
m jebtt (of ten). Der Bug fii^rt 3 U^r 20 Wlimtm nai^mittag^ ah.
SBir ttJoUen un^ urn funf treffen*
227. Used substantively the cardinals are more frequently
inflected, having a plural in -e (see 429) and a dative in -en
(see 79): S0 n^aren i^rer funf(e), stvclf(e)*
1. Colloquially tliis -e is very commonly used as far as 19 incl., even
when the figure itself be meant, which stands in the feminine singular :
!Dtefe 5l(|t(e) x]i m(^t pt gemac^t. !Diefc 5^eun(c) ftc^t fc^tef. ©If if^ bte ©unbc.
(£lfe u^erf(^reitet bie je^n ®et)ote (Sch.).
2. !Die 9)?iIIio'n, bie SBiKio'n, bie SDhHiarbe are regular nouns, and, unlike
^unbert and taufenb, stand in the plural after the cardinals, e.g., brei MiU
Itonen, but fiinf^unbert, M^ taufenb. ®a^ ^unbert, ba^ 2:aHfenb are common
nouns, pL: ^Uttberte + hundreds, STaufenbe + thousands: e.g., ju |)unber^
ten, a hundred at a time ; :6et ^unberttaufetiben bie 2)?enf(^en hxMtn (Le.).
228. ^SSeibe^' corresponds to Eng. "both "in form and
use: 3P t>ag 5>fert) an bei^en Slugen Hto ? It may have the defi-
nite article before it: Me 6eit)en M^e, "both the cows."
1. The singular Beib- means " either," "each " (of two). S3etbe^ la§t
f!^ "^oren = either statement is reasonable ; ba^ Slbenbma^l itnter ^eiber ®c=*
jlalt, the communion in either form ; but the masc. and fern, are archaic.
2)eitn ju einem gro^en ^annc ge^ort kibed : ^leinigfetten aU ^leinigfetten unb
iDt^ttQe Dtnge aU iwtt^ttge 2)inge ;^u l^eftanbeln (Le.). 93etbe^ has supplanted
kibe, heidiu (pl.)» which are still common in the 16th and 17th centuries.
Notice beibe^ — unb = both — and. Seibe^, ein loMtc^er ^onig unb mdc^ttger
©(^winger ber Sanje (Bii.).
229. 1. Peculiar are the compounds of the ordinals with ^alB following
them and felb preceding them : 55iert(e)'^atB (3 J), neunt(e)'^al^ (8-^), meaning
ba^ ijierte nur ^alB or tueniger ein :^aI6, \)Cl^ neunte nur l^al^. ^reije^ntel^alb %0i^ =
12 %(i^ aber ba^ 13te nur ^alk Ags., Icelandic, Danish, and L. Gf. have the
same forms, though in the two latter "half" precedes the ordinal. It
does not go back to 0. H. G. ©elbanber = er(feI6)l) ber jnjeite, two of them ;
felbbretje^^nt, himself the 13th, thirteen of them (G.) ; felbbritt, feIBt)iert gen-
erally uninflected. (Selbfl jwanjigfler (Le.). The cardinal is not common,
82 SYNTAX OF THE PEESOKAL PROiq^OUK. 230-
but Lessing has wfelb fiinfjigcr/' This composition is more common than
l^alb- in the modern dialects.
3. Notice also the cardinals in -er, as in ben fiinftiger 3al)ren — either
"from 1850-60" or " from 50-60 years old." It is now classical. This
-er occurs in the names of the unit, ten, etc. : ber ^intx, ber B^^ner, etc.
See 507, 1. 3u itotit, britt also occur for ju jtpeicn, breien.
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS.
Syntax of the Personal Pronoun.
230. 1. Du, sg., i^r, pi., are used in familiar intercourse
in the family and among intimate friends, in addressing God,
in sermons, in solemn discourses and in poetry. Ex. : ^ennft
in Da^ Sant), mo Die Sitronen bliilm ? (G.). Sliuler, alter 55ater I In
fannft t^en 3:ag ter greil)eit ntc^t md)v f c^ a u e n ; In foUft i^n^oxcn
(Sch. ). (Sr^ab'ner ®eift, tu gaBft mix, gabft mix attee, toaxnm id) bat
(F. 3218).
2. ^u, 3. p. pi., is used everywhere else, even among rela-
tives in some families; also when grown children address the
parents: S>o tr>o^tten @le, mnn id) fragen tarf ?
3. This peculiar use of ©te sprang up early in the 18th century. It is due, no doubt,
to the use of the singular Sr and ®ie in address, which were the height of politeness in
the 17th century. Gv and Sie are due to the use of §ei"r and %xa\x in direct address. In
Chamisso's „^eter ©c^Ieint^l" the gray-coat always addresses Peter with „fcer §err,"
e.g.^ ,/9J2i33C fcer ^crr nieine 3ubnnglid;!eit cntfc^ulbicjeii . . . id) Ijalc einc ^itte an i:^n."
§crr, %xan, Sl^rc ©naben, (Sure (Sscellens, ©eine aKajeftat were followed by the "plural of
majesty" (see 311, 2): §err 'Doftor wurbcn ba fatcd;tftert (F. 3524). ^iir§ crjle wottctt
©eiiie 9}Zaicftat, ha^ bie 3trme'e er)n' 2tufi(^ulj 33cf)incn rciumc (Sch.). §crr was reduced
to mere „ev'' as early as M. H. G., e. g., er Sigfrid ; in the 16th century, „2Bertcr cr
^Jfarrer.'' This form encouraged the use of the pronoun cr in direct address.
4. ^^r, in addressing one person, was early very respectful and has maintained itself
in the drama, except in comedy, to this day, and might be called the " stage-address,"
and is due to Eng. and Fr. influence. See Schiller's DJtavia Stuart.
231. The gradation as to politeness and etiquette now is about as
follows : 1. For princes and all persons of high standing, 3^re ©naben,
(Sure ©rceCenjr Sure ?0^aie|lat, with the verb in the pi. 2. <3te, addressing
one or more persons, verb always in the pi., e.g., biirfte id) (Sie Bcgleiten?
3. 3^r, pL of bu, and %x in the drama addressing one or more persons,
234] SYKTAX OF THE PEESO:t^AL PROKOUN. 83
e.g., (Spat fommt %x, boc^ %x fommt (Scli.). See F. 981, 988. 4. (£r, Sie,
addressing one person, now rare. 5. X)u, i^r, as in 230, 1.
232. The genitive of the pronouns of the 1. and 2. persons stands
very rarely after nouns. Goethe has it once, „mcin, be$ ©cogno'jlen," " of
me the geognost," but it is common as the object of verbs, after adjec-
tives and numerals : 3(^ Htt' eu(^, tte|mt cu(^ meiner an (F. 1875). The un-
inflected possessive metn, betn are by some interpreted as predicate genitives,
e. g., ber 33e(^er ijl bein (Sch.). As it is much more probable that the posses-
sive adjectives were used as genitives of the personal pronoun than mce
versa, this interpretation is hardly correct. (See 441, a.)
233. The personal pronouns always accompany the verb.
In the imperative „(Bk" always stands, but t)U and i^r only for
emphasis: ^iebet eure geinte (B.). 93leiktt ©ie gefiiHt^fl. See
F. 1908.
1. In poetry, colloquially, and in merchants' letters the pronoun is
often not put : S3tn tueber ^^rdulein, mhtx \^m, tarn ungelettet m^ |)aufe ge'^n
(F. 2608). See F. 3429. 3^r ©erte(3 (viz., ©c^reikn) ^om 18ten biefe^ (viz.,
?D?onat^), ^a^e empfangen. Notice the set phrases bttte, I pray ; banfe, thank
you ; gcfd)tt>eige (conjunction, " say nothing of "), before which {(^ has to
be supplied. X^ut nlc^t^f ber 3ubc tr>irb ^erbrannt (Le.), no matter, the
Jew . . .
2. Colloquially the subject, if a noun, may be repeated in the shape of
a pronoun, as in Eng. : ber ^ird^^of, er tiegt tr>ie am Za^t (G.). See 244, 3.
234. The pronouns of the third person have demonstra-
tive and determinative force. (Compare the cognate Latin
is, ea, id.) Hence if they refer to lifeless objects or abstract
nouns, they rarely stand in the G. and D. cases, but they are
supplanted by the regular demonstrative pronouns or, if gov-
erned by prepositions, by t)a(r), l)in, ^er + the preposition.
Ex.: 'Bern 2ieBd)en Mnert ^xu^l 3^ t^td ba»on nite l)oren (F.
2104). ^aht tnd) ^or^er trol)( prapartert (F. 1958). Mdn i(^ glauB',
In ^alt\t ntd)t ^tel ta^on (viz., 'oon ttx Steligion) (F. 3418).
1. Also c^ (A.) is thus supplanted, when referring to an individual
object : SBo liegt ^axi^ ? . . . 2)en ^^htger braitf (not aiif esS) ba^ ne^^men mir
(Arndt). ^m\\'^ ©liicf ! ^er^ ! Sicbe ! ®ott ! id) |abe feinen 9kmcn bafitr (F.
3455-6), ^ennjl bu Conbon? SBefu^e baffelbe iebenfatt(3.
84 CONCOKD OF PKOi;rOU]Sr AKD NOUIT. [2-^5-
Concord of Pronoun and Noun.
235. The pronoun of the third person agrees with the
noun which it represents in gender and number. The con-
cord of the pronoun with the natural and grammatical gender
has been treated, see 165, 166; also the neuter sg. e^ repre-
senting a plural and any gender, see 168.
On the use of „e^"»
236. 1. S^ is the indefinite subject of impersonal verbs
denoting states of the weather and other natural phenomena,
e. g., e^ regnet, ^onnert, bli^t, fAneit, l)agelt, e^ ^at gegla'tteift, e^ iaolif
eg tijlntert, eg ^unfelt, ^cimmert, taut, etc.
2. ©g is made the indefinite subject of verbs, not really im-
personal : Sg fc^Iagt elf; eg brennt, eg flopft, flingelt, eg ge^t log,
liiutet; also in the passive and reflexive: eg tt)trl) getatt^t, gefungen,
gefpielt ; compare rndxi tan^t, mcin x\x\t. Sg ge^t, fpielt fid) l)ier gut
=: it is good walking, playing here. S3oMn foE eg nun ge^tt
(F. 2051).
a. Such an eg is used by poets to give a vague, mysterious, ghostly
impression. Schiller's „Xau(^er," Goethe's „^0(i)5ettUeb" and „3^otentanj"
are full of them : Unb alg er im tt)t(ltgen ©d^lummer lag, beivegt eg jt(^ unter bem
S3ette (G.). The eg (treated so far) except in the passive and reflexive verb-
forms cannot be omitted like, for instance, the expletive „eg" sub 3, 5.
3. Sg is made the grammatical subject of a verb, when the
logical subject follows later: gg ^ogen tret SurfAe tt?oM iikr ten
9l^em (Uh.). gg fc^ritt il)m \x\\6> 3ur (Seite ter Hiil^ente ®enog
(Uh.). SeeF. 3490-1; 3674-77.
The logical subject cannot be another pronoun, eg., eg war x^, eg ivaren
(Sie, as in Eng. " it was T," " it was you," which is a late construction.
a. In ballads and other folk-lore this c8 is not required and inversion is still possi-
ble, as was the rule in O. H. G., without c§ at the head of the sentence. For after all,
c§ was here used not merely to denote an indefinite subject, but to account for an inver-
sion which had no apparent cause. It is an " expletive " and superfluous as soon as
any other part of the sentence stands at the head bringing about the inversion. It is
©ftenest translated by "there." German tales begin „(S3 war einmal . . . ", "There
237] SYi^^TAX OF THE REFLEXIVE PROKOUl^. 85
was once . , . " . ®al) ein ^na6' eln 9?6§lein fte:^n (G.). <Stettt' ein ^na6e [i(^ tnir an bic
©eitc (id.). The construction i^ bin eS, 3^)^ fetb e§, " you are it," as in Ags. and as
English-speaking children still say, is already the rule in O. H. G. Nor can we say
in German ,,id) I)in er" and „<£ic finb er," but i^ Un e§, ba§ Bin tc^, bev I)tn i(^, i(^ tin
fcerjenigc, wel(i)ev . . . , I am he who . . . •
4 Peculiar is the impersonal „e^ gteBt/' " there are '* or " is/'
which is not a very old phrase, but rare in M. H. G. , in which
e^ with pi. verb was even possible.
«@^" is here the indefinite subject and has taken the place of the more
definite „t)a^" or a noun, which "gave," *' furnished," " produced" a cer-
tain thing. Hence „e^ giebt" is always followed by the accusative : ^e^
giebt ©c^ldge," '* Somebody is giving or will give somebody a whipping."
dx, ha gab^^ n)eftfdrf(^en ^c^infen (Schefifel). „(£^ giebt" is not well followed
by a noun in the sg. denoting one object or individual, e.g., ©^ giebt ^tcr
eiuen §unb, but by nouns in the pi., by abstract and material nouns : ©^
giebt feitten BufaE (Sch.). See F. 1118.
5. S^ is used as the subject of impersonal verbs followed by
an objective personal pronoun (D. or A.), denoting states of
mind and body: g^ ^iirftet mi^, e^ ^ungert i^n, e^ rent mt(^, e^ i|t
If the objective pronoun or any other part of speech precede the verb,
c^ is not necessary, but it may be retained. Ex. : 3^ \^Vom eu(^ ^u, ntir
tfl^iS al^ mie ein 3:raum (F. 2040). 2)ir tvirb geivi^ einmal ki kiner ®otta^nU($^
felt bange (F. 2050). mix ijl fc^ledjt ju mute, *' I do not feel well."
6. g^ stands further as indefinite predicate and as indefinite
object. See 204. 3n Ucfem (Binne fannft tu^^ magen (F. 16U).
See further, F. 2012-14 ; 2080. ©ie metnt,t)U feift entflol)n; unD
^alb unD l)alb bijl Du e^ fd)on (F. 3331-2).
In the last illustration and in similar ones e^^ if translated at all, may
be rendered by ''so" : (Sie jinb n)o|l miibe ? D nein, aber id^ Mn e^ Qtrot\tn,
= I was (so).
Syntax of the Reflexive Pronoun.
237. The reflexive pronoun always refers to the subject:
S^ ift ber So^n t)er Tmnt, tie ftc^ felbft be^njungen (Sch.). 2)ie ^at
ft(^ JegUc^e^ erlaubt (id.).
86 SYI^TAX OF THE EECIPROCAL PR0N0U:N^. [238^
1. The dative was already lost in O. H. G. In M. H. G. the use of
fid) as dative is very rare. Lather's Bible is still full of the dative of the
personal pronoun for the reflexive, e. g , Die ^eiben, ba fte "tiCL^ ®efe^ ntc^t
laben, ftnb (fte) i^nen felbfl ein ®efe^, Die ^ei^^eit Idffet i^r fageit/ = wisdom
will take advice. ®ott f(^uf ben ^Kenfc^en il;m pm 33ilbe, Lessing has: Ser
ftc^ ^natt unb gaU i|m felbfl ju lekn m^i enlfc^Ue^en !ann, ber lebet anberer ©!lai)^
auf immer* But this «tt)m'' stands also because there is already one ft(^» It
is very rare in the classics and does not occur in the spoken language.
2. (Belbjlr felber strengthens the reflexive pronoun and prevents its con-
founding with the reciprocal. For examples sec above. But fel^jl (felber)
is far from as common as the Eng. self (selves).
Syntax of the Reciprocal Pronoun.
238. As such are used un^, eud), ftcb, both in the accusative
and dative : UnD (fte) nicften fid) (D.) gu unD grii^ten ftd^ (A.)
freuntlid^ im ©piegel (H. and D., VII. 42). S3enn fi(^ tie giirften
befetoen, mujfett tie Xiener jld) morten unt) teteii (Sch.).
But if any ambiguity arises, as is frequently the case, the unvarying
form einattber or the inflected einer (ber eine) ben anbevn referring to masc.
nouns, bie eine bte anbere referring to fem. nouns, bie einen bic anbern pi. of
both, are used instead of them and even, though tautologically, in addition
to them. Ex.: unb Itebeu un^ unter einanber (B.). (Sie fpotten ber eine be^ anbern.
Syntax of the Possessive Pronouns.
239. The possessive pronoun used adjectively agrees with
the noun like any other adjective. See 212. The uninflected
forms mein, ^cin, fcin stand in the predicate and can be subjects
only when used as nouns with or without the article, e. g.^
^TOein unt) T;ein ijl atlci^ 3an!e5 Urfprung (Prov.).
1. Standing in the predicate, therefore, it is right to say : ^a^ S3u(^
if! mein, metne^, \ia^ meine, ba<3 meinige. As subjects referring to ba<^ S3uc^ :
9)Zeine§, bad mcine, bad meinige ift verlorenr = mine is lost.
3. Care should be taken that the right possessive be used when per-
sons are addressed with ©ie, bu, t'^r (3^r)» SBr refers to Sie, bein to bUr
euer (Suer) to i^r (3^r), e.g.y^'u ^akn 3^re ^rau SJ^utter ijerloren? SBo^in
242] SYJSTTAX OF THE POSSESSIVE PKONOUN^S. 87
n)irb bid) beinc a^ermeffeti^cU nn^ fii^ren ? T)\xx^ be^ Wlanm^ UBermut, bm 3f)x
burd) Suer SBrautgemac^ sum ST^rone gefii^rt (Scli.).
240. Of tcx, Ik, ^a^ metne (ter, Me, t)a^ metni.qe), when used
substantively, ter, Die ?Wetne, pL tie ^O^einen (with capital let-
ters), denote persons, viz., friends, relatives, etc. ; Da^ ^O'Zeine
or ta^ ^Cieinige denote my property, duty, share, deserts.
Ex. : 2)er ^err fennet bie ©eiiten (B.). ©ie '^at ba^ S^rige crljaltert (her
dowry), ^avbinal ! 3(^ ^ak ba^ 5)?eim9e get^am %^\xn ®ie ba^ 3^re (Sch.).
^tefen SJJorgen, ali3 ic^ ©ie im treife ber S^rtgen fanb . ♦ . (id.), "©anj ber
S^rige," „bie Deinige," „bie 2)eine" are proper letter-endings.
241. The possessive pronoun must be repeated like the
article with nouns of different gender: @ein ^ot)er (^an^, feine
etle (^eftalt, feine^ SJtunte^ Sac^eln, feiner ^lugen ©eii^alt ♦ > . (F.
3395-8).
242. 1. As fein and x\)x are both reflexive (referring to the subject of
the sentence) and non-reflexive (referring to another noun) an ambiguity
may arise, which should be avoided by using the demonstrative pronouns
instead ; either beffen, beren always preceding, or be[felkn> berfelkn either
preceding or following the noun. Ex. : 9^olaub ritt l;interm ^ater ^er mit
beffen <Sd)ilb unb ©d)n)erte (Uh.). ,Mit feinem ®d)ilb" would have meant
Roland's shield. Compare the following lines of the same poem, in
which it)m prevents ambiguity : 9^. ritt ^tntevm ^ater ^er unb trug t^m feinen
jlarfeit ©peer jufamt bent fejlen <S(^tlbe* Compare ^rau 91. 9?. ging mit ber
^au^^Wtx'm unb tl^rer 9^ic^te na(| bem ^axh^, i. e , Mrs. N. N/s niece ; but
ntit ber ^au^l^cilterin unb beren 5^i(^te, ^. e., the housekeeper's niece, d^ eifre
leber feiner (the father's) unbejlo(^enenr »on ^orurteilen freien 2kht na6) (Le.).
2. The possessive of the 3. person is in the people's language often
repeated for emphasis after a genitive of possession and also after a
dative: ,Mtmn\ ^Better fein ©arten." Comp. "John his mark." This is
not to be imitated though it occur now and then in the classics and quite
frequently in the 18th century : STuf ber ^oriuna i^rem (5d}{ff (Sch.) ; be^
3IIo feinem (StuM (id.). 3^x artet me'^r nad) eure« 3?ater^ ®et|l aU nac^ ber
Wlumx t^rem (id.). See 180, 4.
3. The definite article cannot precede the attributive possessive pro-
noun. Sener, btefer and such adjectives as cbgebrtc^ter, ern)flHmter seemingly
do, but such constructions as btefer bcin So^xit c^ge^ad^ter mein (Sd^reiber are
rather appositional.
88 SY:NrTAX of the demonstrative PEONOUN. [243-
243. 1. By a license the possessives lose inflectional endings in such
set phrases as occur in Sd) moc^te brum mein Zao, nid^t lieben (F. 2920).
SD'Jein Sebtag benr tc^ bran (Sch.). ^ah^ ic^ bic^ boc^ mein Xage nic^t gefe^en (F.
4440). These phrases are in the transition stage to adverbs and the
apostrophe may stand or not.
2. ©etn is in proverbs and in one phrase „feitter Beit" = *' in due time,"
"in — time," still used for the feminine i^r, a remnant of the earlier
periods, when i^r could not be used as the reflexive possessive: Sein Z'i^ox
fennt jebe ^ul; (Prov.). Untreue fc^lagt feinen eigenen ^errn (Prov.). «©einer
Beit" is an adverbial genitive, in which feiner has become non-reflexive
so that it apparently stands at times for il^rer^ unfere^, etc. Reflexive :
,MUt^ Ding toa^xt feine Beit" (Hymn) ; but non-reflexive : <Bk wax feiner Beit
(once) eine gro^e ©angerin*
Compare the relation of Eng. "his" and "its." The latter sprang
up in Shakspere's time. *' Its" is the genitive of "it." In Sh. " his"
stands frequently where later "its" is used.
3. The use of the German definite article where in Eng. the possessive
is used, is by no means as strict and as common in the spoken language
as the grammarians would have us believe. Take for instance : 9)?etn
armer ^opf i\t mir ijerrutft, 9Kein armer (Sinn i|l mir itxfiMt (F., I. 3383-6).
(Solang ic^ mic^ nod) frif(^ auf meinen S3einen fit'^Ie, geniigt mir biefer ^notenjlod
(F. 3838-9). See 154.
In the 17tli century „ii^" was used also for all persons. " Simplicissimus " is full
of this misuse.
Syntax of the Demonstrative Pronoun.
244. 1) e r, t> i e, t a ^, always accented, points out without
reference to nearness in time or space. It is generally well
translated by "that," also by "this/' and by a personal
pronoun.
Ex.: © em Bolfc l^ter (tliis) iDirb jeber %a^ ein %t^ (F. 2162). 5lkr, xok
id) mid) fe^ne bic^ jn fd)anen, ^aU ic^ »or bem (that) 5)}?enfd)en (Mephistopheles)
ein l^cimlic^ ©ranen (F. 3480-1). D glii^lic^ b e r (lie), ben i^r ^ele^rt ! F. 1981).
^er (for her) ^a^^ id) bie f^reube ^erMttert (Bo.). SBe^^e b em, ber S5ottair(en)<3
•S^riften iiber'^aupt nic^t mit bem ffe^tif($en ®ei|l lk% in ml^m er einen Znl ber<
felben gefc^rieben (Le.).
1. The genitives be^j beffen/ beren sg. fern., berer and beren, pi., are used
substantively as follows :
245] STKTAX OF THE DEMOKSTRATIYE PRONOUi^. 89
a. ^i% is archaic, but occurs in compounds like i>e^l)all), be^wegenr ber^
geftalt, etc., e.g., De^ freut fid) ba^ entmenfc^te ^aar (Sch.). S33ir jtnb ber feine^
wert, ba^ iDtr t)itten (Lu.), We are wortliy of none of those (things), etc.
&. 2)effenr beren G. sg. fern, and Gl. pi., are used when they have the
force of possessives (see 242).
c. The present usage favors berer, G. pi. , referring to persons and bercn,
beffen referrinor to things. But the classics do not agree with this. Gen-
erally these forms are antecedents of relative pronouns. Ex. : 3e^0 fag'
mir ba^ Snbe berer, bie »on 2:roia fe^rten (G.). |>at '^o.^ ^inb f($on Bci^nc? (S^
l^at beren ^ier. !I)ort fie^t man bie ©itter berer (of the gentlemen, lords) von
SBebelo^.
2. The lengthened forms in -en and -er sprang up as early as the 15th century both
in the article and in the pronoun, Luther has „beuen,'' D. pi., but the short genitives
„be§" and ,,bcr.'' In the 18th century they lost -er and -en again, owing, no doubt, to
the desire of distinguishing between article and demonstrative, and between the sub-
stantive and adjective uses of the latter. Goethe has still ,,unb won bcnen 9!)ienid)cu bie
fie befottberS f^a^en." Present usage, however, requires the short forms of the pro-
noun, when used adjectively.
3. Notice the frequent emphatic force of the pronoun, e. g,, 3Scin 9Jec§te, baS mit unS
geboren x\i, won b e ra ift leiber nie bie %x<i^i (F. 1978-9).
Diefer, jener*
245. liefer points out what is near in time and space, Jener
-what is remoter. Diefer is "the latter," Jener, "the former.''
They are used substantively and adjectively : I^iefe^ iun^e
grauenjtmmer :^at ©efii^l unD (Stimme (Le.). Diefer ti^ill''^ trodeit,
tra^ iener feuc!^t Bege^rt* Die^ Statt ^ier — Diefe^ millft ^u geltenb
mad)ett? (Sch.).
1. ^Da^r bte0 like e^, but less frequently, can he the indefinite subjects
of neuter verbs. See 236. E. g., Da^ ifl W SD^agb be^ 9^a(^^ar^* ©a^ ift
ein meifer i&ater, ber fein etgen ^tnb fennt (Sch.). ®ie^ ift bie ^rt mit |>exen um^
^uge^n (F. 2518).
2. T>k^ unb ba^, bie^ unb fene^ have the force of ^^irgenb etti,« e.g., 3Bir
fmb nt(^t me^r beim crjlen ©lasj, brum benfen n)ir gem an bie^ unb ba^ (Song).
Unb er firecfte aU tnabe bie |>anbe nid^t <xvi^ na(^ biefem unb }enem (H. and D.
V. 64).
3. !£)iefer is strengthened hy ^ier ; ber, iener and ba^ by \><ii, e. g., W\i
bem ba J^erben @ie nict)t fertig (Sch.). better, in the sense of " the other " and
90 'syntax of the DEMOI^STRATIYE PROKOUK". [246-
*' to come,*' ;,itt iener 3eit^ in jmem SeBen* ©^affpere^i^ ©efpenfl lommt JwirEic^
aii^ icner 2BeU (Le.).
246. When not referring to persons ^ter + preposition
may take the place of tiefer, and l:a -f preposition the place of
ter and jener, e.g., 2Ber fonft ift \6^\xl\) taran al^ i^r in S3ien ? (Sch.).
!Dai?ott fc^meigt te^ (Sanger^ ^i)flid)!eit (?). ^iernai^ (according to
this) mu§ ^ie ge^art eine ganj ftnl)ere geiuefctt fein*
1. Notice the two strong forms in Lessing's 5IIIe^ bicfe^, feine (Srftnbungeti
«nt> bie ^t|lorifd)ett SJiaterialiert, fnetet er benn in einm fein langen, fein fc^tt)er ju faf^
fenben 9fioman jufammen. For an ba^, tao,^ . ♦ . i i)on bent, wa^ . . ♦ no
baranft)a^ . ♦ ♦,bai)onn)a$ . ♦ ♦ should be substituted, tliougli this is done
colloquially. »2Bir ba(|ten baran, tx>a^ bu ie^t anfan^en njurbeft" is not elegant,
247. ® e r-, ^ i e-, t> a J e n t g e is generally used substan-
tively followed by a relative clause or a genitive. Used adjec-
tively it stands for Der, lite, ta^ when a relative clause follows,
e.g,y tiejenigert ^tn\6!}Zn, metc^e ♦ ♦ ♦ The best usage accents
^er, tie, t)a^. Used adjectively it has only medium stress.
Ex. : 2)ieient9en ber ^na^en, tpeld^e t^re SIufgaBen nic^t gemad^t fatten, ntngten
na(f^jt|en (stay after school). 2ie^et biejenigen, n)elc^e eud^ Derfolgen (B.).
248. Der-, bie-, baffelBe denotes identity. It refers
to something known or mentioned. It is used equally well
substantively or adjectively. It can be strengthened by
,,eben'': ^it aller 2;reue cement)'' tc^ eure ©aben; Der !Durftige foil ftd)
Derfelben erfreuen (H. and D. II., 74-5).
1. 2)er ncintlic^e also denotes identity, but is not written as one word.
;r2)erfelM9e" is rarer than berfelk. 2Bar basS ntc^t ber ©ienjlmann (porter), ber
bie 5lu^manberer l^etrogen ^at ? 2)er namlt(^e.
2. ©cll^tg without ber is rare, e.g., (Selbige^ tt>eig t^ getotg (Heyse).
249. ©elB, feUer, felBft distinguishes one object from
another. It strengthens personal and reflexive pronouns. It
is made einphatic by eben, also in the phrase ein(er) unt) l^erfelbe*
(Selber and felbft do not differ in meaning, but in use. ©elfcer is
251] SYNTAX OF THE I:N^TERR0GATIVE PROi^OU:^^. 91
never made an adverb as fe(6|l is. (BelBer always follows the
word it qualifies, though it need not stand necessarily directly
after it: 3t% f^I^^^ or felbft ^ah il)n gefe^en* SBer ameifelt 5^atl)an,
la^ ik nidJt (see 309, 2) i:ie e^^rltd^feit, t)ie ®ro§mut felber fein ?
(Le.) 2Cer an^txn eine (^ruBe grabt, fdllt \db\t ^inetn (Prov.).
1. ©elbfl lias become also an adverb with the force of «fogar»" and then
stands best at the beginning of the sentence, unaccented : <Bdbft ein [o
|immlif(|e^ ^aax (viz., Psyche and Amor) fanb nad^ ber S5erMnbung ftc^ ungleic^
(G.).
2. Notice the compounds bafel&jl, ^te(r)felbjl, in that or this very place ;
also the force of „i)on [elbft" in : T)k SHii^le ge^t nid)t i)on felb|l (of its own
accord).
For felb with ordinals see 229. Alone it is very rare, e. g., Xot\\ er in
fel6em (im ^^ala'fte) aUe urn jt^ i?erfammelt ^atte (Le.).
250. (Sold) means + " such." It describes what is pointed
out. It is used adjectively and substantively : $i(freidje ^^d^te !
einen [oli^en (2Ceg) ^etgt mir an, ten id) ^ermag ^u gel)en (Sch.). 2Bo
tr>ar tie UBerle^ung, aU n?ir ♦ ♦ ♦ folc^e ^Kac^t gelegt in fol4e ^anD
(id.).
1. The use of folc^ for the personal pronoun or ber-, bte-, baffelk is not
good although found now and then in the classics, e. g., %l^ fte hit SSWoo^^^
littte erreic^ten; fanben fie [ol(^e auf ba^ luftigfle (see 300, 2) au^gefc^miicft (G.).
2. For fold^ etn, fo ein is a frequent equivalent. It is more common in
the spoken language than folc^ ein. Lessing and Goethe are very fond of
it, e.g,y ©0 ein ^ic^ter ift ®^a!fpere unb (S^affpere faft ganj aflein (Le.). 3c^
fann ntid^ nid^t, xok fo ein SBort^elb, fo ein 2;u9enbfd^wd^er, an meinem SBitten xoax^
mtn unb (?3eban!en (Sch.).
„<Sd ettt" does not come from ,,\^\^ ein," but from ein fo before adjective and noun :
„ein fo ^t>^x %\xx\n"— „fo ein ^Dt)er Sturm," then „jo etn ^urm."
Syntax of the Interrogative Pronoun.
251. 2Ber, + "who/' "which/' and ma^, + "what/' are
used substantively only: 2Sa^ fiimmert e^ Me ^Wm, ter man tie
3ungen rauibt,in tt>effen 2Balte fie briiflt (Le.). 5^un, n?en lieBen imi
92 SYNTAX OF THE IKTERROGATIVE PROJ^TOUi^. [253-
i?on m6> am meiften (irL)o SBa^ ijl Uv langen dim fuqer @inn ?
(ScL).
1. Once the genitive after mer and toa^ was common. 2Ber is almost
entirely supplanted by welc^er, and wa^ by wao fiir ein« But xoa^ + geni-
tive, which generally looks like an accusative, still remains in phrases
like )S$a^ 2Bunber(^) (Le.). 2Ba^ be^ Z^nftU, 2Bae ^enfer^* SBa^ i)l SScibc^
bort am gritnen SDalbe (G.)- See 181, 188.
2. 3Bem only refers to persons. Wiien it refers to things or whole
sentences n)o(r) + preposition is substituted. 2Boju ber ^dxm ? (F. 1322).
SBoran erfennjl bu ben !Dteb, 2Bor before a vowel, tt)0 before a consonant.
3. In the spoken language „toa^" is preceded by a preposition that
does not govern the accusative : ju voa^, mit tt)a^; but womit, moju are pref-
erable. The classics have it too. Even fur toa^, um toa^, t>ur(| toa^ are
supplanted by mofiir, tvorum, njoburcb* 3vi toa^ ble 5^offe ? (G.) 5D^tt iva^
!ann ic^ aufwarten ?
4. SSa^ in the sense of raarum and tr>te is originally an absolute accusa-
tive, e. g., 3Ba^ jle^t t^r unb te^t bie ^cinbe in (= in ben) ©d^op (Scb.). 2Ba^
«?irb ba^ ^erj bir fc^n?er (P. 2720).
5. Mark the interrogative adverbs : n)0, + where ; toam, + when ;
tt)te, + how ; n?o(r)- with preposition ; waruntf + wherefore, + why, only
interrogative. For their etymology see 551.
252. S3 e I d) means -f " which " and singles out the indi-
vidual, though etymologically it inquires after the quality.
It stands adjectively and substantively: Unb trelc^er i\V^, t)m W
am meiflen Uebft? (Sch.). S3e(c^e^ Unge^eure ftnnet i6r mir an^
(id.).
In exclamatory sentences welc^ is originally interrogative, often fol-
lowed by ein : 2Be(d) ein Subein, welc^ ein ©ingen tvtrb in unferm ^aufe fcin !
(Song). See F. 742.
253. ^Ba^fitr, ma^ fitrein inquires after the nature
and qualities of a person or thing, ^a^ fiir always stands
adjectively, Yoa^ fiir nn adjectively and substantively. 2Ca^ is
separable from fiir ein. Lessing is particularly fond of this
separation. 2Ca^ fiir stands before the singular of a noun
256] SYNTAX OF THE EELATIYE PKOKOUN^S. 93
denoting material and before a collective noun; before the
plural of any noun. 2Ba^ fvir ein inquires also after an indi-
vidual.
Ex. : 2Ba^ fitr SBein ijl bici^ ? 2Baa fur SSerge ♦ ♦ ♦ trennen utt^ benn no(^ ?
(Le.). 2Ba^ in ^a^lon id) bir fur einen fc^onen <5toff gefauft (id.).
Syntax of the Relative Pronouns.
254. There being no original relative pronouns, the other pronouns were used as
such or conjunctions like so, dar, da, unde (see below) connected coordinate sentences,
one of which later became subordinate. The first pronoun used as a relative was ber,
bie, ba§, in O. H, G. aSel^er, irei", toaS developed into relative pronouns gradually. First
they were made indefinite pronouns by means of the particle so, O. H. G. so hwelich{so),
so hwer{so)^ so hwas(so) >TVl. H. G. swelich^ swer^ swas — whosoever, whatsoever >
N. H. G. wcW)er, wer, waS, which can be strengthened by nur, <x^x^, tmmer (= ever). To
say therefore that the interrogative is used as the relative is hardly correct, though, no
doubt, the indirect question had its influence in the coincidence of the forms of the
interrogative and indefinite relative pronouns. The demonstrative bcv, fctc, \i(x^ intro-
duced the coordinate clause, which afterwards became subordinate; and clause and
pronoun were then called relative. aSclcl^er is only of the 16th century.
255. T) e r and n? e I cb e r are equivalent. After personal
pronouns ^er is preferable. Euphony should decide which is
to be used. CEin grauen^immer, tao unit, ift ef^en fo eM aU tin
SJlaun, kr fid) fd)mtn!t (Le.). 2l>elc^er is preferable after tier^
jenige. The following sentence is bad : 2:ie, tie t)ie WiUiizx Der
^tttt)er tt?ar; ift geftorkn.
1. Of the four relatives ber, meld)-; ttjer, wa^ only tt) e I d)- can also be
used adjectively, the other three only substantively. The genitive of
ber, bie, ba^ is always beffen, berett; sg. and pi., never berev. Ex.: 2Ber fern
®efe^ ac^tet, ift eben [o mac^ttg aU xotx fein ®efe^ |at (Le.) 5lm SJJontag, an
njeld^em 2:a9e Xoxx aheijlen . . ♦ But this is not very elegant.
256. S)er and irelcber will take any antecedent soever.
But trer, ma^, having sprung from indefinite and compounded
pronouns, require none, ^er admits of no antecedent at all ;
ira^ may have any other neuter pronoun, an adjective (pref-
erably in the superlative), or a whole clause, e. g. , %ixv ttja^
trein ge^t Uttt> ni^t t^rein (in^ ©e^irn) ge^t, dn priic^ti^ SGort au
94 SYKTAX OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUl^S. [257-
tienftett fle^t (F. 1952-3). SlEe^ m^ ift, ift ternunftig (Hegel).
SSa^ tu erer6t ijon tieinen Satern 6aft, emirb e^ urn e^ 3U Befi^en (F.
682-3). I)em §errlid^ften, tt»a^ au(^ Der ®eifl empfangen, t)rdngt
immer fremD un^ Kemper (Stoff fid) an (F. 634-5).
1. dxt ttjer; ber 3J?antt t»er; ber, mx are impossible. But Goethe has (in
the** Walpurgisnacht'^), F. 3964: <Bo ®|re bem, n)em S^re gebit^rt. The
proverb says : „(£^re,bem S^re geM^rt," the Bible „(£^tc,bem bie ©:^re gc^bii^rt."
2. SBaO referring to a substantive and n?e((^e^ referring to a whole
clause are not present usage, though the classics use them so. '£)k Sllten
fannten ha^ 1>'m^ nic^tr roa^ mir ^opc^fett nennen (Le.). SiJon fritter Sugenb an
^atte mir unb meiner (Sc^mejler ber Skater felbjl tm Slanjcn Unterri(^t gegekn, weld^e^
einen fo crnjl^aften 3)lann munberlic^ genug ^atte fleiben foEen (G.).
3. If mx has a seeming antecedent the latter stands after the clause.
The antecedent is nothing but the subject of the main clause repeated
for emphasis in the shape of another pronoun. If, however, trer and its
seeming antecedent do not stand in the same case, the latter is indis-
pensable. Ex. : 2Ber ^ec^ angreift befubelt ftd) (Prov.). 2Ber iiber gemiffe ^inge
ben S^erftanb ni(5^t uerliert, ber ^at feinen ju ijerlieren (Le.). 233er ijiele^ hingt, njirb
ntanc^em etwa^ Bringen (F. 97). But 2Ber ein 5D^al litott, bem glauBtntan ntc^t
nnb ivenn er an($ bie SBa'^r^^ett fpric^t (Prov.). 2Ber ha )^a\, bem tvirb gegeBen (B.).
The same is true of xt>a§> : 2Ba^ man nic^t wei§, ha^ eBen brauc^te man unb roa^
man n)ei§r !ann man nic^t l^rauc^en (F. 1066-7). %xn1^ ubt jtd^r n^a^ ein 3)?eijler
hjcrben toiU (Sch.). For the gender in this illustration see 168.
4. The old short form n^e^ is now archaic except in tot^'^al'b, tot^^
tt) e g e n : SSe^ S3rot ic^ t[ft, be^ Sieb i^ ftnge (Prov.).
257. If the dative and accusative, governed by a preposi-
tion, do not refer to a person, too, now rarely la, with that
preposition, are generally substituted : ^x&it^ ift B^f^^l; am
tt^eni^ften t)a^, too^on bie 3l6ft(^t fo Uax in ^ie ^uc^m leud^tct (Le.).
1. Bo, the oldest relative conjunction, has now been crowded out from
the spoken language, though it was very common in the 16th and 17th
centuries: 2)ie Unfe ^anb, ha^u ba^ ^aupt, fo er i^m a^gei^auen (Uh.). 35 on
aUen, fo t>a famen (Bii.).
258. The relative adverbs to o, " where " and b a (colloqui-
261] SYNTAX OF THE Ii^DEFI]S"ITE PROIS'OUiq^S. 95
ally); ^ a, mann, rotnrtf tr) o, "when"; tr>ie, "as" take the
place of a relative pronoun governed by a preposition when
they refer to nouns denoting time, place, and manner.
Ex. : ^ennjl bu ba^ 2anh too hk Sitroneu Blii^n ? (G.). ^^ 9IM tm 2)ienf^en*
lekn ^lugenblicfe, too er bem SBeltgeijl nd:^er ifl al^ fonj^ (Scli.). Sn biefem Slugen*
bU(fe, ba mir reben, Ijl fern ^^^ra'un me^r in ber ©c^tveijer Sanbe (id.). «X)ie Strt
unb 2Bctfc mie," *' the manner in which." (/rSie" is more forcil)le than ^iii
tt)ct(^cr.'") D fc^oner %a^, totm cnbUd^ bcr ©olbat in^ Seben ^eimfc^rt (Sch.).
1. This construction is old only with the demonstmtive adverbs used
as relatives, viz., da^ ddr^ danne. 5llltt)0# aUba/ tt)ofelb}l are archaic
Syntax of the Indefinite Pronouns.
259. S i n and e i n i g e can precede a numeral generally fol-
lowed by a noun. They mean "some," "or so," "odd": tin
a6t Sage, a week or so; einige ^lerjig 3^^^/ forty odd years.
The order may also be: „ein 3^^^ funf^e^n/'
1. Grimm thinks this phrase has lost Moberr" as if it meant etnen %<x^
ober je^n, eln Sa^r ober fiintV^n. No doubt MCtntge ^ierjig 3a|r'' has lost
„uttb" and stands for einige unb ^terjig Sa^r, forty (and) odd years.
260. Sin, etma^, tva^, wer, iemant*, njelc^e, etnigc
can be strengthened by trgenl? (compounded of io + hwar and
gin = "ever," "where," "you please," ^m corresponding to
L. -cun). For the origin of tv>a^, mv, njel(^, see 254. 51^, n?enn
iit etma^ auf I^icft fonnte! " if I could influence you at all (F.
3423). 3Ba^ anter^ fuc^e ju Beginnen (F. 1383). £)te 3^9^ ift to^
immer wa^ uriD tint 5lrt ^on ^rieg (G.). ipier ftnt) ,^irfd)en au »er;^
taufen. SBillfl tu n?el(^e? §aft bu irgent) ma^ ^erloren?
1. They stand generally only in the nominative and accusative. (Sinig
is rare in the singular, and for it ivgenb cin is better used.
261. '21 1 (-. The following examples show the many vari-
ous forms of aa- : att t)a^ ®elD, aU U^ ®efce^, aM ta^ ®elb, m^
M u^ alle^ ?
96 SYNTAX OF THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. [262-
1. 5J^tte stood iu M. H. G. only after prepositions as still dow, e. g., ^tx
alle bem, "withal." Mix ivirb ijon aEe bem fo bumm (F. 1946). The form atte
before the article aud not preceded by a preposition, though very com-
mon in the classics and in the spoken language, is not so good as aU or
all with strong endings, e.g.^ Wi ber (s5c^merj (G.). ^^IH or aKe in such
phrases as ber SQein i)l oSi, " there is no more wine," has hardly been satis-
factorily explained yet.
2. Notice the following meanings ; Side ^tunben einen J^eeloffel »oII, " a
teaspoon full every hour." The singular in the sense of ''every "is
rarer, auf alien %oM, in every case, filler 3lnfang ijl fd)roer (Prov.). SlEe^
©ing n?a^rt feme ^z\t, ®otte^ £tel) in (Smigfeit (Hymn). The singular in
the sense of Eng. " all " is archaic, alien ©inter (Logau, quoted in Grimm's
Diet.), all winter. For all day, all night, we say best bie a^nx^-it ^o.&jX, ben
ganjen Slag. Notice also in aller %x\x^, " very early," in aEer ©tillCf in alle SBelt
3. The plural of jeber, iebmcber, jeglic^er is rare. It is expressed by ,,alle»^
Even the singular of the last two is now archaic and rare.
262. ^ a n c^ e r does not differ from the Eng. " many " in
use and force. Compare txxx manner; manc6 einer, mand)er gute
?[Rann, mant^ tin guter SKann, manege fd)bne Slume.
263. 3? i e I and m e n i 9, denoting the individual and used
substantively denoting persons, must be inflected ; if they
denote an indefinite number, quantity, mass, they are gener-
ally uninflected. T^enn ^iele fint) berufett, akr tt^entge finb auUx^
iVii^Iet (B.). 5>iel no^ %a\i tu ijon mtr ^u l)oren (Sch.). ^va^x mei^
\6ij X)iel, tod) mbd)te i(^ alle^ n^iffen (F. 601). (£^5 ftutiercn i>iel toeri;^
faner in £)eutf*Iant)*
1. S5ielerr -e, -e$ denotes "various sorts," e.g., vteler 2Bein; in composi-
tion ijielerlei SSein, '*many kinds of wine."
A fuller treatment of the large number of indefinite pronouns and numerals belongs
rather to the Dictionary.
265] SYNTAX OF THE VEEB. 97
SYNTAX OF THE VERB.
Classification of Verbs.
264. According to meaning and construction the verbs
may be variously divided : 1, into independent verbs; 2, into
tlie small class of tense auxiliaries and the modal auxiliaries.
See 267. Again: 1, mio personal verbs, which can have any
person, the 1., 2., or S., as subject; % into impersonal verbs,
which have the indefinite subject z^, „e^ recjtiet." See 236.
The personal verbs again divide: 1, into neuter or subjective
verbs, as ^ie (^onne fcbeint (see 179); 2, transitive or objective
verbs, the direct object of which stands in the accusative
(transitive proper, see 198) or in the genitive or dative
(called also in trans., see 184, 190).
As subdivisions of transitive verbs may be regarded: 1, the
reflexive verbs; 2, the causative.
The reflexives again: 1, into reflexives proper, which occur
only as reflexives, e.g., ft(^ gramen, to pine; fid) erBarmen, to feel
pity; 2, into both transitive and intransitive verbs used re-
flexively, e. g., ft(% it>afcben, ftcfe ijereinen, fid) tot laden*
The pronoun is always in the accusative, but see 197.
1. Transitive verbs have often intransitive or neuter force, but there
can be no direct object then. 'Da^ 3)ferb jie|t ben SBagcn, but !Die 3Bolfcn
jie^en am ^immel. Personal verbs can also be used without a logical sub-
ject : ^a$ SBaffer raufc^t, but (£i3 rauf^t m 9^o|re. Also the modal auxilia-
ries occur still as independent verbs ; fBa^ foil ba^ ? but SBo^in foU ber
■Die^ gefluc^tet fein ? See 267.
Syntax of the Auxiliaries.
I. §aBen and fein.
265. S) a^tn forms the compound tenses, active voice:
1. Of all transitive verbs : i(^ l)abt getragen, i^ ^aU Bet)edt, i$
^ak angeflagt.
98 SYNTAX OF THE VERB — AUXILIARIES. [266^
2. Of the modal auxiliaries, of reflexive and impersonal
verbs proper. Sr ^at ei3 nic^t gemoi^t, ^at fidj gemaf^en, ew hat
geregnet, e^ ^at mi6:i gereut
3. Of intransitive verbs which have no direct object, at most
the object in the G. or D. Sr l^attt mm gefpottet, er ^at nitr
gefc^ai^et, er ^atte gelad)t, gemeint, gefc^Iafen*
4. Of (intransitive) verbs of motion when the mere action
within a certain space, the effort, and its extent are to be
emphasized, without reference to direction, point of depar-
ture or destination. 31. ^on ipumBoltt l)at ^iel geretft, = was a
great traveler. T)er (Stallfnedjt l)at eine (Btun^e ^in unt) ^er gerttten*
^r ^atte in SBien je^n 3^^^^ gefa^ren (Le.). T)a^ Samm^en ^at
geppft, t)er gtfc^ l)at gefd^mommen. Da^ ^(eine (the little one) ^at
Ttoc^ ttie gegangen (has never walked). (Sophie l)at geflettert unt)
fi(^ Die (S^iir^e ^erriffen. Der ©c^nelllaufer ^at fc^on Idngft gelaufen
(finished running long ago). Good usage favors: Die Ubr 1:)at
cinmal gegangen, aBer {e^t fte^t fte ftid. Tie 5i}tii^(e, Me 9Jlaf^ine, Da5
3flar) l^at gegangen, but ift is frequently used.
5. Of ft^cn, fte^en, liegen, anfangen, beginnen, anf^oren. But in
S. G. fcin is more common and it is also found in the classics.
fflSo ^aU i^r gefej^en, gej^anten ? 3Cann i^at Die (BMt angefangen ?
266. S cin forms the compound tenses :
1. Of all verbs of motion, except some, which take i^aUn,
when action simply is denoted. See 265, 4. These take fein
when the direction, points of departure, destination and ar-
rival are mentioned. These circumstances are often expressed
by inseparable and separable prefixes in compound verbs.
Ex. : „Der ?0^ai ift gefommen." (Er n?irD gefallen fein, = he proba-
bly fell. 2Csir finD fcfcncd ^inaBgeftiegen. £)ie (Seefa^rer finD anf Der
3nfel (B^t gelanDet. Xie (Storc^e ftnD na6)i @iiDen geaogen. Xer
(Btattlnec^t i^ in einer (StnnDe :^in unD ^er geritten, == he rode to a
certain place (there) and back. "Lit geinDe finD entflo^en, ent^^
laufen, eingetroffen. ffiir finD fd)on me^rerc Tlak nmgejogen (moved).
267] SYKTAX OF THE VERB — AUXILIARIES. 99
2. Of certain verbs denoting a springing into being or pass-
ing away, a transition and development, growth and decay,
often expressed by er-, ^er-, jer-, and separable prefixes. S^ie
^il&l ift gefroren « gefrteren, but e^ Ut gefroren < frieren, there
was a frost). S)a^ ®eit ift gerrlffen. 2)er (B&jim ift gefd)moIaen»
„l:er SruDer ware ni^t geftorkn.'' "La^ SSaumi^en ift geti?ad)fen* Xie
rcid^en SLcntt fint) im ^riege ^erarmt. "La^ Sidjt ift erlofd^en. 'Die
6(^a(e ift gefprungen (cracked). Xer 2eWing mar eingefc^lafen (had
fallen asleep). In the compound verbs it is just this prefix
that called for fein* Compare trinten — ertrinfen, fd)einen — er^;
fdjeinen, toa6:im — ern^aien, |ungern — ^erl)ungertt, frieren — erfrieren*
3. Of feitt, Heiben, begegtten, folgen, gelingen, gefcbe^en, gliicfcn, for
which it is hard to account by meaning, but see 283, 2. Ex.:
(£^ ift i^m ttid>t getungen, gegliicft* Da^ ift fcbon atle^ tiagetvefen*
(iin fiiper 3:roft ift ii:)m geMieben (Sch.).
4. ^aten has gained upon fciu in German, but not so mucli as English " to have " upon
" to be." SoI{5crt and Oc^ccjncn were once generally compounded with I^aBcn. Also the ten-
dency to use intransitive verbs as trausitives, so strong in Eng., has increased in Ger-
man. While in Eng. one can " run " a locomotive, a sewing machine, a train, a ship,
in German fu:^ren, leiten, in ®anv3 tringen, gebrauc^en, or the verb of motion + laften or
mad)en, will have to be used. ®er ^utfi^ev f)at un§ fd^nell gefal^reit. ®er ^JoftiUiou ^at ben
SBageu ijorgefal)reit. 3)2an fonnte tie ^euerfprft^e nt(J;t in ®ang Bringen.
5. The difficulty as to the use of ^aBen and fein lies after all mainly in the way in
which a verb is used, transitively or intransitively, and in the meaning. The student
should attend particularly to these points and not be too timid, as in many cases usage
is by no means settled.
As to the omission of ^aBen and fetn in dependent clauses, see 346.
II. Special Uses of the Modal Auxiliaries.
This subject belongs really rather to the Dictionary, but the appreciation and trans-
?ation of these verbs is so difficult that a brief treatment of them is given here.
267. 1. ^ 6 n n e n denotes ability ; T)cx i^tfc^ !antt f(^n)immett. |>ter j!e'^^
id), i^ !antt ni^t anhtxQ (Lu.). Possibihty : S'^r fonntet i^r SBerfjeug fein, mic^
ill ba^ ®atn jujte^en (Sch.). Knowledge, '* to know how," its oldest mean-
ing: ^am\i bu Stalie'nifc^? Compare fonnen, "to have learnt," then "to
be able" ; fennen (< kanjan, causative of fann — fonnen), **to be acquainted
with" ; miffen, "to know."
2. © it r fen denotes : 1. Permission and authorization : ^u barfjl au^
100 SYNTAX OP THE VERB — MODAL AUXILIARIES. [267-
ba nur frei erfc^einen (F. 336). D^ne Sagbfc^ein barf nicmanb aiif bie ^agb ge^n*
2. " To have occasion to," " reason for," " need '* : 3)?an barf ben @d)luffel
nur jtt)ei Wlal umbret)eit unb ber Spiegel fpringt juriicf, "You need ..." X)u
barffl l)inau^ge^en, bie Suft ifl ^ier feljjr [c^led)t, " You have good reason to gc
out. . ." This force is the oldest, but rather rare now. 3. ** To trust
one's self to" : 2Bev barf tjn nennen unb mx kfennen: 3c^ glaub i^n (®ott) (F.
3433-5). This force has sprung from 1 and 2 and from the verb tar —
tiirren + dare, whose meaning was embodied in barf — burfc:u On the
other hand, it has nearly given up the original force of " need," '* want,"
still apparent in 2, to its compound bebiirfen. In some editions of the
Bible biirfettf *' to want," and lar — tiirren, " to dare," are still the rule. In
later editions l^eburfen and burfen have been substituted for them. 4. The
preterit subjunctive (potential, see 284, 3) bitrfte is used for a mild asser-
tion : T)k 5^a(^n?elt bitrfte Scbcnfen tragen, biefee Urtcil ju untcrfd)rclben (Sch.),
*' Posterity very likely will ..." T)(i^ bitrfte ju fpat fein, " I fear very
much, that is too late." Etiquette admits such redundant phrases as :
2)urfte or barf id) mir eriauben, etc.
3. 5)J D 5 c n denotes : 1. In its oldest, but now rare sense except in dia^
lect, " ability " and ** jiower." This it has given up to „fonncn." Compare
its cognates " may" and "can" in Eng.: 3|r SfnbM gibt ben Sngein <Star!ef
tt>enn feiner ftc ergritnben mag, (F. 247-8), " although no one is able ..."
2. Concession, no interference on the part of the speaker : S)cr 93urf(^e
ma(i m^ ^aufe ge^n (It lies with him, I have no objection), SBer mix ben
Seeder !ann njteber jeigcn, er ntag i:^n be^alten (Sch.). 3. Possibility, the action
does not concern or influence the speaker ; fonnen means a possibility that
lies in the ability of another person or object. 255a^ fitr ©ritnrocE^ mogen
baC fcin (Sch.). Sr mag bae> o^i^a^t ^aben, er ntag ba§ t:^un, It is possible he
said so, he may do it. T)a^ Zkx mag jie()n 3abre alt fein* With this force
it supplants the potential and concessive subjunctives ; if it stands itself
in the subjunctive of the present or preterit, it supplants also the opta-
tive subjunctive. S(^ tt)unfc^e ha^ bie ganje SSelt un^ ^oren mag, ^oxm moge,
9)loc^te and) bod^ bie ganje Sett un^ ^oren (Le.). 4. From 2 springs the force
of " inclination," " liking," " wishing." 2Ba^ ftc^ ijcrtragt mit nteiner 9)fli(^t/
mag ic^ t^r gern gett)a^rcn (Sch.). 3d} moc^te, bap er c^ md)t mieber erfit^re* 3c^
eJTe tt>a^ id) ntag unb letbe toa^ id) mujj (Prov.).
4. 9JJitff en, + must, denotes : 1. In its oldest sense, " to have occa-
sion, room," "to be one's lot," *'it is the case." A trace of this is left
in the following uses : 5D^cin §unb n?ar c^ne SD^auIforb l^inau^gelaufen, 5?un
ntupte and) gerabe ein 3?oUji'|l ba^er fomnten (as luck would have it, a police-
267] SYNTAX OF THE YERB — MODAL AUXILIARIES. 101
man came along), ©er Bufall mu^te i§n grabe ^in I^ringen. Bum sweiten Mai
foil mir fcin ^iaUi} crfd)allen, er mit^te benn (unless it should) kfonberu Sinn
kgriinben (G., quoted in Sanders' Diet.). 2. Necessity of various kinds :
Me Si)lenfd)en muffen \kxbnu 2)er Serine mu§ fd)eiben (Scli.). ©in Dkrl>aupt
mu§ fein (id.), ^a^ muf ein fc^led)ter TOUer fein^ bem niemal^ pel ba^ SBanbern
ein (Song). (£r mu§ [e^r !ranf gewefen fein; cr if! no(^ fo fc^n)a(^. The force
of biirfen : 3d) mu§ nic^t ^crgeffen, " I must not forget."
93raudKi^ + negative generally takes the place of muffeu + negative when it denotes
moral necessity. ©aS trau^ft bu nid}t ju tf)un, wenn bu nii^t luiltft. SSol^t bem, bei* mit
ber neiicn (3eit) nicTjt me^r brau^t ju tc&en (Sch.).
5. ©ollen, + shall, denotes : 1. Dutj and obligafioii.: '®il follfl ^'c^tj^
beincn ^ervn liekn ^on ganjcm |)crsem i)on ganger ^eeirutfb ^on 9a^:^e\n ©cmtile"
(B.), 1)u Mtteil ba fcin foHen, You ought to haVe b«en»tlior^.y «2^ Nec^-j ;
sity and destiny: !Diefe %uxd)i foil enbtgen! t^r '^atipr fdl' fallen.' ' 'dd)Mlntl' '
^^rieben f)ab^n (Sch.). 3^ mi^ nid)t toa^ foU e^ kbeuten (Heine). 2Ba^ foil
ba^ ? What (is that) for? T)axin foUte er ft(^ tanfc^en, In that he was bound
to be deceived, disappointed. 8. It denotes the statement and claim of
another, " is to," " is said to" : 'La^ 3)?eter foK ac^t 2;^aler fofien. ©er 'Bdja^
ber ?^il)elungen foil im SfJ^eine lic(^en, (Siekn Strciflinge foUen entfommen fein. 4.
(SoUte approaches the force of the conditional, + " should." ©oKte er nod)
fommenr fag^ i^m, id) ^dtte nidu Icinger n^arten fonnen* (Sollte er and) wo^^l franf
fein ? Is it possible that he is sick ?
6. Swollen, + will, denotes : 1. The will and purpose of the sub-
ject. 2Ba^ njoUtejl bu mit bem Dolc^e ? fprtc^ (Sch.). 3d) will e^ n.>icber ijergef^
fen, voeil ®ie bod) nic^t tt)Dnen,i)a§ id) e^ miffen foil (Q-.). SBolle nur voa^ bu fannfl
nnb bu njirjl fonncn n?a^ bu n?illfi, 2. *'Tobe about," "on the point of."
(Sin armer SBauer tooUtt |!erkn (Mcolai). (£^ mill regnen. Frequent in stage-
directions, „n)itt gc^en," ,,tr>ill abge^n." SCBiE ft($ |)ector etrig »on mir n?enben?
(Sch.). 3. The claim and statement of another, who "says" or ** claims
to " : ©er Beuge xoiU ben STngeflagtcn gefe^en ^akn. ©u n?illft i^n ju einem guten
BweiJe Betrogen ^abcn* Notice the ambiguity of such a sentence as ©er |)err
toill e^ get^an ^akn, *' claims he did it," or according to 1, "wills or wishes
that it be done."
SSolIen is really the most difficult to understand and use. It occurs in a great many
more idioms with ever varying shades of meaning. Notice, e. g.^ G§ witi ycvlautcn, " it
is spread abroad." 23a§ luitl ba§ fagcn ? = "What does that amount to?" "that is
nothing." 3d) iniU e3 ni^t gefeT)cn ^aben, I will act as if I had not seen it or "nobody
shall see it," according to 1. SSenn ber (Sd)ulcr bod) biefe 9JegeI lerneii wotlte, " if he only
would . . . = conditional. STgoIIte ©ott ba^ . . . , Avould to God that . . . ®iefe ^^ebev
Witt nid)t, this pen does not write (well). But it is impossible to give all these meanings.
102 SYNTAX OF THE VEKB— PASSIVE VOICE. 268-
Still Eng. " will " is not far behind the German, ©cllen and woUen should not be con-
founded with Eng. " shall " and '* will " of the future, see 279, 3.
7. !2affen, sometimes classed here, is really a causative auxiliary
and Bever used as such without an inf., which stands as a further object.
^eine ^lage la§t jte fd^aEen (Sch.). Utt^erjuglic^ lie^ er brei 23attcrien aufracrfen
(id.). See 202, 1. A second force is " to allow," *' not to hinder." !£)er
©efangenn^cirter lie^ ben ©efangenen entn)ifd)en» iBaffen ®ie ha^ Meibcn (= to
leave a thing undone. Saffcn, to look, is a neuter verb.
For laffen + reflexive, see 272 ; in the imperative, see 287, 4.
Remark.— Verbs of motion can be omitted, particularly when an adverb expresses
tlve (tirectiom JEdCrfbu mit ? ^(^ niu^ ^in. ®a§ ^a(Je't fcUte fort (ought to be sent).
^if §ut wu^' in Cie 0^aff;tel. But all except mttffen and biirfen can be used as inde-
per^ent veTt)3r i, (?., no ot'.ier verb need be supplied. There is no call for a verb in 2Sa8
. icU ^er i^ut? (Scfi.), "•, W\i3t .i3 tMs hat (here) for ? Notice that fcllen, mogen, and wotten
are really the only ones that deserve the term modal auxiliaries, since they assist in
expressing the mood. See 287-
THE PASSIVE VOICE.
268. The active voice needs no comment. Only transitive
verbs form a complete passive. But transitives whose mean-
ing admits only of an object of the thing, also in transitives
and subjective verbs, form only the third person singular
with the grammatical subject e0 or without it. 3^nen tt>irt)
c|e!^oIfen* @^ n?irt) gelac^t unt» gefungen. ©eftern tt)urt)e gefpielt»
Set un^ jtt $aufe (where I come from) toixl ^iel 2S^ift gefpieft*
269. In the transformation of the active into the passive
voice, the direct object in the accusative becomes subject-
nominative and the former subject is expressed by ijon +
dative denoting the agent and by bur(^ + accusative denot-
ing means and instrument. 33aumgarten erfd^Iug ten SBoIfen^
fc^iegen. 5B. murbe ^on S» erf(^lagen* Vtv 23rtef tr>urbe t)urd^ einen
I^ienftmann beforgt (through a porter). See prepositions, 304, 2.
270. When a verb governs two accusatives both accusa-
tives become nominatives with the verbs of naming, calling,
scolding. Sr murte fein greunb genannt* See 179, 2.
273] SYNTAX OF THE VERB — PASSIVE VOICE. 103
1. With le^ren and fragen the accusative of the thing may be retained,
particularly if that accusative he a pronoun, e. g., 2)a^ (S(^limmfte,tx)a^ un^
iDiberfiSt^rt, ba^ tuerben tt)ir »om ZoiO, gele^rt (G.). For etti?a^ gele^rt tt>erben it is
better to use unterric^tet werben ; for etii>a^ Qcfragt werben, better nad) etma^
gefragt merben* The accusative of the noun now sounds pedantic, though
le^ren in M. H. G. always retained the accusative in the passive. See
202, 2.
271. With a verb governing an accusative, a genitive, or
a dative, the accusative becomes nominative in the passive, but
the genitive and dative are retained. S). xoux^t ^e^ ^ot^i^errat^
angeflagt. !Deiner tt?urt)e geDac^t (no grammatical subject) or e^
XQWXU beiner getacbt* 5!Htr tt^urre gefolgt, /was followed.
1. The verbs fclgen, l^elfen, gc^ori^en, fd)met(^eln, wibcrjpre^^n, banfen often form a
personal passive in the classics and in the spoken language, but it is very questionable
whether this use should be imitated ; certainly not by foreigners who are accustomed
to this construction in their own language and are apt to make mistakes in the active
and say „i(^ folge bid)" if they hear or say „i(^ werbe gefolgt, gefc()mci(^ctt." Those who
defend the personal passive appeal to the older accusative after I)elfen and jc^meic^eln.
272. The reflexive, encouraged by French influence, and man, t^ +
active often replace the passive. For (£^ mtrb gefungen, gepoc^t stands ?i}?an
ftngt, pod^t* Da offnet jtc^ ba^ S^or, Then the gate is opened. Der (Sd)Iuffel
jDtrb jt(^ ftnben, The key will be found. More frequent than the reflexive
alone is jtc^ . . . lajTen, e. g., Sr iDtrb ftd^ befttmmen la^'i^xi ju . . . , He will
let himself be influenced to . . . , He can be induced to . . . Da^ la§t
ftc^ letc^t nta($en, That is easily done. !Da^ Id^t ft(^ pren, That is plausible.
See 290, 3, h. It is clear from this that the German passive is less fre-
quent than the English. The grammars boast more of the full and long
compound tenses than actual usage justifies.
273. Oeigin of the Passive Voice.
1. In O. H. G. fein (5*7?, wesan), werben iwerdan) were used to express the passive.
Gothic alone shows traces of anything like a Latin passive, but even there the peri-
phrastic form had to be resorted to. In M. H. G. the present is ich wirde gelobet ; pre-
terit, ich wart gelobet ; perfect, ich bin gelobet ; pluperfect, ich was gelobet. Worden
was added to the perfect from the 13th century downward, but was not considered
essential until the 17th century. The passive idea lies originally only in the past or
passive participle and not in wevbcn, which means only " I enter into the state of being
„geUe6t," ,,gej(^tagen," etc. Compare the future, id) raerbe lieBen, "I enter into the state
of loving." The M. H. G. ich bin geliebet, ich was {war) geliebet are by no means lost.
Only they are not called tenses now. 3(^ tin getiefet, ba§ ^iw^"^^^ ^(^ gefegt mean ••' I am
104 SYNTAX OF THE VERB — TENSES, [274-
in the state; of being loved," " the room is in a swept state," " has been cleaned," " is
clean." The participles are felt as adjectives. 3<^ &in gclieljt iDorben, fcas ^intmer ift
gefegt worben mean * I have passed into the state of being loved," "the room has
passed into the state of being swept." The transition into this state, and not the
present state, but the fact or action are emphasized, hence the idea of tense is promi-
nent. The fitness of the name of perfect passive for this form and not also for x^ biu
geliebt is apparent because x^ bin geliebt njorben is composed of t(| bin (ge)tt5ort)en (the
perfect) + geliebt. In O. H. G. fein still formed the present as " to be " now in Eng., but
already in M. H. G. werden was the prevalent auxiliary (see above), while sein was
prevalent in the perfect.
2. Perhaps the following examples will illustrate the force of the vari-
ous forms:
2)ie 3;o(^ter if! V)erIobr, is engaged to be married. S^om ©ife befreit jtnb
etrom unb S3ac^e (F. 903). liefer teffel ijl ^on aSergen kgrenjt (Hu.) These
three are not passive tenses. But compare : ^u bent !Bac^erli($cn ivirb ein
(£ontra'|l ijon S^oIIfommen^eiten unb UnijoEfommen^eiten erforbert (Le.) (present
tense). !Diefer 9)un!t ift i)tel bej^ritten n^orben (perf. pass.). The same differ-
ence between n?urbe + participle {= imperfect pass.) and h)ar + partici-
ple (no tense), e.g., |>ome'r war i)or %\itx^ unjlreitig ficiptger gelefen al^ je^t
(Le.). Die ^?>aufer njaren fejllic^ gefc^ntiitft (no tense). Der fRciuber^auptmann
i))ar fc^on gefangen genommen iuorben, al^ feine Seute l^erkifamen (pluperfect
pass.). Der ©pio^n njurbe o^ne n?eitere^ an einen ^jl gefniipft unb er^angt (imper-
fect pass.).
Examples of the future and conditional perfects passive are very rare
in the classics.
Syntax of the Tenses.
Simple Tenses.
274. The Present.
1. It denotes an action as now going on. SBie glan^t tie
(Sonne, mie lac^t tie glur (G.).
2. It is the tense used in the statement of a general truth
or fact or custom, in which the idea of time is lost sight of.
•IDreimal trei ift neun. ®^it i\i tie Siebe (B.)- Sorgen m^^t ©orgen
(Prov.).
3. The historical present is used in vivid narrative for a
past tense. IDag gu ^inj gegeBene Seifpiel ftntet allgemetne 5^ad)^
a^mung; man ^erWt tad 2lnten!en te^ SSerrater^ ; aEe 3lrme'en fatten
»on i^m afc (Sch.).
275] SYNTAX OF THE VERB — TEKSES. 105
4. For the English perfect German (also French) uses the
present when the action or state continues in the present
time, but there is generally an adverb denoting duration of
time qualifying it. Ex.: ^m bin i(^ \khn Zao^t feier (G.). S^tod
^age gektt n^ir fc^on ^ier ^erum (id.). 3* Mn all^ier erft furje 3eit
(F. 1868).
This use is by no means new in German or unknown in English, e.g., *' I
forget why." '' The world by what I learn is no stranger to your generos-
ity " (Goldsmith, quoted by Matzner). It is closely related to the present
sub 2 and 3, and generally translated by " have been " + present participle.
5. The future present, that is, the present with the force of
the future, is much more frequent in German than in Enghsh.
Ex.: 9Zeirt, mm, i^ ge^e na^ Der (BtaU auriid (F. 820). 2Cer mi^,
mx morgen iiBer nn^ befte^It (Sch. ).
It is a very old use of the present, from a time when the periphrastic
future was not yet developed.
6. The English periphrastic present in " I am writing," " I do write"
rarely has corresponding German phrases. For instance, tl)un is dialectic
and archaic. Unb t[)U^ tttc^t me^r in 5Borten framen (F. 385). A large num-
ber of present participles are looked upon as adjectives and stand in the
predicate after fcin; but they do not form a tense (see 273, 1). There is
a difference between the simple present and [etn + pres. part. The for-
mer, if it occur at all, denotes an act of the subject, the latter denotes a
quality of the same or of another subject. Ex.: ^<xxi itimmt teil an etn^a^,
one takes part in something. Scmanb t)l teilne'^menbr one is sympathetic.
©ie ^arbe fc^reit is hardly used, but tie ^arbe t|l etne fd^retenbe, the color is
a loud one. 2)te 5lu^jtd^t rei^t einen,tmmer '^o'^er ivi j^etgcttr the prospect entices
one to climb higher and higher, but bie 5fu^jtd)t tfl rei^enb, the prospect is
charming. Compare the Eug. *' charming," " promising," etc.
275. The Preterit.
1. It is strictly the " historical " tense, used in narration,
when one event is related in some connection vsrith another
event, as following it or preceding it. Ex. : Scifar lam, fa6 unD
ftegte* Sr mart) geBoren, er \tW, na^m ein 3Cei6 uniD \icixb (Gellert).
In the story of the creation in Genesis only the pret. is used until
106 SYNTAX OF THE VERB—TENSES. [276-
chapter 3, verse 4, when the account is summed up Sllfo ijl ^immel mh Srbe
getDortert/ which has the perfect as it should have. See 276.
2. Ifc represents a past action as lasting, customary; also as
contemporaneous with another action. ®eftern tarn t>er SWe^icu^
l)ier au^ ber @tal>t ^inau^ ^\im 3lmtmann (connect ,,^inau^" with
„^nm/' not with „au^ Uv 'Bta'tt") unt) fant mt(^ an^ Uv (Erbe unter
^otttm Mr(otvn, n?ie elnige auf mir ^erumfrabbelten, an^ere mid) nedten
(G.). M^n war ta^ SBort, meil e^ tie 2:^at ni(^t ti?ar (Sch.).
Compound Tenses.
276. The Perfect.
It is used to denote a past event as a separate act or inde-*
pendent fact. The act is completed, but the result of it is felt
in the present and may continue in the present. Ex. : 3d) ^abe
genoffen M^ trl^ifc^e (31M (Sch. ). ^ott ^at ^ie SCelt erfd^affen = God
is the creator of the world, but 3m 5lnfang fdiuf ®ott ^immel unD
grte (B.). Xu ^aft^^ emi(^t, Dctai^io (Sch.). See 279, 2.
1. In the best writers this distinction is generally observed, but not in
the spoken language, in which the perfect is crowding out the preterit.
As an illustration of the exact use of the tenses, particularly of the pre-
terit and perfect, may be recommended the introduction to Schiller's
®ef^i(^te be$ ^hfaM ber ijereinigten S'^ieberlanbe.
277. The Pluperfect.
It denotes a past action which was completed before another
past action began. Ex. : Zili^ I)atte hum feinen Oliidmarfd) ano,c^
txdcn,aU ter ^ontg fein Sager ju ©d)wer)t auf^o6 un^ gegen granlfurt
an tcr €)Uv riidte (Sch.).
278. The Future.
1. It denotes an action yet to take place. Ex. : 3Ca6 trtrt)
(lU^ bem ^int^Iein trerten ? (B.). Der ,^aifer ti^irt) morgen abreifen.
2. It denotes probability and should then not be translated
by an English future as a rule. Ex. : 1)er §unt) trtrt? fec^^ ^a^xt
alt fein (= ift \vo^ or mal}rfd)einUd)), the dog may be or is prob-
280J SYNTAX OF THE VERB — ^TENSES. 107
ably, six years old. SBer flopft? S^ mtrl) ein Settler fetn, it is
probably a beggar.
3. In familiar language it stands for the imperative implying
confident expectation of the result, ^u mirft t)ier Meiben, You
shall stay here. Du n)irft t)ici) t)uten, Take good care not to do it.
For the present witli the force of the future, see 274, 5.
279. The Future Perfect.
1. It is the perfect transferred to the future. Ser^ekn^
mxM i^x fiir euren gelo^errrt eu(^ geopfert ^aBen (Sch.). More fre-
quently than the future, the future perfect denotes probability:
SBo toiv^ er l)ie ^a^^it jugebra^t ^ben ? (Le.), Where can he have
spent the night? g^ tt)irt) tx>a^ antre^ mbl betieutet ^aben (Sch.),
It probably meant something else.
2. As the present can have future fcjrce, so the perfect can
have future perfect force. 5Ri(^t e^er ^en! i(| l^iefe^ SSIatt gu
brauc^en, bi^ eine 3:^at get^an ift, ^if iinwtterfpreAIic^ ten ipodjijerrat
be3eugt (Sch.).
3. In M. H. G., the future perfect is unknown and its force is expressed
by ge prefixed to the present, and by the perfect.
f a. Guard against confounding the modal auxiliaries in German with
the Eng. future. Approach to a future might be felt in JDoHen and foKeiif
e.g., Wa^ njotten fie benn ^erau^ijer^oren, mnn ciuer unf(^ulbtg ifl? (G.) IDer
?Rei(^^tag ju 5lug^burg foE |offentU(^ unfere ^xoit'tit pr 9ieife bringen (G.). See
283, 4.
280. The Conditionals.
They are future subjunctives corresponding to the preterit
and pluperfect subjunctive as the future corresponds to the
present. As in all subjunctives, the idea of tense is not empha-
sized. Preterit subjunctive and I. conditional, pluperfect sub-
junctive and II. conditional are nearly identical in force, but
preterit and pluperfect deserve the preference, particularly in
the passive. In dependent conditional clauses the preterit or
pluperfect subjunctive oidy can stand. In the main sentence
108 STKTAX OF THE VEEB — ^TENSES. [281-
there is no choice between them and the conditionals. Ex. :
D^ne ^einen diat toixx^t i&j e^ ni^t ^tt^an feaben or t)atte i&i e^ nid^t
get^an. ^a^ mxu\t vn an meiner <SteEe t^nn^* SCdreft in l)icr
gen^efen, mein 93ruter tuare nic^t geftorten (B.).
281. The conditionals should be substituted for the subjunctive of
the preterit and of the pluperfect : 1. When the force of the future is
to be emphasized as in : ^at)mt bcr ^ranfe Me 2)?ebtjiu rcgelmci^tg ein, fo vouxht
ba<3 %khtx ijon biefer (Stunbe an aHmd^Uc^ verfd^mtnben* @ie glaut)ten^ fte tt)urben
ftc^ leic^t al^ ^elben barjlellen (Sch.). 2. When the indicative and subjunc-
tive forms coincide as is the case with certain persons in weak verbs :
5luf einen (£ib n)urbe tc^ i^m ni(|t glau^en* „®laul)te" might be pret. ind. 3^i
tDiirbet bieS 9^dtfel mix ixMxtn, fagte fie (Sch.). „^^x tuerbet" could also be
indicative future.
The Tense of Indirect Speech.
282. The rule is : The indirect speech retains the tense
of the direct. Ex.: tk Saume feien gebannt, fagt er, nnl mv fte
fcbatige, itm tt^ad^fe feine ^anD ijtxan^ ^nm ®xah (Sch.). ggmont
beteuerte, t)a§ t)a^ ®an^t ni6>t^ aU tin Za\d)&itx^ gen^efen fei. Xer
^nak Se^auptete, er ^citte e^ nid^t Qtt^an, mnn er ni&it ijon fetnen
®efa^rten la]n ^erleitet morbeit tt>are* Sr fagte an6>, er troUe e^ nic^t
mieter ti^nn, mnn man i^m ie^t ijergebe* Der 3^W9^ fonnte nic^t
fdjiroren, fca^ er ^en ^(ngeflagten ie gefe^eit ftabe*
1. But this rule is not strictly observed. If the main clause contains,
for instance, a past tense, the other clause may take a preterit for the
present, a pluperfect for the perfect, or a conditional for the future : ®a^
xodxtn bie ^Jlanetettf fagte mtr ber ^it^rer, fte regierten ba^ ®ef({)i(f (Sch.). Sl)r
n)urbet bie^ fRatfel mtr erflaren, fagte jte (id.). W\x melbet (pres. for perf.) er, er
Icige franf (id.). If any ambiguity arises, as is not unfrequently the case,
this license should not be indulged in. If the main verb is in the pres-
ent, it is not well to substitute the preterit or pluperfect in the sub-
ordinate clause, because this license is due to attraction of tenses, viz.,
preterit in one — preterit or pluperfect in the other. Compare : ®r
kteuert, er fci bagecnen, he asserts, that he is opposed, dx beteitert, er njctre
bagegen mi^ht be construed as meaning er tDurbe bagegen fein, which means
** he would be opposed." ©r beteuert, er fei bagegen gemefen, he had been
283] SYNTAX OF THE VERB — TE:N^SES. 109
opposed ; er xodn bagegen gewefen might moreover be understood as having
the force of the II. Conditional.
For the mood of the indirect statement, see 285. For further remarks on the use
of tenses, see 284, also the General Syntax.
283. Origin of the Compound Tenses.
1. The compound tenses in all the living languages are products of the development
of so-called periphrastic conjugation, which uses certain independent verbs denoting
existence, possession, transition, or the beginning of an action, in connection with an
infinitive, participle, or gerundive. The more the inflectional endings of the simple
tenses of the earlier periods weathered, the more favorable were the chances for the
growth of analytical and circumlocutory tenses. Compare the Latin amor^ amatus
sum or fui ; excusavi, excusatam, -um habeo or teneo with French je suis aime, -ee,
je fus aime, -4e ; je Vai excuse, -ee, je I' avals excuse, -ee. The Germanic languages
have only two simple tenses. Gothic shows still a mutilated passive. But the future
perfect and pluperfect active and passive sprang up within historic times from a com-
bination of an independent verb with an infinitive or participle, which were at first
felt only as predicate noun or adjective. The participle in O. H. G. could be inflected
like any predicate adjective.
2. At different periods of High German there were different verbs which could be
thus employed. Besides the modern auxiliaries I)a6en, fein and tcerben, in O. H. G.
€igan,+ to own. In Gothic haban + inf. was made to express the future, in O. H. G.
»uln (shall) and werdan + pres. part. ; in M. H. G. besides these, wellen, muezen. %^)
l^aBe ten §ut aBgenommcn or aufgefe^t means originally I have, possess the hat in some
state or position, viz., in my hand (taken off) or on my head (put on). The German
order, too, shows this early construction much better than the English " I have taken
off my hat." Compare the Latin Excusatum habeas me rogo, "Have me excused,
pray," ,,33itte, l^aBe (^alte) mtc^ (fur) entf(i)ulbigt. " ^aben could only be used with tran-
sitive verbs, but losing the distinctive meaning of possession, it could combine with
verbs having an object in the G. and D. and even with no object, viz., with intransi-
tive verbs. §aben required the past participle in O. H. G. in the A., but fein required
it in the N. ©ein could not, from the nature of its meaning, form the perf, or pluperf.
active of any transitive verb, but only of intransitive? denoting a continuance of a state
(Meifccn, fcin) or transition into another state, where it, however, collided with trerben,
used in the future. But notice that the idea of transition and change is in most verbs,
here in question, due to the prefix, ©ein + past participle could onl3r mean existence
in a certain state, at most the beginning or ceasing of an existence.
3. As to verbs of motion, their relation to these verbs is very intimate. When it is
not, l)abcn becomes the rival of fein, as soon as the activity of motion is to be brought
out and not the result. That yein could be used with a past participle of a verb of mo-
tion at all, was partly brought about by its use with a present participle and infinitive.
Such forms as vermutenb, wermogenb, nac^gebenb fein, wevmuten fein are remnants of the
use oism + pres. part, or inf. in M. H. G. We do not feel the participle or infinitive
as such now. They form no tense.
4. SBevben + pres. part, was in M. H. G. more common than werben + inf., but the
110 sy:ntax of the verb — moods. 284-
latter was the established future in the 16th century. From " I pass into the state of
praising " to " I shall praise " is not a long step.
5. The conditionals formed with raurbe sprang up in the 14th century and were set-
tled in the 16th, according to Grimm. In M. H. G. before the 13th century "so^cZe,"
" wolde " were used as in the other Germanic languages, but these lacked the umlaut,
and therefore were not easily distinguishable as subjunctives.
THE MOODS.
Subjunctive.
284. The indicative is the mood of reality, the subjunctive
is the mood of unreality, contingency, possibility.
1. The imperative subjunctive helps to fill out the impera-
tive for the third persons sg. and pi. and the first person pi.
It is a strong optative, see sub 2.
Ex.: ^Ui^ f($tt)ei9e, jeber neige ernilen Sonen nun fetn D^r (Song). (Se^e jeber
xo'm er^^ treibe, fe^e jeber mo er Wxht (G.). (Seten ©ie mir tt)ill!o'mmen. £aff en
xoxx ba$, let us not do this. ®e|en tt>tr biefen ^aragrap^(en) noc^ mal bur(^, let
us go over this paragraph once more. ®e^en ^ie. Slreten bie |)erren gefal^
ligft ein (rare).
2Beite and f ei, feib really subjunctives, are used as imperatives in the second person.
SQBerbe munter, mein ©emiite (Hymn), ©ei rair gegvii^t, metn 58erg (Sch.).
2. The optative subjunctive expresses a wish or request.
The present subjunctive implies confidence of fulfilment.
Only the third person is used.
Ex. : !Did) fii^re burc^ ba^ njtlbkttjegte Ce^en etn pcibtge^ ©efd^icf (Sch.). ^ein
S'^ame fei »ergeffcn (Uh.). Oott ijernte^re bie ®a&e (G.).
The preterit subjunctive implies less assurance, and, like
the pluperfect subjunctive, even no expectation of realization.
Ex. : D tr>aren xo'xx wetter I o war \^ ju ^au^ (G-.). D fa'^fl bu/ ijoller SOion^
benfc^ein ♦ , ♦ (F. 386). Scire er nur noc^ am SeBen ! (Implying „er ifl aBer tot«)»
f^rcmmer (Stab, o ptt^ tc^ nimmer mit bem (Sc^werte bi(^ ijertaufc^t (Sch.). See
also F. 392-7.
3. The potential subjunctive expresses an opinion as such,
a possibility, a mild assertion of an undoubted fact {dipIomatiG
subj.); it stands in questions, direct and indirect; in exclama-
285J SYNTAX OF THE VERB — MOODS. Ill
tions. The preterit and I. conditional are the potential sub-
junctives of the present ; the pluperfect and II. conditional,
of the past.
Ex.: 3(^ reime, hd^V i^, bo^ no(^ fo jiemlic^ pfammenf wa^ j^ufammen geprt
(Le.). t)a^ gittge nod^, '*that might do yet" (id.). 2Ber iDU§te ba^ nic^t?
Everybody knows that, ^atte id) bo(| mmmerme^r gebac^t, ba§ er fo grog toix^
ben witrbe (Le.). 2Bie liege fic^ aCe^ fd^reiben! (G.) (Implying „t^ ijl unmoGU(^")-
%a\t ^attc ic^ ba^ S3e|le ^ergeffen (id,). S5eina|e n^are ic^ gegen einen SBaum gerannt.
2)u ^dttejl i>a^ Qemugt? (Implying „ic^ glaube esS nic^t). 9^id)t, bag ic^ tt)iigte, not
as far as I know.
See also the modal auxiliaries, 267.
4. The concessive subjunctive denotes an admission, yield-
ing, and supposition. Generally only in the third person of
the present and perfect. It borders closely upon the optative
and conditional.
Ex. : (£^ fojle m^ e^ tooUt (Le.). (£^ fet, ''(it is) granted." ©efette, bu
fei)l ein guter ober fc^Ummer, leg^ bic^ auf^ D^r (Uh.). See mogen, 267, 3.
5. The unreal subjunctive stands in conditional sentences
both in the premise and the conclusion, i. e, in the dependent
clause and in the main clause, when the premise is not true.
The preterit and pluperfect stand in the premise; the preterit,
pluperfect, and the two conditionals in the conclusion. The
preterit has present and future force, the pluperfect has future
force only.
Ex. : e^ liege ft(^ alle^ treffltc^ fd^Uc^ten, fonntc man bie <Ba^tn im'mal ux^
ric^ten (G.). 3(^ mare nic^ts^r tvenn i^ bliebe tt>a^ ic^ Mn (id.). 2Benn toix ®elb
6ei un^ ge^abt fatten, fo witrben ix>tr ben airmen toa^ gegekn ^akn.
The premise omitted or represented by an adverb, etc. : 3c^ t^ate ha^
nid^t an Deiner 'Stelle = menn ic^ an 2)einer ©telle mxt, Sir voaxtn be^ 2:obe^.
£)fne 5ll^enftoc! mxt ber SBanberer in bie S:iefe linabgefallen.
The conclusion omitted : 3a tt>enn tt?ir nic^t n)drcn, fagte bie Saterne jum
Syjonb. Da ging jte au^ (Folk-lore).
285. The subjunctive is the mood of the indirect state-
ment, in which the speaker expresses the ideas of another in
112 SYNTAX OF THE VERB — MOODS. [286-
his own words without sharing the responsibility for, and
belief in, the statement. For the mood in the dependent
clause included in the statement notice especially the 3. and
4. sentences of 282 and the last of 328. For examples and
tense see 282.
Imperative.
286. It expresses a command and occurs only in the 2. p.
sg. and pi. For the 1. and 3. p. pi., see 284, 1. Sile mxt 3Beile,
Make haste slowly. Seke l)U mid) meine Seute lennen (Sch.).
Sintet itm (id.). S3artet i^r, int)em toiv ^oran laufen.
1. The pronoun is quite optional ; only when there is a contrast, as in
the last sentence (i^r — tpir), it should stand. In the subjunctive it al-
ways stands.
The imperative is only used in the present and has future force,
but by a license also a perfect imperative occurs : 23efen! S3efcn I (Beib^d
getpefen ! says the apprentice when he wants the brooms to cease being
watercarriers (G.).
287. Other verbal forms that take imperative force and a
very strong one, are :
1. The infinitive : SSlaul (?[J^unl)) ^alten ! Hold your tongue.
5^ic^t anfajjen ! Do not touch.
2. The past participle : T^ie 3;rommel geriibrt (G.). grifc^ auf
^amerat)en, aup^ 9)fert), auT^ 9)fer^ I in t)a^ gelt, in Ut grei^eit
geaogen (Sch.).
3. The present and future indicative : Oeorg, bu Hetbfl urn
mic^ (G). T)u mx\t ben 3lpfel fc^iegen i?on tern .^opfbe^ ^naben
(Sch.). See 278, 3.
4. The modal auxiliaries denoting a necessity, duty, can
express imperative force, also lajfen. Du foHft nid^t fte^len (B.).
^ein Mm\6^ mu§ miiffen (Le.), no man ought to be compelled.
Since the Eng. " let " shows no inflection, notice the German forms :
fia§ un^ ge^en, to a person addressed as bu; plural Saf]! uit^ ge^en. 2a^tn
(Bit un^ ne^eit/ to a person addressed as <3ie.
290] SYNTAX OF THE VERB — lis^EIi^ITiVE. 113
Infinitive.
288. It is a verbal noun and the present infinitive has
neither voice, tense, nor inflection. The compound infinitive
arose Hke the compound tenses (see 283) : gelobt tocxlm, to be
praised; geloBt morDen fein, to have been praised; gelobt )^ahtn, to
have praised.
1. Notice the marked difference in meaning between the present of some
of the modal auxiliaries + perfect infinitive, and the perfect or pluper-
fect + present infinitive. Ex. : !l)er ^utfc^er toiU ben ©efaitgenen gefejen
|aben = claims to have seen him, but ^at t^n fe^en tuoUen = wanted to see
him. 2)er ^aufirer mup i?orbeigegangen fein = must have passed by, but ^at
ijorkige^en miiffen; was forced to pass by, etc.
289. We distinguish between the infinitive without ju and
with ^n.
The former is the older construction. Being a noun, the infinitive always stood in
the D. after ju in O. and M. H. G. But in early N. H. G., when it was no longer in-
flected, the prepositional infinitive gained ground and gave also rise to the gerundive
(see 298). Usage is in many cases still unsettled as to the use of 5u. Its frequent use
is the source of much bad style (see Sanders' „t§auptfd}Wicru3feitett" . . . sub Inf.). The
cases where the infinitive has taken the place of the present participle are mentioned
below under each head. In the gerundive alone the participial form has taken the place
of the infinitive. See 298.
The Infinitive without ^u.
290. 1. It is dependent upon the modal auxiharies. £)er
33ote mitt eg au^ atter Seute "iS^unD erfa^ren i:)abm. "Man fott feen Zclq
ni6.)t ijor Dem 3l6ent) loBen (Prov.). Also upon t^un in quaint and
dialect style, e. g., I^a t^dteit fte fi6 trennen (Uh.). See the
speeches of Wartime and ?!}?argarete in F., I. Upon 1^ahn in the
phrase gut i)ahn. Vn BafI gut reben, it is easy enough for you to
talk, dv t^ut ni(^t5 al^ ♦ ♦ . , he does nothing but . . .
2. In certain phrases dependent upon some verbs of motion;
also upon :^elfen, ^d^tn (command), lajfen, le^ren, lernen, mac^en,
nennen* The verbs of motion are: fpajieren reiten, fa^ren, ge'^en;
\6>la\m Qi^m, \i&i ((^lafen legen, etc. ^ei§t mi(^ ni^t re^en,
114 SYKTAX OF THE YERB — li^^FIl^ITIYE. [291-
l)ei^t mii^ [(^tx^eigen ; tenti meiit ©e^^eimni^ ift mix ^flic^t (G.). Se^re
mi(^ t^utt nadj Deinem 23o^lgefalIen (B.). See Schiller's Tell, 1549.
3. Dependent upon certain verbs of rest: bleiben (most fre-
quently), lie^en, fte^en (rarely); and upon verbs of perceiving:
ftni^en, fii^len (rarely), :^oren, fe:^en; also ):)abm. ^tcdm Heiben, to
stick fast (intr.). (Scblafen liegen. Sir fanten Un ^etc^nam im
SBalne liegert* ^ir fa^eit ten gul)rer ixbtv tern 5lbgrunte f(^it>eBen*
Der ^vroler ^at gembl)nU(^ get)em am §ute fteden, ter Snglanter
Sanger l^erunter^angen. 3d) :^ab^ ei5 ofter^ ru^meu l)cren, tin ^omo^
Ma'nt fijnnf etnen 9)farrer lebren (F. 526-7).
a. <Setn is still so used in dialect. (Sr tft ftfc^cn, jagen, lie has gone afishing, ahnnt-
Ing; ev ift fifc^en geioefen, he has been afishing. With all the verbs sub 3 antl several
sub 2 the present participle was once the rule in older German. Compare the partici-
ple in the predicate, 294, 2.
b. After fitl^Ien, ^oren, laffen, fel^cn the infinitive has either passive or active force,
and often an ambiguity arises which should be avoided by a different construction.
2Btr f)aUn e§ fageit r)oren, We have heard it said. S)ie S)Dggc la^t fid) ttii^t nedcit, The
bulldog will not be teased. 9Bir ^5ren ben ^naben rufen, calling and called (generally
the first). ®er gol^nJutf^er lie^ un§ ntcf)( fa:^ren, the hackman did not let us go, did not
allow us to drive, did not have us driven ®er SD^eiftcv tiefi bie 3;Dd)ter nt(^t malen, did
not allow her to paint and did not have her portrait painted.
4. As subject or predicate with fein and ^ei§en, to be, to
amount to : 5^10^ ei'nmal etn SSunlDer ^offen ^iege ®ott ijerfucben
(Sch.). Q,xn 55ergnugett emarten ift and) tin ^Ser^nugen (Le.).
The Infinitive with ju.
291. 1. It expresses the purpose of an action and in gen-
eral the indirect object ; also necessity and possibility after
neuter verbs, e. g,, fein, bleiben, fte^en, when it has passive force.
T}it ^a6!jt ift titdit ju dnbern. g^ MeiBt nod) i>ie( gu t|un. "La^ ftcl;t
noc^ SU iiSerlegen^ !Da treibt'^ i^n, Den foftUAen fvd^ ^n ermerben
(Sch.).
This is the old and proper use of the infinitive, originally a noun in
the D. governed by ju. In N. H. G. urn was added to express purpose,
but it was really superfluous, though common in the spoken language.
Urn bie (Stromung a^suleiten ^rukn fte ein frifc^e^ Sctte (Platen). 2Bir le^en ni^t
292] SYNTAX OF THE YERB — IKFI:N^ITIVE» 115
wm ju effen,fottbern mir effen urn in leku. The force of ju wasinucli weakened
when urn could thus be added. Besides um, anftatt and o^ne can i^recede
in : an^iatt m^ ju laufen, !am ber 23ar nd^er ^eran. D|ne jtc^ umpfe^en,Iief ber
!I)le6 bai)on. But „um" should never be used except to express purpose.
It is used too frequently. See sub 4.
2. It stands as direct object of verbs, often preceded by, or
in apposition to, a pronoun or pronominal adverb + preposi-
tion. Ex. : %anQ an p ^arfen unt) ju graBen (F. 2355). ^Riemant)
In older periods of the language there was no ju in this case.
3. It stands as subject, in the spoken language, more fre-
quently than without gu ; there is no choice. ®efal)rlid) ift^^ tien
Seu 3U treden (Sch.). Sine fi^one SKenfcfeenfeeie ftnren ift ^eminn
(He.).
4. As adjunct of nouns and adjectives, the latter often being
qualified by ^u and ^mu^. „Xie ^unft fid) klteBt^u ma&icn," 3^
[tola, I^an! ein^uernten, m ic^ U)tt ntc^t fdete (Le.). Du mvt\t Mint)
genug, l^a^ ni4t ein^ufe^n ? ♦ ♦ ♦ Sereit, ^ir ^ur (^^efedfcfeaft l)ier 3U
Bleiben (F. 1431).
After adjectives „um ju" is now far more common than ju alone. 3c^
bin ju alt, unt nur p fptelett, ^u iuttg, urn o'^tte SBunfd^ ju [ein (F. 1546-7). Quite
rare is aU p + infinitive.
5. For the independent use of infinitive, see imperative, 287, 1.
With or without ju in elliptical expressions : S©a^ t^m, fpric^t 3eu^ (Sch.).
2Ba^, am fRanh be^ &xaU in litgenl (F. 2961).
AcCUSATrVTE WITH THE INFINITIVE.
292. In this construction the logical subject of the infini-
tive stands in the accusative. The infinitive stands with or
v^ithout ju. Ex.: §ter ru^et Martin gaulermann, tt>enn man ^ett
ru^^ett fagettlann, ^cr feinen ^eUa^ ni(^t5 ^^than (Wechherlin, quoted
by Blatz). Su^en, Me man Siigen ^u fetn tuei§ (Le.).
1. Accusative with infinitive was not rare in O. H. G. in the translations from Latin
and Greek. It is largely due to foreign influence. In M. H. G. it is very rare. In
116 SYKTAX OF THE VEKB — PARTICIPLES. [293-
modern German it is discouraged by the best authorities, though Lessing uses it quite
frequently.
2. The corresponding English constructions must therefore be rendered freely into
German. I believe him to be my friend, 3(^ glaube ba^ er mein greunb ift or 3(J) i)alk il)n
fur meinen greunb. German loses thus a compact construction.
The Infinitive as a Noun.
293. Some infinitives are felt as nouns only, e, g,, ta^ SeBen,
tai Slnfe^en, ta^ SeiDen* The infinitive used as noun generally
has the article. £)a^ S^aud^en ift l)ier ^erboten* 33eim Uberfe'^en
mu^ man bis an^^ Uniiberfe'^lic^e ^^erangetn (Q.). 'Der Srkn SBeinen
ift ein ^eimli(^ ^a6:itn (Prov.).
Participles.
294, The participles are really adjectives derived from
verbal stems. The present participle retains more of the
verbal construction and force than the pas(^, in which the
idea of tense only appears in intransitive verbs.
The present participle has active force in all verbs and the
noun is the subject of the action. T)er Iad5elnt)e (See, W auf^
get)ente (Sonne, ta^ fc^IageniDe ^Better, " fire-damp." Both parti-
ciples can be used as nouns, adjectives, and adverbs very
much as in English. They stand in apposition, in the predi-
cate and as attributes.
1. Participles in which the noun is not the subject of the action, and those
in which lies passive rather than active force, are still current, but not so
frequent as in early N. H. G. They are not generally countenanced, e. g. ,
M fc^lafenber 5^ad)t, " at night time," *' when everybody sleeps " ; cine ft^enbe
Sebenaart, a sedentary habit of life ; ejTenbe SBaaren, eatables (better (£p^
Jvaaren); cine ijor^abenbe fRd\t, an intended journey. Some of these can be
defended: fa^renbe ^aU, movables, chattels (intrans. verb); erjlauncnbe
9?ac^ric^t, astonishing news (trans, verb) ; eine ntelfenbe ^ui^ (intrans. like
,,tttild)en"); bte reitenbe ^o% postman on horseback. Poetic are ber fc^tDtn-
belnbe %tU, the giddy rock. fSon be^ ^aufe^ tt)eitfc^auettbem ©teBel (Sch.).
2. In the predicate appear now only such present participles as have be-
come regular adjectives : kbeutenb, important ; reijenb, charming ; binrei^enb.
ravishing ; kibenb, in pain, ill health ; brtngenbf urgent. See 274. 6.
L
296] ST]^TAX OF THE VERB — PARTICIPLES. 117
3. In apposition : ^oc^enb, tt)te au^ Dfena ffta^tn, glii^n bte :2ufte (Sch.).
3^ emt)fange fnieenb bie^ ®e[^en! (id.).
4. The participial clause with the present participle is only in very
restricted use in German compared with English. It cannot express an
action preceding or following another action, a cause, purpose, etc. It
has usually the value of an adjective clause and can often be explained
as in apposition. 2)er ^rme, ftc^ an mi(^ ipenbenb, fpra(|j ^aUn 'Bit MitUib,
mein ^txx.
295. The past participle of a transitive verb has passive
force ; that of a verb which forms its compound tenses with
feitt has active force: ^er lauBumfrangte SSec^er (Sch.); ta^ ^erge^
fii^rte ^ol! (id.); tie aBgefegelten @d)tjfe; tier turd^gefadene (unsuc-
cessful) Santita't*
1. But not all verbs that have fein in compound tenses can be thus used ;
the participle must denote the state produced by the action of the verb.
!Dte gefegelten (B(^tjfe, ber gelaufene ^ned)t would not do. !£)er entlaufenc 'BUa'ot
means "the runaway slave." This force is clear from the origin of the
compound tense with fein (see 273, 283).
2. Seemingly a large number of past participles have active force, but
they are either quite wrong or they can be explained as having had origi-
nally passive force. Thus : „Ungebetet i§t man ntd)t" (Gerok) ; wungegeffen in
S3ette ge^n" are as wrong as their English equivalents: One does not eat
unprayed, go to bed uneaten. „S3ebieut" means ** in service," ''invested
with an oflace," hence a servant, elrt ^ebienter. w^erbient," one who has
merits, mil er jt(^ unt etma^ or jemanb ijerbient gemad)t ^at; etngcMlbet means
conceited, taken up with one's self ; etn ^erlogener SD^enfc^, a man given to
lying ; ijerfoffener SJJenfc^, given to drinking, and many other compounds
with i?er- : ijerweinte 5(ugen, eyes red with weeping.
a. That some are now felt as havinj? active force cannot be denied, else the wrong
use mentioned could not have sprung up : gott?, pfltcf)tttergc[feii, forgetful of one's duty,
of God.; toevfdjlafen, " one who slept too long" ; wermeffen, " presumptuous " j toevlegen,
embarrassed ; besides the above.
296. The pecuUar past participles of verbs of motion,
which seemingly have active force, stand in a sort of apposi-
tion or as predicates with fommen, rarely with ge^en, Ex. :
Stam ettt 55ogeI ^eflogen (Song). 3)a fommt be^ ffiegiJ geritten dn
fd)muc!er S^elfne^t (Uh.).
118 SYKTAX OF THE ADVEEB. [297-
1. This use is by no means modern, ^omnten and ge^n are felt as
auxiliaries. Compare ^crloren ge^en.
2» Special notice deserves the past participle with t)ei^en, fein, and
ncnnen, which has the force of an infinitive, but belongs under this head.
Da^ ^ei§t fc^lec^t Qtxoox^tn, That is a bad throw. Unter e^rlic^en Seuten nennt
man ha^ n^do^m*" %xi^^ setvagt i\i ^al^ getT^onnen (Prov.).
297. The participle appears in au absolute construction.
The logical subject is left indefinite (Lessing is very fond of
this). The logical subject stands in the accusative and with
a few, hke au^genommen, eingefc^Ioffen, abgered)net, even in the
nominative. 5l(Ie maren gugegen, ter 5>farrer au^^genommen, Unt)
liefer nun auf Saofoon an^tmnUt, fo ift Me (Ba&|^ !(ar (Le.).
1. Closely related to this construction is the absolute accusative + a
past participle (see 209) and in some cases there may be doubt as to
which is meant. Unb fie jtngt ^inau^ in bie finftcre ^ad)t, ba^ ^luge »Dn 2i3einen
getriibct (Sch.).
The past participle is in elliptical construction in the imperative, see
287, 2.
The Gterundive.
298. It stands only attributively. In the predicate the old
infinitive stands, which it has supplanted. Xer noc^ ju t>e.r-
faufcnte (9(^ran!, the wardrobe which is still to be sold; but ^cr
(Bd)xant ift nod) ^u ^erfaufen, the wardrobe is still to be sold.
See 289, 452.
Though the form is rather that of the gerund than of the gerundive, in construction
it closely resembles the Latin gerundive. Hence the name in German.
SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB.
299. The adverb qualifies a verb, an adjective or another
adverb. Ex. : Tn baft ntt(^ mad^tig ange^ogen (F. 483). Die
unBegreiflicfe ^el)en SBerfe ftnt) l)errli(^ mie am erften Za^ (F. 249-50).
Da^ ift fe^br fcfcon gefd)riekn.
1. The adverbs of time and place often accompany a noun with the
force of an attribute : ^ox Seuem brokn fte^t geMicft, ber (jclfen le^rt uub -^ilfe
fcl)lc!t (F. 1009-10). ©eorg V. (ber giinfte), einft ^onig ijon ^annoijer, jlarb im
5lu^lanbe.
3011 SYNTAX OE THE PREPOSITIOK. 119
2. The adverb stands as a predicate : !Die f(^onen Beitett »ort 3lraniuc§
finb nun »orukr (Scli.). 1)te Z^ux ijl ju (one can supply „gemac^t")* 2)er or
tern ^JliniTter ijl ni^t wo%
a. Do not confound cjut and wol^l. Except in a few cases, as in wol}! t^un, to do
good, wo^l does not qualify a transitive verb. We do not say in German vdoI^I f^reifccn,
ttJD^I antnjDvten, rvc^ anfangeu in the sense of English " well." ©v l)at e§ luo:^! gefd)rteljen
means " he wrote it, indeed, (I assure you) " ; or it is concessive and can mean : " to be
smre he wrote it, but then — ." In the last sense ircl)l lias no stress.
3. With adjectives or participles used as nouns that are felt rather as
substantives than as adjectives or as derived from a verb, the adverb
chang^es to an adjective: ein m^ fStxtoawWx > ein na^er il^emanbter; ein
intint SBefannter > ein intimer 23efannter» But compare Goethe's famous line :
300. An adverb ma}^ strengthen the force of a preposition
by standing before or after the preposition + case. This is
always the case when the adverb is the X3refix of a separable
compound verb: ring^ urn tie 8tat^t (^erum), mitten t^ur^ im
2Ba(i?, in t>a^ ®orf ^inein, am tern ®arten :^erau^» S^ ritten l^rei
Sfteiter ^um Z^oxt ^tnau^ (Uh.).
1. Mark the adverbs which are only adverbs and not adjectives :
tt)o|l, fajl, \^on, fe^r, neuUc^f freilic^, fru^ (rare), [pat (rare), balb, and others.
2. The uninflected comparative and superlative of adjectives serve
also as adverbs. Notice the difference between au^ + A. and an + D.
<Bk fangen auf ba^ bej^e (Uh.), they sang as best they knew how. This is
absolute superlative. ®ie fangen am kften, they sang best of all, any. This
is relative superlative.
SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION.
301. The prepositions express the relations of a noun to a
verb or to another noun.
1. Prepopitions are originally adverbs, and the distinction between prepositions,
adverbs and conjunctions is only syntactical. 'Denn is, for instance, a conjunction =
for, and an adverb = then, than ; wa^renb is a conjunction = while, and a preposition
= during. Prepositions could not originally *' govern " cases. A certain case was
called for independently of the preposition, then still an adverb. In Greek there are
prepositions governing three cases, which shows how loose the connection between
case and preposition was. In fact nearly all adverbs, old and new, can be traced back
120 SYJsrrAx of the peeposition — genitive. [302-
to cases of nouns or pronouns. They are isolated or "petrified" cases, and as such
could only stand in the loosest connection with the living cases, which they gradually
began to " govern."
2. Prepositions can govern difierent cases in different periods of the language.
The preposition has been partly the cause of the loss of case-endings. Its function
becomes the more important the more uninflectional (analytical) a language becomes.
It is one of the most difficult and subtle elements to master in the study of a living
language. For another reason the preposition is very important, viz., the preposition
-l-case has supplanted and is continuing to supplant the case alone, directly dependent
upon a verb or noun. The two together are much more expressive and explicit than
a case alone. In ©ie Siebe be3 S3ater6, the genitive may be subjective or objective, but
there is no ambiguity about tie Siebe jum SSater, be§ 3Satei§ Stebe jum (So^ne.
Classification and Teeatment of the Peepositions Accoeding
TO THE Cases they Goveen.
302. Prepositions governing the Genitive:
Unweit, mitteU, fraft unt) ma^ren^; (aut, t)crmoc(e, ungeac^tet; oBer^
^alb unt) unterl)afb; inner^alb unt^ auger^alb; tie^feit^, jenfeit^, fatten,
tr)e(^en; ftatt, au^ (dng^, ^ufolge, tro^.
These are all cases of substantives or adjectives (participles) and their
number might be easily increased, e.g., by bejitglic^, with reference to ;
angejtclta, in the face of; feiten^, on the part of ; inmttten, in the midst of,
etc.
(The order is the one in which they are given in German grammars. The semicolon
shows the ends of the lines of the doggerel.)
We comment in alphabetical order briefly upon those that seem to require comment.
Often a mere translation will suffice.
1. Slnjlattr an — flat t, flatt, + instead of. T)xam (from which,
from whose breast) flatt ber golbenen £iebcr etn SStutfira^I ^oc^ auf fprm9t(Uh.).
5ln 2:o^ter jlatt, in daughter's stead. ®tatt sometimes with the dative. It
also governs an infinitive like o^ne, translated by " without + participle."
See Infinitive, 291, 1.
2. 5luper^aU + outside of; tnner^aU + inside of; oBer^aU,
above; unter^aH, on the lower side of, below. They are all more
expressive than the simple forms. They rarely govern the dative.
3. !D i e ^ f e i t (^), j e n f e i t ((3), this side of, on the other side, beyond.
Rarely with the dative.
4 ^ a n> e n, ^ a U e r, !^ a I b, on account of, + in behalf of. Follows
302] SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION — GENITIVE. 121
its case. Frequent in composition : ht^f^al^, therefore ; meittet^alBctt^ on my
behalf; ^Iter^ ^albcr, on account of age. Comp. tDcgen and toiUm*
5. traft, according to, by virtue of. traft be^ ©efe^e^ ; fraft be^
^mte«. Formerljonly ill traft,^.^',, ba§flet^ bcr aebile(©o^n) . ♦ ♦ in ^raft
attein be^ fftin^^f ba^ ^aupt, ber gurjl be^ |)aufe^ t»erbe (Le.). Comp. laut.
6. 2aut, from, «nac^ 2aut," laut^ (Lutlierj, means ''according to,'
" bj." Saut ©efe^l^# by command ; laui be^ Xeflamentc^, according to the
last will and testament.
Plural nouns without articles in which the genitive could not be dis-
tinguished stand in the dative : laut 33riefenf according to letters. Saut
means literally according to a verbal or written statement ; fraft gives a
moral reason.
7. ^itttl^, mitteljl (most common), ijetm it telftr by means of,
with. 2)?ittel|^ tim^ ^ammtx^, etne^ S3o(}rer^. It is more expressive than
mit or burc^. Rarely with the dative.
8. D ^f rare and archaic. With genitive if causal (on account of) ;
with dative if local (above), and temporal (during). T)a minttn sufammen
bie ©renabter^ tt)ol)l ob ber flctglidjm ^unbe (Heine). Db hmx Salb; nib bem
SBalb (Sch., Tell); ob bem 5lltare (id.),
9. 2; r If with genitive and dative, in defiance of, in spite of ; in the
sense of **in rivalry with," ''as well as," always with the dative. Zxoi^
be^ ^cftigen 9iegen^ fu^ren n)ir aK ^ie ©dngerin ftngt tro| eincr ^a^tiQaU, as
well as a nightingale. Comp. the forms ju or jum ^iroi^e preceded by a
dative : ?D^tr jum 2:rc|c fu:^r er fort ju lefen, in defiance of me or to defy me
he continued reading.
10. U n a n g e f e ^ e n/ setting aside, unbefc^abet, without detriment to,
u n g e a d) t etf notwithstanding (very frequent). The last two also with a
preceding dative; bemungea(^tet is felt as an adverb. These are very
modern prepositions. Unwett, unfern# not far from, occur also with
dative.
11. 2} ermogCf in virtue of, through, in consequence of, by dint of.
Denotes a reason springing from a quality of the subject : ^ermoge feiner
fReblt(^fctt, through his honesty. We could not say fraft feiner 9i*; ijerntogc
(and not fraft) grofer ^Infhrengungett/ by dint of great efforts. (Perhaps from
r^nac^ 35ermogen»")
12. Sal^renbr during. Sometimes with the dative: n)a^renbbemf
meanwhile.
13. 935 e g e tt, on account of, both preceding and following the noun ;
122 SYNTAX OF THE PKEPOSITIOJST — DATIVE. [303-
also with the dative. SBegen denotes also a motive and an impediment.
(Seiner ®ro§e wegen fonnte basg ©ii)iiT nid^t burd^ ben M<xm\. T)tx SD^itlter war
wegen [einer <Btaxk kru^mt. SSegen from ijon — megcn, still common in „^on
9iec^t^ ia?egen," strictly, in justice.
14. 2B i n e n, generally u nt — w i H e n, denotes the purpose, the ad-
vantage or interest of a person. Urn meiner 9^u^e nsillen erfldren @ie ftd^
beutUd)er (Sch.). Urn be^ ©o^ne^ ttJiHen, urn meinetmillen, for the sake of or in
the interest of the son, for my sake. 2Begenr ^alben, and njtCen all appear
with pronouns, and are used promiscuously.
15. 3 u f I ge, as frequently with the dative, denotes the result, " in
consequence of," Bufolge be^ 5luftrage^, in consequence of the commission ;
ben SJerabrebungen pfolse, in accordance with the verbal agreements.
Prepositions governing the Dative.
303. @(^reib: mit, nad), nM)\t, nebft, famt; feit, "oon, ju, ^umi'ter;
entgegen, au^er, au^ — fteto mit tern Xati'o nie^er*
1. ^ ^, still nsed in the Alemanic dialect (Baden, Switzerland) as a
preposition. In business style it denotes the place from which merchan-
dise is delivered or the time after which anything is to be had : ab |)am^
HxQ, ah ^tnia^x, ab = "all aboard.''
2. 5ru ^ denotes the starting point of a motion, the opposite of in +
accusative, = "out of," "from": 3lu^ ben Slugen, au^ bem Sim, '*out of
sight, out of mind " : au^ bem ^enjler fe^en, to look out of the window.
Origin and descent: an^ alten Bciten, from olden times; au^ ^annoijer,
from Hanover. Material : au^ Se^m, of clay : m^ ?KefI, of meal. Motive :
au^ 5!)?itleib, ^a^, from pity, hatred. Origin also in au^ Srfa^runQf from
experience ; au^ S^erfc^en, by mistake. Notice the idiom : au^ ^iJln geburtig,
a native of Cologne, born in C.
3. 5r u § e r, outside of, beside, the opposite of in + dative. Denotes
also exception and *' in addition to." More frequent in the figurative than
in the local sense, because au§ert)alb is more precise. S(u§er bem ^aufe, not
at home ; au^er ^aufe fpeifen, to dine out ; au§er ftc^ fetn, to be beside one's
self, ^nx ber S^etter wax an^er mir ba. Mark once the genitive au§er Sanbe^
ge^^en, to go to foreign parts ; also the accusative in auper alien B»)cifel fe^en»
^ put beyond all doubt. (Se^en being a verb of motion.)
4. S3et. Original meaning is nearness, hence by, near, with : bet ber
€?(^eune, near (by) the barn ; bet ber Xante, near the aunt or at the house of
303] SYISTTAX OF THE PREPOSTTIO:^^ — DATIVE. 123
the aunt ; Oeim ^tu^, by Jove ; bie (Sd)la(^t ki 255ort^, the battle of W. ; bei
3:ifc^ fein, to be at dinner ; Bet Xao, unb kt ^a^i, by day and by night ; M
(einem) S'iamen nennenf to call by name (but i^riebric^ m i t Xiamen, Frederic
by name) ; Ui (rare) neunjig ©efangenen, about ninety prisoners ; 16et (Strafe
ijon idjn Maxh ten marks fine. 3c^ ^abe fetn ®elb bet mtr, I have no money
about me. The accusative stands in bei Sette legen, bringen, jleUeit, to lay,
put aside. In M. H. G. after verbs of motion regularly the accusative,
but in the spoken language now discarded, though still found in the
classics.
5. SBinnetif sometimes with genitive, expresses now time only,
''within^* : binnett bret 3a^rett; within three years. < be — innen.
6. ©ntge'gen denotes approach, both friendly and hostile, towards
and against ; stands generally after its case. Sir gtitgen bent i^reunbe txA^
gegett; fu'^rett '^zm SBtttbe entgegett. With verbs of motion it frequently forms
separable compotmds and is really more adverb than preposition.
7. ® e g e tt u' b e r, opposite, facing ; generally after its case ; rarely
gegett — itber. !£)em (5(^loffe gegettiiber*
8. ® e ttt d §, preceding and following its case, according to, in accord-
ance with ; really an adjective, ^ent 35erfpred^ett gemd^, according to the
promise ; gemdf bem ©efe^e, according to the law. It is more definite
than tta(^»
9. •B'Jit means 'Mn company with/' *'with"; denotes presence, ac-
companying circumstances and instrument. %xm in 5lrm niit btr, fo forb^'re
ic^ metn 3a|r^unbert in bie (Sc^ranfen (Sch.). ^tt ^rcuben, gladly; ette mit
Seile, hasten slowly ; mit ^ug unb SRec^t, justly (emphatic) ; mtt ber 3eit
pflitcft ntan 0tofen, in due time . . . ; nttt %\tx^t intentionally ; mit bem ^^fetl,
bem «8ogen (Sch.). (See mitteia, 302, 7.)
10. S'? a c^ denotes originally a " nearness to," being an adjective (na^e);
then *'a coming near to," and generally corresponds to Eng. "after" in
point of time, order. With verbs of motion (literal and figurative) " to "
and " after/' 9^a(^ etiuct^ flreben, ftc^ fe^nen, to strive after, long for ; m6) '^xi"
ternac^t ; nac^ bir fomme ic^, it is my turn after your ; na(^ S3erlin retfen* *' In
accordance with," not so expressive as wgemdp," in this sense often after
its case. S'lac^ ben ©efefeen »erbient er ben ^ob ; \itm 2©ortlaute na^, literally.
Aim: m6) ettx>a^ fc^Iagen, f(^te§en, to strike at, shoot at. 9^ac^ ettua^ fd^mecfen,
rted)en; etc., something has the smell, taste of ; m^ etma^ itrteilen, to judge
by ; nac^ etwa^ or jemanb f^icfen, to send for. (See ju and gemdf
124 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION" — DATIVE. [303-
11. 91 d (^ ll is the superlative of na^e (nac^), and denotes very close
nearness to in place, order, = + *' next to." Bundcbjl lias no different force.
ilnb nd(^|l bem Seben n?a^ erfle^ft bu bir? (G.).
12. ^tl\l denotes very loose connection and connects also things
and persons not necessarily belonging together; famt, on the other hand,
only what naturally belongs together. 5(uf etner (Stange trdgt jte etneu ^ut
nebjl einer Saline (Sch.) (a hat and a banner). < nebenf! < L. G. nevens.
13. ©am tf mit famt# jit \amt, " together with." ^id) famt ntctncm gan^en
^eere bring^ ic^ bem |)erjO(] (Sch.). See neb)l. It implies a close union, which
does not lie even in mit*
14. © e i t, older jtnt, = + since, denotes the beginning of an action and
its duration to the present moment, ©eit biefem S^age fc^metgt mir jeber
9)?unb (Sch.). ©r ift herein feit me:^reren ©tunben (id.), it is several hours since
he came in (into the city). . (Sett einigen 3a^ren ja^lt er feine Binfen, For sev-
eral years he has paid no interest.
15. 25 H/ *' from," denotes the starting point of a motion or action in
time and place. Its case is often followed by another preposition or by
Ijer. S^on ber ^anb in ben 9)lunb; ijon 2Borten fam'^ ju ©(^Idgen, from words
they came to blows. 23on Dftern U& 9?ftng|len ifl fiinfjig 2;age. Origin :
2Balt{)er »on ber S^ogelmeibe* %vix\t »on SBi^marcf. ^err i?on (B(^uleml)urg»
Hence ijon in the names of persons denotes nobility : ^err ijon <Bo unb vSo,-
S5on Sugenb auf; »on ®runb au5, thoroughly ; »on Djlen '^er. Separation :
fret, rein »on etma^. Supplants the genitive : etn ^ann ijon S^re, »on gro§en
^enntniffen ; ber ^oM ijon 9)art^. Denotes the personal agent : SBaHenjletn
wurbe i)Ott ^Jtccolomtni ^tntergangen unb i?on »ielen ©eneralen im 'Bixd^t (in the
lurch) gelaffen. Notice : <B^nxh ijon einem 2Birt (Le.). Cause : na§ »om
(with) %au, ijom Sffegen*
16. Bu denotes first of all the direction toward a person (but m^
toward a thing) + "to" : ju jemanb ge^en, fommen, |>red)en, etc. ©te fang ju
i^m, fie fprac^ ju t^m (G.). Bu ft^ fommcn, *'corae to" ; etraa^ lu fic^ jleto, to
put something in one's pocket. (This is its only use in 0. H. G. In
M. H. G. its use spread.) In dialect and in poetry it stands before names
of cities and towns (= at). 2n ©tra§burg auf ber (Bc()anj (Folk-song). 3^r
[etb mcin ®afl ju <Sd)ii3\)5 (Sch.).
In certain very numerous set phrases and proverbs ju stands before
names of things. Direction: ijon Drt ju Drt, from place to place ; ju
Sett(e), lUx Rxx^t, jur (Sc^ule, ju ©runbe, ju 9iate ge^en = " take council " ;
i
304] SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION — ACCUSATIVE. 125
many loose compounds with fa^ren; ju %aUf jit (Statten, ju ^c^abcn/ p Snbe,
ju (£t)ren fommen; lu ^c^anben, j« ^Jtc^te; jum <£d)clme ti^erben.
Place where ? : „5U beibeit ®eiten bee di^z'm^" (Song) ; ju ^aufe, pr ^anb
fetn; ju i^iipen Uegen. Manner of motion: ju ^an'o, px Staffer, ^u ^Jferb (ju
Sflo§), jii 2Bagen^ ju %u^ = Eng. ''by" and "on." Transition or change :
sum ^onig madden/ wa^leit, ernenncn ; pm ^Jarren, jum fcejlen l^alm, to make a
fool of. Degree or size, numbers : jitm Zdl, in part ; ju |)unbertcn/ by the
liundred ; ju breien ii?aren n)ir im 3iwtmer, there were three of us in the
room ; jum Xobt ktriiM (Gr.), sad unto death. Combination of things :
9?e^men Sie nie ^^fejfer, ©atj ober ©enf ju (with) bem Si? Dft |atf er faitm
SBaffer ju ©d)tt)arj&rDt itnb 2Bur|l (Bii.). Notice the use of ju before nouns
followed by (^inein^ ^eraui3, etc.: jum Sl^ore l)inaue; jitm i^enfter ^erau^. Time
(rare) : Unb fommt er ni^t ju Djlern, fo fommt er p S^rinita't (Folk-song). After
the noun = "in the direction of," " toward" : bem 2)Drfe p, toward the
village ; md) bem Dorfe, to the village.
Prepositions governing the Accusative:
304. Si^, turc^, fiir, gegert, o^ne, foni^er, urn, mi^er*
1. 35 i ^, till, until, denotes the limit in time and space. When denot-
ing space it is followed by other prepositions, except before names of
places. The nouns of time rarely have an article or pronoun. 35i^ ^aft^
nac^t ; M^ an^ Snbe aHer Dinge ; M^ ^ierl)cr unb tti(^t ji?eiter ; H^ an ben l^tUtn
%Ci^ ; neunjig U^ ^unbert Maxt; M^ Sraunfc^weig. (331^ < hi -f a;s, + Eng.
by + at.)
2. !Durd^r + " through," denotes a passing through : burc^ ben SBalb^
bur(^^ S'iabelo^r* Extent of time (the case often followed by ^tnbnrc^):
burc^ Sa^rje^^nte ^inburc^; bk ganje Beit (^in)bur(^. Cause and occasion, very
much like au^ : burc^ 9'Jac^lafftgfeit, burc^ eigene (Bd^ulb. Means: burc^ einen
^feil »ern)unben, burc^ einen ^ienflmann I^eforgen, attend to through a porter,
(X)urc^ more definite than mit* See this and mittel^. It denotes now no
longer the personal agent.)
3. S ii r, + for, denotes advantage, interest, destination : 2Ber nic^t fitr
mi(^ i\t, ijl wtber mt(^ (B.). @r fammelt fitr bie airmen* 2)ie (Sc^eere x]! fein ©picl^
jeug fiir ^inber. !Dte 3Ba^rI)eit x\i i)or()anben fitr ben SBeifen, bie ©c^on^eit fiir ein
fit^lenb ^erj (Sch.). Substitution and price : !l)a tritt fetn anberer fur i^n cin
(Sch.). 9)?etn 2thin ij^ fitr ®oIb ntd)t fcil (Bu.). Limitation : Sc^ fur meine
^erfon* ®enug fitr btefe^ ^aL S^r jeigtct einen fecfen 5D?ut , ♦ ♦ fitr eure 3a^re
(Sch.). (BtM fitr <BtM, point by point. In its old sense (local) only in
certain phrases : (Bdjxitt fitr (by) (Bd)xxn, %aQ fitr (by) Xac^, <Ba^ fitr (after)
S'a|^* (See ^or.)
126 SYNTAX OF THE PREP0SITI0I5" — ACCUSATIVE. [304-
4. ® e 9 e n denotes " direction toward," but with no idea of approach
that lies in ju and nac^. It implies either friendly or hostile feeling if
persons are concerned ='* towards,'" "against." ®egen bit SSanb le^nen;
gegen ben Strom fc^wimmcn* SBenn ic^ Tni(^ gegen fte ijerpflic^ten \oU, fo muffen fie"*^
au^ gegen mic^ (Sch.). ®ibt t^ ein SDlittel gegen bte ©c^|[»tnbfuc^t ? ©egen ^umm*'
|eit fdmpfen ©otter felbf^ ijerge&en^» Exchange, comparison : 3^ mtit ^unbert
gegen ein^. SfJoIanb toar ein 3n?erg gegen ben Otiefen. Indefinite time and num-
ber: "towards." 2)er ^ranfe fc^lief erfl gegen ^D^orgen ein. !Der ^5elb^err |)atte
gegen brei^unbert taufenb ©olbaten* ©egen bret U^r. ©egen once governed the
dative almost exclusively and traces of it are still found in Goethe.
® e n is still preserved in «gen ^immel/' ®en < gtn < gein < gegen,
+ again. See entgegen/ which implies a mutual advance.
5. £)i)n e, '' without," the opposite of „mtt," «^et." 9)?tt ober o^ne Maufel,
gilt mtr gleic^ (Sch.), " With or without reserve, it is all the same to me."
Sin ^flitter o^ne ^5ur(^t unb S^abel. In wO^nebem" is a remnant of the D. in
M. H. G. ; jweifel^o^ne of the G. occurring after the M. H. G. adverb dne,
from. Stmai3 t|l nic^t o'^ne, there is something in it (Coll.). D^ne m Com-
position, see 489, 3 ; + infinitive, see 291, 1.
6. ©onber, ''without," is now archaic except in set pnrases like
wfonber ®leid)en," wfonber Btvetfel," " without compare," " no doubt," + Eng.
asunder. Once governed the accusative and genitive.
7. Um, "around," " about." Unb bte <Sonne, jte ntacbte ben tr>etten 0litt urn
bte 2Belt (Arndt). Unb mn i^n bte ®ro§en ber .^rcne (Sch.). ^er or ^erum often
follows the case : 3n einem ^albfret^ jlanben urn i^n ^er fed^^ ober jtekn gro^e
^onig^Mlber (Sch.). It denotes inexact time or number: Um 9J?ttternad)t
begral^t ben ;2ei6 (Bii.). Urn brei ^unbert ^orer, an audience of about three
hundred. (®egen is rather " nearly," um means more or less.) But „um
breiijiertet fitnf" means "at a quarter to five." ''At about" would be
ffiingefd^r um'' or ^um ungefd^r," e. g., ungefdBr um 6 U^r. It denotes further
exchange, price, difference in size and measure : ^ug"' um 5[uger B^^n um
3a^n (B.). mt^ ifl eu^ feil um ®elb (Sch.). Um ^ei BoH ju flein. ©r ^at
ji(^ um jwei 5)fenntge verrec^net* Loss and deprivation : um**^ ;2eBen Bringen, to
kill ; um^^ ®elb fommen^ to lose one's money, ^a n?ar^^ um i^n gefd^e^n (G.),
He was done for. SBer brad^te mid) brum? (um beine Siebe) (F. 4496), Who
robbed me of it? It denotes the object striven for: um etnja^ n?erben,
fptelen, frageUf Ibitten, f^retteUf beneiben, etc. The object of care, mourning,
weeping ; SBein^ um ben S3ruber, boc^ md)t um ben ©eltebten toeine (Sch.). (Bd)abe
tt)dr^0 ViXSi eure ^aare (id.). 9^tc^t um biefe t^ut^^ mir leib (id.).
308] THE PEEPOSITIOK — DATIYE AKD ACCUSATIVE. 127
8. 2B i b e r, ** against," always in the hostile sense. Denotes resistance
and contrast : 2Ba^ ^tlft un^ ^t1)x unb SBaffe mbtx ben ? (Sch.). ©^ ge^t i^m
tt>iber bie S^latur, It goes against his grain. + Eng. " with " in withstand.
Prepositions governing the Dative and Accusative.
305. 2ln, anl ()inter, in, mUn, nUx, unkx, vor, jtuifci^en.
1. In answer to the question whither ? they require the
accusative. In answer to the question where? the dative.
3)flan3C tie Siiume ijor t)a^ $au^* tk SSaume fte^^en vor l^em ipaufe.
2. In answer to the question how long and until when ?
they require the accusative. In answer to the question when ?
the dative : 3«t ^ai^n 1872 murtc ©trapurg toituv aU Deutfdje
Uni^erfitat erojfnet* Sir reifert auf v^ier^e^n ^age in^ Sat)*
3. When an, auf, in, ixln, unter, ^or denote manner and cause,
then auf and ixbtx always require the accusative, but an, in, unter,
^or generally the dative, in answer to the questions how and
why? 2Bir freuen un^ ixUv {= over) and auf (= looking for-
ward to) feme 9ln!unfL 2luf tiefe SBeife, but in tiefer ^eife.
Der Settler n?einte ijor ^i^euten iiber tie ^errli^e ®at)e.
The above general rules, as given in Kraase's grammar, will be found of much
practical value.
306. 1. 5ln + Dative.
After nouns and adjectives of plenty and want : Syjangel an ®elb, nx^ an
©utern. After adjectives when the place is mentioned where the quality
appears : an beiben %}X^tr\ la^m, an einem Sluge Minb. After verbs of rest,
increase or decrease, and after those denoting an immediate contact
or a perception : %n ber ^mUt fag bcr ^nabe (Sch.). (£0 fe^lt an 33iid)ern.
!Der 5lu^tx)anberer lltt am 2Be*feIfteber» t)tx Si^euner fii^rt ben S3dren an einer
.R'ette, !Den SJogel er!ennt man an ben i^ebern (Prov.). It denotes an office
and time of day : am 2:^eater, an ber Uni^erjttat, am ^mte angefiellt fein, to
hold an office at ... ; am Wlox^tn, %knt> ; e^ ijl an ber Beit . . ♦ , it is
time ....
128 THE PEEPOSITIOK — DATIVE AI^D ACCUSATIVE. [306-
2. 21 n + Accusative.
After htnUn, erinncrn, m^nen and similar ones, and verbs of motion,
2)eufet an ben 9^u^m, nid^t an bie ®efa|r. (Se^en (Bit ft(^ bo(^ an^ %tn^tx (near
tlie window). Inexact number : an bie brei mai ^unbert taufcnb Mann (as
many as). From its English cognate "on" an differs very much in
meaning. *' On " generally is auf. See also 300, 2.
3. 2iuf + "upon." For auf + Dative, see 305, 1, 2, 3.
It denotes rest or motion upon the surface,
3luf + Accusative.
Stands after verbs of waiting, hoping, trusting, etc., e.g., auf ctn)a^
tt>arten, ^ojTen, fi(^ kftnnen (recall), gefapt fetn, fic^ frenen (see 305, 3), ijerjic^ten^
(e$) auf etma^ wagenf ^oren. Here it stands generally for the old gen. with-
out preposition. 3^ tann mx6) auf bie genauen Umftanbe ni^t ibeftnnen, I cannot
recall . . . ©er |)unb njartet auf fein ^reffen, SKerfe auf bie ^cxit be^ Se:^rerd.
Zxot^t ni(^t auf euer 9^e(iyt (Sch.). After adjectives denoting pride, envy,
anger, malice, e.g., eiferfiic^tigf neibif(^, ftolj, Bijfe, txlo\t: eiferfud)ti9 auf feme
©i)re (Sch.) ; jlol^ auf feine Unfc^ulb; erbofl auf ben ©efangenen (it^er would mean
cause). Exact time, limit, and measure ; often with ,M^,*' Here belongs
the superlative, see 300, 2. S5t^ auf^g SBIut, S3i^ auf Speif' unb 2:ranf
(Le.). (£^ tfl ein 2?iertel auf brei, a quarter past two. ^uf bie SD^Jinu'ter
^efu'nbef auf ©c^u§n)ette, at shooting distance. S3i^ auf bie S^Jeige, to the
last drop. 5(uf fteben fc^on eine^ mieber (Le.). (Nathan had '* toward " or
" as a return for " his seven dead sons one child in Reclia.) 2luf eine Maxf
ge:^en l^unbert 3>fennige.
4. $ t n t e r + " behind," opposite of ,fiovJ' See 305, 1, 2.
It denotes inferiority : Die franjoftfc^e ^frtitlerie f!anb mlt Winter ber beutf(i)en
IwxM (ambiguous, either stood far back of the G. or was much inferior to
the G.). Notice the following idioms : fid) Winter etttja^ madjen, to go at with
energy. 3(^ !ann nid^t baMnter fommen, I cannot understand it. (S^ Winter
ben D^ren ^aben, to be sly (coll.) ; Winter bie D:^ren fd)Iagen, to give a box on
the ear ; ft^ et»a^ l^inter bie D^ren f^reikn, to mark well.
5. 3^ + in, into (A.).
The German and English prepositions are more nearly identical than
any other two. See 305, 1, 2.
306] THE PREPOSITION — DATIVE AlTD ACCUSATIVE. 129
3tt + Accusative.
Denotes direction, including transition, change, division : SSettn ber
2iih in @taui) jerfaEen, lebt ber gro^e 9lame noc^ (Sch.). 2)eutf^lattb jenig auf
bicfem 0Jei(^^tage in stt)ei Oieligio'nen unb imi ^olitifc^e 5)artei'cn (id.).
6. ^ e b e n, near, by the side of. See 305; 1, 2. < eneben,
lit. "in a line with."
7. Uber + over, above. See 305, 1, 2, 3.
iiber + Accusative.
After verbs denoting rule and superiority over, e.g., l^errfi^enf ftegenf
vcrfiigen (dispose) ; laughter, astonishment, disgust, in general an expres-
sion of an affection of the mind, e. g., itber etn)as$ la^en, erftaunen, ft(| ♦ ♦ . ^e^
nagen,rtc^ . . ♦ entritjlen, fic^ argern. (For an older simple genit.) ^arlber^ro^e
ftcgtc uber bte ©ac^fen. ^a^ 3:e|lament ^erfiigt iiber ein groped 33ermogen. 2Bie
fhi^te ber 9)okl iiber bie neuen Si^re^en (G-.). 'Die ©efangenen kflagen ftc^ uber
i^re S3e|anblung. fiber fein S3ene^men haU id) nti(^ rec^t gecirgert. It denotes
time and excess in time, number, measure : Uber^^ 3a^r, a year hence,
only in certain phrases, duration : iiber S^ac^t, bie S^a^t uber, !Den (Sabbat^
iiber tt)aren fie jlille (B.). Uber ein Sa^r, more than a year (ambiguous,
either *'more than a year'' or " a year hence "). Uber brei taufenb ^anonen.
iiber aUe 33egviffe [d)on, beautiful beyond comprehension.
When it denotes duration or simultaneousness, or when the idea of
place is still felt, then the dative follows ; when it denotes the reason
then the accusative follows. This is clear when the same noun stands
in both cases, as in 3c^ bin iiber bem 33u(^e eingefc^Iafen, means " while reading
it I fell asleep." ^d) bin iiber ba^ 33uc^ etngefc^Iafen means "it was stupid,
therefore I fell asleep." Uber ber S3efd)reibnn9 ha ijergefp id) ben ganjen ^rieg
(Sch.). (Sd}abe, ba^ uber bem fd)onen 2Bai)n be^ Cel)en^ ^efle |)dlfte ba^in ge^t
(Sch.).
Notice »0n ttwa^ and iiber etwa^ fprec^en. Sc^ ^a^e batjon gcfprod^cn/ I have
mentioned it. 3d) f)CLU bariiber gefproc^en, I have treated of it, spoken at
length.
8. Uttter + under. See 305, 3.
In the abstract sense this rule holds good. It denotes protection, in-
feriority, lack in numbers (Dative, opposite of iiber), mingling with, con-
temporaneous circumstance (D.). It stands for the partitive genit.
(= among). Unter bem ©c^u^e. 2)er i^elbwe^el fie|t itnter bem Dfftuer. 2©er
tt)itt unter bie ©obaten, ber . ♦ . , he who wants to become a soldier (Folk-
130 SYKTAX OF THE CONJUl^CTIONS. [308-
song). ®r t|^ brunter geBUebenr te did not reach the number. Sambrai
offnete fetnem (BxMi^oft unter (amid) freubigem 3urufc bie Sl^ore tuieber (Sch.),
2Ber unter (among) biefen (D.) reid^t an unfern i^rteblanb ? (Sch.) (^on biefen would
be " of these "). It denotes time when none of the exacter modes of ex-
pressing time is used : 2Bir finb geboren unter gleic^en (Sternen (Sch.). Unter
ber Olegterung ber ^onigin S5tctoria = in the reign ; n^ci^renb implies not a sin-
gle act, but a commensurate duration, = during, ^er ©afrifta'n f(^Uef
KDOt^renb ber S^rebtgt, but gtng unter ber ^^rebigt ^tnau^* In «unterbeffen," and
other compounds of that class, inbeffen, etc., the gen. is probably adverbial
and not called for by the preposition.
See jn)ifcl)en.
9. S5 r 4- before, in front of. See 305, 1, 2, 3.
SSor + Dative.
Introduces the object of fear and abhorrence ; .^etn ©ifengttter f(^u^t »or
t^rer Sift (Sch.). S5or 9ett)iffen ©rinnerungen moc^t^ i6) mic^ gem pten (id.). Wlix
grant ijor bir. Time before which anything is to happen or has happened :
Der ^onig if! gefonnen, ijor 5(knb in 9)labrib nod) einjutrefen (Sch.). 25or brei^ig
3a^ren, thirty years ago. S5or ad)t Za^tn, a week ago. Hindrance and
cause : Die ®ro§ntutter mxh i)or Summer jlerkn (Sch.). Den SBalb »or lauter
S3aumcn nic^t fet)en (Prov.). S3or hunger, i)or Durjl jler^en. Preference : »or
aKen Dingen, above all things ; :^errli(^ ijor alien.
25 or and fur are doublets and come from for a and furi respectively. In
M. H. G. fur + A. answered the question whither ? wr + D. the ques-
tion where ? In N. H. G. they were confounded, even in Lessing very
frequently, but in the last seventy years the present syntactical difference
has prevailed. Goethe and Schiller rarely confound them
10. Qn^ii&jtn.
" Between " two objects in place, time, and in the figurative sense. 9iein
mup e^ Meikn jn)ifd)en mir unb i^m (Sch.). Die ©olfenfaute tarn jtt)ifd)en ba^ ^eer
ber S9t)pter unb ba^ |)eer 3^rael^ (B.). See 305, 1, 2 ; also unter = among,
sub 8.
SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTIONS.
307. The conjunctions are divided : 1. Into the coordinat-
ing, like unb, lenn, etc. ; 2. Into the subordinating, e. g., mil,
1)a, aU, etc. They are treated in the General Syntax, where
see the various clauses.
309] GEKERAL SYNTAX — SIMPLE SENTENCE. 131
GENERAL SYNTAX.
I. THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.
308. Subject and verb make up the simple sentence. This
sentence may be expanded by complements of the subject and
of the verb. The subject may be either a substantive, a sub-
stantive pronoun, or other words used as substantives. The
attributes of the subjects may be adjective, participle, adjec-
tive pronouns, numerals. These are adjective attributes.
Substantives, substantive pronouns, and the infinitive are
substantive attributes. Their relation to the subject may be
that of apposition and of coordination; or they may be con-
nected by the genitive, or by preposition + case in subordi-
nation. Preposition + case is more expressive than the
genitive alone, when the subject is to be defined as to time,
place, value, kind, means, purpose.
The predicate is either a simple verb or a copula + adjec-
tive or substantive or pronoun which may be again expanded
like the subject. The complements of the verb are object and
adverb. The object is either a noun, substantive pronoun, or
other words used as nouns. It stands in the accusative, dative
or genitive, or is expressed by preposition + case. The
adverb qualifies the verb, adjective, and other adverb. It is
either an adverb proper or preposition + case of substan-
tive or what is used as such. It may also be a genitive or an
accusative.
309. As to form the main sentences may be divided as
follows :
1. Declarative sentences, which either affirm something of
the subject or deny something with regard to it. Affirmative :
^ura tft Ux Sd^merj unt) mx^ ift Dit SreuDe (Sch.). Du haft 'Eta^
ma'ntm unD 5)erlen (Heine). Negative : Xa^ SeBen ift t»er ©liter
]32 GEN^ERAL SYNTAX— SIMPLE SE;NrTE:N'CE. [309-
l)od)fte5 ni&jt (Sch.). ©ie foEen x^n nidfet ^aUn, ten freien teutf^en
m^tin (Beck).
1. The double negative is still freqaent in the classics and collo-
quially, but it is not in accordance with correct usage now : ^eine £uft S)OU
feiner Seite (G-., classical). Man fte^tr t»a^ er an nic^t^ feinen 5(nteil nimmt
(F. 3489) (said by Margaret, coll.). After the comparative it also occurs
in the classics : ^ir muiTen t>a^ sBerf in biefen ndd)tlen Za^tn miitx forbern, al^
e^ in Sa^ren ntd)t gebiel) (Sch.).
2. After verbs of *'liinderiDg," -'forbidding/' " warning," like i)er=*
pten, ijeri^inbernf warnen, ijerMcten, etc., the dependent clause may contain
„m(^U: 5^ur ptet euc^, ba§ i^r mir ni(^t^ ^ergiept (G.). S'^imm bic^ in 5lc^t, bag
bic^ fHa^t nii^t »erberk (Sch.).
3. When the negative does not affect the predicate, the sentence may
still be affirmative. S'ii^t ntir, ben eignen Slugen mogt i^r glauben (Sch.). But
nid^t mir stands for a whole sentence.
2. Interrogative sentences: $aft tu ba^ ©(^log pefe^en? (Uli.).
2Ber reitet fo f))dt burd^ 5^a^t unt) 2Cmt) ? (G.). Double question :
SBar ber Settler ^erriicft ober tt>ar er betrunfen? (Slaubft bu tai3 ober
niftt? SBillft ^u immer wetter fcfctt»eifen ? (G.). 2l>er meip ba^ nid^t ?
For the potential subjunctive in questions, see 284, 3.
For the indirect question, see 325, 2.
3. The exclamatory sentence has not an independent form.
Any other sentence, even a dependent clause, may become
exclamatory: D, In S^alb, o i^r Serge bru6en mie feib i^r fo jung
geBUeben unb ic^ Hn morben fo alt! (Uh.). I)a^ ijt ta^ £o^ te^
©d)onen auf ^er grbe ! (Sch.). Sa^ unV (owe) t(^ i^m nidJt aUt^ I
(id.). 2Bte ber ^nabe geivac^fen ift !
For the imperative and optative sentences, see 284, 2 ; 280.
310. Elliptical clauses generally contain only the predicate
or a part of it, including the object or adverb, ©iiten 3}?orgen !
(53elt ! Truly ! ©etroffen I You have hit it ! Sauiifam I (Sc^neU !
etc. It is very frequent in the imperative, see 287.
Proverbs often omit the verb : fSul ©ef^rei unb tventg 2BcIIe. ^leine
^inbcr, Heine 8orgen; gro^e ^inber/ grcpe (Borgen. See 309, 3, in which the
last examples are really dependent questions.
313] GENERAL SYNTAX — SIMPLE SENTENCE. 133
Concord of Subject and Predicate.
311. The predicate (verb) agrees with the subject in num-
ber and person.
Two or more subjects (generally connected by unD) require
a verb in the plural : Unter Den 3liwejcnten n^ed^feln gurd)t mil
Srftaunen (Sch.). "Lo&i an ttm ^er^en nagten mlr Ux Unmut nrit) tie
©treitbegier (id.).
1. If the subjects are conceived as a unit and by a license greater in
German than in English, the verb may stand in the singular ; also in the
inverted order if the first noun is in the singular. Ex. : Wa^ x\t ba^ fur
eiu ^am, t>a§ i^m 2i5inb unb Mm ge^orfam ift (B.). ©^^ fprcc^e SBelt unb ^a6)^
mlt, etc. (Sch.). !Da fommt ber MHer unb feine ^nec^te* By license : (Ba^m
unb Xl^un ijl jweicrlel (Prov.). ©a^ sjjji^trauen unb bie Siferfuc^t . . ♦ ertt)ac^te
Mb tDteber (Sch.).
2. The plural verb stands after titles in the singular in addressing
royalty and persons of high standing. In speaking of ruling princes the
plural also stands. Servants also use it in speaking of their masters
when these have a title. Ex.: Sure ((£tr>.) 9)?aieftdt, 2)urc^lau(^t, ©xcettenj
kfe^ten? (Seine SJJaiefldt ber ^atfer ^aben geru^t, etc. !Der |)err ©e^eime
|)ofrat finb nic^t ju |)aufe. !^ie ^errfc^aft jtnb aus^gegangcn.
312. After a collective noun the verb stands more regularly
in the singular than in Eng. Only when this noun or an in-
definite numeral is accompanied by a genitive pi., the plural
verb is the rule. In earl^^N. H. G. (B.) this plural was very
common. IDie ^^en^e flot). Mt ffielt nimmt Jetl (G.). Unb Ui
Junge 35oI! ber ©(^nttter ftiegt jum Xan^ (Sch.). 3lIIe SJlenge ^eine^
ipaufe^ follen fterkn (B.).
313. When the subject is a neuter pronoun, e^, Me^, H^,
etc., the neuter verb agrees with the predicate noun or sub-
stantive pronoun in number: T)a^ tt?aren mir felige ^age (Over-
beck). S^ finb tie ^ruc^te i^re^ 2;^un^ (Sch.). S^ jogen trel 3ager
ti?ot)I auf t)ie Sirf(^ (Uh.). In this case e^ is only expletive. 2Ser
fmt) l)iefe ?
134 GEKERAL SYNTAX — SIMPLE SENTEITCE. [314-
314. When subjects are connected by cntn?et)er — ot>er, nid^t
nur — font^ern au(^, irer)er — no(^, fotro^l — aU {au6^), the verb has
the person and number of the first subject and joins this one
if the subjects are of different persons. The verb for the
second subject is omitted. dnimUx t)U Qtl)\t (or gebft In) oDn
id)* ZdU tear \6:i f(^ult), ttiU er. Subjects of the same person
connected by the above correlatives ; by ot^er, nebft, mit, famt
have as a rule a singular verb and the verb joins the second
subject. i;)em 3?oI!e tann mux geuer bet nodj 2Baffer (Sch.),
Neither fire nor water can harm those people.
315. If the subjects are of different persons, the first has
the preference over the second, the second over the third.
Moreover, the plural of the respective pronouns is often
added. Der la unt> idj, toix ftnt) an^ Sger (Sch.). X)u unt> ter
Setter, (t^r) gel)t nac^ ipaufe.
The adjective as a predicate or attribute has been sufficiently treated
under the adjective, see 210-225.
316. The noun as a predicate agrees with the subject in
case ; if the subject is a person, also in number and gender,
but in the latter only when there are special forms for mascu-
line and feminine. See 167. Ex.: Die S:>eltgef^id^te ift U^
SSeItgen*t (Sch.). Xie 5Rot ift W Gutter ter grfin1)ung (Prov.).
£a^ 5iKat(^ett tr>iE je^t Sraie^erin mxUn,^utx\i woEte fie ©c^aufpielerin
itjerben.
1. If one person is addressed as ©te or 3^r, the substantive stands of
course in the singular. „(Bk finb etn grower Mn\itx tm (Sc^ie^en." Poetic and
emphatic are such turns as : Olegierte S^lec^t fo laget t^r i)or mir tnt Staubc ie|t,
benn id) bin (Suer ^onig (Sch. , spoken by Maria Stuart).
317. The substantive in apposition has the same concords
as the substantive in the predicate, only the rule as to case is
frequently found unobserved in the best writers. S3a^ Senu^
bant), t)ie Sringerin te^ Q^iM^, tarn "SHnx^, ter (Bttxn U^ Ungliirf^
320] GEKERAL SYNTAX — COMPOUND SENTENCE. 135
fcbnea aerreigen (Sch.). 3^r fennet i^tt, ben ®c^b))fer fu^ner §eere
(id.).
The apposition may be emphasized by namlic^ and aU : S^nen, a\^ einem
gereiften Mamt, glauben )»ir.
II. THE COMPOUND SENTENCE.
318. The compound sentence consists of two or more
clauses, which may be coordinate (of equal grammatical
value) or subordinate (one dependent upon the other).
Coordinate Sentences.
We may distinguish various kinds of coordinate sentences,
which may or may not be connected by conjunctions.
319. Copulative Sentences. The conjunctions mit), au6>,
t)ei:gleid)en, gletd^fall^, ebenfall^, and their compounds, teegleidjen
au*, fo aud), eknfo aud^; niAt ttur — fonbem an6:j; m4t allein —
fon^ern aud^ ; fottio^l — aU (auc^) ; iceter — no^ indicate mere
parataxis. Qvittm, au§ert)em, iiberi^te^, ia, fogar, }a fogar, ijielme^r
emphasize the second clauses. Partitive conjunctions are
teil^ — tetl^, |aIB — ^alb, pm Sell — ^um ZdL Ordinal con-
junctions are erften^ — gnjeiten^, etc. ; juerjl — tann — ferner,
enl)lici), 3ule|t; Bait) — Bal^. Explanatory are namltdb, unt) jtt)an
Ex. : !Die ^iiV ifl Hetn, t)er @pa^ tft gro§ (F. 4049). §alb 309 fte
i:^n, ^alb fang er ^tn (G.). 3d) mttl tretJer (eugnen noc^ befc^ontgen,
M^ i4 fie Berebete (id.). 5^id^t attein Me erften SSliiten fallen ab,
fonbern anc^ bie griic^te (id.).
1. Notice that the adverbial conjunctions such as balb, lult^t, battn,
njcber — noc^, ^alb, tetl^, etc., always cause inversion. Some admit of
inversion, but do not require it, e.g., m^, erf!en^, ndmlid^. The ordinal
conjunctions and namltc^ are frequently separated by a comma, then no
inversion takes place, ©rften^ ifl e^ fo bcr Sraitd^, jweiten^ Witt ntan^^ felber
aii(^ (Busch).
320. Adversative Sentences. 1. One excludes the other
(disjunctive-adversative) : ober, or, enhreber — ober, fonft (else).
136 GENERAL SYNTAX— COMPOUND SENTENCE. 320-
an^ernfad^, otherwise. Ex.: Sr ( SCaHenftein) mu^te entn?ehr gar
nid^t befe^len ol'er mit ^odfommener grei^eit tjantdn (Sch.). One
contradicts the other (contradictory - adversative) : fontern,
X)idmti)x, fontern ♦ . ♦ ijielme^r* The first clause contains ni6^t,
^toaXf freili^, atterbing^, w^L @o wa^kn fie ftc^ ni6>t in Die 5'ldl)e
ter geintie, fonbern fe^en unijerrii^teter (Bacfee juriid (Sch.).
2. The second sentence concedes the statement of the first
in part or wholly. The first may contain nicfct, etc., as above;
the second has aUv, often in the connection abtx ^od), t^ennodj
aber, aber g(eic^tt>o^l ; allein, iikigeu^ ; nur* Slllein is stronger than
akx.
Mark the contrast between abcr and fonbernf Eng. but. ^kr concedes,
fonbern contradicts, ©r wax jn?ar md)t franf, aber boc^ md)t baju aufeele^t, "but
he did not feel like it." ®r mar nid)t franf^ fonbern er njar nur nic^t baju anf^
gelegt (he only did not feel like doing it), ^kk ftnb krufen abtx n^enige finb
au^ermal)let (B.). Den Unge^euern, ben ©igantifd^en l^citte man i^n (eorneille)
nennen foUen, aber nic^t ben ©rc^en (Le.). Staffer t|ut'^ freilid^ ni(|t (It is not
the water that is effective in baptism), fonbern ba^ 2Bort ®otte^, fo (which)
mit unb bei bem 2Baffer ift (Lu.).
3. The second sentence states something new or different
or in contrast with the first without contradicting or exclud-
ing or limiting the same. It occurs commonly in narrative
and may be called " counexive- or contras ting-adversative. "
Conjunctions: aber, ^ingegen, tagegen, ubrigene, tro^Dem, gleic^ttjo^l,
in^ejfen, etc. ^te Selei^tgung ift grog ; aber greyer ift feine ®naU
(Le.). (g^ ftot ein 9latfe( mt) to* ift t^Mn^ (G.). @^ ift Me
fd^onfte $offttUttg; toc^ ift e^ nur eine ^offnung (Sch.).
321. Causal Sentences. One gives the reason or cause for
the other. Conjunctions: t)(a)rum, te^megett, ta^er, benn, namltdj,
etc. The clause containing the reason generally stands
second, the one beginning with „tenn'' always. Notice ^mn,
"for," always calls for the normal order. Ex.: (Soltaten ttjaren
tetter, beitrt W ?0^ettge ge^t ttac^ t)em (SIM (Sch.). (Sitte ©urAIaud)^
ttgfett lagt er ftc^ nenneit; brum muj} er (Sotbaten l^alten fbnnen (id.).
325] GENERAL SYOT?AX — SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. 137
322. Illative Sentences. One sentence is an inference or
effect of the other. Closely related to the causaL Conjunc-
tions : fo, a'i\o, ]omi't, folglid), mitt)i'tt, U'mna6)j, etc. 9Reine Sftedjte
(right hand) ijl gegen ten "Drud t)er 8ie6e uttcm|jftnt)lt(^ ♦ ♦ ♦ fo
(then) fetD i^r ®o^ x>on Serlic^ittgen (G.). 2)ie ©onnen dfo fc^einen
Utt^ nid)t me^r (Sch. ).
SuBOBDn^ATE SENTENCES.
323. We shall distinguish three classes of dependent
clauses, according to the logical value of the part of speech
they represent:
1. Substantive clauses, with the value of a noun.
2. Adjective clauses, with the value of an adjective.
3. Adverbial clauses, with the value of an adverb.
Substantive Clauses.
324. The clause is subject : Za^ eBen ift ter glucfe ter bofen
Z^at, tag fte fortma^rent) 23o|'e5 mu^ geBdren (Sch.). ?iKi(^ reuet, tag
ic^'^ t^at (id.). Predicate (N.) : Xie ^TOenfcfoen pn^ nid^t immer
\va^ fie fc^einen (Le.). Object (A.): ©lauBfl tu ni&jt, tag einc
SSarnung^ftimme in Xxaumm i^orbeteutent ju un^ fprtcftt? (Sch.).
2Ba5 man fd)marj auf tr>eig Beft^t, !ann man getroft na&j ipaufe tragen
(F. 1966-7). Dative : SCo^l tem, ter m auf tie 9Zeige (to the
very end) rein getebt fein Se6en ^at (He.). Genitive : 2Beg ta^
$er3 t^ott ift, te^ gel)t ter WnnX) liBer (B.). Apposition: T)en etein
8tol3,tag tu tir felbft nii^t genitgeft, ^er^eil)^ id) tir (G.).
325. As to their contents the substantive clauses may be
grouped as follows:
1. Sag, or declarative clauses, always introduced by „tag*''
(B6^on ©ofrate^ le^rte, tag tie Seele te^ Wlm\6>tn unfterBlicf) fei, or tie
$^e|re,tag tie (Seele . . . , or wix glaukn, tag tie @eele . . .
More examples in 324.
138 GENERAL SYKTAX — SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. [325-
2. Clauses containing indirect questions : a. Questions after
tlie predicate always introduced by oh ; in the main clause may
stand as correlatives e^, t)a^, l>effen, la'oon, etc. Sr ^attt ni6>t
gef^rieBen, ob er gefunD geMieben (Bii.). (See F. 1667-70). 6.
Questions after any other part of the sentence, introduced by
an interrogative pronoun, by an interrogative adverb, simple
or compounded with a preposition, viz., mx, Voa^, trie, W, toann,
itiomit, mo^er, n?o^in, etc. Ex. : graget nidjt, tt>arum i^ traure (Sch. ).
See F. 1971. Segreifft t)u, mie antcic^tig fd)tt)armen ^iel Ieid)ter al^
gut ^anteln ift ? (Le.). 5^o(^ fel)lt un^ ^un^e, ma^ in Untemalten
unt) ^(^^93 gef(^et}en (Sch.). c. The question may be disjunc-
tive, introduced by oh — ol)er; ob — oter oB; ob — oK Ex.:
3lber fag^ mir, o6 mir fte^eti o^er o6 mir njeiter ge^en (E. 3906-7).
Unt e^ ter 2:ag fi(^ neigt, mu§ ftc^^^ erfliiren, ob i^ t)en greunl), oh ic^
lien 25ater foil entbe^ren (Sch.).
Remarks. — 1. The mood in 1 and 2, according to circumstances, is
either the indicative or the potential subjunctive. See the examples
sub 1 and in 324.
3. In „ba^"-clauses the other two word-orders are also possible, but
without t»a§: <Boixau^ le^rte, tie (Seele fei un^erblic^. ©^ wurk be^auptet, geftcrn
^abe man i^n no^ auf ber (6txa^t gefe^en.
3. When the subject is the same in both clauses or when the subject
of the dependent clause is the object of the main clause, in short, when
no ambiguity is caused, the infinitive clause can stand in place of ba§ +
dependent order. 'Man ^offt, ba^ untergegangene ©(^iff noc^ in ^eben. 2)ic
^oUjet ^at bem ^aufmanne befo^lcn, fein (Sc^itb ^o^er ju pngen.
3. Clauses with indirect speech — after verbs of saying, as-
serting, knowing, thinking, wishing, demanding, commanding.
They either begin with ta§ with dependent order or they have
the order of the direct speech. The subjunctive is the reigning
mood. Eor examples and tense, see 282.
4. Clauses containing direct speech, a quotation: ^a^ 3Bort
ift fret, fagt ^er General (Sch.). ^er ^onig riefj 3ft ter ©anger
ta?
328] GEKEEAL SYKTAX— SUBORDINATE SEiTTEi^CES. 139
Adjective Clauses.
326. The clause is introduced by a relative pronoun or by
a relative adverb. Nothing can precede the pronoun in the
clause except a preposition. Unless the personal pronoun is
repeated after the relative, the verb stands in the third person.
Ex.: ^u fpric^ft ijon 3^^^^^^ ^^^ ijergangen fint (Sch.). T)ie (Btatte,
tie eitt guter Wtn\&i betrat, ift eingemei^t (G.). Der tu ^on tern
^immel Mft, fitter grieDe . . . (id.).
For use of the pronouns and more examples, see 255-258.
327. 1. The relative pronoun can never be omitted as in English.
In several relative clauses referring to the same word, the pronoun need
stand only once, if the same case is required ; if a different case is neces-
sary, the pronoun should be repeated. This is often sinned against, for
instance by Schiller : 8te^ ba tie ^tx\t, bie er [(^riet) unb feine ®lut geftetjt,
instead of mxin er ♦ ♦ ♦ gejle^t.
2. The relative clauses beginning with mx, tt)a^ without antecedents
are really identical with substantive clauses, e.g., T)a fe^t, ba^ i^r tiefftnnig
fa§t, n?ai3 in be^ 9)?enfAen |)irn md)t pa§t. gitr toa^ brein ge^t unb nic^t brein ge^tr
ein frciftig Sort p Dienj^en fte|t (F. 1950-3).
3. Case-attraction between relative and antecedent is now rare.
^U m\6:)ix, denoting rather a cause than a quality, is now archaic, but
still quite frequent in Lessing's time, ^ma^, aU mldjix \id) an ben Mo^en
(mere) S'tQuren erge^et, = **^neas, since he delights ..." (Le.). S?on bcr
2;ra9obief aU iikr bie un^ bie Beit i^iemltd) aHe^ barau^ (of Aristotle's Poetics)
gonnen ..." about tragedy, in so far as time has favored us ... " (id.).
„1)a" in the relative clause is no longer usage. 2Ber ba jle^et, fe^e ju, ba§ er
nic^t fatle (B.).
328. The mood depends upon circumstances. The poten-
tial subjunctive (of the preterit and pluperfect) is frequent
after a negative main clause. @^ ift !etne gro§e (Btalt in X)eutj'd):^
lanb, Die ber DnM uiAt BefuAt ^tt^ (= did not visit). The sub-
junctive of indirect speech also stands. J)ie 9legterung ber
Screinlgten <Biaatm befc^werte fi(^ ixitx bie Sanbung foijieler %xmm,
ml&jt manege europaifc^e SRecjierung fortfc^ide.
140 GENEKAL SYNTAX — SUBORDINATE SEKTEKCES. [329-
Adverbial Clauses.
329. They are introduced by the subordinating conjunc-
tions. The main clause often iias an emphatic adverb, e, g,,
alfo, tann, ta, ba^in, je^t, ^at)er, rarum, ©o does not, as a rule,
stand after dependent clauses expressing time and place, and
generally becomes superfluous in English after dependent
clauses of manner.
330. Temporal Clauses. 1. Contemporaneous action imply-
ing either dui^ation or only point of time. Conjunctions :
ira^renD, intern, inte^ (intteffen), mie, ta (all meaning "while,''
" as ") ; folange (al^) ; fo oft (al^) ; fo bait) (al^) ; t)a, mo (rare and
colloquial) = when; \Mnxi (wann is old) + " when," refers to
the future; ale, "when," refers always to the past with the
preterit ; xozxi, imuil, lnm\\, = + " while," are archaic,
©olange, fo oft, fobab are now much more common without
Ex.: 5lc^ ! t>icllei$t inbem (as) iinr ^offen, ^at un^ Unveil fcf)on Qctroffen (Sch.).
5f?ur ber ©tavfe wirb ba^ 8d)ic!fal jwingeit, menn ber 8(^tt)ac^lm9 mtterliegt (Sch.).
UnD mz (as) er jt^t unb tr>ie er lau[d)t, teilt ftd^ bie %hxi empor (G.). SlU be"<3
<Sanctu(3 SBorte famen, ba fc^ellt er breimal bei bem Xiamen 0,®anctu^ . . ." is
part of the mass) (Sch.). ©^ irrt ber 3^enfc^, folang' er jlreBt (F. 317). ©otalb
bie erflen Serc^cn fd)n)irrten (erfd)icn) ein 5D?dbc^cn fc^on unb munber^ar (Sch.). ^a^
©ifen mu§ gefd^miebet tuerben, n?eil e^ glii^t (Prov.). SSiE mir bie ^anb nod^
reic^en, bern)eil ic^ eben lab (=r while I am loading the musket) (Uh.).
2. Antecedent action, i. e., the action of the dependent clause
precedes that of the main clause. Conjunctions : nac^tem,
after ; ca, al^, ircnn, after, when ; fettt'em, feit, feittem t»a§ (all
mean + since) ; fobalt (al^), fowie, mt, as soon as ; the adverb
!aum + inverted order.
Ex. : 9?immer (no more) fang t(^ freubige Sieber, feit t(^ betne (Stimme bin
(Sch.) 3Benn (after) ber Mh in <5taub jerfaCen, tebt ber grofe ?«ame nod) (Sch.).
Unb tt)ie er winft mit Um %\mx, auf t^ut fic^ ber weite Bwinger (id.), ^aum war
ber 35ater tot, fo fommt ein ieber mit fcincm Soling (Le.). (Notice the inversion.)
332] GENERAL SYNTAX — SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. 141
!Der tonic uxlu^ 9?urnberg, nad^bem er e^ pr ^urforgc mit cincr ^tnlangHd^cn
SSefa^uUij ijerfe^en ^atte (Sch.).
3. Subsequent action. The action of the dependent clause
follows. Conjunctions: fifee, Be^or, + "ere", "before"; m,
until, with or without taf .
Ex. : 9^te ijerai^te ben ^am, tf bu fein Snn^rc^ erfanttt '^ap (He.). SSeijor
xoxx'^ taffcti rinnen, Betet einen frommett <B^x\x^ (Sch.). S3t^ bie ©lo(fe fw^^ »er^
fit^Iet, lafil bie jlrenge ^r^eit ru^n (id.), ©^e wir eig utt^ »erfa^en (unexpectedly),
]6ra(^ ber Sagett jufammett.
a. The main clause may be emphasized by bantlr bamal^f bann^ barauf,
and [o, if it follows the dependent clause.
In 2 and 3 the potential subjunctive can stand.
331. Local Clauses. They denote the place and direction
of the action of the main clause. They begin with too, mo^in,
W^tx, and the main clause may contain a corresponding ba,
Ex. : Bo 5D^enf(^en!itnj! ni^t preid^t, |at ber ^imtnel oft geraten (Sch.). !Die
SBelt ijl i)oE!ommen itkraU, n)o ber Wltn^6^ nic^t ^infommt mit fetner ^ml (id.).
2)ettn ektt too S3e9riffe fe^Ieti, ba fleUt ein 2Bort jur rec^ten 3eit |t(^ ein (F. 1995-6).
tein SCBaffer ifl p :^akn, wo^iti man ftd^ ait^ wenbe*
a. The demonstratives ba, ba'^in, ba^er in the local clause are now
archaic. Do not confound the relative clauses and indirect questions with
the local clauses which generally refer to an adverb.
The potential subjunctive may stand in them.
Glauses of Manner and Cause.
332. Modal clauses express an accompanying circumstance
and are therefore related to contemporaneous clauses. Con-
junctions: itttem, tag ni(^t, o^ne t)a§, without, intern ni^t, ftatt or
anftatt tag, instead of. Ex.: !l)er diitkx gtng fort, intern er auf ben
©egner einen ^erac^tlic^en 33li(f marf* 3^ Hn nk in Sonton, tag ic^
ni(^t ba^ '^n\mm befuc^te (subj.).
1. They may have the potential subjunctive. But these clauses occur
more frequently in the form of participial and infinitive clauses With
142 GENERAL SYNTAX — SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. [333-
rrO'^ne ju," „anftatt in" : 5U^|>aftf anj^att ju empfangcn, muftc jal^lcn* (£r rttt fort
333. Comparative clauses denote manner, degree, and
measure. Conjunctions: tok, aU, " as," '' than " with the corre-
sponding fo, alfo, ebenfo (= so) in the main clause. After the
comparative al^, tenn, m^tx, "than." Other forms: gleicfemie —
fo ; fo vou — fo ; just as — as, so. 5Bie denotes rather manner
and quality, aU the degree and quantity. When both clauses
have the same predicate, contraction is common. Then mt
denotes likeness, aU identity.
Ex. : Sc^ jtnge K)te ber S^oget jingt (Q-.). 1)an!et ©ott fo toarm al^ x^ fur bicfen
2;run! eud) banfe (id.). 2Bie bu mir („t^u)l" understood), fo i^ btr (Prov.). 2)u
Mj^ mir nic^t^ me^r aU feitt (Bo^n (Sch.). !Der trdgc ®ang be^ ^riege^ ^at bent
^ontg e^enfo^iel Sc^aben get^an aU er ben OJebeUen S5orteil hac^te (id.), ^atte fi(^
etn 9ftattjktn angemdjl't al^ tote ber !Doftor Sutler (F. 2129-30) (al^ toie is collo-
quial). „2Bie ein fRimx," " like a knight " ; „aU (etn) Otitter," " as a knight."
<Bein ®IM voax grower al^ man kre($net l^atte (Sch.). ©ine^ ^aupte^ (by one
head) Idnger benn aHe^ S?oIf (B.). SBeber is very rare.
1. Specially to be noticed are the clauses with al^ o^, aUmm, gener-
ally followed by the potential or unreal subjunctive. For ftjenn + de-
pendent order occurs also the inverted without n^enn. Ex.: 3^r etlet ja, aU
mnn t^r %\vi^d ^ctttet (Le.). <Su^t bie 2Btffenfd)aft, aU tourbefl ewig bu ^ier fetn;
STugenb; aU ^telte ber %oh bt(^ [c^on am jlrduknben ^aax (He.). But the indica-
tive is possible : Unb e^ mattet unb ftebet unb ^raufet unb jtf($t vok tt>enn Saffer
ntit i^euer fic^ mengt (Sch.).
2. ^enn is preferable after a comparative when several ^al^" occur.
2Bie is colloquial. ©^ fragt ft(^ ob ^efjtng grower aU Did^ter benn aU 2)?en[(^
genjefen fet. ^idoji in the clause after al^ is no longer good usage, though
common in the 17th and 18th centuries. Lessing has it very frequently.
3f^ lebtc [o eingejogen, ali3 i^ in 2)?ei§en nic^t gelebt ^atte (Le.).
a. '^flidjtS wenigcr al§ means " anything but," literally "nothing less than that," gen-
erally felt by English speakers as meaning " nothing but," e. g., SlCer ic^ barf fagen, ha^
biefe 6inri(^tung ber gabel nicf)t3 lueniger ol^ notwenbig i[t, L e., that this arrangement of
the plot is anything but necessary (Le.). In „nt(^t§ aI6" = " nothing but," as after all
negative pronouns, ,,niemanb al^ bu" = nobody but you, aU has exclusive force, =
" but.'*
3. Other correlatives are fo einer — xok; ber namli^e — tt)ie; berfelbe —
tt)ie; fol(^-, )o + positive adjective — tr)ie (quality) and al^ (degree); after
336] GENERAL SYNTAX — SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. 143
ju, aHju + positive and after ein anberer stand aU + bag or mm, ali and
infinitive, e.g., (£r benft ju ebel, aU bag er fo etwa<3 »ott un^ emarten fonntc*
(£r ijl ber namlic^e n)te er immer tuar* Sure S^erfo^nung tear ein wenig ju fc^nett^
al$ bag fte bauer^aft ^dtte fein foUen (Gl-.).
Notice the potential subjunctive after ^aU ha^*"
334. Under this head comes really the proportional clause,
which expresses the proportion of the decrease or increase of
what is asserted in the main clause. The conjunctions are
the following correlatives : }e — tefio, urn fo (or urn tefto, rarely);
{c — it, = the — the; je nat^bem (or nac^tem or mie, rarely),
according as. If the main clause stand first, its correlative
is dispensable.
Ex. : 3e tne^r ber S^^orrat fc^molsr beflo fc^redlti^er \ou^^ ber ^m^tx (Sch.).
3e langer, je Uekr (Pro v.). 3e me^r er ^at, je me^r er tt>\U. (3e) m^hm einer
ringt, nac^bem \W gelingt (G.), "The success depends upon the effort."
1. 3e = ever ; beflo, " on that account," " hence," see 442, a. Notice
the dependent order in the first, the inverted generally in the second.
335. Consecutive clauses express the result or effect of the
predicate of the main clause. Conjunctions: t)a§ (foba§), that;
in the main clause, if any correlative^ fo, fo fe^r, bergeflalt, terart,
fo((^* Ex. : (So ^eraBfd^eut ift t)ie %\^vanmi\ ^ag jte fein S^erfjeug
ftnt>et (Sch.). Sr filing, tia^ laut l^er 3Ba(t) erfiang unb alle^ gifen in
(Biixdtn fpraitg (Uh.),
1 The result may also be expressed in the form of a main clause or
of an infinitive clause : ^o(^ itbernd^m^ {6) gem no(^ ei'nmal aHe ^(age, fo UeB
njar mtr ba^ ^inb (F. 3123-4). 3(^ Mn ju alt, urn mx ju fpielen, ju iung urn oi^ne
SSunfc^ ju fettt (F. 1546-7).
2. Mark the potential and unreal subjunctives of the preterit and plu-
perfect which may stand in these clauses : 35ernteint ^f)x ntid^ fo jung unb
fc^jDad^, ha^ i(^ mit 0iiefen flritte? (Uh.). 2)a0 3>ferb war fo la§m,bag toir fc^neHer
ju ^u§ ^eim gefommctt waren*
336. Restrictive clauses limit the value and scope of the
statement of the predicate and border closely upon the con-
ditional and comparative clauses. Conjunctions: nur t)a§, only
144 GENERAL SYNTAX— SUBORDIlf ATE SENTENCES. [337-
(that), auper t)ap, except that, in fo fern (aU), mofern, in tok fern,
in fo or in mie ti?eit; in as far as, in as much as. The negative
force is given also by the subjunctive and the normal order
with the adverb t)enn or by e^ fei Denn, e^ ivaxt "otnn, tiaf , which is
now more common.
Ex. : SSir tear en gar nic^t fo iibel bran, nur ba^ mx ntc^te ju trinfen f^attm We
were not at all so badly oft', only ... 3n fo fern nun biefe SSefen ^orper ftnb,
fi^ilbert bte ^^cefte auc^ ^orper (Le.). Sr entferntc ftc^ niemal^ njeit, er fagt^ e<3
i^r benn (H. and D„ IV. 42-3). 3^ laffe bic^ nic^t, bu fegneft mic^ benn (unless
thou bless me) (B.). 0iu^ig (gebenfe ic^ mi^ p ijer|)alten); e^ fei benn, ba9
(unless) er ftc^ an meiner (£§re ober nteinen ©litem Jjergreife (Sch.).
1. This is a very old construction, quite common in M. H. G. The
negative force lies not in benn, but in the lost ne + the potential or con-
cessive subjunctive. !I)enn < M. H. G. danne, is unessential. Compare
M. H. G. den lip wil ich mrliesen, si en werde m%n io%p — my life will I
lose, (she become not my wife) unless she, etc. 8waz lebete in dem walde
e^ entrunne danne balde, das was zehaiit tot, — 2Ba$ im SSalbe lebte, bai3 n?ar
anf ber (Btelte tot, e^ fct benn ha^ e^ balb baijon lief or gelaufen n>dre (quoted by
Paul). He disappeared as early as late M. H. G., particularly after a
negative main clause. It is left in nur < ne waere = (e^) tt?dre ntc^t bag.
See Paul's M. H. G. gram., § 335-40.
337. Causal clauses denote the cause, reason, and means.
Conjunctions: ba, since, mil, because, intern =: by + present
participle in Eng. Correlatives, if any: ba'rum, t'a'kr, fo, U^lalh
etc, Da'turc^ ba§, t^a'mit ^ap express rather the instrument.
2BeiI expresses the material cause; ta the logical reason; „in^
tern" is a weak causal and borders rather closely upon the
contemporaneous „inDem.'' T)enn + normal order expresses a
known or admitted reason. It is emphatic. See 321.
Ex. : !Dag ©c^Iepptau (hawser) jerrt§, Weil ber ©d^Ieppbampfer (tug) ju fc^nell
anjog. fSlii bem bejlen SBilten leiften mx fo toenig, metl un^ taufenb SSillen freujen
(G,). Scben anbern in fc^ttfen x\i kffer, ta id^ fo flein Mn (G.). 2)ir blit^t gewip
ba^ fc^onfle ®IM auf ©rben, ba bu fo fromm unb ^eitig bijl (Sch.). 9lid^eUeu wu^te
fi$ nur babur^ ^u ^elfen, bo^ er ben geinbfeligfeiten ein fc^leunigc^ Snbe mac^te (Sch.),
1. S'^un, bteweil, aUbieweil, magen, fiutemat, and others, are rare and
archaic.
339] GEI^ERAL SYKTAX — SUBORDIlirATE SENTEiq^CES. 145
2. The clauses with ba'burc^ bag, ba'mit bag border closely upon the
substantive clause. 2)a, says Becker, denotes the real and logical rea-
son, tx>eil the logical only when the kind of reason is not emphasized.
SSeil stands in a clause that answers the question as to the reason,
2S5arum tuurbe SSaKenflein abgefe^t? SBeil man i^n fitr cinen S[^errdter ^ielt.
338. Final clauses express intention and object. Con-
junctions: X)ami't, fca^, "in order that." 9luf tag, unb bag are
archaic. In the main clause rarely stand barum, "^^Uf in tcr
3lbftd)t, 3U t)em ^mdt (both followed by Dag)*
Ex.: 2)arum eben leil^t er feinem, bamit er flet^ ju ^tUn ^aU (Le.). !Daju ro:r:>
i^m ber SJerjlanb, baf er tm innern |)erjen fpiiret, n)a^ er erfi^afft mit feincr ^ano
(Sch.). (£§re Skater unb 9)lutter, auf bag bir'^ wo^l ge^e unb bu lange lekji auf
(£rben(B.).
1. The reigning mood of this clause is the subjunctive. If the object
is represented as reached, the indicative may also stand. Urn ju + inf.
forms a very common final clause ; 9)?an lebt nic^t urn ju effen, [onbern man i§t
um ju leben.
339. Concessive clauses make a concession to the contra-
diction existing between the main clause and the result ex-
pected from it in the dependent clause. They are called also
adversative causal clauses. Conjunctions : oBglet'd) (06 ♦ ♦ ♦
glei(!^), obfc^o'tt (ob ♦ > > f(^on), obwo^l (ob . ♦ ♦ n?o()l), ob aud), oB
jn;)ar, wenn and), mnn gleic^, ob, all = "although." The main
clause may contain De'ttnodj, boc^, nit^t^beftotveniger, gleid)tt)O^I, but
fo only if it stands second.
Relative clauses with indefinite relative pronouns and
adverbs, it>er . * ♦ au^ (immer,nur), tt)ie ♦ ♦ ♦ au(^, fo ♦ ♦ . an6)
(nod)) ; inverted clauses and those with the normal order, con-
taining the adverbs fci^ott, glei(^, gwar, tt)o|I, freilid), ttO(^ have also
concessive force.
Ex. : 3jl ea Qleic^ ^a^t, fo Ieu(i^tet unfer fRt6^t (Sch.). (Compare Dbgletd^ ea
9?a(^t tflr ob e^ gleic^ ^ad)t if! . . ♦) 2Ba^ ^^euer^wut i^m au^ gcraubt, ein fu§er
S^rofl ifl i^m geblieben (id.). ^Jluttg [prad^ er ju SRetnefcn^ beflen (in favor of R.)
fo falfd^ au(i^btefer bcfannt war (G.). ©in ®ott ijl, ein l^eiliger SBttte lebt, wtc aud^
ber mcnfc^Ud^e tt>an!e (Sch.). ©rfiitt^ ba^on bein ^erj, fo grog e^ ij^ (F. 345.^).
146 GENERAL SYNTAX — SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. [340-
^an fommt im ©crebe, tt)ic man ftd^ tmmer jlellt (G.). 2)em S55fe»)ic^t tt)trb allea
[driver, er t|ue ma<^ er toiU (Holty). 3toax meif ic^ »iel, bo(^ miic^t^ ic^ aUt^ tt)iffen
(F. 601).
1. Mark also the form of the imperative and unb + inversion : (Bet
nod^ fo bumm, e^ gibt boc^ jemanb(en), ber bic^ fiir weife ^cilt. ^er SDJenfd^ tjl frei
gefd^affen, i|l frei, unb njurbe er in tetten geboren (Sch.).
2. Mood : if a fact is stated, the indicative ; if a supposition, the con-
cessive and unreal subjunctive. See examples above.
3. When certain parts of speech are common to both clauses, there
may be contraction. D^bmo^l »on ^o^ern <Stamm, litbt er ba^ SJolf (Sch.).
340. Conditional clauses express a supposition upon which
the statement of the main clause will become a fact. If the
supposition is real, the conditional clause has the indicative;
if only fancied or merely possible, the potential subjunctive;
if it implies that the contrary of the supposition is about to
happen or has happened, .then it has the unreal subjunctive
of the imperfect or the pluperfect. Conjunctions : n^entt, if;
fall^, im gade bag, in case that; mnn anber^, if ... at all; also
trofern, fofern (such often difficult to distinguish from a conces-
sive clause) ; tco, fo (rare). The main clause may have ba, tanit,
in bem Satic, and if it stand second, generally begins with fo*
Ex.: 2Benn |i(^ bie SJoIfer felbfi ^efretn, ba fann bie S©o:^Ifa^rt nic^t gebei^n
(Sch.). SBenn bu aia 3J?ann bie 2BtiTenf($aft »erme^r|!, fo fann bein ©ol^n ju ^o^'rem
Biel gelangen (F. 1063). Ser miebe nid^t, wenn er^^ untge^en fann, ta^ 5(u§erfie
(Sch.). ®o hvi fampfefi ritterlid^, frcut bein alter fQattx ftd^ (Stolberg).
1. Other forms of the conditional clause are the inverted order, the
imperative, and the normal order with benn + subjunctive (= if . . . not,
unless ; see 336, 1). 'Btx im S3ejt|e unb bu wo^nfl im 9ied^t (Sch.), Possession
is nine points of the law. Dem lieben ®ottc tt)eic^^ nic^t an^, jtnb'jl H i^n auf
bem 2Beg (Sch.).
2. SSofern nid^t, au^er mm, e^ fei benn ha^, if not, unless, denote an ex-
ception to a statement true in general. !Der SBolf ijl ^armlo^, auper menn er
hunger f^au See 336, 1.
3. Sometimes the preterit ind. is substituted for the unreal subjunc-
tive in the dependent or in the main clause or in both. Its force is
343] GEKEKAL SYNTAX — WORD-ORDER. 147
assurance, certainty. Straf ettt ^iir^i^ ntein ©efK^t, ac^, fo UW id^ jtd^er ntc^t
(Gleim). 3)Jit btefem ^feil burc^Wo§ tc^ dud^, mm i^ mein Uek^ ^inb getroffen
j^dtte (Sch.). D tt)drjl bu tt>a|r gewefen unb gerabe, nie fam ei3 bal^in, atte^ jliinbc
anber^ (Sch.).
4. Contracted and abbreviated forms : (SntttJorfett BIo^ tjl^^ ettt gememer
^reijel; i)oI(fu§rt ijl:'^ em unj^erblic^ Unternefimen (Sch.). ©enn nic^t, tt)0 nic^t,
ttjo tnoglid^ are very common. Sir »erfu(^ten il^tt »)o moglid^ ju bcrul^iQen, ttcnn
nic^t ganj ju entfernen.
For the tenses see also 275-280.
WORD-ORDER.
341. We distinguisli three principal word-orders according
to the position of subject and verb:
1. The normal, viz., subject — verb.
2. The inverted, viz., verb — subject.
3. The dependent, viz., verb at the end.
(By " verb " we shall understand for the sake of brevity the personal part and by
"predicate" the non-personal part of the verb, viz., participle and infinitive.)
342. The normal occurs chiefly in main sentences : "Der
2Bint) tot^L It is identical with the dependent order if there
is only subject and verb in the dependent clause. !Die SJlit^le
Qi% well Ux aSittt) m%
343. The inverted order occurs both in main and depend-
ent clauses: ®e^t W 9RuMe ? m^t t)er SSinD, (fo) ge^t bie mixW.
It occurs :
a. In a question.
b. In optative and imperative sentences.
c. In dependent clauses, mainly conditional and after aU +
subjunctive when there is no conjunction like mnn, oh, etc.
d. If for any reason, generally a rhetorical one, any other
word but the subject, or if a whole clause, head the sentence.
e. For impressiveness the verb stands first.
Examples with adjuncts (objects, adverbs, etc.) added:
148 GENERAL SYNTAX — WORD-ORDER. [343-
a. ©c^reibt ^er %vtnnt) ? SIei6t t)er Diener ni(^t lange au^? 2Ba^
[(fereibt t)ir Ut greunt ?
But when the inquiry is as to the subject the normal order stands of
course. 2Ber fc^reibt einen 23rtef? Sa^ ijl ber langen OJebe furjer *5inn? (Sch.).
b. 9Jlbge nit t)er 2:ag erfc^etnen, mnn beg raukn ^rtege^ iporben
tiefeg fitlle 3^^al burd^to^en (Sch.). For more examples, see
284, 1, 2.
But the inverted order is not required: !Dte Bd^ bcr S^ropfen, bie er ^egt,
fei euren STagen pgelegt ! (F. 989-990).
c. SCidft tu genau erfa^ren trac^ ftc^ gtemt, fo frage nur Bet eblett
grauen an (G.). 2Birt man mo (mtrgen^mo) gut aufgenommen,
mu^ man nti^t gleic^ n?ieter!ommen (Wolff). (Sr) (Btrid) brauf ein
(Bpange, ^etf un^ ^fling^ aU maren'^ eben ?)fifferling' ; banff nid^t
meniger unb ni(^t me^r, aU ob'^ ein ^orb »ol( ^liijje mar' (F. 2843-6).
Notice here the inversion after aU alone, but dependent order after
aU ob. See 340, 1 ; also F. 1122-25, 1962-3.
But for emphasis and to add vividness, the normal is still possible :
2)u lle^ejl jlill, er wartet auf; bu fprid^jl i|n an, er flrebt an bir l^inauf (F. 1168-9).
This is mere parataxis.
d. Die Sotfc^aft Ijjox' x6^ mot)I, aUtin mix fe^^lt ber glaube (F. 765).
(Ernjl ift tag Seben, ^eiter ift bie ^unft (Sch.). 9Ki(^ Ijat mein ^erj
betrogcn (id.). 2Bo aBer ein 2Iag ift, ba ijerfammein ft(^ bie ^Ibler (B.).
i:eineg (3d\k^ ^ab' i(^ einen §au(^ ^erfpiirt (Uh.). See also F. 860-
1, 1174^5, 1236. iiberfe'^en fann Sa^^Iu^ bie^ ©emalbe nid)t ^altn
(Le.). ©efd^rieben fte^t: „3m 2lnfang mar U^ SSort" (F. 1224).
See also 236, 3.
1. The main clause, inserted in any statement or following it, has in-
version according to this rule. 2)aa, fpric^t er, ijl fein 5lufent^alt/ toa^ forbcrt
^tmmelan (Sch.). SSie feib ibr glucflic^/ ebler ®raf ! l^ub er ijoll 5lrgUjl an (id.).
For emphasis the speaker can insert a clause uninverted : 2)enn, i^ tt)ei§
ca, er ijlber ©liter bie er bereinjl erbt, n>ert (H. and D., III. 53).
2. The coordinating conjunctions aber, alfein, benn, mmlx^, ober# fonbernr
unb standing generally at the head of the sentence, any adverb with the
force of an elliptical sentence (jivar, ja, etc., having generally a comma
345] GEI^ERAL SYiq^TAX— WORD-ORDER. 149
after them) call for no inversion. After cntweber there is option. Ex. :
^Mtx tie ^unjl ^at in ben neueren Beiten ungleic^ tceitere ©renjen erl^alten (Le.).
3voax euer a3art ijl frau^, boc^ ^eM i^r nic^t bte ^k^d (F. 671). ^iirnja^r ! tc^
bin ber einjige ©o^n nur (H. and D., IV. 91). Sa, mir '^at t^ ber @eijl gefagt
(id., IV. 95). ®enn bte mUmtx ftnb ^eftig (id., IV. 148).
3. When the dependent clause precedes, the main clause can for em-
phasis and very frequently colloquially have the normal order. Ex. :
^atte er bie Urfaci^en biefe^ aHgcmetnen Slkrglaukn^ an <3^a!fpere^i3 ^c^on^eiten
audb gefu(^tr er wurbe fte balb gefunben ^akn (Le.).
e, §at Me ^onigin to(^ ni(St^ ijorau^ »or tern gemetnen Siirc^ermeiBe
(Sch.). ©te^en tt)ie gelfen t)0(^ attjei ^O^dnner gegen einattber ! (H. and
D., IV. 229). Generally contains t)0(^.
344. The dependent order occurs only in dependent
clauses. The clause begins with a relative or interrogative
pronoun which may be preceded by a preposition ; with a
relative or interrog. adverb; or with a subordinating conjunc-
tion. Ex. : SBenn 14 ttiit %lmn^tv mdre, mocbte i6) n?o^l X^iogene^
fetn* 3^ ttt^fe^ ^^ 6^t, j;e me^r er will (Claudius). (So flol^ id) Bin,
mu^ i(^ mir fel6ft gej^el)n : bergleic^ett ^ab' ic^ nie gefe^n (G.). 3Bie
fol^e tiefge()rdgte Silver ^o^ ^u ^dkn in un5 fdjlafen fonnen, U^ tin
SSort, eitt Saut pe li^edt (Le.). See also F. 2015-18, 2062.
345. The dependent order does not occur in main clauses,
but it is not the only order of the dependent clause.
1. The verb precedes two infinitives. One may be the past
participle of a modal auxiliary. Ex.: Rann icb t)ergejfen,ttjie^^
l)atte lommert fonnen? (Sch.). X)ap ein 9Kenfc^ t)o(^ einen ?D^enfc^en
fo ^erlegen foil mad)en fonnen! (Le.).
a. But in this case and in other compound tenses the '* verb " {i. e., the
personal part) may also stand between the participle and the other aux-
iliary or the infinitive, e. g., mil ber ^aufmann ba^ ^axi^ fod gefaitft f)a1>tn or
gefauft foE ^akn (in poetry). ®e!auft f^aUn foil is the common order.
2. The normal order may stand:
1. In dependent clauses containing indirect speech. Sr
150 GENERAL SYNTAX — WORD-ORDER. [346-
glaubt, S^alfpere ^aU 33rutu0 gum ipelten te^ <BtMt^ mac^en moUeit
(Le.).
2. See last sentence of 358.
3. In certain clauses with negative force containing an
enclitic „Denn'': e^ fei tenn tag + dependent order. See 336.
4. In substantive clauses : (^ott tt?et§, icfo bin nii^t fcbult> (Le.).
This is mere parataxis without conjunction.
346. The auxiliaries ^aben and fetn are also frequently
dropped in dependent clauses to avoid an accumulation of
verbal forms, both in prose and poetry. Lessing, Goethe,
and Klopstock, especially the first, drop the auxiliary very
freely and skillfully.
Ex.: 5Cie unbe^reiflid) i(^ ijon i1^m Beleitigt tt>orten (supply Mn
here or before beleitigt) unt) no(^ tt>ert>e (Le.). ^O^o^UA, tap ter
Sater tie ^^^ranneH te^5 e t n e n S^ing^ ni^t langer in feinem ^aufe
(supply ^at) tulten troUeu (id.).
347. The dependent order in main clauses is archaic and poetic.
Ex. : (Bicgfrieb ben jammer n?o|l [djmingen funnt (dialect for fonnte) (Uh.).
Ura^ne, ©ropmutter, 5D^utter unb ^inb in bumpfer^tube kifammen jtnb (Schwab).-
348. 1. The inverted order in the conditional clause and in a main clause for the
sake of impressiveness has sprung from the order of the question. Compare, for
instance: 1. 3ft ber greunb treu y (question). 2. 3ft fcer greunb treu ? (question). (Sut,
fo wirb er mir &eiftel)en. 3. 3ft ber ^yreunb treu (conditional clause), fo icirb er mtr 6eiftct}en.
4. 3ft mir ber greunb boc^ treu gefiUeben ! (impressive inversion).
2. The main clause has inversion when the dependent clause precedes, because it
generally begins with an adverb like fc, bann, etc. ©e^ft bu ni(^t, fo tl^u^ bu Unrej^t.
Without fo, the inversion really ceases. Hence we say, the normal order may still
stand for emphasis. But fo, etc., were so frequent that inversion became the rule.
Inversion is therefore limited originally to the question and to the choice of placing
the emphatic part of the sentence where it will be most prominent.
349. 1. The dependent order was in O. H. G. by no means limited to the dependent
clause. Toward the 10th century it begins to become rarer in the main clause. In
early M. H. G. it became limited to the dependent clause, so that now we may justly
call it the •' dependent -clause order ^
2. The verb at the end is, no doubt, a great blemish of German style— second only
to the separation of the little prefix of separable compound verbs, which may turn up
after many intervening parts at the close of the sentence. According to Delbrfick, the
dependent order— subject, object, verb — was the primitive one, still in force in Latin.
352] GEi^ERAL SYNTAX — WORD-ORDER. 151
General Eules for the Order of other Parts of the
Sentence besides Subject and Verb.
Position of the Predicate.
350. The predicate, be it an adjective, a substantive, par-
ticiple, infinitive, or separable prefix of a compound verb or
the first element of a loosely compounded verb, stands at the
end of a main clause in a simple tense. The adjuncts of the
predicate, such as objects, adverbs, stand between verb and
predicate.
Ex.: I)er ©erine mup fcijei^en, t^er (Sommer ijl ^n (Sch.). ^1^x [eiD
ein Wdfkx (id.). Sr ^at ijerlor^ne S3orte nur ^efproc^en (id.), ^ein
©d)i{t) fing t)iefen 9rtort)ftreic^ auf (id.). (Straflofe gre(^:^eit j>rld)t t)en
©itten ipo^n (id.), ©eftern fant) ciit ^agner^Sonce'rt ftatt*
In tlie dependent clause only the verb changes position, subject and
predicate remain as in the main clause, and the adjuncts stand between
them. For instance : ®iavLbt ba^ nic^t ! 3^r werbet biefe^ tampfe^ ©nbe nim^
mer erbUtfen (Sch.), becomes ©laubt m($t, bag i^r biefe^ ^ampfe<3 ©nbe je erblicfen
njerbet.
351. In the compound tense the separable prefix immedi-
ately precedes the participle, be it in a main or in a dependent
clause, ^reigic^ 3^^^^ ^ahcn intr jufammen au^gelebt nni: au^ge^alteti
(Sch.). "Lit S^olera toiti (is about to) u'ber^ant ne^men* See 137.
Order of Objects and Cases.
352. a. Case of a person before a case of the thing. 2lber
aud) nod) ^ann ♦ . ♦ ful)r ^er ^aifer fort, im @tdnt)eti ten grie^en au
aetgen (Sch.).
b. Case of a pronoun before a noun. 'Man Beftimmte pe
(them) liem attgemeinen Unn^illen jum Dpfer (Sch.).
c. The dative stands before the accusative; if both are per-
sons, the accusative may stand before the dative. Sr felbft
^atte i^em T:ienfte ^iefe^ ipaufe^ feine erften Selr»3uc(e genjitmet (Sch.).
152 GEN^EKAL SY]STAX — WORD-ORDER. [353-
d. The accusative-object stands before remoter objects, a
genitive or a preposition + case. But see also a. 'ilRan mb(^te
fagen, 33oltaire ^a6e nn (^efiibl »on Der SBic^tigleit t)iefer 3>er)'onlid^!eit
ge^aBt (H. Grimm). Die (^i^iilerin f(^rieb einen 3luffa^ iiber ten
©inter.
e. As to pronouns, ftd^ stands generally before e^, and both
before every other pronoun. The personal pronoun stands
before the demonstrative. The personal and ftcb may stand
before the subject, if it be a noun, in the inverted and depend-
ent orders. Sr ^ai fic^ e^ angeeicjnet. ^rummau (a proper name)
nd^ert ft(^ i^m (Sch.). SSer ttarf (tc^ fo ettt>a5 erlauBen ? 3enem ten
2Beg ju tern Bomifd^en 3:^rone ju i?erf(^ltegen, ergriff man Me SSaffen
f(^on unter ^Ulatt^ta^ (Sch.). 5Ba^ i^m tie x>ergroperte ^Ulac^t ter
@tdnt)e (estates) <m @elBfttl)dtig!eU: no(^ ubrig lie§, ^ielten feine
Slgnaten (relatives) unter txmm f^impflic^en 3i^<^^9 (i<i-)- -^^^ W
tie glotte ergeben ? A^aft tu e^ x^m tt?ieter gegeben ?
1. c also includes the personal pronouns : SSie fonnt' id) ol^ne Seugett mtc&
i^r ua^n ? (Sch.). The rules «, c, (? are by no means strict.
353. For the position of the adjective, see the use of the
adjective, 194, 212. Notice that what depends upon an
adjective, participle, or infinitive precedes them. "Die Sng^^
Idnter ftnt xhxtm ^errfd)er:^aufe ergeben* ^\xm ©e^en geboren, gum
©djauen beftettt, tern ^urme gefc^troren, gefallt mir tie SBelt (G.).
ffiir baten x^n, ten 33rief auf tie 5)oft gu ^tHn. (@^a!|>ere'» 2Ber!e
ftnt) feine 2:ugentle^ren, \xi ^apitet gebrac^t unt turd) retente (Eyempel
eridutert (Le.).
Position of Adverbs.
354. In general, adverbs stand before the words they
qualify. The modal adverbs nidit, etma, gtrar, fc^on, n?ol, etc.,
and the adverbs of time immer, f^on, {e^t, nie, nimmer stand
generally immediately before the predicate or in place of it if
there is none, txt^ ^iltuig ift begaubemt fdjbn (Mozart's 3^uber^
358] GENERAL SYJ^TAX — WORD-ORDER. 15^
flute) ^in fe^r ^eftiger §uften gretft Un ^xankn flat! an* 'Da^
]6^mvt §era mirD ni6t turd) 5Borte leiAt (Sch.). ©c^on ^iele 2:090
fe^' i(ft e^ fd)meigenD an (id.). ^&i l)abe eu^ noc^ nie erfannt (B.).
^aj^ tu i^n noc^ nid}t Befud^t ? (Notice the opposite of the Eng-
lish order in " never yet/' " not yet.")
355. An adverb of time stands before one of place, and
both before one of manner. Ex. : 2>ie(e Sauern tt>aren geftern
nac^ Ux (BtaU au Wlaxttt gefa^ren* S3ir fasten morgen per (Sifenba^n
nad) 3flul»olfta^t» (E5 tanjt pd) auf i^iefem ^latkn gupoDen ni*t fe^r gut*
1. Of several adverbs of time or place the more general precede the
more specific. 255ir reifen morgen frii^ urn 6 U^r 59 9)?tnuten ab* 2)er 5^olijtft
fanb hm SSetntnfenen auf ber ^^a^rj^rape im 2)rec!e liegen.
2. Adverbs of time precede objects when these are nouns, but pro-
nouns precede all adverbs. 2Btr fetcrn halh ben 4ten Suit, ben Slag ber nnab^
l^dnsigfeitaerflarung. 2Bir l^ofen i|n morgen auf bent ^a^n^ofe ju trefen*
356. Only ahtx, namlic^, iet)0(^, and a few others, can sepa-
rate subject and verb. Ex. : £)er 9li(^ter abtx fpra(% (Le.). Xit
^ac^tigall jetoA ftngt tt>unt)erf^i3n*
357. As to the position of the prepositions, they, with very
few exceptions, precede the noun ; when they follow the noun
has been stated under Prepositions. See, for instance, 303,
7, 8, 10.
Position of Clauses.
358. Dependent clauses have, in general, the positions of
those parts of speech and of the sentence which they repre-
sent, i, e,, the substantive clause standing for the subject or
object has the position of the subject or the object in the sen-
tence, etc. No special rules are needed for them. When
there are several dependent clauses, the last often takes for
variety the normal order introduced by unt>»
The following examples show well-placed dependent clauses : ^ettt
^atfer fann, m^ unfer ijl, »erf(^enfen (Sch.). SJerftegelt ^nV W^ unb »er^rieft,
154 GEJ^EBAL SYNTAX — WOKD-OKDER. [359-
ba§ er nieht guter ©rtgcl x\t (id.), ^ie S^rV bie i^m gelJurtr geb^ i(^ i|>m gern; ba^
9le(^t ba<3 er ftc^ tiimmt, ijcweigrMc^ i^m (id.). $lia id^ iiinger tvar, Uebte id) ni^t^
fo fe^r, dU 0loma'ne (novels) (G.). 9iic^etieu ttuite fid) baburd) ju klfen, bag er
ben geinbfeltgfeiten jtcifi^en beiben ein fd>Ie«ni9e^ £nbe mad>te (Scli.). ISRdn guter
©etjl ktta^rte mid) baijor/ bie flatter an ben ©ufen nur ju legcn (mir before bie
SiJatter in prose) (id.). 2)er 9J?enf(^ bege^rt, aGe^ an ftc^ ju reigen (G.). 2Bie
glucfUc^ tjl ber, ber, urn ftc^ niit bent Sc^idfal in ©inigfeit ju fe^en, nid)t fein ganje^
»or|erge^enbca i?eben megjitwerfen IJrand)t (id.).
359. The rules given can hardly be abstracted from poetry. Even in prose they
will be found frequently infringed. Rhythm, rhyme, and, in prose, emphasis control the
order of words and allow of much choice. But students translating into German should
adhere to the rales very strictly. It will be noticed that the German word-order coin-
cides very nearly with the old English, and does not differ after all so much from the
modem English word-order. The chief points of difference are the dependent order,
the position of adverbs of time, which in English stand generally at the end, and the
position of the adjuncts of adjectives, participles, and infinitives, wliich precede the
latter instead of following them as in English.
1. The word-order required by certain conjunctions has been frequently mentioned
in the General Syntax. See, for instance, 320.
LIST OF ABBEEVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS THAT
REQUIRE EXPLANATIONS.
Ags. = Anglo-Saxon.
(B.) = Bible.
(Bo.) = Bodenstedt.
(Bii.) = Burger.
(Ch.) = Cliamisso.
D. = Butch or Dative.
(F.) = Hart's Edition of Goethe's
Faust, Part I.
Fr. = French.
(G.) -^ Goethe.
Go. = Gothic.
Gr. — Greek.
G. T. = General Teutonic.
(H. and D.) = Hart's edition of
Goethe's Hermann and Dorothea.
(He.) = Herder.
H. G. = High German.
(Hu.) = A. von Humboldt.
I.-E. = Indo-European.
L. = Latin.
(Le.) = Leasing.
L. G. = Low German.
(Lu.) = Luther's works excepting
his translation of the Bible.
M. G. = Middle German.
M. H. G. = Middle High German.
N. G. = North German or North
Germany.
N. H. G. = New High German.
O. Fr. = Old French.
O. H. G. = Old High German.
(Prov.) = Proverb.
(R.) = Riickert.
Rules = the oflBcial rules for spell-
ing, see 37.
(Sch.) = Schiller.
S. G. = South German.
(Sh.) = Shakespere translated x>y
Schlegel and Tieck.
(Uh.) = Uhland.
V. L. = Vulgar Latin.
< means " derived from," " sprang from," '* taken from."
> means ** passed or developed into," ** taken into."
+ between a German and non- German word denotes common origin
or ** cognates." In other positions it means " accompanied or followed
by."
* before a word means that that form of the word does not actually
occur, but is conjectured or reconstructed.
: = :, or : as :, means a relation as in a mathematical proportion.
I, II, III after verbs indicates the strong verb-classes.
— between letters means " interchanges with," e.g.,^ — d) as in ^o^er —
^od) or e — i as in ne^men — nimmjl*
SUBJECT-INDEX.
The numbers refer to the paragraphs. The umlauts have a separate place, h after
a, b after o, u after u.
Ablaut : nature of, 393 ; four grades,
394,463,2; 496; 497.
Ablaut series : and verb-classes, 132-
139 ; I.-E., 394, 1 ; G. T., > O. H. G. >
N. H. G., 395-400; 459-467 ; group-
ing of, 459.
Abstract nouns : article before, 149 ; no
article, 145 ; 155, 2; plural of, 171 ;
62, Rem.
Accent: 417,418; degrees of, 419;
chief on stem-syllable, 420 • 420, 2;
478, 4; Eng. in Norman-Fr. words,
420, 3 ; in compounds, 421-423 ; sec-
ondary, 424; rhetorical, 426; "free"
in I.-E., 420, 2 ; in foreign words, 42 7,
420, 1; 424, 4; 493,2; 63, 2; charac-
teristic of Germanic Lang., 478, 4; =in-
tonation, 392, 1.
Accidence : 38-138 ; Historical Commen-
tary on, 428-476.
Accusative: office of, 198; after verbs,
198-206; two A. after verbs, 199;
predicate in passive, 202, 2; cognate,
203 ; logical subject in, 205 ; after re-
flexive verbs, 206 ; adverbial, 207 ; dif-
ference between A. and G. of time, 208,
1 ; after adjectives, 207, 1 ; 183 ; abso-
lute, 209 ; 297, 1 ; by attraction in the
pred. after laffen, 202, 1 ; after prepos.,
304-306; with Inf., 292.
Adjective: decl. of, 69-72 ; 436 ; origin
of strong decl., 437; comparison of,
73-76, see comparison, compar. and
superlat. ; 438, 439 ; used as nouns,
820, 221, 181 ; gender of same, 160,
3 ; 169 ; 162, 3 ; G. after, 182, 183 ;
D. after, 194 ; A. after, 183 ; 207, 1.
Attributive use of, 211-217 ; only
used attributively, 211 ; uninflected
used attributively, 212 ; in the predi-
cate, 218, 220 ; as nouns declined
strong, 214 ; G. sg. m. and n., 216, 1;
declined weak, 213; 217,1; as nouns,
221, 1 ; origin of double decl., 215 ; un-
settled usage as to strong and weak
decl., 216, 221 ; after indef. pron.,
214 ; 216, 4; 181 ; after person, pron.,
216,2; two or more adj., 212,3; 217.
In the predicate, 218, 219 ; only used
in pred., 219; position of adjuncts of,
353 ; accent in certain compounds,
422, 1-7 ; derivation of, 522-528 ;
used as adverb, 554.
Adjective Clauses : nature of, 323 ; 326-
328 ; 339.
Adverbial Clauses : nature of, 323, 329 ;
various kinds of, 330-340 ; see tempo-
ral, local, clauses of manner and cause
(332-340), final (338). conditional,
(340), etc.
Adverbs : origin of, 551-555 ; < G. of
nouns, 187, 552 ; +prepos. supplanting
the person, pron., 234 ; syntax of, 299,
300; after prepos. + noun, 300; ad-
verbs which are only adverbs, 300, 1 ;
554, 2 ; adjective as, 300, 2 ; 554 ;
comparison by, 223, 224 ; relative and
absolute superl. of, 300, 2 ; nature of,
301, 1 ; interrogative, 251, 5; relative,
258, 326, 331 ; demonstrative, 327,
3; in local clauses, 331, a- position in
a sentence, 354 ; order of adverbs of
time, place, manner, 355 ; accent in
compound, 423.
Adversative Sentences : coordinate, 320.
Affricate : 413, 5 ; 408, 1.
Alemanic : 483, 1.
Alphabet : printed and script, 1, 2 ; ori-
gin of the G. letters, 360 ; Latin letters
in G., 360, 2 ; relation to G. sounds,
361.
Anglo-Saxon, see English.
Apposition; < G. of nouns, 181 ; 179,
1; 317.
Articles: inflect, of, 38; accent of, 39;
contraction with prepositions, 40 ; spell-
ing of, 39 ; 41 ; syntax of, 140-158 ;
nature of 140 ; general cases of absence
of, 141-146 ; before proper nouns,
147 ; before abstract nouns, 149; be-
fore names of materials, 150 ; before
collective nouns, 151 ; repetition of,
158. See A., def. and indef.
Article, Def. : infl. of, 38 ; attraction to
preceding words not prepositions, 41 ;
contraction with preceding prepos., 40 ;
relation to Eng. possessive pron., 154,
243,3; distributive for Eng. "a," 156.
Article, Indef. : infl. of. 38 ; aphaeresis of,
41; after certain pronouns, 144, 252;
before certain pronouns, 157.
Austrian: 483.
SUBJECT-INDEX.
267
Auxiliaries: of tense: infl. of, 110 ; use
of, 365, 366 ; 383, 2 ; omission of,
346; in passive voice, 373.
Modal : see pret. pres. verbs ; special
uses of, 367; verbs of motion omitted
after, 367, Rem. ; imperative force of,
387, 4 ; + perf. and pres. inf., 388, 1 ;
390.; in future, 3 79, 3, a.
Bavarian-Austrian : 483, 2 ; 488, 5, a.
Bible: 486; 487.
Brecfiung : 405, Rem.
Capitals : initial, 364 ; in pronouns of
address, 330; in article, 39.
Cardinals, see Numerals.
Cases : see individual cases, N., G., etc. ;
order of cases in the sentence, 353.
Causal Sentences : coordinate, 331 ; sub-
ordinate, 337.
Comparative : see comparison ; use of,
3*/«3 ; by adverbs, 333, 334 ; conjunc-
tions after, 333.
Comparative Clauses : 333, 1-3 ; with
nid)t, 333, 2.
Comparison: of adjectives, 73-76; 438;
439; irregular, 76, 1; defective and
redundant, 76, 2; the suflixes, 73, 438 ;
by adverbs, 333, 334, 333, 1 ; of two
qualities of the same object, 334.
Compound words : accent of, 431-434 ;
irregular accent of certain nouns, adjec-
tives, and prefixes, 433 ; secondary ac-
cent in, 434 ; 531 : see nouns, adj.,
etc. ; 516 ; compared with Eng., 531,
Compound tenses : 109-115 ; 383.
Concessive Clauses : 339.
Conditionals : formation of, 115, 383, 5 ;
force of, 380, 381, 384, 5.
Conditional Clauses : tenses in, 380, 384,
5 ; nature of, 340 ; several forms of,
340, 1 5 word-order in, 343, c.
Conjugation : strong and weak, 101-103 ;
446,476 ; weak, 117, 118, 447, 454,
455 ; strong, 130-133, 446,456-469.
Conjunctions : classification of, 307 ; ori-
gin of, 301, 558.
Coordinating: copulative, 319; adver-
sative, 330 ; concessive, 330, 2 ; causal,
331 ; illative, 333.
Subordinating : in temporal clauses,
330 ; in comparative clauses, 333 ;
334 -J in consecutive clauses, 336 ; in
restnctive clauses, 336; causal, 337;
final, 338 ; concessive, 339 ; condi-
tional, 340.
Consecutive Clauses : 335.
Consonant-declension, see n-declension.
Consonant-stems : become i-steme, 54 ;
438, 2 ; 433, 1 ; 433-435.
Consonants: description of, 374-389;
open, 374-381 ; shut, 383-385 ; na-
sals, 386-388^; compound, 389 ; long,
389, 5 ; cous.-table, p. 1G7 ; see Grimnvs
and Vemer's Laws; doubling or length-
ening of, 389, 5; 413, 5; 488, 2, c;
535, 1, R. 2.
Coordinate Sentences: 318; various kinds
of, 319-333.
Copulative Sentences : 319.
Dauisli: 479, n.
Dative: oflice of, 189; as nearer object
after intrans. and certain compound
verbs, 190 ; as indirect object after
trans, verbs, 191; ethical, 193 ; after
impers. verbs, 193 ; after adj., 194 ;
190; supplanted by prepos. + case,
195; after prepos., 303, 305, 306.
Declension : of articles, 38; of nouns, 43-
68 ; 438-435 ; of foreign nouns, 64,
63,3; of proper nouns, 65-68; ofthe ad-
jective, 69-73; of pronouns, 81-100.
Demonstrative Pronouns : 88-91 ; use of,
344-350 ; origin of, 443 ; supplanted
by l)ier and ba + prepos., 351, 2.
Dependent Clauses, see Subordinate.
Dependent order of words : 341, 344 ;
in main clauses, 347,349; the oldest
order, 349, 2.
Dialect : and written lansruage, 390 ; in
M. H. G., 485, 2 ; in N. H. G., 486,
487; in the pronunciation of the edu-
cated, 390 ; and the public school, 393,
5.
Diphthongs: pronunc. of, 33 ; analysis of,
373 ; become single vowels, 488, 4 • <
long vowels, 488, 5.
Dutch : 481, 3 ; 493, 3.
East Prankish : 483, 3 ; 486.
Elliptical clauses and phrases : 310 ; 384,
5, Rem.; 387; 343, of, 2.
English: 479, III. ; 493,4; umlaut in,
403, 2.
Euphony: 418,1.
Exclamation : G. in, 188, 309, 3 ; order
of words in, 343, e ; see interjections.
Final clauses : 338.
Flemish : 481, 3.
Foreign nouns : decl. of, 64 ; gender of,
163; verbs, 538.
Foreign wordls : spelling of, 365 ; ac-
cent, 437, 430, 1 ; 434, 4 ; in G. word-
stock, 493-494.
Fractions : 633, 2.
Frisian : 481, 1.
Future : formation of, 114 ; force of,
378 ; imperative force of, 378, 3 ;
387, 3 ; present with future force, 374,
5 ; condit. for subj. of, 381 ; origin of,
383,4; 379, 3.
Gender : of nouns and their distribution
among the declensions according to,
43; syntax of, 159-169; grammati-
c.il and sex, 159, IGO ; concord ofthe
268
SUBJECT-INDEX.
same, 165-168 ; according to meaning,
160; according to endings, 161; doubt-
ful and double, 163 ; change of, 161,
Eera., 163; of compound nouns, 164;
concord of, 165-168; between subject
and predicate, 313, 316.
Genitive: office of, 180; various kinds of
G., 180, 1-7; partitive G. passed into
apposition, 181, 351; supplanted by
piepos., 181 ; dependent upon adj.,
83, 183 ; dependent upon verbs as
nearer object, 184; as remoter object,
185; after impersonal verbs, 186; ad-
verbial G. of place, time, etc., 187; sup-
planted by A., 307, Rem.; difference be-
tween A. and G., 308; after prepos.,
303; in exclamations, 188.
German Dialects : classification of, 480-
483; 484.
Gsrman Language : see Sdiriftsprache ;
history of, 478-494 ; relation to other
Germanic languages, 480-486.
German Sounds : analysis of, 366-389.
Germanic Languages : relation to other
I.-E. languages, 477; characteristics of ,
478 ; classification of, 479-484.
Gerundive: 107 ; 389, Rem. ; 398 ; 453.
Gothic: letters, 360; language, 479, 1.
Grimm's Law : 407-415 ; G. T. shifting,
407-410; G. shifting, 413-415; mod-
ifications of, 413 ; in dialects, 480 ; in
derivative verbs, 535, 1, R. 2.
Hessian : 483, 2.
High German : explanation of terms, 480,
3, a. See South German.
Hildebrantslied : 485, 1.
Icelandic : 479, IT ; 339. 1 ; 530.
Ilkitive Sentences : co-ordinate, 333.
Imperative : 105, 450 ; in strong verbs.
131 ; personal pron. in, 386, 1 ; future
with imperative force, 378, 3 ; 387, 3 ;
force of, 386 ; other verbal forms with
the force of, 387 ; conditional and con-
cessive force of 339, 1 ; word-order in,
343, b.
Indefinite Pronouns : 94-100, 445 ; use
of, 359-363.
Indirect Speech : tenses in, 383; mood in,
385; 335,3; 338.
Indo-European: 477.
Infiuitive: 106, 451; nature of, 388;
390, 3, b ; perfect, 388, 1 ; imper. force
of, 387, 1 ; without and with ,11. 389-
391; 391,3-5; without v.t, 389,Rem.;
after certain groups of verbs, 390 ; with
ju, do., 391, 1 ; as object and subject,
391, 2, 3 ; A. with, 393 ; as a noun,
393 ; governed by prepos. + ^u, 391, 1 ;
inf. clause, 335, 2, Rem. 3 ; 333, 1; 335,
1 ; position of two, in dependent clause,
345, 1 ; position of adjuncts of, 353.
Insfumental: 194.
Interiections: .559, 5G0.
IntCxi-ogative Pronouns: 93,444; use of,
351-353 ; D. supplanted by lue(i) +
prepos., 351, 2.
Interrogative Sentences : 309, 2 ; indirect,
335, 2 ; disjunctive, 335, 2, c ; word-
order, 343, a.
Inverted order of words: 341, 343; in
inserted main clause, 343, 1 ; origin of,
in conditional and in main clauses, 348,
1 ; after certain co-ordinating conjimc-.
tions, 319 ; in a clause instead of obs
0lei(^, etc., 339.
I-stems: 53-55; 439.
Iteratives: 531,2.
Jo-stems: 46,2; 438; in adj., 437, 3:
496,2; 533.
Kanzleisprache : 486,487.
Labialization, 367, 1 ; 370, 4, Rem.
Language : written. See Schriftsprache,
Law of Finals: 478,3.
Levelling : nature of, 491, 1 ; in the strong
pret., 460 ; in the weak verbs. 454,
455.
Low Frankish : 481, 3.
Low German Dialects: 480, 1; 481;
> H. G., 493, 3 ; their relation to the
written language, 393, 1-3 ; 391.
Low Saxon: 481,2.
Luther: 486,487.
Middle Frankish: 483, 1.
Middle German Dialects: 480,2; 483;
488, 3, a ; 488, 4.
Middle High German : 485, 2 ; transition
of sounds to N. H. G., 488-491.
Mi-verbs: 136; 449,1,2; 473-476.
Modal Clauses : 333.
Modal Auxiliaries. See Auxiliaries.
Mood : see subj., imper. ; in adjective
clauses, 338.
Multiplicatives : 531, 1.
N-decleneion : of nouns, 47, 61, 62,
433-435 ; of adjectives, 69, 313, 315.
Narrowness of vowels : 367,2.
Negatives : 309, 1 ; double negative, 309,
1 ; in comparative clauses, 333, 2.
New High German : 485, 486.
Nominative: 178,179; absolute, 397;
predicate. 179; A. for, in pred., 303, 1.
Normal order of words : 341, 343 ; in
subordinate clauses, 345, 2 ; after co-
ordinating conjunctions, 343, 2 ; when
the subordinate clause precedes, 343, 3;
348, 2 ; 343, c ; 358.
North German : see Low G.
Norwegian: 479,11.
Nouns: decl. of, 43-68 ; systems of noun*
decl., 43 ; distribution of nouns among
the three declensions according to gen-
der, 43, 433 ; cfeneral rules for noun-
decL, 43 ; strong decl. of, 44-60, 438-
431 ; weak decl. of, Gl, 63, 438, 2 ;
SUBJECT-INDEX,
269
432 ; mixed decl. of, 63, 435, 1 ; use
of cases, see individaal cases ; deriva-
tion of, 496-51G; composition, 517-
581. gender of compound, 1G4; ac-
cent of, 431, 423. See Number, Proper
N., Foreign N.. Abstract N., Compound.
Number : Singular and plural of nouns :
pi. the basis of classification of strong
nouns, 44 ; no sign, 45, a ; umlaut,
45,*; -e, 49-55; -er, 56-60, 431;
(e)n, 61-63 ; pi. in -3, 60 ; irregular,
51, 173, 173 ; double forms, 58, 163,
4; 431, 2; of abstract nouns, 171;
nouns only in pi., 174.
Sing, or pi. after nouns of quantity,
etc., 175 ; why sing., 176 ; sing, where
Eng. pi., 177; sing. neut. of pronouns
refer to masc, fern., and plural nouns,
168, 313.
Sin<,^ and pi. of verbs : 311 ; pi. after
a collective noun, 313 ; "pi. of majes-
ty," 311, 2.
Numerals : 77 ; infl. of, 78 : when in-
flected, 336, 337; cardinals, 77-79;
pi. in -e, 337 ; in -cr, 338, 2 ; ordinals,
80, 311, 530, 533 ; infinitive, 100;
derivation of, 5^9-^33.
Old High German : 485.
Ordinals : see Numerals.
Orthography : division into syllables, 36;
regulated by government, 37, 36i, 2;
historical notes on, 360-365; umlaut-
eigns, 363 ; on the marks to show
length, 363 ; on use of capitals, 364 ; of
foreign words, 365 ; government rules,
37.
O-stems ; lose sign of the pi., 47, 51,
438.
Participial Clauses : 394, 4 ; 333, 1.
Participles : 103, 107, 453 ; use of, 394
-397 ; position of adjuncts of, 353.
Past part, without gc-, 108, 113,
453, 2; 470, 538; isolated, 139,
Rem.; 131, Rem.; 534, 4 ; imper. force
of, 387, 2; passive force of, 395 ; act-
ive force of, 395, 2 ; 396 ; dependent
upon fommen. l^eiFii, etc , 396 ; of
verbs of motion, 396; absolute con-
struction, 397.
Pres.part.,374,6; 383,3,4; 394,453;
in compound tenses, 383,1, 2; 351.
Passive : see Voice.
Perfect: formation of, 113; force of.
376; with future perf force, 379,2;
Eng. perf. — G. pres., 374,4; impera-
tive, 386, 1 ; infinitive, 388.
Personal Pronouns : 81, 83, 440 ; syn-
tax of, 330-335 ; gender of, 81 ; use
of, in address, 330-33,3 ; repetition of,
33.3, 2 ; omission of, 333, 1 ; sup-
planted by other pronouns and preposi-
tions, 334 ; in the imper., 386, 1.
Phonology : 360-437 ; orthography, 360
-365 ; analysis of sounds, 366-389 ;
as standard of pronunc, 300-393 ; pho-
netic laws. 393-417 ; accent, 418-437.
Plaitdeutvsch : 481, 2. a ; 484,
Pluperfect: formation of, 113; force of,
377; relation to Condit., 380, 381,
384, 5,
Plural : see Number.
Popular Etymology ; 494, S, 3.
Possessive Pronouns : 85-87 ; sjTitax Oi,
339-343 ; origin of, 441 ; compounds
with, 87; used substantively, 340;
repetition of, 341, 343, 2 ; relation to
def. article, 154, 343,3 ; supplanted by
demonstr. pron., 343, 1 ; uninliected,
339, 343, 1; after G., 180, 4,
Predicate, 308 ; concord of subj. and
pred., 311-317 ; number of verb after
collective noun, 313 ; when subjects are
connected by conjunctions, 311, 314;
person of verb when subjects are of dif-
ferent persons, 315 ; position of, 350,
351.
Prepositions: syntax of, 301-306 ; nat-
ure of, 301, 1,2; 556; classification
of, according to cases, and treatment of,
in alphabetical order, 303-306 • gov-
ei-niug the G., 303 ; governing the D.,
303 ; governing the A., 304 ; govern-
ing D. and A., 305 ; general position of,
357.
Present: infl. of, 103: of weak verbs,
118. 447 ; of strong verbs, 131, 456 ;
O. H. G., 446 ; of pret.-pres. verbs,
134 ; uses of, 374 ; periphrastic, 374,
6; impcr. force, 387, 3; formation of
present-stem, 457.
Preterit: infl. of, 103; weak, 454;
strong, 458 ; levelling in. 460 ; double
subj., 135, 136. 464,3 ; 139 ; of pret.-
pres, verbs, 134. 470; force of, 375 ;
relation to condit., 380,381,384,5;
ind. for unreal subj., 340, 3.
Pret. pres. verbs : 134 ; 135 ; 108, 2 ;
367; 470-473
Pronouns: inflection of, 81-100, 440-
445; syntax of, 330-363; concord
with noun, 165-168, 335; origin of,
496; position of, in the sentence, 353,
e ; neut. pron. refers to masc. or fom.
noims, 168 ; neut. pron. one of two
accusatives, 199, 1, 2. See reciprocal,
possessive, etc., separately.
Pronunciation: of letters. 1-37, 366;
standard of, 390-393 ; disputed points
in standard, 391 ; Hanoveiian and N.
G., 390, 4 ; 393, 1-3 ; dialect in, 390,
1-3.
Proper Nouns : decl- of, 65-68 ; article
before, 147, 155, 1 ; gender of, 160, 2,
with Rem. ; 164.
Question : see Interrogative Sentences.
Reciprocal Pronouns: 84, 197, 306,
338.
Reduplication : nature of, 458 ; in VII. CI.
270
SUBJECT-IKDEX.
of verbs, 130, 131; in the present,
457,3.
Reflexive Pronouns: 83,337; personal
for, 33 7, 1.
Relative Clauses : see Adjective CI.
Relative Prononns : 93 ; use of, 354-
358 ; origin of, 354 ; supplanted by
adverbs and conjunctions, 357, 358,
336, 337.
Restrictive Clauses : 336.
Roundness of vowels; 367, 1: in S. G.,
391, 5.
Runes, 493, 2.
BUckmnlaut : 403, 2 ; 455.
Scandinavian, 479, 11.
Schriftsprache : 390; 485, 2f 486, 487.
Sentence : structure of simple, 308 ; con-
stituents o^ 308 ; arrangement of, see
word-order: various kinds of main,
3Q9 ; 384, 2 ; 386 : compound, see co-
ordinate and subordinate.
Shifting of mutes : see Grimm's Law.
Shifting of spirants : see Vemer's Law.
Silesian : 483, 6.
Singular : see Number.
Slavic : 477 ; 481, 2, Rem. ; 483, 4-6.
Souancy: 376.
South Frankisn : 483, 2.
South German Dialects : 480, 3 ; 483 ;
488, 5, a ; 489 ; 490, 1, a ; relation to
the written language, 391, 393, 4.
Suabian : 483, 2.
Subject r 308 ; concord of, and predicate,
311-317 ; position of subject and verb,
341, 356.
Subjunctive : kinds of, 384 ; potential,
384, 3; 335, 2. Rem. 1 ; 335, 2 ; 338 ;
in conditional clauses, 340, 448.
Subordinate Sentences : 318, 333, 334-
340; word-order in, 343, c; 344-
346 ; 350, Rem. ; omission of auxil.,
346 ; position of, 358.
Substantive Clauses : 333-335 ; nature
of, 333 ; various kinds of, 335 ; nor-
mal order in, 345.
Superlative: see Comparison ; use of, 333
-335 ; never uninfiected. 333 ; absolute
and relative, 333 ; applied to two ob-
jects, 335; of adverbs, 300, 2.
Siirdness : 376.
Swedish : 479, IL
Swiss : 483, 1, a.
Temporal Clauses : 330.
Tenses : simple, 101, 103, 448 ; use of,
374, 375, 383.
Compound: 109, 113-116, 376-
381 ; origin of, 383 ; position of sepa-
rable prefix, 351. See the separate
tenses.
Thuringian : 483, 4.
Time : modes of expressing time, 336 ;
G. of, 187 ; A. of, 308.
Umlaut : signs of, 31, 363 ; as a sign oi
the pi., 45, b\ 48 ; in comparis(m oi
adj., 74; in pret. subj. of strong verbs,
131 ; in the pres. of strong verbs, 137,
Rem. ; 139, Rem. ; 130, Rem. ; 131,
Rem. : 404 ; nature of, ^01 ; in Eng.,
403, 2 ; spread of, 488, 1 ; in derived
verbs, 535.
Upper Saxon : 483, 5.
Variatives: 533.
Verb : principal parts of, 103 ; infl. of,
\i)6 ; personal suffixes of 104, 118,
121, 449; classification of, 364 ; ir-
regular weak, 119, 454, 455; weak
vebs are derivative, 117, 1.
Reduplicating: 130, 131,458; non-
thematic, see mi- verbs ; anomalous,
134-136.
Compound : 137 ; D. after, 190 ; A.
after, 198, 547-550; accent in, 421.
Reflexive, 138 ; 197; 306; 336,2:
364.
Impersonal : subject of, 336, 1, 2, 5;
cases after, 186, 193, 305 ; G. after,
184-180 ; D. after, 189-193 ; D. or A.
after, 196, 300 ; A. after. 198 ; two A.,
199, 301 ; neuter, 179 ; trans., 191,
364 ; intrans., 364.
V. of motion : comp. tense of, 365, 4;
366 ; 383, 3 ; 390, 2 ; past part, of,
396; see Number, Predicate, auxil.,
pret. pres. verbs ; person of, in relative
clauses, 336 ; position of, 341, 350^
Rem. ; derivation of, 534-550.
Verner's Law : 411, 413, 416.
Voice : passive, infl. of, 116 ; constmc-
tion in, 179,2; 303, 2; 368-373;
replaced by reflexive construction, 3 73 ;
origin of, 373 ; in Go., 383, 1.
Vowel-declension : see Noun, strong ;
438-431.
Vowels : quantity of, 33-35, 488, 2, b ;
analysis and description of, 367-373;
vowel-table, p. 162 ; general remarks
upon, 373; doubling of. 33,363,4;
connecting v. in conjugation, 118;
449, 2 ; 454, 2, 3 ; in ablaut, 393-
400 ; in umlaut, 401, 403, 404 ; in-
terchanges of, 403-406 ; lengthening
of, in W. H. G., 488, 2 ; ^hortening o^
488, 3 ; diphthongization of long v.,
488, 5.
Vowel- stems : see Vowel-Declension.
Wordformation : 495 - 559 ; substan-
tives, 495-531 ; pronouns, 496 ; ad-
jectives, 533-533; verbs, 534-550;
adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions,
551-558 ; interjections, 559.
Word-order : 341-350 ; normal, 343 ;
inverted, 343 ; dependent, 344. See
these separate heads; in poetry and
W arose, 359,
ord-stock: 493-494.
WORD-INDEX AND GERMAN-ENGLISH
VOCABULARY.
The first contains a list of the German and English words, prefixes and suffixes
specially treated in the grammar. Also the strong and irregular verbs with the princi-
pal parts, and the second or third pers. sing, of the pres. ind. and the imperative sing,,
if they are at all peculiar.
The umlauts have a separate place, a after a, o after o, vi after u.
The numbers refer to the paragraphs. I., II., III., etc., mean the strong verb-classes
and ablaut series.
After the substantives the gender {m., n.,f.) and the plural ending are always indi-
cated of the strong nouns, the gender and w. (= weak) are given after the weak nouns.
When there is no pi. sign at all, it is indicated by -. When the cognate Eng. word is
rare, or when its meaning differs quite widely from the German word, it is placed after
the common Eng. meaning.
The vocabulary is meant to cover all untranslated single words and illustrative sen-
tences as far as § 147, except the foreign words 63, 3; 63, 2; 64.
. If weak verbs must have the connecting vowel this is indicated by the preterit.
- after a word means a prefix in composition, before a word it means a suflax.
a.
a, pronnnc. of, 3; description of, 371, 4;
quantity of, before r, it, xt, 33, 488, 2 ;
in ablauts., VI., 459, 4 ; in ablauts. I.-
V., 459.
a, in Engl, phrase " so much a pound,''
156.
9lag, n.^pl. Stfcr, carrion.
ah, from, 303,1; 516, 1.
aljer, but, 60, + word-order, 343, 2; 356;
comt)ared with fenbevn, 330, 2 R
H&cr-, 516, 1.
ab^anben, lost, 439, 1.
aO'fc^rclben, to copy, see f(i>rei6cn.
9l6t, m., !le, + abbot,
a A, alas, 60; 559, 1.
a^ten, with G., to attend to, in 83; (ad^s
tete).
oc, as sign of umlaut of a, 363, 2.
oeu as sign of umlaut, 363, 2.
Sifter-, 516. 2.
-age, noun-sufHx ; fern, gender, 161, 2;
163,5.
at, pronnnc. of, 33, 373. 1.
att.+all, 100; dc'f. art. after. 144; neuter,
168; use of, 361; accent^ 433,5.
attcin, conj.^ but; + word-order, 343, c.
attcv-,+8uperl., 333; accent, 433, 1, 5.
ollcrbincj?, certainly, 553, 1.
aUerlie'bft, charming, very lovely, 333 ;
433, + Shakspere^s cUderliefest.
allma^ltd), gradually, 536, 3, c.
al^, before a predicate noun, 179 ; in ap-
position, 3 17; before a relative pronoun,
33 7, 3 ; in temporal clauses, 330, 1;
in comparative clauses, 333, 343, c;
after comparative, 333, 2 ; after adjec-
tives, nid)io, anoer-, 333, 2, a, 3 ; + baft,
333, 3.
alt, + old, etym., 453, 1.
5lUev, n., -, age, old age.
am < an bent, + on the, 40.
-am, noun-suf., 501.
3tmt, w., -er, etym., 516, 3.
an, + on, 305, 3; 306,1,2; compared with
auf, 300, 2.
ail < an ben, 40.
an'Oinbcn, to tie, see 6inben.
-anb, noun-suflix, 505.
onbcr-, + other, 94 ; accent in comp.,433,
1; etym., 445, 3; in comp., 530.
anbevt()al() = 1', 530. '
3lnnuit,/., «oi?^., grace; gender. 164, a.
an'i:I;rei6en, to write down, charge, see
^d)reiIJen.
272 WORD-IN^DEX Ai^D GERMAIT-EKGLISH VOCABULARY.
anjlatt, + instead of, 303, 1; + ju and inf.,
291,1, R.: 333, 1.
Hnt-, 616,3.
-ant, 505.
2tntn)Drt, /., •z^., + answer; gender, 164, e.
Strm, m., -o, + arm.
9lrmut, /., no pi., poverty; gender, 164, a.
-at, 511, 2, d\ in neut. foreign nouns,
163, 1.
SItem, m., -§>, no pi., breath, 47, 1; 501.
atmen, to breathe, 118, 1; (atmete).
au, proniinc. of, 32 ; analysis of, 372, 2;
origin of, 488, 5; 490, 6.
auc^, also, + eke ; in relat. clause, 93, 4;
with trenn, ob, 339.
auf, + upon, 305, 3 ; compared with an,
300, 2; +ba^, in order that 338.
au'ferfte^^en, to rise again, 546, 2.
au'frid}ten, to erect, (-ri^tete).
9tuge, n„ -%, -u, + eye,
a-umlaut, see a, c.
au§, + outof, 303,2.
au^er, besides, 303, 3; +ba^, 336.
§t5t, /., -, + axe, 491, 2; 512, 2.
ft, pronunc. of, 31 ; 362 ; 371, 2, R. 3 ;
see umlaut,
ft^en, to bait, corrode, + etch, 535, 1, R. 2.
ftu, pronunc. of, 32; 372, 3; origin of,
488, 5.
au^er-, + outer, 7G, 2.
B, pronnnc. of, 4; description of, 385, 2;
final, 385, 3; „l)arteg" l\ 383, 1, R.;
392, 2; Eng. correspondents of, 408, 2;
413, 2; 490, 6.
1-, see be-; 557, 1; 414,3.
Ba(fen, buf, geba(fen, + bake,VI.,l 29 ; (badft,
Bute) ; in comp., 528.
5Bab, n.. -eg, -cr, +bath.
33al!e(n), rti., -, beam, 46, 4.
33anb, /?., 58; m., 162,4; 496.
58anbe, /., w., + band (of robbers, etc.).
-bar, adj.suffix, 526, 1 ; accent, 424,
1,6.
barmfie'rjig, merciful; accent, 422, 3.
ba^, more, very, + better, 76; etym.^ 439.
Sauer, m., w., farmer, 62, 3 ; 63; strong,
- builder; n., -, cage.
33au, m., -e, see also 51.
33aum, m., — c, tree, +beam.
33 ar, m., w.,+bear.
be-, + be-, by, 108, 3; 540, 1; Bee bei.
beben, tremble, etym.^ 457, 3.
bebarf, see bcburfen.
beberfen, to cover, + deck,
bebient, etijm., 295, 2.
bebingt, past part., conditioned, 125, 1.
bebftrfen, + G., to need; for infl. see 135, 2.
befeljlen, befall, befo^Ien, to command, IV.,
127; (beftc^Ifl, befiebt, be^ol^le).
SBefeftigung, /., w., fortification.
betleii3en, befits, beftiftcn, I., 122, 1; refl., to
apply oneself to ; (bu bcftei^eft, bu or et
be[lcipt).
befreunben, + befriend; (befveunbete).
begeben, refl., + G., to give up, 540,4; see
geben.
beginiieit, begann, begonnen, + begin. III.,
125, 2 ; 454, 3 ; 457, 2 ; (begbnne).
bef)aupten, to assert, 540, 4 ; (bel^auptetc).
bet, + by, near, 303, 4; in comp., 516,4.
beib-, -h both, 100; use of, 228.
Sein, w., -e, leg, + bone,
beifammen, together, in the presence of.
bcipen, btj3r gebifien, + bite, I., 122, 1 ; (bu
beipeft, bu or er beipt).
beijen, + to bait, cauterize; eiym.^ 535, 1,
belejen, past part., well read, 540, 3.
beUen, bott, gebDUen,+ to bark, VIII., 133;
{w. and bittft).
benc^mcu, take away, 540, 4; see ne:^men.
bequcm, convenient, comfortable, + becom-
ing; 409,3.
bergeii, barg, geborgen, hide. III., 125, 3 ;
397; (birgft, birg, barge and bitrge).
berittcn, past part., mounted; 524, 4.
bevflen, barft, gebDrften, + burst, III., 125,3;
(bu birfteft, bu or er btrft, bh'ft or berftc ;
borfte or barfte).
^cfagt(er), the afore + said 146, 1.
beid^eibeu, modest, past part., 524, 4.
beffer, bcft, + better, best, 76, 1 ; 439 ;
300, 2.
beyud)t, frequented, 74.
bcten, to pray; (betete).
^etrubniS,/. or n.. -ifte, sadness, grief.
93ctt, n., -e§, -en, +bed; 3U— +to — or
in — .
beuvgen, +bow 488, 5.
beircgen, beioog, bewogen, to induce, VEII.,
133 ; (bcroegft, beirege).
bid, Eng., 396.
bicgen, bog, gebogcn, bend, 11., 124, 2; (bu
beugft, rare).
U^Hene, /"., lu., +bee, 455, 2.
bietcn,'bDt, geboten, offer, IL, 124, 2; 396;
408, 2; (er bictet and bent),
binben, banb, gebunbcn, +bind. III., 125,1;
496; (er binbet).
btnnen, within, 303, 5; 557, 1.
5Binfe, /., w., + bentgrass, 490, 2.
3?irne, /., -z^?., +pear, 435, 3.
hi^, till, until, prepos., 304, 1 ; conj., 330,
3; etym.. 557, 1.
bitten, bat, gcbeten, ask, + bid; V., 128, 2;
199; 233, 1; 457,1; 466; (er bittet).
blanf, shining, 74.
blafen, blte§, geblafen, blow, VIL, 130, 1;
(bu btafeft, bu or er blaft).
blap, pale, 74.
Slatt, w., -eS, -i^-er, leaf,+blade.
blau,+blue, 74.
blattern, to turn the leaves of a book.
33Ict, 71., no pi., lead,
bleiben, bitcb, geblicben, remain, I., 122,2;
+ inf., 290, 3.
blei(^en, btidv geblicben, + bleach, I., 122, 1.
9?iate, + blowth, blossom ; etym., 430, 1.
'^^it, in,, w., messenger.
93oct, n.,pl. 5Bbte,+boat.
^oyen)i(^t, m., pi. -e ov -er, rascal, 57, 3 ;
59.
WOKD-IKDEX AiTD GEEMA]S"-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 273
S3ranntwein, m., -e, +brandy.
Braten, briet, gebraten, roast, fry, VII., 130,
1; (bratft, brat),
braudjen, need, compared with miiffen,
867, 4.
33raut, /., -c,+ bride.
SBrdutigam, m., -c, +bride^room, 439, 1.
brec^en, bracf>, gcbrod;eu, + oreak, IV, 137;
(bu bri(i)[t, brid)).
bvennen, brannte, cjebvannt, + burn, 119, 1;
455; (bvennte).
bringen, bradjte, gcbrad^t, + bring, 119,1;
454, 2; (bra(^tc).
SSvDttn, m.^ for SSronnen, ^J5runnen, well,
spring, + bourn, 489, 4; 46, 4.
aSrofam, m., -e, crumb; 23rcjame, /., w.,
47,1; 601.
5BrDt, w., -e, sometimes —e,+ bread.
a3ruber, m., —, + brother, 46, 48, 411,
415.
93runnen, see 33ronn.
23u(^, n., — cr, + book.
5BuUe,+ bul], see 163,3.
bunt, variegated, 74, 5.
58urg,/., w., castle, 397; in comp., 164, c.
SBurjdE^, m., -e, and w.^ fellow.
c, pronuEC. of, 5; in foreign words,389, 3.
6afu§IeI)re, /., w., theory of the cases (of
nouns).
causeway, causey, +(S^auftce, 494, 3.
d) pronunc. of, 6; 375,4; 378,3; 383,
1; description of, 375; quantity of vowel
before, 35; Eng. correspondents of, 410,
3 ; 414, 3 ; 415, 1, 3 ; 490, 8 ; d)— g,
416; d) — T, 493,4; d) - f, 535, 1, R. 2.
ch, Ger. correspond, of, 414, 3; 535, 1,
R. 2.
-dyjn, + -kin, 46, 1; 493, 4; 510; neuter
gend., 161, 3; pronunc. of, 6; 375,2.
-d)e(u), in verbs, 536, a.
6()Vt[t, m., w.,+Cliristian, 435, 3.
choose, + ficicii, 416, 1.
*)", d^g, pronunc. of, 39, 383, 1; 490, 3, a.
tt, 14 ; 383, 1 ; Eng. correspondents of,
413, 4; 414, 3; cf — c^, 535, 1, R. 2.
b, pronunc. of, 7, 385, 3: description of,
384, 2. Eng. correspondents of, 410, 1;
413, 1, a; 415; b — t, 416.
-b, 511, 1.
ba, + there, adv.\ before a prepos. begin-
ning with a vowel, bar; in relat. clause,
358, 33 7, 2 ; in local clauses, 331, a ;
= because, since in causal clauses, 3.37;
= as, when in temporal clauses, 330, 1,
2; etym.^ 551, 1; after demoustr. pron.,
345, 3.
®ad?, 71., -er, roof, + thatch.
bactjtc, see benfen, also 417, 1.
1)ame, /., w,^ lady, +dame.
banii't, coTv'., in order that, 338.
ba'mit, + ba9 = by + part. clause, 337
®anf, m., -e§ ; -pL of, see 173.
barf, see biirfen.
bag, + that ; see ber; peculiar use of, 168;
for G., 183.
\)0,^, + that, comj. ; in substantive clauses,
335 ; + nid)t = without + part, clause,
333 ; in other adverbial clauses, 335,
336, 338.
bduc^t, see beiK^t.
-be, noun-suffix, 511, 2.
®e^nung^34), 363, 2. 3.
bein, G. of bu, 81 ; possessive pronoun,
85.
beinev, G., see bem.
bemungead;tet, notwithstanding, wrez?., 303,
10.
benfen,ba(^te,geba(^t, + think, 119,2; 403,
2; 454, 3; (bdd)te). Inf. as noun, baS
®enfen.
CDenfmat, ?i., monument; iox -pi. see 58.
benn, + then, for, 301, 1 ; causal conjunc-
tion, 331,337; after comparative, 333,
2; in restrictive clauses, 336; origin of,
551, 1.
bev, + the, def. art., 38-40 ; demoustr.
pronoun 88, 443; lengthened forms in
en, ev, 344, 2; relat. pronoun, 93.
berart ba^, so that, 335.
beren (G. pL), 88, 93. 1; use of. 344, 1.
berent-, 87, 89.
be'rgeftalt \i<x%, in such a manner that, 335.
berer, see bcren.
berienige, he, that one, 91, 1; 347.
bevc, 89, 443.
berfclbc, -felbtge, the same, 91.
beriuetl, + while, 330.
be§, be^, beffen, 89.
befjent-, 89,
befto, + the, 443, a; correlative of ie,
334.
beud)t < biinten, 119, 2 ; 454, 3.
beutf(^, German (+ Dutch), 413, 1, a.
©eutfd^lanb, w., Germany,
-dge, Ger. correspondents of, 413, 4.
®td)ter, m.. -, poet,
btc^, + thee. Ace. of bu, q, v.
tic, + the, fern. def. art., see ber.
bieS, biefCer), + this, 90 ; etym.^ 443 ; use
of, 345, 346; bie§ unb bag, jene§, 345,2;
supiplanted by adverb + prepos., 346.
btcu?cil, + while, 330; because, 337, 1.
®ing, W.. + thing; iov pi. see 58.
bingen, bang or bung, gebungen, III., 135,1.
bir, +thee, D. of bu, q. v.
boci>, adv., yet, after all, + though, 343, e.
^ottov, m., -§, pi. -o'ren, 63, 2.
bDppet-,+ double, 531, 1.
Tsrangfal, /., -c, distress.
brcf(J^en, braic^ or bvofd)/ gebrofc^en, + thresh,
III., 135, 3. 133; (brafc^e or brDfd)e,
brifd^eft, bu and er bvtfi^t, bvtfd^, also weak,
brefd)cft, bref<^e).
bringcn, brang, gcbrungen, to penetrate, III.,
135, 1; (brange).
brttt-+ third, 410, 1; 530.
bvudcn, to print Ir-tr o
bracEcu, to press i"^'*^'^-
274 WORD-ITS^DEX AN"D GERMAN-EKGLISH VOCABULARY.
bumpf, hollow (sound), + damp, musty
(air), 74, 5.
buntel, dark, compar. bunfler.
fcurc^, + throui^h, 304, 2 ; compar. with
ijen, 369; with inittel5 and mit, 302, 7 ;
separable and insep. prefix in comp.
verbs, 549, 1.
©urcblauc^t, /., w.. Serene Highness,
fcitnfen, fciiinfte, gebunft, impers. verb, it
seems, + (me) thinks, 119, 2; 454, 3.
tUifen, fciirftc, gebuvft, to be permitted; infl.,
135, 2; past part, 108, 2; use of, 367,
2; etym., 416.
c, pronnnc. of, 8 ; description of, 371, 1-
3; unaccented, 371, 3; 485,2; sign of
length, 33, 363. 1; sign of umlaut, 363;
before r, rt, rb, 33, 488, 2; sign of plu-
ral, 47, 49, 51, 53; in cardinals, 33 7;
in the adj.-sufiixes -cl, -cr, -en, 71; con-
necting vowels in conjugation, 118 ;
in case-suffix, 43, 46 ; derivative e in
verbs, 535, 536 ; secondary before r,
491, 2; e - i, ic, 137, 138, 403; c — h,
489,1.
-e in imperative, 105; 118, 3.
-e in nouns < adj., 498, 1; gender of such
nouns, 161, 2.
-c in jo-stems. 46, 47, 51, 437, 3 ; 498,
2 ; gender of such nouns, 161, 3.
-e in adverbs, 554, 1.
ed^t, genuine, etym.^ 488, 3, a.
G(fe,/., w., comer, +edge, 413, 4.
ebel, noble, 404, 71.
el^e, before, + ere, 7G, 2, h ; 439, 2 ; coiij.^
330, 3.
Ci, prouunc. of, 33 ; analysis of, 373, 3;
origin of, 488, 5.
-ci, noun-suffix, 498, 3 ; gender of such
nouns, 161, 2.
Gibam, m., -c, son-in-law, 47, 1 ; 501.
-eien, verb-suffix < French verbs in -ier,
538.
civ3en, + own, adj., 470; 471, 6; 534, 4.
eigentumli(^, accent and meaning, 433, 2.
cilen, to hasten.
cim < cincm, D. of ein, q, v., 41, 1.
(5imcr, pail, etym., 398.
cin, +a, one, indef. art., 38, 41; after wddj,
wa§ fiir, 93, 2, 3 ; indef. pronoun, 73,
95, 359, 300; ein par, ein iDenicj, a few,
a httle, 100.
cin, adv.y + in; — unb au§, + in and out;
538, 7.
einanber, + one another; uninflected, 84.
eingeSoren, for two meanings see 538, 5, 7.
einig-, indef. pron., some, 95 ; at?/., +
united.
einmal, +once, 39, 41.
ei'nncbmen, take possession of, see nelimen.
In 85 gcncmmen ein for eingenommcn by
poetic license.
(Sinobe,/., w., solitude, desert, 511, a.
einS, + one, 531, 2; for cognate Ace,
304.
einfl,+once, 531, 2; 555,2.
ei'nfiubie^rcn, to study well, commit to
memory.
ein^eln, adv., singly, 555, 3.
eitet, vain ; uninflected " nothing but,"
313,1.
-el, noun-suffix, 46, 438, 5 ; 499; gender
of such nouns, 161, 1: 161, 3; adj. -suf-
fix, 71, 533, 1; verb-suffix. 106.'
elenb, wretched ; etym., 401, among Ex-
amples.
clf,+ eleven, 77; 539.
elk,+(SIc^, Lyientier, 490, 3.
-ein, in verbs, 536 ; connecting vowel
in -, 118,3.
Gltern, parents, + elders, 174, 404.
-em in nouns, 501, 533, 2.
emp-< ent- 541.
emtnef>Icn, cinpiaftl, empfctitcn, recommend.
IV., 137; 464,3; (empf el;tc, bu empfie^lft,
empfiel)!).
-en, noun-suffix, 46; 438, 5 ; 501; 503 ;
indicates masc. gend., 160, 1 ; in the
n-declcDsion, 61, 63 ; in the pi. of for-
eign nouns, 64, 2, 3 ; in D. and A. of
proper nonns. 66; in G sg. of adj. for
e§, 73; 91, 3; 316, 1; in pronouns,
344, 2 ; 440, 2 ; in mixed declension,
63; in comp. nouns, 518, 1, 2.
Adj.-stiffix, 71; 311; 534. In the
past part., 107; 453; 503; 534. In
the inf., 106; 451. In adverbs, 551.
-enb (nb), in the pres. part., 107; in nouns,
505; in the gerund, 107.
(Snbe, «., -§, -n, + end.
enge, narrow, 408, 4.
Gngel, m., -, + angel.
-en-^, adv.-suffix, 555, 2
ent-, 541.
Gnte, duck, 430, 1.
entgegen, + against, *'to meet," 303, G;
557, 1; see gegen.
entfagen, to renounce.
enta^ebcr (— cbcr), + either — or, 343, d, 2;
558.
er, he, 81.
ev for §err, gentleman, Mr., 330, 3.
-er, noim-suffix, 438, 5; 65, 507; indi-
cates masc. gend., 161, 1; 163,3; as
sign of plural, 56, 431.
Adj.-suffix, 71, 533, 3; 507, 2 ; in ad-
verbs, 551; 556; compar. suffix, 79;
438 ; in the G. of pronouns, 83, 88,
344, 2 ; 440, 2 ; in verbs, see -em.
er-, 543.
Grbe, double gender, 163, 3; neut. pl.Grtc
is rare.
(Srbe,/., w., + earth, 63, R.
-erei, noun -suffix, 497, 3, R.
erbaten, lofty, 139. R.; 534, 4.
ertalten, to grow cold (.535 2
crtalicn, refl., to caich cold j '
-erlic^, adj.-suffix, 536, 3, c.
evloic^en, evlof*, cvIoj(f>en, to go out (candle,
fire), VIII., 133; (crli)d;c[t, bu and cv cr-^
U';cl)t, orliicl}).
-cm, adj.-suffix, 534, 3; adj. in — , iniin-
fleeted, 311.
WORD-IKDEX AKD GERMAN-El^GLISH VOCABULARY. 275
-cr(n), verb-suffix, 537, 2 ; connecting
vowel in, 118, 3.
erieic^en, + reach, attain.
er)d)allen, erii^oU, erj^oUen, resound, VIIL,
133 ; (eg erfc^aUt).
cricl)vecfeu, erfdjraf, cvidjrotfen, to be fright-
ened, IV., 13 7; (evfcljrtdft, erjc^rid); when
trans, generally weak.
ev[t, first, + erst, 76, 2, 6; 439, 2.
eriDa^eu, eriDog, criuogen, consider, VIIL,
133 ; (erra&gft).
crira^nen, to mention ; etym.y 457, 2.
(Sr3- + arch-, 516,6.
Co, + it, N. and A. sg neut., 81; peculiar
uses of, 236 ; gender, 168 ; replacing
cognate A., 304 ; 336, 6 ; G. of masc.
and neuter, 83 ; 183; A. supplanted by
prepos., 334, 1; indefinite subject, 336,
1,2,4, 5; grammatical subject and exple-
tive = there, 336, 3; 313; position of
eg (A.), 353, e ; eg (N.) and inversion,
336, 3, a.
eg [ei benn, bail, unless, 339; 340, 2.
effen, ap, gecjeffen + eat, V., 138, 1; (bu iffefl
or i^t, er i^t, i^) ; pres. part., 394, 1 ;
etym., 409, 1; 466.
(Sffig, vinegar, + acid, 509.
ettid)- some, 96.
ctiuao, something, anything, somewhat,
96; 199, 1; 360.
eu, pronunc. of, 33 ; analys. of, 373, 3 ;
origin of, 488, 5; eu — ie, 406.
eucl; + you, D. and A. of i^r, q. t;., 81; refl.,
83; reciprocal, 84; 338.
euer+your, possessive pron., 85.
curev for euer (G.), S3.
(S«3.+your, 86; 311,2.
T, pronunc. of, 9 ; description of, 380 ;
Eng. correspondents of, 410, 2; 414, 2:
415, 1 ; 493, 4; f — b, 416.
-fad), -fold, 531, 1.
%a^,n.^ -er (and-e); compartment, pigeon-
hole;
i^aben, m., pi. and meanings, Bee 48, 1.
faben, archaic for fangeu, g.v.x 417, 1:
458, 2.
fa^ven, ful)r, gefatjrcn, drive, + fare, VI ,
139 ; 400 ; 467 ; +fpajteren, 390, 2 ;
(fa^rft).
ga^rt,/., w., journey, ride, 430, 1, a.
taUen, ftet, gefatten, + fall, VII., 130, 1 ;
458,2; (fallft).
fatlg, adverbial G. in comp., = case, 91, 3;
conj., 340.
falfd) + false, 74, 5.
fangen, fing, gefangcn, to catch, VII., 130,
1; (tangft).
far + fern, 76,2.
faff en, to seize, (bu faff eft or fa^t), 118, 4.
faft, almost, 300, 1; 554, 1.
foutenjen, to be lazy, 539, 3, a.
^o^)xi^,f., W; trade, 430, 1, a.
fatten, to fell, 535, 1, a.
-faltig + -fold, 531, L
fec^ten, fod^t, gefoc^ten + fight, VIIL, 133 ;
(bu fid^tft, fi^t, also weak),
geber,/., z^., +feather, pen.
fe{)Ieu + fail, lack, 494.
geinb, fn., -e, enemy, + fiend, 505; partial
ac0., 319.
Aclb, n.^ -er, field.
feft, firm, 554, 1.
geuer, w., + fire; pi. of, 173.
gi(^telgebirge, n., a mountain range in N. E.
Bavaria, < bie %id)tc, fir.
finben, fanb, gefunben + find. III., 135,1;
464; (finbcft).
ginf, m., w.,+ finch.
fifd;en + fish (bu fifc^eft or ftf(^t, erfif^t), 118.
gtnfternig, /., -ntffe, darkness.
fUi(^, shallow, level, 74, 5.
flcc^ten, flodjt, geflDd)ten, to braid, Vin., 133;
(bu fti(^tft or flid;ft, er fUdn, fUd>t or fle(^te).
i5te5iongIel)re, /., w., accidence.
Piegen, flog, geflogcn, + fly, 11., 134, 2 ;
(^cugft, fleug are archaic).
flief)en, flob, geflD{)en, + flee, IL, 134, 2 ;
490, 3, b; (fteud)[t. fleud) are archaic),
ftiepcn, flofj, geftDJ3en, IL, 134, 1 535, 1, a;
(bu, er flcu^t, archaic),
glo^, n., -e,+raft, 54 ; 439, 1.
p[5^en + to float, trans., 535, 1, a.
goIgenb(e'^) -hthe following, 146, 1.
forlorn, 416, 1.
fort + forth, on, 76, 1.
fv-, 545; see »er-.
fvagen, frug, toask, 139; 457,2; construc-
tion after, 199.
^rau, /., w., woman, wife, Mrs.
^•rauenjimuier, n., -, lady; 166.
grftulein, n.^ -, young lady. Miss, 166.
fret + free,
fretlid), to be sure, 300, 1 ; 339 ; 554,
2,6.
freffen, frajj, gefreffen, + eat, V., see effcn ;
108, 3; 138, 1.
greunb, m., -c, + friend, 505.
ber ^rtebe(n), m., no pi, peace, 46, 4;
47,2.
frieren, fror, gefroren, to freeze, IL, 134, 2.
fro^, cheerful, 74, 5.
fromm, pious; harmless,
frug, pret. of fragen, 139, 461.
fru^, early. 300, 1; 554, 1.
f^-aSr-'""' [breakfast, 137,1; 431,t
funben, past part, of finben, 453, 3.
5unfe(n), m., spark; see 46, 4.
?vurc^e, /"., 2^;., + furrow, 430, 1.
further,' 76, 2.
^n^, m., -eg, -e,-i-foot, 430, 1.
3;Ud^ftn, /., pi. -iunen, + vixen, 504,
fut)ren, to guide, 535, 1, a.
ptten, colt, + foal, 503, 2.
far + for, 76, 2, b ; 304, 3 ; 306, 9 :
516, 5.
fiirbaf3, onward, 76, 1.
farc^ten, to fear; (fiird)tete); 454, 3.
fiivlic'6 ne^mcn, to put up with, 538, 7.
gilrft, m., w., prince, 76, 2, b\ 439, 2.
276 WOKD-Iiq-DEX Aiq"D GERMAiq"-E:N'GLISH VOCABULARY.
g, pronunc. of, 10; 375, 3, 4; 391, 2 ; in
foreign words, 378, 4; 383, 1, Rem.;
after u in N. G., 383, 1, a; Eng. corre-
spondents of, 408, 3, 4; gcj, 41>3, 4; de-
scriptioti of, 383, 2; see gc-.
gan — gunnen > gounen, 4 71, 5.
ganj, whole.
gar, adj.^ done ; adv.^ even, very ; + nid)t,
not at all.
©arberobe, /., 2^., + wardrobe,
g&ren, gor, gegoren, to ferment, VIII., 133;
(garft, rarely gierft, often weak through-
out).
ge-, g-, 516, 7 ; 543 ; in the past part.,
107, 108 ; 453, 2 ; 538 ; in nouns of
neuter gend,, 161, 3 ; in p. p. of com-
pound verbs, 546, 2.
gebaren, gebar, geboren, to bring forth,
+ bear; IV., 137,398 ; (pret. subj. ge^
bare, bu gebierft, gebier).
gebcn, gab, gegeben, + give,V., 138, 1; (gicbfi,
gieb); 466; impersonal, 305; 336,4;
399.
©e(f, m.^ w., coxcomb.
@eba^t(er), the above mentioned, 146, 1 ;
< gebenfcn, q. v.
@eban!e(n), m., + thought, see 46, 4 ;
47, 2.
gebentcn, gebac^te, gcbad)t, + think of, men-
tion; see benfen.
gebci^en, gebict), geticr^en, thrive, I., 133, 2.
&ebi(^t, n., -c, poem.
gebtegen, ac^.^ solid, pure, past part, of ge-
bei|en, according to Verners Law, 411;
534, 4.
©efalle(n), m., pleasure (in), favor, see 46,
4; 47,2.
gegen + against, 304, 4 ; see entgegen, ju,
nad^, um.
gcgeniiber, opposite, 303, 7
ge^en, gtng, gegangen, + go, Vn., 130, 1;
136,1; 457, 2; 474; +inf., 390,2;
I)astpart., 396; (bu ge^fl, gel;e).
SeiM i'^^'' meaning, etc., see 163, 3.
©eifl, m., -er, +ghost; wit.
getjen, to be stingy, etym., 539.
©elb unb ®ut, lit. money and property = all
one's possessions,
gelegen, convenient, 534, 4.
getingen, gelang, gelungen, to be successfnl
(in), m., 135, 1.
gelten, gait, gegctten, to be worth, valid, m.,
131, 135,3; impersonal, 305; (golte —
gaite, bu gittfl, cv gilt, imper. gelte as a
nile).
©emac^, w., " cr, apartment,
gema^, according to, 303 8.
©emut, /I., -er, soul, disposition.
gen, towards, 304, 4.
©euera'l, m., -e or — e,+general.
genefen, gena§, gene^en, to recover, V., 138,
1; (bu gene^eft, er genefl, genefe).
gcuteBen, genoB, genoffen, to enjoy, IL, 134,
1; (bu genie^eft or genie^t).
gering, small, compar. of, 76, 1.
gcfc^aftig, busy.
gefd^e^en, gei(^a^, gef^e^en, to happen, V.,
138, i; (eS geid)icl>t).
©ef^tcd^t, n., -er, race, generation.
©cfd^mciDe, n., -, set of jewelry,
gefd)U)eige, conj.,=saj nothing of, 333.
©efelle, m.^-w., journeyman, fellow, com-
panion.
©efeUji^aft, /., w., company, party.
©cnd)t, 71., see 57, 58.
©efpenft, w., -er, spook, ghost.
gcifen, past part, of eijen, 138, R.
geftalt, shaped, past part. < ftclten, 455, 3.
gefunb + sound, wholesome, 74, 5.
©etreibe, /i., -, grain, etym., 511.
getroft, confident, 419; past part. < trcften,
455, 3.
©evatter, m., -, + god- father,
©ercanb, 7i.,-c, ^er, garment, 58.
geicanbt, active, clever, 74, 5 ; past part, of
wenben, 455, 3.
©ewerbe, n., -, trade.
©eiDimmel, ti., -, swarming,
gewinnen, geiuann, geiconnen, win, m., 135,
2; (geiDLMine — geicanne).
gh, G. correspondents of, 415, 1.
geiuip, certain, etym., 413, 2 ; past part.,
453, L
giepen, gop, gcgc||en, +to pour, 11., 134, 1;
(seu^t, geu^ rare, gie^eft or gie^t).
©ift, n.^ -e, poison, + gift ; etym.^ 399 ;
403,1; gender of, 163,3.
©lag, n.^ -I'eo, -fer, +glas8, 493, 3.
glauben + to believe.
©laube(n), m., + belief, see 46,4.
gleid) + like; for fcgleid)=immediately; +in-
verted order, 339.
-gleii^en, in comp. with pron., + the like of,
87.
glei(^en, glid), geglidjen, to be like, I.,
133, 1.
gleii'en, w. v.j deceive, 133, 1.
glei^en, gU9, geglijien, + glitter, I., 133, 1;
bu gletpeft or glei^t, er gleifet),
gleiten, glitt, geglitten, + glide, L, 133, 1;
(er gleitet).
glimmen, glomm, geglDmmen, + to glimmer,
Vm., 133.
©nabe, /., w., grace,
©olb, w., nopL, gold.
©ott, m., -eg, ^er, +God, 408, 3.
gonnen, not to grudge; etym.^ 471, 5.
graben, grub, gegraben, to dig, VL, 139; (bu
grabft).
gretfen, griff, gegriffen, to seize, L, 133, 1.
greinen, gricn, gcgrienen, + grin (generally
weak, rare), 1., 133, 1.
©raf, m., w., count,
©rtffet, m., -, style (slate-pencil).
grinfen, + grin< greinen, 133, 1.
grDp + great; compar. of, 73.
©ro^mutter, /., -, + grandmother.
grilpen + greet; (bu gritficft).
gut + good ; compar. of, 76, 1 ; compared
with roc^I, 399, 2, a; 439.
giWben+ golden, 534, 2.
WOED-INDEX AND GERMAN-EKGLISH VOCABULARY. 2?7
'^, pronnnc. of, 11 ; description of, 374;
Eug. correspondents of, 410, 3; 415, 1;
silence of, 33; 363, 2 ; 491, 2; loss of,
415, 3; sign of length, 33, 363, 2, 3;
}^ — 6),13; 490,3,6; I; — g, 134, Rem.;
416.
J)ahcn + have, infl. of, 110; contracted
forms, 111, 1; impersonal, 305; in
comp. tenses, 365 ; 383, 1, 2 ; + inf.,
390, 1.
-t)aft, adj.-suffix, 546, 2.
ibageftcl;;, m., w., bachelor; pi. also -e.
^aib, before cardinals, 336, 2; after ordi-
nals, 339, 1.
-I)alben, f or . . . sake (of), comp. with pro-
nouns, 87, 89; prep., 303, 4.
Bat6er + half, prep., 303, 4.
fatten, I)ielt, ge^aUen,+ hold, VII., 130,1;
(bu f}altft, er f;alt).
^anb, /. ^e, +hand, 53; 439, 1.
-:^anben, in comp., 439, 1.
l^anbeln, to act, trade.
l^anbgcmein (reerbeu), to come to blows,
319.
^aiibic^u^, m., -e, glove.
:^<xugen, t)ing, ge^^augcn, + hang (intr-WU.,
130, 1; (bu^angft).
^affen+tohate, 414, 1 Ex.; bu ^feftor^a^t.
^att+ hast, see l)aben.
^a^, + hate, 414, lEx.
feat + has, see ^aben.
gauen, ^kh, gefyauen, + hew, strike, Vn.,
131; (bu^au[t).
^aufe(n), m., + heap, crowd, troop, 46, 4.
§au§, 7i., -fe§, -^er, + house ; — unb ^of,
house and farm, — and home.
feau^ + out here <:^ie + auS, 41, 1.
^dupten, D. pi., see 59.
4e6et, 7/1., -, lever.
:^eben, ^o6 (^ub), ge:^oBen, VI., 139; VHI.,
133 ; 457, 1 ; 467 ; (^6&e — I)a6e, bu
^ebft).
§e^I, 71. and m., no pi., concealment; m 83
he makes no secret of it , . .
^eibe, m., w.,+heathen, 163, 3; 435, 3.
^eimUid^unjV/., w., visitation.
letnt + this night, 443, 2.
^eirat, /"., w., marriage, 511, a.
6eifer + hoarse.
:$ei^en, f)ie^, ge^ei^en, command, be called,
+hight, vn., 108, 1; 131, 458. 2 ; in-
trans., 179, 1; trans. 301; +inf.. 390,
2, 4 ; +pa8t part., 396, 2 ; (bu ^ei^eft or
^eipt, er ^et^t).
-^eit + -head, 515, 1 ; indicates fem. gen-
der, 161, 2; 431, 2.
Inciter, serene, 71.
^elb, m., w., hero.
:^clfen, ^atf, ge^olfen, + help, m., 135,3;
past part, of, 108, 1; 464; +inf., 390,
2 ; (bu l}tlfft, ^itf).
§emb, n., -e^, -en, shirt.
l^er+ hither, + here, 443, 2.
§err, m., w., lord, master, Mr.; reduced to
er, 330, 3 ; short c, 488, 3.
'^evxli^, splendid.
]^cr»o'rt^un, refl., to distinguish one's self ;
see t^un.
§er3, n., +heart, infl. of, 63, 1 ; 435, 1.
^er^og, m., -e, +duke, 416, 1.
4^'^5'^9^win, n.f — er, +dukedom.
fee^en, Incite, hunt, 535, 1, b, R. 2.
beuer + this year, 443, 2.
^eute + to-day, 443, 2.
^ier + here, after pron., 345, 3 ; etym.,
443, 2.
^tmmel, m., -, heaven.
bin, thither, away, 443, 2.
:^inter + behind, prep.y 306, 4 ; in comp.
verbs, 549, 2; ac0., 76, 2.
§irte, m., «f;.,+ herdsman,
his — its, 343, 2.
f)od} + high, 73 ; 490, 3, 5. Infl. ^o^er,
^^cffart,/., no. pi., pride, 538, 2, h.
^"offen + hope.
^ 01)1 + hollow, compar. 74.
^olb, gi-acious, compar. 74, 405.
^oten, fetch, + hale, haul.
^opfen, m., - + hops.
^ofe,/.. -2^;., trousers, + hose.
|>6ren + Dear, instead of ge^iirt, 108,1; 113;
+inf., 390, 3.
^ulb, /., no pl.^ favor, grace, 405
^unb, /w., -e, dog, + hound.
§unbert, n., -e,+hundred, 336 ; 539, 2.
§ufte, /., «;.,+hip, 430, 1 ; 513,2.
^ilnbc^en, «., -, little dog,
3.
i, pronunc. of, 13 ; description of, 369,1,
2 ; < ie. 488, 4 ; < u, 489, 2 ; < c,
489, 5.
t(^ + I, 81.
-id}, 509 ; indicates masc. gend., 161,1;
489, 5.
-ic^t, 509,1; 535,3.
ie, pronunc. of, 33, 3; sect; in redupli-
cating verbs, CI. VII., 458, 2; 488, 3, a.
ie— eu, 134, 406.
-ie, noun-suffix, 489, 4; 493, 2; indicates
fem. gender, 161, 2.
-teren, verbs in, 108, 4; 493, 2; 538.
-ig^ + -y, adj.-suffix, 535^ 1-3 ; 489, 5 ;
for -id), 509; 536, 3, c
-igen, verb-suf., 539, 4.
-tgfcit; 515, 2.
-igtic^, adj.-Puf., 535, 2.
tl)m, i:^n, i^nen, see er, fie, eS, pers. pron.
tf)r, poss. pron., her, their, with cap. your,
85; origin of, 343,2.
ti^rer, G. of pers. and poss. pron., see fie,
it)r.
3^10, your, 86 ; 441, 8.
in + in, 306, 5 ; for in ben, 40.
-in, noun-sufflx, 504 ; fem. gender, 161,
2; 167; 430,3.
tnbem, a»y., while, 330,1; 333; because,
337.
-tng, noun-sufflx, 506.
inner + inner, 76, 2.
inner^oIS, within, prep.^ 303.
278 WORD-INDEX AKD german-e:n^glish vocabulary.
in fofern, in n?iefern, +m so far as, 33G.
trbif(|+ earthly.
irjenti, any, ^\ ith proii. and adv., 2 GO.
Srrtum, m., --er, + error, 56.
-ifc^ +-ish, adj. -suffix, 811; 514; 525,4.
its, 343,2.
3.
j, pronunc. of, 13; 378, 4; description of,
375, 4; disappeared, 491, 2.
iagen, hunt, chase; strong pret., VI., 129.
Sa^v, w., -e, + year; after numerals, 175.
Sdger, m., -, hunter.
je + ever ; oo/y. 334 ; before cardinals with
distributive force = "at a time"; je
nad^rcm = "that depends*' ; +aye.
jefc(er), every, each, infl. of, 97 ; 216, 1 ;
445, 1 ; in comp., 97 ; pi. of, 261, 3 ;
+ either.
jebeo, each, 168.
lebraeber, every one, each, 97 ; 261, 3 ;
445, 2.
jcglic^, every, +each, 97, 445, 1.
jemanb, some one, 97; 260; 445, 1.
len(er), that, + yon, 90 ; 443, 1 ; G. sing,
of, 216, 1; use of, 245, 246.
jug, see jagen.
lung + young.
3unge, m., w.^ boy; n., w.^ + young of ani-
mals.
3ungfer,/., «;., maiden ; eiym.^ 516, 12, a.
3unter, young nobleman, +younker, 516,
12, a.
?iun)e'l, n., -§, -<n, + jewel.
jilngjl, lately; etym.^ 555, 2.
a.
t, pronunc. of, 14, 383,.l; Eng. corre-
spondents of, 409, 3 ; description of,
383, 1.
ta^f, bald, + callow; com par. of, 74.
.^aifer, tw., -, emperor, + Cesar, Czar.
!aU+ cold, etym., 409, 3.
fann, see fonncn.
lannte, see Jennen.
^ar-, in comp., '42 2, 3.
.Qa|en!oniv3in, f.^pl. -inncn, + queen of cats.
faum, hardly; word-order, 330, 2.
^Me + cheese, 46, 3 ; etym., 428, 5.
fed, bold, + quick, 403, Ex.
leiren, fiff, geliffcn, + scold (like an old
woman), I., 122, 1.
fein, no, none, 72 ; 95 ; 445, 2.
-!ott, noun-suffix, 515, 2; fem. gend., 161,
2; 430, 2.
fcnnen, fauntc, ge!annt, to be acquainted
with, 119, 1 : 267, 1 ; (fenntc).
^ette, /., M?.,4-chain. 435, 4.
fiefen, see furcn; bit fiefeft or tiz%
^inb, w., -es, -cr, child, 60.
.^Tiinblein, n., -, little child.
5lirf(^e, f.^w., + cherry.
nar + clear, 74.
^leiuob, w., -e, also -ien as if a foreign
word ; jewel, 511, «.
nicben, Hob, geWobcu, split, + cleave, 11.,
124, 2.
flimmen, flomm, geHommen, + climb, VIIT.,
133.
ttmgen, Hang, geKungen, to sound, ring, III.,
125, 1.
^nabe, m., w., boy,+knave, 413, 3.
fnarren, creak.
fncifen, tm]], gcfniffcn, pinch, I., 122, 1.
fcmmcn, tain, gefcmmen, + come, IV., 127 ;
465; 489, 1 ; umlaut in pres., 127, R.;
+ past part., 296 ; 409, 3.
fonnte, see fennen.
^opf, m.^ -c§, — e, head,
foften+cost; constr. with, 207, 1, R. ;
(tcfleft, toftet).
£eniv3, m.^ -c+king.
!onnen, !cnntc, v3c£cniit, + can, 135, 3; 108.
2; 267, 1.
£raft, /., -e, strength, +craft ; prep., 302,
5, 6.
^reb», m., -e, + crayfish, 512.
freif(^en, trlfcw, v3efrif(^en, scream, I., 122, 1.
freipen, see freiic^en.
£i-iccl)en, frocT), gefroi^en, + creep, crawl, n.,
122, 2; (freuc^ft, trend; are archaic),
^ul), /., •-c, + cow,kine.
tunb + known, + (un)couth ; constr. with
219.
funnt for fonnte, q. v.; in 347.
fureu, for, geforen, + choose, II., 124, 2;
132 ; 411 ; 416, 1 ; 463 ; (bu far[t).
Stiffen, 72., 710 2?^.,+ kissing.
I, pronunc. of, 15 ; description of, 381 ;
385, 4.
-t, see -ci.
laben, tub, gelaben, + load, summon, VI.,
129; also weak; (bu labjl, er labt).
lal^m -I- lame, 74.
Sanb, yz., + land, pi. see 58.
Sanbomann, m., pi. -leute, fellow country-
man, 172.
lang + long.
Sangeicei'le,/., ennui; accent 422,1.
laffen, lie^, gctanen, + let, vn., 130, 1; past
part, without gc-, 108, 1; constr. after,
199, 202, 1; 267, 7; + reflexive, 272 ;
in the imper., 287,4; +inf., 290,2,3,
b ; 266, 4 ; (bu lan'cft or Id^t, cr la^lt).
la^, weary, 74 ; 76, 2 ; 439, 2 ; +late.
Uiu, tepid, + luke, + lew% 74.
laufcu, Itcf, gclaufen, run, Vn., 131 ; 212,
1; 458, 2"^; (bu laufft).
laut + loud ; etym., 396 ; 415 ; prep.,
302, 6.
lauter, nothing but, 100.
lac^eln, smile.
langft, long ago, 555, 3.
leben + live.
Icbe'ubig + living ; accent 420, 1.
Icgen + lay, 535, 1. a.
le^ren, teach ; instead of gele^vt, 108, 1 ;
WORD-INDEX AKD GERMAK-EKGLISH VOCABULARY. 279
constr. after, 199 ; in passive, 303, 2 ;
+ inf., 390, 2 ; 395.
-lei, 533.
getb, m., -e§, -er, body,
leiben, litt, getitteu, suffer, I., 133, 1; 411;
416, 1; (bu leibeft).
Seiben, 7i., -, suffering,
letber, unfortunately, 335, 2.
leiben, ltc6, geliel)en, + lend, I., 133, 2.
-lein, noun-sufflx, 46, 1 ; 500, 2 ; neut.
gend., 161, 3 ; 493, 4.
fiettftcm + lode-star, 530, 4, a.
-ler, noun-suflax, 500, 4 ; indicates masc.
gender, 161, 1.
lerncn + learn ; instead of gclcrnt, 108, 1 ;
for le^ren, 199, 2 ; +inf., 390, 2 ; 395.
lefen, lai, getefen, read, V., 138, 1 ; 395 ;
(bu Itefeft or Ueft, er lieft, Iteo).
leferltdj, legible^ 536, 3, c.
let, in imperative, 387,4.
le^t- + last, 439, 2 ; 76, 2 ; after ordinals,
533, 2.
fieummii), m., no pl.<, repute ; etym.^ 396 ;
494,3,
-leute, in comp,, 173.
4td^ + -like, + -ly, 311; 535,4; 536, 3 ;
adverbial suffix, 544, 2.
8iAt, /i., + light, pt. see 58.
lieoen+love, 496.
giefieSOrtef, m., -e,+ love-letter, 518, 3.
Uegen, lag, getegen, + to lie, V., 138, 2;
457, 1 ; II., 133 ; +inf., 390, 3.
-tig, 536, 3, c,
-ling + -ling, noun-suffix, 500, 3; indi-
cates masc. gender, 161, 1.
-Itugen, in names of places, 500, 3, a.
-lingo, 553.
linf-, left (hand), only used attributively
like adjectives in 311.
lofeen, praise, 496.
Sorber, m., -i, -(e)n, + laurel.
lore + 2e^re, 395.
8d^, /i., -c§, -e, + lot.
log + loose, + -less in adj., 536, R.
lofc^/cn, trans, and weak, to extinguish, un-
load: intra7is.^ io hQ extinguished, see
erloi^en-
Subwig + Louis + Chlodwic, 396.
eutl)er + Luther, 396.
Suft. /., — e, pleasure, + lusts,
lugen, log, gelogen, +lie, II., 134, 2 ; 133.
itugen ftrafen, to give the lie, 199, 2.
m, pronunc. of, 16 ; description of, 388 ;
Eng. correspondents of, 490, 4, 5.
-m, see cm.
mac^cn + raake, + inf., 390, 2- 366,4; bao
(Ace.) mac^t = the reason is . . .
mug, see inogen.
SiJZagb, /., —e, + maid-servant, 513, 3.
tnager + meager, 71 ; no umlaut in compar.,
SDf^agi'fter, tw., -, + master (of arts).
tna^len + grind, originally of VI., see 400 ;
past part, gemaljlen still common.
400;
100;
SDJdb +maid, 513,3; (poetic form).
SU^ajeftat, /., 'm;., + majesty,
mal, once, probably = emmal, 41, 1 ; in
comp., 531, 3.
man, one, 98.
maud) + many a, 100; 363; 535,1 ; +ein,
144.
9)2ann, m.,+man ; pi, 58, 59; in comp.,
173.
a)?arf(^, m., -e, + inarch ; /., w., + marsh,
163, 4.
marf(i)ieren + march, 108, 4.
Wla\i, m., -ۤ, -en, +mast ; /., w., fattening,
stall-feeding,
ma^cn, because, 337, 1.
matt, faint, + mate in check-mate; compar.,
74.
ajiaulrouvf, m., M, + mole, et
494, 3.
9J?auoletn, w., -, little + mouse.
SDieer, n., -e, ocean, + mere.
nief)r + more, compar. of, 76, 1 ;
439 ; used in comparative, 334.
mebrer-, several, 76, 1 ; 100.
me^rft-, +most, 100.
meiben, mieb, gcmicben, avoid, L, 133, 2;
(meibeft).
mcin, G. of id), see metncr ; mein-, possess.
pron., 85 ; in mein 2:ag, Sebtag, 343, 1.
mciner, comparat., + more mine, 335, 2 ;
G. of id), 86.
meinig-, poss. jpro7i., + mine, 85.
meift-hmost, compar. of, 76, 1; 100.
9)2ei9cl, ?7i.,-, chisel,
meiben, announce, (metbcte).
melten, molf, gemotfcn,+milk, VIII, 133 ;
(bu melfft and milfft, mclfe and milf).
5melobet, /., w., + melody, 493, 2.
9D?enfd), m., ^6;., + man ; n., see 59, 514.
meften, ma^, gemefieit, + measure, V., 138,
1; (bu mijieft or mi^t, er mi^t).
SSKeffer, n., -, knife ; m., -, measures ; see
163, 3.
9)?ette, /., w., + matins, 435, 4.
mt(^ + me, Ace. of ic^, 81.
minber, less, comparison of, 76, 1 ; 439 ;
used in compar., 334.
mines, in comp., 87.
mir+me, to me, D. of i^, 81.
9J?ip- + mis-, 453, 1 ; 516, 8 ; 544.
m\!\\i-, see Wir^-.
mit, with, 303, 9.
9J2tttag§]'tunbc, /., w., hour of noon,
mittel- + middle, 76, 2, b.
mittelfl, see mittel-, prep., 303, 7.
0)2itterna^t, / , -^^6, + midnight, 519, 2.
aJZittn)D(^, m., also /., w., Wednesday,
164, d.
mm < mb, +Eng. mb, 490, 4.
3Kd^v, m., Id;., + Moor.
9J2orb, m., -e§, pL see 51.
morf(^, rotten, 74.
mouse — mice, 439, 1.
mogen, mod)te, gemoc^t+may, 135, 4; 108,
2'; 367, 3 ; 413, 2 ; (cv mag, pret. subj.
moc^te).
SfKunb, m., -e6, -c, older -e,+mouth.
DJhK^fet, m., -a, also/., w., + muscle.
280 WORD-IKDEX AITD GERMAK-EI^GLISH VOCABULARY.
-mut, in comp., 164, a ; +mood
ajiutter, /., — , +motlier ; see Verner's Law,
411.
9)M(ie, /., M>., + midge, 413, 4.
itjube, tired.
niujien; mu^te, gemu^t, + must, 135, 6 ;
108, 2; 307, 3; 471,3; (bu mu^t, er
mup, mupte).
91.
n, pronuTic. of, 17; nature of, 386, 387,
final n in foreign words, 386, 1, Rem. ;
short before sonant stops, 385, 4 ; n =
q.y i. e., "• guttural " nasal, 386, and see
nt, ncj; before labial, 388, 1; lost in
Eng., 417, 1 ; entered the N. of nouns
of the n-decl., 435,3; loss of, 435,3,4;
503 ; 506, 1 ; Eng. correspondents of,
490, 5. See -en.
na&j, after, 303, 10; see 311 and gei^en,
9?a^6ar, m., -3, -n, + neighbor. 63, 1.
nac^bem, corij., after, 330, 2 ; according as,
334.
^a*t, /., ^e,+night, 53, 2; 439, 1.
nal)e+n ear, + nigh, 73.
92arr, m., M'., + fool.
5)Jatu^v /., w;.,+nature.
nat^ft + next, 73 ; 303, 11.
-nb, part.-suffix, 505.
*nefor etne+a, 41, 1.
ncben, by the side of, 306, 6 ; 557.
nebfl, besides, together with, 303, 12;
555, 2.
needs, 553, 1.
ncl^men, na^m, genommen, take, IV., 137 ;
35unber — , 199, 1. 2 ; (bu ntmmft, nimm).
-ne(n), verb-suf., 537, 1; 118, 1, 2.
*nenfor einen + , 41, 1
nennen, 119, 1 ; 455 ; constr. with, 301 ;
390, 2; 396,8; 303, 4.
-ncr, noun-suf., 503, 1; masc. gend.,
161, 1.
neu + new.
ng, pronunc. of, 17, 383, 1, a ; 386, 1.
nic^t, nid)t-3, + not, + naught, 99 ; 199, 1, 2 ;
309, 1 ; position of, 354 ; in compar.
clauses, 333,2; 490, 3 ; after verbs of
hindering, 309, 2.
SPd6)i<i, /., w,^ + niece.
nicl)t3 iceniger al5, anything but . . ., 333,
2, a.
nib + beneath, 551, 3.
nieber-, a6^'.,+ nether, 76, 2.
niemalS, never.
ttiemanb, no one, 97, 445, 1.
-nisi + -ness, 50 ; indicates neuter and
fem. nouns, 161, 2, 3 ; 438, 6 ; origin
of, 503.
nf, pronunc. of, 17; 386, 1.
nDbeI + noble, 74.
noc^, still ; = nor with correlative xoi\iZx ;
nod) ni*t, not yet, 354.
S'Jorben, m..+North.
9(0teu, old D. pi., 439, 1.
nun + now; — because, 337, 1.
nur, only; +bap, 336; 336,1.
o.
D, pronunc. of, 18 ; description of, 370,
1, 2 ; in ablauts, VI., 459, 4 ; < u, 405.
489, 4 ; < a, 489, 3.
ob, ;?7'e/?., + above, 303, 8; conj., whether,
335, 2; although, 339.
ober- in comp., chief, + upper ; accent,
433, 7. yf ^ ^
oBcr-, a6^'., + upper, 76,2.
oBgleic^, Dbfdjon, obioo^I, although, 339.
£)bige§ + the above, 146, 1.
Dc^^, m.,w.,+ox, 63, 2.
Dbem, ??i., no pL, breath, see 3ltem.
oe as sign of umlaut, 363, 2.
Dl^nmac^t, fainting, 489, 3 ; 516, 10.
D^ne, without, 391, 1, R.; 304, 5; in
comp., 489, 3 ; +516, 10 ; +ba^ = with-
out + part, clause, 333.
D^nebetii, without that, 304, 5.
O^r, w., -e^3, -en, +ear.
on + an, 306, 2.
once + einft, 555, 2, a.
-or, noun-end., 63, 2.
Drt, m.^pL see 57, 58.
Dften, m., -5, no pl., + east.
ou, Eng. — G. an, 488, 5.
D-umlaut, see 5.
5, pronunc. of, 31 ; description of, 370,
3, 4 ; — e 489, 1 ; < a, 489, 4.
p, pronunc. of, 19 ; description of, 385,
1 ; Eng. correspondents of, 413, 3 ;
414, 2, a; 493,3.
^ala'ft, m., pL ^alafte, 163, 1; 493,1;
494.
^antoffel, m., -3, -n, slipper.
pf, pronunc. of, 19 ; description of, 389,
1 ; Eng. correspondents of, 409. 2 ;
414, 2.
'^[o-Ui /', w^M castle, + Palatinate.
$tau, m., w., + peacock, 414, 2.
pfeifen, pfiff, gepfiffen, whistle, I., 133, 1.
$ferb, w., -e6, -e, horse, + palfrey,
pflegen, pfteg, gepflogen, carry on, VIIL,
133 ; 469 : (bu pflegft, pflege) ; always
weak = to cherish.
33funb, n.. -e§, -e, + pound ; after numerals,
175.
pB, pronunc. of, 19.
platt, flat, 74.
plump, awkward, + plump. 74.
prcifen, prie§, gcprtefen, + praise, I., 133, 2 ;
(bu preifeft, er preift).
^rinv m., w., + prince (of a royal family),
probteren, try, 108, 4.
pufeen, dress up, burnish, (bu pufeefl),
118,4.
q, pronunc, of, 30 ; 409, 3 ; as symbol,
see u and 386.
queUeu, quoll, gequotlen, to gush forth, well
WORD-IKDEX Al^D GERMAi^T-EKGLISH VOCABULARY. 281
up, (quiUft, quittt, quid ; also weak quel*
lejl, quelle),
qmman^ see Jomraeiu
9i.
X, pronimc. of, 31; 391,3; description of,
374,2; 377; < 8,411,416,
$fia6e, crow, + raveiL, 413, 3; 435, 3; 503.
9iab, n.,-e§, "eiv'wheel, 56.
Hiant, m., -e§, — er, edge, brim,
tai<i), quick, + rash, 74.
raien, rage, 118, 4; (fcu, er raft).
9iat, m., -e§, ^. see 173.
raten, riet, gerateti, advise, Vn., 130, 1; (bu
x'at]t, er rat).
9fatf(!^lag, ratfc^tagen, advice, to advise,
137, 1.
rauc^, rau:^,+rongh, 490, 3, b.
racljen, ract^tc, gcradjt or geroi^cn, + wreak
vengeance, VIII., 133; generally weak;
(bu rad)ft).
dlat)d, 71., -,+ riddle.
rccf;t,+ right.
dtQd}t, w., -c, + right, pi. jurisprudence;
321, 4, o.
rccl)nen, + reckon, 118, 2; 537, 1 ; (rc^s
uete).
rcbeu, to speak (rcbetc), 118 ; 537, 1.
rcgncn + rain, 118,2; 537,1; (regnetc).
reiben, rieb, gerteben, rub, + rive, I., 133, 2.
rci^ + rich.
9Jct(^, /I., -e, empire.
-reid) + -rich, 4- ric, 515, 3, a.
9iei'(^§frei()eit, /., -?/;.,+ freedom of the em-
pire, immediate dependence upon the
empire.
9Jetd)tum, m., — cr, wealth.
reif3en, rif}, geriHcu, tear, I., 133, 1 ; (bu
rei^eft or reiyt, + write).
telfcn, travel, 118 ; (bu reifeft or reif^).
reiten, ritt, geritteu^ + ride, L, 133, 1; +fpa=
jieren, ride for pleasure, 390 ; (bu reiteft,
er reitet).
rcnuen, raunte, gerannt, rush, + run, 119, 1.
retteu, save (rettete).
-xi^, + -ric, 515, 3.
ried)eu, ro^, gerod^en, smell, 11., 134, 1.
ringen, rang, gerungeu, wrestle, + wring, III.,
135, 1 ; ringeu, umringen, etc., are of dif-
ferent origin and weak, though umruus
gen, surrounded, is not uncommon.
tinnen, rann, geronnen, drip, III, 135, 2 ;
457,2 ; ronn, roune also occur.
SWitter, m., -, knight.
dlod, m., — e, coat.
rc^ + raw, 74; 415,3.
9io^r, w., -e, reed, 55.
rot + red.
9i6^re, /., w., pipe.
3i53tetn, ti., -, little rose.
rufen, rief, gerufen, call, VII., 131; constr.
after, 196 ; (bu rufft, in classics some-
times rufte).
runb + round.
9iudon, m., -,+ ridge, 413, 4.
S, §, pronunc. of, 33-34; 391, 4; descrip-
tion of, 378, 1, 2, 3 ; in G. sg. of m. and
n. nouns, 43 ; of/, nouns, 66, 518, 3 ;
in G. s. of Eng. adverbs (needs), 553, 1 ;
in the pi., 60; 67 ; in composition with
poss. pron,, 87; in compound nouns,
518, 2, 3.
W < ft, 413, 2; f in Verner's Law, 411,
416 ; Eng. correspondents of, 414, 1 ;
417,5; 490, 2.
-§, noun-suffix, 513 ; in adverbs, 553.
*§ for ba^o, 41 ; for e§, g. v.
©ac^fe, m., •2/;., + Saxon.
fac^t, gently, + softly, 417, 1 ; mostly ad-
verb.
©ad, m., — e, + sack,
jageu + say.
-fat, noun-suffix, 50, 51 ; 500, 1; nouns
of doubtful gender, 161, 2, 3.
-fam 4- -some, 536, 4.
famt, with, 303, 13.
©ame(n), m., + seed ; infl., 46, 4.
fauft-hsoft, gentle, 74 ; 417, 1,
fatt + satisfied (+sad), 74,
Ba^, m., -eg, -e, sentence.
faufen, foff, gefoffen, drink (of animals), IT.,
134,1; 463; (bu faufft, +sup and + sip).
faugcu, fog, gefogen, + suck, 11., 134, 2; (bu
faugft, not faugft < faugeu).
©au6 unb ^rau§ (uninflec), revel and riot.
©abel, m., -, + sabre.
©anger, m., -, + singer.
©auie, /., w., column, 430, 1.
fc^, pronunc. of, 33; description of, 378,
3; 389,4; Eng. correspondents of, 413,
1; 490, 1; ori<^in of, 490, 1 ; 514.
-f(^, 514 ; see -ifi^.
©d)abe(n),f?2.,harm, damage, 46,4; 48, 1.
fc^affen, fd)uf, gefdjaffeu, to create, + shape,
VT., 139; (bu fdjaffft, weak = work,
procure).
-f(^aft + -ship, 515, 4; fem. gender, 161,
2; 430,2.
fd;atten, f^oll, gefdjoffen, to sound, generally
weak, 133; (bu f^attft).
©c^ar, f.,w., troop, host.
fc^auen, to look.
-fd)e, suffix of surnames, 514, o.
fci^eiben, fd)teb, gefci^teben, to separate, de-
part, L, 133, 2 ; vn., 131 ; (bu fd^eibeft,
er fc^eibet).
fc^eineu, fd;ien, gef^tenen, + shine, seem, I.,
133, 2.
fd^et^en, \Am, gcf(^iffen, cacare, I., 133, 1.
fc^ellen, fc^olt, gefc^oKen, to ring (the bell),
Vni., 133 ; (bu fc^iUft, fd)ia are very
rare, also weak),
fdjelten, S^aM, geft^olten, + scold, HI., 135, 3;
491, 2 ; (bu \^i\i% er W\i, f^ilt or f^elte,
fc^oltc).
-f(^en, suf. in verbs, 539, 2.
fd)eren, fc^or, gefc^oren, -h shear, Vm., 133 ;
(bu fd;ierft, fc^ier, also weak.
fd)euen, avoid ; refl., to fear.
fc^ieben, f(^ob, gefc^oben, push, + shove, IE.,
134, 2.
282 WORD-INDEX AND GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
^^ier, oc?/., brilliant, pure ; adv.^ almost,
(quick, comp. bold + bait),
jt^te-pen, \^Mi Qcfd^ofjen, + shoot, II., 124,
1 ; (bu jd)ici5e|"t or f^ievt).
©c^Ub, n. and w., + shield., see 58; 163, 4.
f*inben, fc^unb (j^anb), gej^unben, to skin,
ni., 125, 1; (bu fe^inbeft).
fc^Iafen, \^\\t\, sefc^Iaf en, + sleep, VII., 130,
1 ; pres. part., 394, 1 ; (Du f^ldtft).
f^Iaff, slack, 74.
f(3^Iav3en, W«g, gefc^Iagen, strike, + slay, VI.,
129 ; rfapr.,=to fight ; (bu fd^logft).
f(^Ian!, slender, 74.
f*lci^cn,id)Uci2,3ef{^lid)cn,to sneak,!., 122,1.
f(^Icifen, f(i>Ii[f, gei»^Iiffcn, to sharpen by
grinding, I., 122, 1 ; weak = to raze,
fii^lei^en, \^\\% gef(^Iifien, wear off, + slit,
I., 122, 1 ; (bu jdjleiyefl or jcMet^t).
f^Uicien, f(i^Icff, gcj(^Ioffeu, to slip, II., 124,
2 ; (bu fc^Ieufft, f(J^Ieu_f very rare),
jc^llcpen, fc^lo^, gefc^loffen, close, conclude,
II., 124, 2 ; (bu j^lie|eft or jc^lie^t; f^leu^t
etc., rare).
id)Unben, see f^tingen.
fd^Ungen, fdjlang, gefe^Iungen, to twine,
+ sling, devour. III., 125, 1.
Scbtucf, m., -e, swallow ; pi., 51.
fc^Iilpfen + slip < jdjUefen according to 535,
1, R. 2.
(£(i^mac^, /., novl.^ disgrace, 490, 3, h.
^d)ma(^ten, to pine (,fd)inad)tete).
fc^nieid}eln, flatter, 536, 2, Ex.
fd^metBen, j(^m!i?, gcfd)mi»Kn, throw, + smite,
1., 122, 1 ; (tu fd^mei^cft or fd^mei^t).
yc^mcl^^en, ji^melj, gefc^mclscn, +melt. Vni.,
133; (bu jd^mtlsjl or jd)mil5t, ei* Ic^mitit,
trans, is weak).
(Sdjnicra, m., -eS, -en, pain, + smart, 63.
jd;nauben, fd^no^, gefd^noben, snort, puff,
+ snuff, II., 124, 2, also weak; (Du
fc^naubft).
Sd)neeu)ittd)cn,-i- Snow-white (witt is L. G.
for weiB).
fd)neiben, (d^nttt, gcfd)n'ttcn, + cut, L, 122,1;
416, 462 ; (bu fd)noibo[t).
f^nie&en, see j^naubcn.
fd)nl(5en, carve, 535, 1, E. 2.
ji^on, already, 339 ; position of, 354 ;
form of, 5*54.
fd)on, beautiful, 522.
fi^rauben, ft^rob, gcf(!^rDben, + screw, II.,
124, 2; (bu f(^ranbft) ; also weak.
^i^reden, \^x<xl, geid>rcden, to be frightened,
see crfd>rcden.
S(^red(en), w., fright ; infl., 46, 4.
fc^reiben, fj^rieb, gefc^rieben, write, I., 122, 2.
fc^reien, fc^rie, gefdjrieeu, cry, + scream, 1.,
122, 2.
fd)vciten, S^xxii, gc?d)rittcn, to stride, walk,
I., 122, 1 ; (bu fc^i-citeft, er fc^reitet).
Su^ritt, m., -e§, -e, stride, step ; after
numerals, 175.
f(^roff, rugged, uncouth, 74.
fd)iDeigen, ^(^ir*eg, gcfdranc^.-:, to be silent,
L, 122,2
edjirein, n., -e, pig, + sow, + swine, 502,2.
fd)icelten, fd)tDoII, gefAnjoUen, + swell, ■snil.,
133; (bu ^dyicittil, fd)m!I).
f(^njinben, f^wanb, ge^d^iuunben, disappear,
III., 125, 1; (bu f(^mnbe)'t, jc^iranbe —
fc^wiinbe).
j(^tt)ingen, fd^wang, gefc^mungen, + swing,
III., 125, 1 ; (idjiuiinge and j(^u>iinge).
fd)tcinimen, jd^njamm, gef(^n)ommen, + 6wim,
III., 125, 2 ; 464 ; (j^ironune and
fc^icamme).
fd^Mi^oren, f($»3ur and fdjtcor, gc^cfetroren, +
swear, VI., 129 ; VOI., 132 ; 457, 1 ;
(bu f(^irorft).
®e. < ecine, His, 311, 2.
(See, m., -§, -en, lake ; /., w., + sea, 63.
fcr)en, ^ai), ge^eben. + see,V., 128,1 ; instead
of gc"cl;cn, 108, 1 ; +inf., 290, 3 ; 410,
3; 411, Ex; (bu fie^, fie^).
^ein, G. s. of ev, e§ : see feiner.
fein, his, its, 85 ; not referring to subject,
242, 1 ; 243, 2 ; referring to indefinite
subj., 98 ; seemingly for i^r in „ieincr
3ett,'^ 343, 2.
fein, to be, 110 ; 473, l ; in comp. tenses,
266, 283,1-3; in passive, 273 ; +inf.,
290, 3, a ; +past part, 296, 2 ; +pres.
part., 2 74, 6.
feiner, G. s. of er, e§, of him, of it, 81.
fctt + since, mep.. 303, 14; + since, cc??/,
330,2.
feitbem, see fett.
fetten-o, on the part of, prep.^ 302.
-feito, in comp. with poss. pron., 87, 552.
-fet, noun-suf., 46, 1 ; 500, 1 ; mostly
ncut. gend., 16, 13.
fclb-, icibcr, + self , 91, 2; before numerals,
229, 1 ; 530 ; strengthens refl. pron.,
237,2; use of, 249.
felbanber, two of them, of us (according to
the person of the verb), 229, 1.
felbig-, same, 248, 2.
felbfl, see feib-
-feltg, adj.-suf., 528, 2, a.
-fen + -se, verb-suf , 539, 1.
fenben, fanbte, gefanbt, + send, 119, 1 ; 455,
1; pret. subj., fenbete.
fenfen, fenftc, gefenft, trans., + sink, 535,
1, a.
©effel, m., -, (easy, large) chair,
©cu^e, /., w.., epidemic disease, 396.
sh — f(^, 490, 1, d.
shall + follcn, 266, 5 ; in ftit., 266, 6 ; 2 79,
3 ; 283, 4.
\i&j, A. and D., sing, and pi. of refl. pron.,
him- and herself, themselves, 83; re-
ciprocal pron., 84, each, one another ;
supplants pers. pron., 237,1; 243,3,
R.J position of, 353, e.
fie, N. and A., fem. smg., and pi. of all gen-
ders, + she, her, they, them, 81.
©ic, yon in address, 230, 2; 233.
fied), infirm, + sickly, 396.
fieben, fctt, gcfotrcn, boD, + seethe, 11., 124,
1 ; 416, 1 ; 463 ; (bu ficbcft) ; figur.
weak.
©in-, in comp., 494, 3.
fingen, fang, gefungen, + sing, m., 125, 1.
finten, fanf, gcfunfen, + sink, m., 125, 1.
©inn nnb 95evftanb ~ all reason, lit. sense
and reason.
WORD-INDEX AND GERM AX-ENGLISH YOCABULARY.
^83
fmuen, fann, gcfonncn, meditate, in., 135,
2; (ffinue and fomie).
fint+ since, prep., 303, 14.
fintemal, because, 337, 1.
figen, fajj, 9eiei7en,+sit, V., 1S8, 2; 457, 1;
[bu fi^eft, er W, \Mt)\ -, ^ ^ ^
fo+so: in main clauses preceded by de-
pend, claus., 329; 333; 330, 3, a;
348, 2; in consecutive clauses, 335;
in compar. clauses, 333, 3; in conces-
sive cl., 339; relative adv., 257; =iyeun,
340; +^1X1^ 350,2,
©o^n, m., -c, +son, 405.
fDl(^ + snch, 91, 3 ; 443, 1 ; force of, 350;
+ ein, 91,3; 144; 157 ; 333,3.
fofern, conj.^ +in so far as, 340,
©olba't, m.^ w., + soldier,
foUen, joUte, geiottt, + shall, ought, 135, 5 ;
108, 2; 471, 2, 4; force of, 367, 5;
379, 3; 383,2,5.
fonber, without, 304, 6 ; 489, 4.
fonbern, but, 330, 2, R.; word-order after,
343, c.
fonft, at other times, 330 ; 551, 3,
fp, pronunc. of, 34; 378, 3; 389, 4;
391, 1 ; Eng. correspondents of, 413, 1.
©pa^, m.^ -c§, -e, joke, fun.
fpapen, to joke, 118, 2; (fpa^eft, fpa^te).
fpat, adv.^ late, 300, 1 ; 554. 1.
©paten, m., -, + spade.
©pa^, wj., w., also -e§, -c, + sparrow,
fpajieren, walk about, with veibs of motion,
390, 2.
fpa^en + spy, 494, 1.
fpat, late, see also fpat.
fpeieit, fpie, gejpieen, + spit, + spew, I.,
133, 2.
©peife, /., w., food.
fptnnen, ipann, gefponuen, + spin, in., 135,
2; (fpanne and fpornte).
©pion, m., -e, + spy, 494, 1.
fplei^en, iptlil, geipUifeu, + split, I, 133, 1 ;
(bu fplei^eft or fpleiiit, er jpletpt).
©peril, m., + spur, for infl. see 03, 1.
fpred)cn, fprac^, gefprod^en, + speak, IV.,
137 ; (ou fprt(^ft, fpric^ ; with A., to see,
in § 60.
fprtefjcn, fpro^, gefprof^en, + sprout, 11., 134,
1 ; (bu fptie^eft or fprte^t, er fprte^t ; old,
fpreu^t, fpreu^).
fpttngen, fprang, geforungen, + spring, run,
ni., 135, 1 ; (fprange),
©pro^, m., -ffeg, -Re, + 8prout, scion,
[t, pronunc. of, 34 ; 378,3; 389,4; 391,
1 ; Eng. correspondents of, 413.
~\i, super! . suffix, 73; 438, 1; in ordinals,
80 ; 530 ; in nouns, 513, 3.
©taat, m„ -e5, -en, + state, government,
©tad^el, m., -, sting,
©tabt, /., % city, 430, 1, a ; 490, 1, b.
©tamm, «z., -, + stem.
ftarr, stiff, + staring, 74.
flatt + instead of, 303, 1; 490, 1, b.
©tatt, /., no pl.^ place, 4- stead, see ©tabt.
©tatte, /., w,, spot, see above,
ftec^cn, [tac^, gcfto(^en, siing, puncture, +
stick, IV., 137; 457,2; 405,1; (bu
Mm. m).
[teden + to stick (not flaf, but weak),
ftct)ea, ftaiib (ftunb), gc[tanben, + stand, 139;
136, 2; 457,2; 475 ; (bu fte^ft, [tet)e, ic^
[tunce or [tanbe).
ftet;len, [ta^l, gcfto^ien, + steal, IV., 137;
398 ; 465 ; (Cu ftie^Ift, jnelyl or [tel;te,
ftoi^le or ftaf^le).
fteigen, jtteg, geftiegen, to ascend, mount, I.,
133, 2.
©teiu, m.,-c, + stone.
©teimnc^, m., w., also strong, stone-cutter,
fteinreicV + stony, very rich, 4:^3, 4.
fterben, [tavb, geftovbcn, + to die, IV., 135, *3:
( + starve, [tirbi't, ftur&c, rarely ftarbe).
ftieben, ftob, geftobcn, fly, scatter like d:;st,
I., 134, 2 ; (bu ftiebit, older fteubft).
^ii^i, gender and meaning see 58.
ftinfen, ftan!, geftunfen, + stink, HI., 135,1;
(I'tanfe, rarely ftutife).
ftoJ^, proud, 74.
fto^en, ftiep, geflo^cn, push, thrust, VII.,
131 ; 458, 2 ; (bu fto^t, er fto^t).
flraff, stretched, tight, 74.
©traud}, 771., -e and — er, shnib.
ftre(feu + stretch, in § 79 to die.
[treii^en, ftvii^, geftrid^en, -i- strike out, +
stroke, L, 133 1.
ftreiten, ftvitt, geftrttten, contend, I., 133, 1 ;
(bu ftrcitcft) • "strong," 438, 3.
©tiiBc, /., sitting-room ( + stove).
©tu^I, m., — e, chair, + stool, throne,
flunb, pret. of fte:^en, q. v.
-ftunb in comp., 531, 2.
©tute, mare, + stud, 430, 1.
ftufeen, be startled, clip, < same root as
flD^cn; see 535; bu [tu^eft, 118, 2.
\vi^t\\ + seek, 454^ 3.
©utfet, /., w., passion, mania, 396 ; orig.^
lingering disease ; + sick.
-fti(^ttg in comp., 538, 2, b.
©ftben, m., -i-, + south.
©ftnbflut, /., ^y., Deluge, 494, 3.
\^, + sweet.
I, pronunc. of, 33, 35-
t, pronunc. of, 35 ; see t^ ; Eng. corre-
spondents of, 408. 1 ; 413 : 413, 1 ;
414, 1; description of, 384, 1; in ,
389, 3, 4 ; excrescent, 87 \ 89 ; 91, 2 ;
491,2; 513,2,3; stops mto spirantis
before, 413 ; tv, 414, 1.
-t, noun -suffix, 513 ; fem. gend,, 161, 2 ;
163,5,
-t, in the participle of weak verbs,
453.
A, 2. pers. sg. in pret^-pres, verbs,
470, 2.
^afel,/., «;., formal meal ; Get — , at + table.
Stag, m., -c + day,
taugen, to be fit, + do, 471, 5.
Staufenb, w., -e,+ thousand, 336.
tch, G. correspondents of, 414, 3.
-te, suf. in ordinals, 80, 530.
-te, in pret., 117; 454, 1.
teil^, in part ; in comp. with poss. pron., 87.
284 WORD-IN^DEX AN^D GERMAN-EIfGLISH VOCABULABY.
-tel, in comp., 533, 2.
-ter, nonn-sufl, 508.
teta, see t^at.
Teutones, 493, 3.
t^, pronunc. of, 35 ; origin of, 363, 3 ;
384, 1.
t^at + did, 374,6; 390; 476,2.
Silver, gend. and meaning, 163, 4 ; 408, 1.
St^rane, tear, 430, 1.
St^ron, m., -c and -€n, + throne, 63, 1.
t^un, t^ot, 9et^an, + do, 136, 3; 454,1;
476; as an auxU., 394, 6; 394, 1;
(tl^ate).
SEBur, /., «r., + door, 408, 1 ; 430, 1.
SEpr^cn, w., -, little door.
SEier, w., -e, animal (deer).
%\S^, m.y -e, table ( + disk, + dish).
StDc^ter,/., ^,+dauo:hter, 46, 48, 408, 1.
SEob, w., -eg, joZ. of, 173.
toU, mad, + dull, 74.
tragen, tvug, getragen, carry, VI., 139 ; (bu
trcicift).
SErant, w., -e, + drmk.
trauen (with D.), to trust,
treffen, trof, getroffen, hit, IV., 137; (bu
triffft, triff).
treiben, trieb, getrteben, + drive, I., 133, 2.
treten, trot, getreten, + tread, step, V., 138,
1 ; (bu trittfl, er tritt, tritt or trcte).
triefen, troff, getroffen, + to drip, drop, II.,
134, 1 ; 463 ; (bu trietft, rarely treufi'!).
triegen, see tvugen.
trinfen, tranf, getrunfen, + drink, m., 135,
1 ; (trcinfe, older txunfe).
trocEen + dry, 534, 4.
SErcpfCen) m., - +drop, 46, 4.
SErcpf, m., -e, fool, orig. "struck with
paralysis.*'
tro^, in defiance, in spite of, 303, 9.
tro^en, to comfort, 535, 1, a ; (troftete).
-trunfen, intoxicated, 538.
SErtibfal, /., -e, sorrow.
SErummcr, a pi., ruins, 59.
trugen, trog, getrcgen, to cheat, 11., 134, 2 :
133 ; (bu triigft, older trciigft).
%yx^, «., -€§, — er, cloth, shawl, 58, 85.
-turn, + -dom, 57, 4 ; mostly neut. gend.,
161, 8 ; origin of, 501 ; 515, 5.
%, pronunc of, 389, 3 ; 414, 1 ; § — J, f,
535,1,5.2; see J.
tt.
u, pronunc. of, 36 ; description of, 368, 1,
2 ; < uo, 488, 4 ; u — c, 405 ; +nascUis
and liquida sonans^ 459, 8, a.
ue, as sign of umlaut, 363, 2.
urn + SU, in order to, 391, 1, 4, R. ; 335, 1 ;
338, 1 ; 304, 7 ; in comp. verbs, 549,
4; +jo, 334.
untrungen, suiTounded, see rtngen.
un- 4- -un, accent, 433, 6 ; 516, 10.
unb + and, 319; + inversion, 339, 1.
-ung + -ing, 506, 2; gend., 161, 2.
un§, D. and A. of wir, + us, to us, 81 ; also
refl., 83 ; and reciprocal pron., 84.
unfer, G. of luir, 81.
unfer, poss. pron., + onr, 85.
unirer, for unfer, 83.
unter-, adj.^ lower, + under, 76, 2.
unter, i>rep., + under, 306, 8, 10 ; in comp.
verbs, 549, 5.
Unterfd)icb, m., -e§, -e, difference, 458, 3.
Untertl)an, m„ w., subject (of a ruler), 63, 1.
Uv- + or-, 516, 9.
Urol^ne, great grandmother in § 143.
urbar, arable, 536, 1.
iX, pronunc. of, 31 ; sign of umlaut, 363,
2 ; 368, 4 ; description of, 367 ; 368,
3, 4 ; < ue, 488, 4 ; u — i, 489, 2.
uber + over, 306, 7: in comp. verbs, 549, 3.
u'berfal)ten, to cross.
aber^au'pt, in general, 433 ; 553, 3.
», pronunc. of, 37; 380, 1, 2 ; see f;
415,1.
SSater, m.. -, + father, 46, 48, 2 ; 411 ;
478.4.
SSaterlanb, n., -ۤ, -e,+ fatherland.
Ber- + for-, 516, 11 ; 545 ; in certain par-
ticiples, 395, 2 ; 545, 5.
perberben, serbarb, uerbcrben, to spoil (intr.),
ni., 135,3; (bu »erbirb[t; verbirb, terbiirbe,
rarely tcrbarbe).
SSerbicnft, gend. and meaning, 163, 3.
perbient, deserving, meritorious, 395, 2.
perbrie^en, i-^erbro^, perbroffen, to vex, II.,
134, 1 ; (bu t>erbrie^eft or »erbvic^t, old
»erbreu§t).
pergeffeu, werga^, tergefyen, + to forget, V.,
138, 1 ; past part, in comp., 395, 2, a ;
(bu pergifjeft or rergi^t, er tergipt, J>ergi^).
ter^altni^m&|ig, comparatively,
terfauren, to sell.
Berlaffen, to forsake, see laffen.
petlegen, embarrassed, past part., 395, 2, a;
534, 4.
perrernen, to forget how to . . ., + unlearn,
perlieren, perlor, pcrloren, + lose, 11., 134, 2;
416.
ttermoge, by virtue of, 303, 11.
»ertt»irren, to confuse, strong past part., uets
n)Drren=compIicated, VIII., 133.
SSetter, m., w. or mixed decl., cousin, 63, 1.
9Sie^, n., -c§, -e, cattle (+fee), 410, 3.
»iet, much, compar. of, 76, 1 ; 100 ; 199,
1, 2; 363.
vixen + >vuc()fin, 504.
poll- + fuU, 74, 549, 6.
PcHcr + full, 319, 1.
PDHfonimcn, perfect, 431, 1.
SScIf, n.y — er, people, + folk.
3SD'If§etpmDlogie^ + folk-etymology, 494, 2.
pom < pon bcm, from the, 40.
pon, from, by, 303, 15; compar. with bur(^,
369 ; 304, 2 ; 306, 7, i?. ; +felbft, of . . .
self, 349, 2.
Por + before, in point of, 306, 9 ; 516, 5 ;
compar. with filr, 304, 3.
porau'ywerfunbigcn, announce beforehand,
546, 2.
Porbcr-, the front one, 76, 2 (short o).
WOED-IKDEX AKD GEEMAN-EKGLISH YOCABULARY. 285
SSorfa^r, m.^ w., ancestor,
wor'^afcenb, intended, 394, 1.
SSormunb, m., -eS, "-er, guardian.
XO, pronnnc. of, 38 ; description of, 379 ;
380, 2: loss of, 417, 2; Eng. corre-
spondents of, 410, 3 ; 415, 2 ; 490. 6.
wadjfen, \v\x^^, geroad.})en, grow, + wax, VI.,
139 ; 417, 5, a ; (bu, cr load^ft).
SBagcn, m.,+ wagon, + wain, 494,1; 48,2.
SBaggo'n, m., pi. in -§, car, 494, 1.
wain + 2Bagen, 494,1.
voai)X, true, 74.
SBa^r^eit, /., w., truth.
SSalb, m., -e§, -er, forest, +wold.
icatten, rule (roaltete).
tcanbein, walk, change, 118, 3.
wanbern + wander, 118, 3.
wonn+when ; for relat. pron., 358 ; cwy.,
330, 1; etym., 551,2.
war, pret. of fein, q. v. ; also wesan.
warb, pret. sing, of racroen. 111, 2 j 460.
ttarum + why, + wherefore, 351, 4 ; 551, 2.
tt>a§, interrog. pron., 93 ; 444 ; use of,
351; + G., 351, 1; preceded by p.,
tnit, 351, 3 ; with fiir and etn, 144,
353; force of luarum, 351, 4; relat.
pron., 93 ; 356 ; 356, 2 ; indef. pron.,
96; 304; 360.
tt)a§, archaic of wesan^ 466, 1.
wafc^en, luufd), geiuajj^en, + wash, VI., 139 ;
413 ; (bu njaf(^e[t or waf<^t).
SBaffer, /i., -, + water, 414, 1, Ex.
ttjigen, see wiegen.
wafrenb, during, 303, 11; conj., 330, 1.
-wdrto, + -ward, 553, 2.
"weak," 438,3.
weben, moh, gen)D6ett, + weave, VIII., 133 ;
(bu webft) ; weak = to move.
weber — no^ + neither — nor ; + whether,
444, 3 ; in compar. clauses, 333, Ex.
-njegen, on account of, in comp. with pron.,
87, 89 ; prepos., 303, 13.
tt)e^ t:^un + D., to pain, see if)mx.
SBei6, n., -c§, -cr, + woman, + wife, 166.
weic&, soft ( + weak).
tt3Ct(^en, miX), geanc^cn, to yield, I., 133, 1 ;
weak = to soften.
2]3ei^nacf)teu, Christmas, 439, 1.
weit, because, 337; + while, 330, 1.
-weife, -wise, 553, 3.
weifen, wteS, gciuiefen, show, I., 133, 2.
ttei^fagen, prophecy, 547, 3 ; (p. p. gemeiSs
wet^, see wtffen.
aeld^, interrog. pron., 93, 2 ; 444, 2 ; with
ein, 144; 353; relat. pron., 93, 2;
355, 356; indef. pron., 96, 360;
etym., 415, 2.
njeiti, D. of tuer, q. v. ; 93, 1.
wenben, wanbte, gewanbt, turn ( + wend),
119, 1 ; 397 ; 453 ; (bu wenbeft, pret.
subj. ttjenbete).
jrenig, Uttle, few ; comparison regular or
as m 76, 1.
wenn, conj., + when, = if in temporal
cl., 330, 1 ; = if in concessive cl.,
339 ; = if in condit. cl., 340 ; etym.^
551, 2.
wer + who, interrog. pron., 93 ; 351 ;
410, 3; 444; relat. pron., 93, 3;
354; 356; indef. pron., 96; 354;
360; 339.
werben, tcarB, geworben, recruit, sue for,
in., 135, 3 ; (bu \axxl% mxh, wiirbe or
vabxm),
werben, warb or wurbe, gcworben, become
( + worth). III., 135, 3; infl. of, 110;
111, 2; 460, 1; in passive, 373 ; in
comp. tenses, 383, 2-5 ; + gu, 303,16;
(bu wirft, er vcirb, njerbe, iriirbe).
werfen, trarf, geworfen, throw. III., 135, 3 ;
(bu wirtft, »irf, wxlrfe or xo^x\^).
SSerf, 72,., -e§, -e, + work, 60.
nje§, tceffen, rce^, 93, 1 ; 356, 4.
toefen, wesan, V., 138, 5 ; 411 ; 466.
ireg^atb, wherefore, 93, 1.
weffent-, in comp., 93, 1.
SBi^t, W2., -e, + wight, + whit,
iriber, against, 304, 8; in comp. verbs,
549, 7.
wibmen, dedicate (wibmete), 118, 2.
m^, +how, as, 444, 1 ; in tempor. clauses,
330, 1, 2 ; in compar. cl., 333 ; after
comparative, 333, 2.
trieber, a(^?;.,again, in comp. verbs, 549,8.
iriegen, lucg, geiDDgen, + weigh, VIII., 133;
(also irdgen, bu tciegft).
icilb + wild.
wtU, see iroHen ; 367, 6.
willen, for the sake of, in comp. with pron.,
87, 89 ; prepos., 303, 14.
irinben, tcanb, gei»unben, + wind, III., 135,
1 ; (bu tt)inbeft).
ttJtffen, tou^te, getcup, for infl. see 135, 1 ;
413, 2 ; 471, 1 ; 473, 1 ; compar. with
fennen, fonnen, 367, 1.
with+t»iber; 306,8.
SGBittum, fi., -e, jointure, allowance, 501.
n)D(r) + where, supplants cases of interrog.,
and relat. pron., 351, 2 ; 358 ; in local
clauses, 331 ; in tempor. cl., 330, 1 ;
in condit. cl., 340, 340, 4 ; origm of,
551,2.
irofern, coTij., in so far as, 336; 340;
340, 2.
WD^t + well, pronunc. of, 381; 339; 489,
1; position of, 354; 399, 2, a.
njoMgeboren, (Your) Honor, lit. + well bom.
WDUen, wottte, gerooUt, + will, be willing,
for infl. see 135, 7, and 108, 2 ; 473,
2; special force of, 367, 6; 379, 3;
383, 5.
Womogtic^, if possible, 340, 4.
tcorben, past part, of toerben, 108, 5.
2Bort, w., -e and -er, +word, 58.
SBunber, n., -, + wonder, see ne^^mcn.
wurbe, pret. of irerben. 111, 2.
SBurm, m., -cr, and -e, +worm.
iDU^te, see wifjcn.
SSiirbe, /., w., dignity, + worth.
286 WOHD-I^sTDEX AJS^D GERMAN-EKGLISH VOCABULARY.
^, pronraic. of, 29 ; 389, 2 ; 417, 5, a ;
Engl. X as symbol, 395.
X), pronunc. of, 31.
3, pronunc. of, 30 ; 389, 3, 4 ; Eng. corre-
spondents of, 409, 1 ; 414, 1 ; 490, 2 ;
535, l,i?. 2.
5a:^m + tame, 74, 398.
2a^n, m., -e, + tooth, 409, 1 ; 417, 1.
3art, tender, 74.
gasmen + to tame, 535, 1, a,
Q'aljxe, /., w., + tear, 430, 1.
ge^n + ten, 77, 539.
3eid)en, n.^ -, + token.
jeic^ncn, draw, delineate, 118, 1.
jeiljen, jicf), gejie^en, accuse, L, 132, 2;
395; 463.
-3en, verb-guf., 539, 3.
ger- + dis-, verb-pref., 546.
5eu'ci^en, to tear to pieces, see rei^en.
3euge, m.^ w.^ witness.
jie^en, jog, gcjogen, draw, II., 134, 2 ; 416;
(bu geucJjft, jeud) are archaic).
-jig + -tyin numerals, 539, 1.
jtttern, tremble, eiym., 457, 3.
ju + to, 303, 16; before inf., 391; before
adj., 391, 4 ; 333, 3 ; see gegen and
3uber, tub, etym.^ 398.
3uc!er, m., no j??;., + sugar.
jufolge, in accordance with, 303, 15.
gum < 5U betn + to the, 40.
3unft, /., -e, guild, 398.
^utigc, /., w., + tongue, 414, 1, Ex.
5ur< ^u ber + to the,/(gm., 40.
§urii'clbringen + bring back, see tringen.
jufammcn, together.
jirav, to be sure, 339 ; 555, 3 ; position
of, 354.
jireen + twain, + two, 79; 539.
Awet + two; infl. of, 78; form and gend.
of, 79 ; 539.
3WeIt + twelve, 77 ; 539 ; 489, 1.
3n?ie-+ two- 530,1.
5n)ier + twice, 531, 2.
jwingen, jtrang, gejiuungen, to force, III.,
135,1.
Att)ifc^en+ between, 306, 10; compar. with
unter, 306, 8; 305, 1,2.
gnjD + two, /em., 79; 539.
z, Grimm's sign for the sound between
z and 6, 414 ; > s, 490, 2.
THE STUDENT'S
Manual of Exercises
FOR TRANSLATING INTO GERMAN
WITH FULL VOCABULARY, NOTES, REFERENCES, AND
GENERAL SUGGESTIONS
Prepared and Arranged to Accompany
BRANDT'S GERMAN GRAMMAR
BY
A. LODEMAN, A.M.
PROFESSOR OF GERMAN AND FRENCH IN THE MICHIGAN STATE NORMAL SCHOOL
Boston
ALLYN AND BACON
1888
Copyright, 1885, by G. P. Putnam's Sons.
REMAEKS AND EXPLANATIONS.
The following Exercises have been prepared with the
twofold purpose of furnishing to the student material for
translating into German, and of assisting him in the analysis
and translation of the more difficult illustrations in Brandfs
German Grammar,
That examples from the German classics are the proper
kind of illustrations for a text-book of such high order and
merit as Professor Brandt's, cannot be doubted. Had the
author illustrated his rules by means of sentences especially
adapted to the understanding of the young student, the latter,
upon completing the course in grammar, would not be well
prepared to read and enjoy the works of the great German
authors. If the examples found in Brandt's Grammar, in
some instances, force the student to greater application, he
will feel amply repaid for his extra labor when he takes up the
study of the masterpieces of German literature.
At all events, the present Exercises will, it is hoped, enable
even the beginner to derive the full benefit from the large
number of excellent illustrations drawn from the acknowledged
masters of German style and embodied in Brandt's Grammar.
Should he find any difficulty in translating any one of them.
4 REMARKS AND EXPLANATIONS.
he has only to refer, by means of the table given below, to the
corresponding English Exercise, and he will find that one or
more of the English sentences will greatly aid him in the
understanding of the German example.
The Grammar referred to throughout the book (including
the Vocabulary) is BrancWs Grammar of the German Lan-
guage, Paragraphs to be read over merely are put in ( ).
In the Exercises, words in [ ] should not be translated,
while those in ( ) are required by the German idiom.
The cognate mark ( + ) is put, as a rule, only where even
the beginner can recognize the common origin of English and
German words after having had his attention called to it.
When the German word is preceded by the article, the + is
placed before the latter.
Figures at the end of sentences refer to those sections in
the Grammar in which more or less of the material required,
for the German sentence may be found.
The Vocabulary contains all words not explained in the
notes, except such grammatical words (pronouns, prepositions,
3tc. ) as are easily found in the very paragraphs to which the
student is referred for each exercise. The notes under the
first twenty exercises are so full as to do away with the use of
the Vocabulary.
TABLE
SHOWING IN WHICH EXERCISES ILLUSTRATIONS OF THE VARIOUS
PARAGRAPHS OF THE GRAMMAR MAY BE FOUND.
Para.
Ex,
Page
Para.
Ex.
Page
Para.
Ex.
Page
38
1
7
110
5
9
226-29 ..
17
. 33
39
1
. 60
tt
. 31
. 45
230
18
. 34
40
2
. 61
111
. 5
. 63
«(
7
. 11
41
1
. 60
112
. 3
. 8
231-32 ..
7
. 65
42
1
7
113
6
. 64
233-34 ..
18
. 34
43
. 2
. 7
114
4
. 9
235-36 ..
19
. 35
44-5
1
7
((
. 5
. 10
237^1 ..
20
. 36
46
. 2
7
115
. 2
. 22
242-43 ..
7
. 65
48
1
.. 9
116
. 4
. 9
244-18 ..
21
.. 36
49-50 .
. 3
. 8
"
6
. 11
<(
8
.. 65
51
1
.. 60
117
2 '
.. 7
249-54 ..
22
.. 37
52-3
4
9
118
7
. 65
((
8
.. 65
56-8
. 5
. 10
119
. 6
. 11
255-63 !.
23
.. 38
59-60
1
.. 60
120-3
. 18
.. 19
"
8
.. 65
61-2
. 6
. 11
124-8
. 19
.. 20
264-66 .
24
.. 39
63-4
7
. 11
129-33
. 20
.. 20
267
25
.. 39
65
. 8
.. 12
134
. 11
.. 15
"
26
.. 40
QQ
1
. 60
135
. 11
.. 15
268-73 "..
27
.. 41
67
. 8
. 12
((
. 12
.. 15
274:-15 .
38
.. 42
68
1
.. 60
"
. 13
.. 16
276-79 .
29
.. 43
69-72
9
.. 13
((
. 14
.. 16
280-83 .
cO
.. 44
73-5
. 10
.. 14
136
. 15
.. 17
284-85 .
31
.. 45
76
. 11
.. 15
137
. 16
.. 18
286-90 .
32
.. 46
77-8
. 12
.. 15
((
3
.. 61
291-93 .
33
.. 47
79
. 17
.. 33
138
. 14
.. lf>
294-300 .
34
.. 47
80-2
. 13
.. 16
139-46
1
.. 21
301-3
35
.. 48
83-5
. 14
.. 16
147-50
. 2
7
304
36
.. 49
86-7
. 7
.. 65
151-58
. 3
.. 23
305-7 .
37
.. 50
88
. 15
.. 17
159-63
. 4
.. 24
308-17 .
1
.. 51
89
7
.. 65
164-69
5
.. 24
318-22 .
2
.. 52
90-1
. 15
.. 17
170-77
.. 6
.. 25
323-28 .
. 3
.. 52
92-3
. 16
.. 18
178-79
.. 7
.. 26
329-32 .
4
.. 53
94-100
. 17
.. 18
180-83
8
.. 27
333-35 .
5
.. 54
101-2
. 2
.. 7
184-88
.. 9
.. 27
336-40 .
6
.. 55
((
. 3
.. 8
189
.. 10
.. 28
341
16
.. 18
{{
. 5
.. 10
190
.. 10
.. 28
((
16
.. 32
103
1
.. 7
((
3
.. 61
u
7
.. 56
**
.. 2
.. 7
191-97
.. 11
.. 29
342-43 .'
16
.. 32
((
.. 5
.. 10
198
.. 11
.. 29
kfr
7
.. 56
"
.. 31
.. 45
((
.. 3
.. 61
344
. 16
.. 32
104-5
7
.. 11
199-202
.. 11
.. 29
((
8
.. 57
106-7
8
.. 12
203-9
.. 12
.. 29
345-49 .
8
.. 57
108
.. 8
.. 12
210-12
.. 13
.. 30
350
. 3
.. 8
'»
.. 10
.. 14
213-17
.. 14
.. 31
4(
5
.. 10
109
.. 3
8
218-21
.. 15
.. 32
'*
9
.. 57
110
1
.. 7
222
.. 16
.. 32
((
. 3
.. 61
((
.. 2
.. 7
((
.. 10
.. 14
351-53 .'
. 9
.. 57
u
.. 4
9
223-25
.. 16
.. 32
354-59 .
. 10
.. 58
ABBEEVIATIONS.
acc.
= accusative.
part.
= participle.
adj.
= adjective.
perf.
= perfect tense.
aux.
= auxiliary verb.
pers.
= personal.
B. T.
= Bayard Taylor.
plup.
= pluperfect tense.
conj.
= conjunction.
plur.
= plural.
dat.
= dative.
poet.
= poetical.
def. art.
= definite article.
p.p.
= past participle.
Ex.
= Exercise.
prep.
= preposition.
F.
= Faust, Hart's Edition.
pret.
= preterite.
f. and ff.
= following.
pron.
= pronoun.
gen.
= genitive.
pr. pts.
= principal parts.
Ha.
= James Morgan Hart.
sep.
= separable.
imp.
= impersonal.
str.
= strong verb or noun.
indef. art
= indefinite article.
subj.
= subjunctive.
inf.
:= infinitive.
subord.
= subordinating.
insep.
= inseparable.
trans.
= transitive.
intrans.
= intransitive.
V. tr.
= transitive verb.
irr.
= irregular.
w.
= with.
lit.
= literally.
wk. V.
= weak verb. *
n.
= noun.
+
= of common origin with,
nom.
— nominative.
or cognate.
I., II. . . . denote classes of strong nouns or verbs.
In the Vck:!Abulary separable and strong verbs are marked i
str, respectively ; inseparable and weak verbs are not marked.
9. and
FIEST SEEIES.
Exercise I.
38, 42, 44, 45 — 103, 110, Present Indicative of loBen, ^altn^
fein — {The first sentence of each of the following para-
graphs : 178, 180, 189, 198).
1. The father praises the son. 2. The brother has a house.
3. The bath is in the house. 4. The strength of the sons is
great. 5. Have you a trade ? 6. The angels perform miracles.
7. The days are short. 8. Is the thread long or short ? 9.
Where is the gardener's spade ? 10. The gardener has the
spade.
Remark.— Most of the nouns in these Exercises will be easily found in the §§ above
referred to.
1. Father + ber ^odtx. To praise, loBen* Son + ber ©o^n; ace. ben ©o|n.
2. Brother ■^-'iitx SBruber. Tohme + ^^^tn. House + ba^ ^au^; gen. -e^, dat.
-e, acc.=:nom. 3. Bath + ^a^ Bab. To he, fein. In, in (prep, here w. dat.).
4. Strength, bie ^raft. Of the sons, ber ©o^ne. Great + grog. 5. Trade,
ba^ ©ewerbe. 6. Angel +^tx ©ngeU Toperform=do + t|un (3d pers. plur.
the same). Miracle, ba^ 2Bunber. 7. Bay + ber Slag. Short, furj. 8.
Thread, htx ^ahtn. Long + lan^* Or + ober. 9. Where? roo^. Gardener +
ber ©artner. Spade + ber ©paten. 10. Sentences 9 and 10 suggest an easy
method of introducing conversation in connection with these Exercises.
Exercise II.
43, 46 — 103, 110, Preterite Indicative of loBeit, l!:jCiltn, fein —
(117—275, 2, 101, 102).
1. The grain was on the floor. 2. The daughter loved
the father more than the mother. 3. The little child was
8 GERMAN EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. [I. Series.
playing with the little dog. 4. The knight presented a set
of jewelry to the daughter. 5, On the rock [there] was a
well. 6. I had a thought. 7. The floor rests on the beams.
8. The father and the brother-in-law rested in peace.
1. Grain, \>(X^ ©etreibe. On, auf (prep, here w. dat.). Floor, ber Soben.
2. Daughter + bte 2:od)tcr. To love + Uekn (inflected like lob en). More +
mc^r, TMn, al^. Mother + bie 9Kutter. 3. Little child, ba^ ^inbc^en. To
play, fpielen (inflected like loben). The German has but one form for the
English simple, emphatic, and progressive forms ; hence, was playing =
fpielte. Little dog, ba^ ^itnbc^cn. With, mtt (prep. w. dat.). 4. Knight^ ber
IRitter. To present, fc^enfen (inflected like loben). Set of jewelry, ba^ ®e»*
f^meibe. 5. Rock, ber %t\\txi* Well, n., ber 33rmmen. 6. Thought, n., + ber
©ebanfe. 7. To rest, ru§en (inflected like loben). Beam, ber S3alfe. 8.
Brother 4n-laiJ0, ber (Sc^maaer. Peace^ ber ^riebe*
Exercise III,
49, 50—101, 102—109, 112--265, 1—350.
Remaek.— It is not intended that the rules on the Declension of Nouns, as pre-
sented in the Grammar, should be committed to memory. The student, by carefully
perusing them, in connection with the written exercises, will learn to observe closely
the various forms ; and, in the future, he should learn, as far as possible, the Nam.
SiJig., Gen. Sing., and Nbm. Plur. of each noun, as all the other cases can be given
when these are known.
1. The dog has caught a badger. 2. My friend has seen
two hawks. 3. The youth has been in (the) prison. 4. We
have made many attempts. 5. A year has twelve months, a
month has thirty days. 6. What have you heard ? 7. I
have not heard a sound. 8. The kings on the thrones are
not free from tribulations. 9. (The) salmons are larger
than (the) herrings. 10. The smith can carry the anvil
with one hand.
1. Dog, ber ^unb. To catch, fangeit, str. v. (pr. pts., fanciett, fteng, gefangen).
Badger, ber 2)a(^^. 2. My + metn (declined like the indefinite article
eln, see 38) Friend -f ber greunb. To see + fe^en, str. v. (pr. pts., fe^en,
I. Series. ] GERMA2!f EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. 9
fa^, gefcl^en). Two + %xoiu Hawk + ber ^aMc^t. 3. Youth (young man) +
ber Sitngling. To he, fein, ivar, gemefen* The compound tenses of [ein are
formed with [eittf not with l^akn ; hence, I have been = tc^ Mn getDcfen
(see 266, 3). Prison, \>0i^ ©efangnif — in bem may be contracted into tm
(see 40). 4. To Tnake + ntac^en* mac^te, gemad^t* Many, »tete. Attempt, ber
S3crfuc^» 5. Tisar + ba^ Sal^r* r^re/'oe + jmolf, if(9?i^^ + ber ^onat.
Thirty + brct^ig. Da^ + ber %<x%. 6. TFAa^.? + 2Ba^? r<9 A^^r + pren,
l^orte, ge^ort* 7. Bender : I have heard no sound. No, fcin (declined like
ein)* Sound, ber Saut, 8. jS'tw.^ + ber ^onig* On, auf (here w. dat.).
Throne + ber 2;^ron, Free from + fret i?on (w. dat.). Tribulation, bie Xritb^
fat. 9. Salmon, ber Cad)^. Large, larger, largest, 0ro§, grofer, gro^t. T^a/z,,
als^. Herring + ber Bering ♦ 10. /S?7ii^^ + ber <S(^mieb, str. II. Ote/i + fann*
To carry, tragen, str. v. (pr. pts., tragen, trug, getragen). Anvil, ber S(mbo§«
With, mit (w. dat.). One + ein (declined like the indefinite article). Hand
+ bie ^anb, str. III.
Exercise IV.
52, 53 — 110, Present and Preterite Indicative of werten —
(114, 116).
1. The maid will kill the goose. 2. The cow is [being]
killed. 3. Kafts are made out of the trunks of (the) trees.
4. You will hear the mice in the night. 5. The guests were
at the ball in the city. 6. The son's betrothed will come to-
morrow. 7. The song of the choir was heard in the garden.
8. They will seek excuses. 9. Do you see the eagle in the air ?
10. The fruit of the tree will soon be ripe.
1. Maid + bie SRagb. To kill (of animals), fc^Iad^ten, wk. v. Ooose +
bie ®an^. 2. Cow -i- bie ^u^. Note that is killed is the passive voice. 3.
Baft, ba^ glo^. To make + mac^en, wk. v. Out of i)on (prep. w. dat.).
Trunk, ber <Stamm. Tree, ber 23aum» 4. To hear (see Ex. Ill, 6). Mouse
+ bie SDZau^* Mght + bie 5?a(^t. 3n, here with the dat. 5. Guest + ber
®a|l* At, here auf (w. dat.). Ball + ber SBaK. City, bie Stabt Sn, here w.
dat. 6. Betrothed, n.,bie SSraut (bride). To come + fommen, str. v. (pr. pts.,
fommen, f am, gefommen). To-morrow + m^x<sixi, 7. )8(?r^^ 4- ber®efang. Choir
+ ber (S^or, Garden + ber ©arten, str. I. 3n, here w. dat. 8. To seek -I-
10 GERMAN EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. [I. Sbbies.
fuc^en, wk. v. E^-cuse (subterfuge), bie 5lu^fluc^t, 9. Do you see f (Bel}en
©ie ? Eagle, ber 5lar, str. II. Air, bte Sitft. 3n, here w. dat. 10. Fruit
+ bie %x\x^i. Soon, balb* Bipe + reif.
Exercise V.
56 to 6S-^Eeview 101 to 103, 110, 114, 116, 350.— 103,
Present and Preterite Indicative of fingen*
1. The men turn the wheels. 2. Do you believe in ghosts
and spectres ? 3. Our mind is not free from errors. 4. He
read all [the] words on this leaf. 5. The villain did not listen
to the words of his friend. 6. The girls wear shawls and
ribbons. 7. The ties of (the) blood are strong. 8. The
foxes live in the forest. 9. The scholars write with pencils.
10. I have forgotten the word. 11. We found the leaves
under the shrubs. 12. His friends are under shelter.
1. Man + ber 3)?ann. To turn, bre^en, bre^te, gebre^t. Wheel, ba^ 0lab. 2.
To believe, %\<LuUn, glauMe, geglaubt. In, here an (w. ace). Ghost + ber ®ei|i*
^^c^r^, ba^ ©efpenfl. 3. Oz^r+itnfer. Jfm<?, ber ®eift. Free from, ^qg^k,
III., 8. Error + ber Srrtum. 4. To read, lefen, la$, gelefen. All, plur., +
aKe. Word + ba^ 2Bort. On, auf, here w. dat. Leaf, bda SBlatt. 5. Villain,
ber 23Dfen)t(^t. To listen to, ^oren auf (w. ace.) ; did not listen (see Ex. II., 3).
His, fein (declined like ein). Friend, see Ex. III., 2. 6. 6^i>^, ba^ 5)?abd^en
(46, 1) ; notice that in German all diminutives are of the neut&r gender,
no matter what they signify (161, 3). To wear, tragen, trug, (^etragen. Shawl,
ba^ %u^. RibUn, ba^ ^anb. 7. Tie, \)(i^ 33anb. Blood + ba^ «8Iut, gen. -e^.
Strong, flarf. 8. i^i^ic + ber f^ud)^, gen. -es3, plur. i^u^fe. To live + leben/
lebte, gelebt. Forest, ber SBalb. 9. Scholar ^+ ber Sd^iiler (46, 1). 2(9 ^nY^,
[ci^reikn, fc^rteb, gefc^rieben. PencU, ber S3leifltft (ba^ 33Iei, lead ; ber 8ttft,
" small pointed object " ; see 164). With, ntit (w. dat.). 10. To fm^get +
ijergeffen, yerga^f ^ergeffen. 11. To find + ftnben, fanb, gefunben (inflected like
fingeHf fang, gefungen; see, however, 104, 118, 121 first sentence). Shrub,
ber <Bixau^. Under + unter, here w. dat. 12. Under shelter = unter Dad^
Uttb %a^ (ba^ T)a^, roof ; bae %ad), compartment).
I. Series.] GEEMAi^ EXEECI8ES IN GRAMMAE. 11
Exercise VI.
61, ^2—119— Eevietv 116, 350.
1. The messengers were sent to the prince. 2. The stu-
dents sent a present to the poet. 3. The finches sing beauti-
fully. 4. The democrats hate monarchs, kings, princes,
counts ; they honor the peasants. 5. The architects have
built a house for the Hungarian. 6. The lights were burn-
ing. 7. The astronomer thinks of the stars. 8. The fellow
brought a bear out of the woods. 9. Not all kings are heroes.
10. (The) Men believe in God.
1. Messenger, ber S3ote. To send+\tnhm, fanbte, j^efanbt. To, when denot-
ing motion toward a person, is usually translated by ju, w. dat. Prince,
ber Siirjl, + ber ^nnj. 2. Student + ber (Stube'ttt. Present, n., ha^ ®e[d)enf
(50, 4). Poet + ber ^ot't (62, 3), or ber 2)ic^ter (46, 1). 3. Finch + ber
^inf. 2o sing + jtngen, fang, Qcfungen. Beautifully, fc^on. 4. Democrat +
ber ^emofra't. To hate + ^affen, '^agte, 9e:^aft» monarch + ber 3)lona'rc^.
JSTm^r (see Ex. III., 8). Count, ber (^raf. T(9 honor, e^ren, e^^rte, gee^^rt. Peasant y
ber S3auer. 5. Architect -f ber 5lr(^ite'ct. J<9 6m7d, ^auett, ^aute, gebaut. i^(?r
+ fur (w. ace). Hungarian + ber Uttgar. 6. Z^^^^ + \iCk^ !Bt(^t (58). 2^(?
hum + Brennen, Brannte, ge^rannt (see Ex. II., 3). 7. Astronomer + ber
5Iflrono'm. To think of + benfen an (w. ace.) ; benfen, bad^te, gebac^t. Star +
ber 8tern, str. II. 8. Fellow, ber S3urf(^e. To bring '+ hingen, &rad)te/ geha^t.
Bear + ber S3ar. Out of + an5 (w. dat.). Wooos = forest, ber S©alb. 9.
Not + ni(^t. ^ero, ber ^elb. 10, Man := liuman being, + ber 2)?enf(i^. To
believe in (see Ex. V., 2). Ood + ®ott.
Exercise VII.
63, 64—104, 105—230, 1, 2.
1. Thou hast eyes and seest not; and thou hast ears and
hearest not. 2. You are losing your slippers. 3. Do you
know the doctors and professors of the university ? 4. Mary
was the mother of Jesus Christ. 5. I feel a pain in my heart.
12 GEEMAN EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. [I. Series.
6. Go, and take this atlas to tlie director of the seminary. 7.
My cousin's neighbor has written dramas. 8. Canst thou find
the minerals ? 9. Tell me the cases of the singular and plural.
10. The insect has lost its sting.
1. Eye + ba^ Sluge* Seest + fte^ft (128, 1). Ear + ba^ D^r. To hear (see
Ex. III., 6). 2. To lose + »erlieren, verier, ijerloren. Slipper, ber ^Janto'jfeL
3. Do you know ? ^ennen (Bie ? Doctor , ber ©oftor. Professor, ber 9)rofeffor.
University^ bie Unwerfttd't (43, 1). 4 Mary, 9J?ari'a. Jesus Christ, 3efu^
(S^rijlu^. 5. To feel + fu^Iettf fii^ltef gefiip. Pain, ber (Sc^merj* Jlf?/, see
154. Heart + bas3 ^erj. 6. 7^(? ^<? + ge^en, Qteng, gegangen. Ja^6, liere to
be rendered hj ^ringen* Atlas + ber 5ltla^ . Director, ber ^Director . Seminary
+ ba^ (Bemina'r. 7. Cousin, ber SDetter. Neighbor + ber S'Jac^bar. T(? «/?n^e
(seeEx. v., 9). i>r«ma + ba^ ^rama, 8. Ca?^ (see 135, 3). i^^;^(^ (see Ex.
v., 11). Mineral + ba^ SJ^inera'L 9. To ^e^^, fagen, fagte, gefagt. if(g + mtr
(dat. of i^). Case + berSafu^. Singular + ber ©tngular (gen. -^). Plural
+ ber plural (gen. -^). 10. Insect + ba^ Snfe^ct. Its, here feinen, /S^w^, ber
etad^el.
Exercise VIII.
65, 67—106, 107, 108, 3.
1. The Prussians have a king, the Americans a president.
2. Many Englishmen wander through Switzerland. 3. The
students have sung a song on the Ehine. 4. Alsace used to
belong to France. 5. The palace of (the) emperor Charles
stood in Aix-la-Chapelle. 6. The generals of the great
Frederic were heroes. 7. Anna's sister has leffc England.
8. The Fichtel-mountains are covered with snow. 9. The
pupils have read of the two Marys. 10. Goethe's works are
instructive.
1. Prussian + ber ^reufe. American + ber Slmerifa'ner, President +
ber ^rcijibe'nt (62, 3). 2. Many (see Ex. III., 4). Englishman + ber
Snglanber. To wander + njanbern, tt)anberte, gewanbcrt. Through + burc^ (w.
ace). Switzerland + bie (Scfiweij (see 147, 2). 3. Student (see Ex. VI., 2).
C (see Ex. VI., 3). Song, ba^ IHeb. On, auf (here w. dat.). Rhine +
I. Series.] GERMAN" EXERCISES 1^ GRAMMAR. 13
ber fH^dn — (^Tn bent 9f?^ettt would mean on the bank of the Rh.). 4. Alsace
+ ba^ (£lfa^. To helong to, ge^oren ju (w. dat.) ; used to belong, here to be
rendered by tbe (present) perfect of ge^oreit* France + i^ranfreic^* 5.
Palace + ber ^oXcL'\t* Emperor, ber ^aifer* Charles + Raxh To stand +
fle^en, jlanb, gej^anben* Aix-la-Chapelle + 5lad)en. 6. Oeneral + ber ®enera'L
Of the great Frederic (see 65, 3, last example). Hero (see Ex. VI., 9).
7. Anna + ^nna* Sister + WB6^xoi^tx. To leave, i)erlaffen, ijerlieg, ijerlaffcn.
England + (£nglanb, 8. Fichtel-mountains, ^o,^ i^tc^telgeMrge* I^o c<???er,
kbec!en, Bebeifte, bebecft. With, mit (w. dat.). Snow + ber 8d)nee* 9. Pupil,
ber ©(fitter (46, 1). To read (see Ex. V., 4). Of ijon (w. dat.). Two + itotu
Mary + 3)Zari'e» 10. TF'(?7'/fc + ba^ Serf, str. II. Instructive, bek^renb
(originally tlie pres. part, of Bele^rettf to instruct, see 274, 6).
Remark.— In the following pages, any new nouns that are given will be followed
by the terminations of the genitive singular and of the nominative plural^ if there is
any ; if the vowel is modified it will be indicated thus, -.
The other cases may then be found as follows :
1. Singular : Dative = nominative, but 1) when the genitive ends in e§, the e is usu-
ally retained in the dat, ; 2) when the gen. ends in en, the same ending is found in the
dative.
Accusative = nominative, but when the genitive ends in en, the same ending is
found in the accusative. The words under 46, 4, end in en in the dative and accusa-
tive.
Rule : Feminine nouns do not vary in the singular.
2. Plural : Genitive and accusative = nominative ; the dative always ends in n.
Exercise IX.
69, 70, (71), 72.
1. Good men are loved. 2. Dear friend ! write me often.
3. Cold water is wholesome. 4. The young poet has made a
very fine poem. 5. I shall never forget the wise words of my
dear mother. 6. William has written his little letter with a
poor pencil. 7. A red cherry is a nice fruit. 8. In the cities
on the Rhine [there] live many pretty girls. 9. The good old
man has lost his only son. 10. The late president Lincoln
was a noble man.
1. Man (see Ex. VI., 10). To love + Ilekn (see 116). 2. Bear + teuer,
lieb. Friend -hhix %xmn\>, e^, e. Write, fc^rcibcn, str. v. (122, 2). Me + mtr
14 GEIlMA]!f EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. [I. Series.
(dat. of id)). Often + oft. 3. Gold + fait. Water + ba^ 2Baffer, ^, -
Wholesome y gefunb. 4. To^mg + iung. P<?6^ (see Ex. VI., 2). To make
+ mac^en, wk. v. Very fine, ^errli^. Poem, bai3 ®ebic^t, e^, e. 5. Never
+ nie. i^^^r^^e^ + ^ergeffeit, i^erga^, ^ergeffen. Wise + tceife. TFbr^Z + ba^ Sort,
e^, e. 6. William + SBil^elm. JKs, fetn (declined like ein). Little, flein.
Letter, ber 33rief, e^, e. With, mit (w. dat.). P^c>r =bad, fc^Ied)t. Pencil (see
Ex. v., 9). Bear in mind 350. 7. Red + rot. Cherry + bie ^trl'd)c.
7iwj«, ^v&\^* Fruit + bie ^5ru(^t, -, -c. 8. City, bie ©tabt, -, -e. On + an,
here w. dat. To live + leben^ wk. v. Pretty, Mbfd^, fc^on. Oirl, ba^ 9)?db^
(^en, ^, -. 9. O^cZ + alt. Note that two or more adjectives, limiting
one noun, follow the same declension. To lose + 'OixXmiU, str. v. (124, 2).
HiSy [ein (declined like ein). Only, adj., + einjig. Son + ber (Sot)n, e^, -e.
10. Late = deceased, sjcrjlorkn. President (see Ex. VIII., 1). Nohle,
ebel.
Exercise X.
73, (74), 75—108, 1.— 222 {five lines).
1. Henry is younger than Edward. 2. I have bidden the
elder brother go. 3. The well has the clearest water. 4. He
has sent for the finest dress. 5. We have never had (a) greater
fun. 6. The flower is lovely. 7. This tree is the highest. 8.
Is the doctor richer than the merchant ? 9. I have heard it
said. 10. The straight way is the shortest. 11. Mary has the
sweetest voice of the three sisters. 12. We shall come next
week.
1. Henry ■¥ ^tm'x^* Young -{- lyxno^^ Than,aU* Edward + (Ehmxh. 2.
To bid, ^ei^en, ^ie§, ge^ei^en. G^^^ + ge^en, gieng, gegangen. O^^ + alt. 3. Well,
n. (see Ex. II. , 5). Clear + Har. Water + ba^ SBaffer, ^, -. 4. To send
for =let {or cause to) come, !ommen laffen. Fine, fc^on. Dress, n., ba^ ^leib,
e^, er. 5. Never + nie. Had {p. p.),9e^aM. Great + grop. Fun, ber 8pa§,
e^, ©paffe. 6. Flower, bie 33Iume, -, n. Lovely, aGerliebfl. 7. Tree (see Ex.
IV., 3). High + ^o^. 8. i)oc^<?7'(see Ex. VII., 3). i?^c^ + rei(^. Merchant,
ber ^aufmann. 9. See 290, 3, b, and 108, 1. 10. Straight, gerabe. Way
+ ber 2Beg, e^, e. Short + (?)!urj. 11. Sweet + fii§. Voice, bie ©timme,
-, em Of, ijon (w. dat.). Three + brei (see 226, first line). Sister + bie
ed^mefler, -, n. 12. Next + nad^j^. TTeeA; + bie Sod^e, -, n.
I.SBRIBS.] GERMAN EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. 16
Exercise XI.
76, 1, 2— (134)— 135, 1.
1. Thou knowest more than I. 2. To-day is better than to-
morrow. 3. (The) most people are poor. 4. Nobody knew
it. 5. The man at the left provoked him. 6. To-morrow [I
will write] more. 7. The inner circle is smaller than the
outer [one]. 8. The middle position is the safest. 9. The
poor [man] has fewer cares than the rich [man]. 10. He was
seen no more.
1. To know, n)t|Ten (135, 1). 2, To-day + ^eute. To-morrow + mo r gen.
3. People = men + 9J?enf(^en, £eute. Poor, arm. 4. Nohody, nicmanb. It +
e^. 5. Render: The left man; left, Itn!. To prowke, here ^c^en. wk. v.
Him, i()n. 7. Inner -{-xrmix^ Gircle, ber ^xti^, t^, e. Bmall^ flein. Outer
+ du^er. 8. Middle + mtttler. Position, bie ©tcttutt^f -, ctt. xSia/^, jtc^er. 9.
See 220, first two lines. Fewer, njeniger (see 263, first four lines). Care,
tie ^orfte, -; n. 10. No more, nic^t me^r. To see + fel^eu/ fa^, gefe^en.
Exercise XII.
77, 78—136, 2, 3.
1. Canst thou count in German ? 2. I can count from one
to one hundred. 3. You may take three apples. 4. How
many millions has Rothschild ? 5. I do not know (it). 6.
We write now eighteen hundred eighty-four. 7. There (=it)
was one who took it to heart. 8. You can choose one of two
things. 9. The boy knows the multiplication-table. 10.
Thirty times twenty is six hundred.
1. To count, i^ci^len, wk. v. In Oerman, auf !^cutf(^. 2. From — to,
ijon — Bid. 3. Render may by biirfen or !onnctt. To take, ne'^mcn, m\)m,
genommen. Apple -i- ber 5lpfcl, ^, -. 4. How many, xok »tel, »telc (see
263, first four lines). Million + bie S^ittio'n, -, n. 5. To know, wiffen
(136, 1). It, ed (see Ex. III., 3). 6. To write, fd^reiben, \^x\il, gefi^rieBem
16 GERMAN EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. [I. Series.
Now, \t%i. 7. Render : who took it to heart, by to whom it went to the heart
(see 78). "'S tt)ar = e^ n)ar. 8. To choose, n^ci^kn, wk. v. One of two
things (see 78). 9. Boy, ber ^na^e, % n. To know, in the sense of to have
mastered = Unmn* Multiplication-table, ha^ Sinmalein^. 10. Times (de-
noting repetition), mal (175).
Exercise XIII.
80, 81, 82 {first hvo lines)— 1S5, 4, 5.
1. He may be the fourth. 2. YoU' shall have the twentieth
part of the whole sum. 3. They shall not tease you. 4. The
banker sent us one thousand dollars. 5. She cannot see thee.
6. Thou canst not see her. 7. Charles may be in his twenty-
fifth year. 8. We are not permitted to speak with them. 9.
Give him the pencil. 10. You can give me the first piece.
1. May + niagr 3d sing, of mogeu. 2. Party ber %dl, t^, e. Whole, gattj.
Sum + bie (Bumme, -, n. 3. To tease, qucilen. You, 8te, cuc^. 4. Banker
+ ber 33anfter (pronounce ier = Eng. ia). To send + fenbeti (119, 1).
Dollar + ber ^oKa'r, plur. -^ (silent). 5. To see + fe^en^ fa:^, gefe^cn. 6.
In this sentence, and the preceding one, place nid)t after the pronouns.
7. Charles + ^arL In his, render in the by in bem, or im (154). 8. 2o
be permitted, biirfen. To speak + fprec^en^ fprac^, gefproc^en. With, mit (w.
dat.). 9. To give + geben ; imperative, gie^, geku Sie, ge^t. Pencil (see
Ex. v., 9). 10. Piece, ta^ <BtM, t^, e.
Exercise XIV,
83 to 86—135, 6, 7—138.
1. lam ^lad to see you. 2. He is afraid of ghosts. 3. The
brothers and sisters love one another. 4. We will not quarrel.
5. You must not be surprised. 6. The student must not be
afraid of work. 7. Give me my shawl. 8. I have given it to
thy niece. 9. Your house is new; mine is old. 10. His
I. Series.] GEEMAK EXERCISES 12^ GRAMMAR. 17
father and mine are cousins. 11. I have seen it with my own
eyes. 12. She has lost her money.
1. To he glad = rejoice, ftc^ freuctt* 2. To be afraid of, flc^ fur(|ten ijor
(w. dat.). Ghost (see Ex. V., 2). 3. Brothers and sisters, bie ®ef(^tvtjler.
One another + einanber (preceded by the reciprocal pronoun ; here ft(^)» 4.
To quarrely \\^ j^anfen (wk. v.). The reflexive pronoun, in this case, is, of
course, Htt^. 5. To be surprised, fi(| n)itnbern (wk. v.). Bear in mind that
the reflexive pronoun must correspond with the subject ; thus, we may
use in this sentence : ©u — bid), or <Sie — ftc^, or i^r — eu(^. 6. Student
(see Ex. VI., 2). To be afraid of fid) fi^euen ^or (w. dat.), ft^ fiirc^ten ijor
(w. dat.). Work, bie Arbeit, -, en. 7. Shawl, bae Stu^, c^, -er. 8. It, here,
of course, e^, since S^uc^ is neuter. Niece + bie SSlx&^it, -, n. 9. New +
neu. Mine, here + ba^ meintge, since ^au^ is neuter. Old + alt* 10.
Cousin (see Ex. VII., 7). 11. Own, adj., + eigen (dat. plur. eigenen). Eye
(Ex. VII., 1). 12. To lose (see Ex. VII., 2). Mmey, \iOi^ ®elb, e^, ex.
Exercise XV.
88, 90, 91—136, 1, 2, 3.
1. This astronomer is ^ery famous. 2. 1 cannot walk in
these shoes. 3. Are you going this way or that way ? 4.
The roDf of this house is steeper than that of the church. 5.
My uncle lives in that city. 6. Those trees stand before his
door. 7. What is your friend doing? 8. Such beautiful
flowers are rare. 9. I cannot forget such an insult. 10. My
sister and I are using the same inkstand.
1. Astronomer (see Ex. VI., 7). Very, fe:^r. Famous, I6crfi^mt. 2.
To walk, go, ge^en* In, here w. dat. Shoe + ber (Sd)u:^, e^, c. 3.
Way + ber Seg, c^, e. This (that) way, ace. 4 Roof ba*^ Dac^, e^, -er.
Steep, fleil. Church + bie ^ird^e, -, n. 5. Uncle + ber Dnfel, d, -. To
live = reside, njo^nen (wk. v.). City, bie ©tabt, -, -e. 6. Tree, ber 93aum,
e^, -e. Before, i)or, here w. dat. Boor + bie %1)m, -, en* 7. What ? +
SSa^ ? 8. Flower, bie SBIume, -, n. Rare, felten. 9. Insult, bie 33eleibigung»
-, en. 10. Sister + bie <B^)XOi^tx, -, n. To use, gebrauc^en (wk. v.). Injc-
stand, ba^ 2;intenfap, -foffeig, -faffcr*
18 GEEMAN^ EXEECISES IK GRAMMAR. [I. Series.
Exercise XVI.
92, 93—137—341, 344 {first four lines),
L Who is this boy ? 2. Whose pen is this ? 3. To whom
shall I give the jlowers ? 4. What a tumult along the streets !
5. What mountains, what deserts do still separate us ? 6. The
letter which I have copied is very short. 7. Whoever does
not understand a language cannot speak it. 8. Nobody has
ever conquered without fighting. 9. We will write down all
the words which you have learned. 10. Send him to prison,
no matter what he says.
1. Boy, ber ^nabe, w, n. 2. Pen, bie %i^tx, -, n. 3. Shall + foU. To
give + gebcn, str. v. 4. Tumult + ha^ ©etiimmel, ^, -. Along the streets,
(Stra^ett auf (poet.) ; bie — ^inauf or entlang (prose). 5. Mountain, ber S3erg,
e^, e. Desert, bie 2Bit|le, -, n. To separate, trennettr wk. v. Still, nod^. 6.
Letter, ber 33riefr e^, e. To copy, abfc^reiben (see Ex. XII., 6). Very, fe^r.
Short -{-lux^. 7. Whoever, mx. To understand, 'otx^t^tn {137,136, 2). It,
here fte, since (Sprad^e is feminine. To speak + fpred^en, fprac^, gefpro(^en.
8. Nobody, fetner. Ever, \t, nod^. To conquer, fiegen, wk. v. Without
fighting, render : that has not fought. To fight, jlreiten, flritt, gejlritten (see
93, 1). 9. To write down, auffd^reikn (see 137). Word + bas^ 2Bort, e^, -er
(see 58), To learn + lemen, wk. v. 10. To send (see 119, 1). Prison,
\>a^ ©efdngniff \\t^, ffe. To, here \xC^ (contracted from in ba^). No matter,
etc. (see 93, 4).
Exercise XVII.
94 to 100.
1. The one is going, the other is coming. 2. Some ladies
are dancing in the other room. 3. Nobody is born (as) a
master. 4. Everybody ought to know what is best for him.
5. Have you seen anybody in the garden ? 6. People say that
you are studying too much. 7. They do not believe him. 8.
It is better to do something than nothing at all. 9. Thou
1. SiSBiEs.] GEKMAiq" EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. 19
must have a little patience. 10. There were many stones and
little bread. 11. All Germany lay in shame and woe. 12.
The whole of Germany shall be our fatherland.
1. See Ex. II., 3. 2. Lady, tie ^ame, -, n. To dance + tanjett, wk. v.
Room, ba^ Btmmer, ^, -. 3. To he horn + geboren t»erben (see 95). 4.
Ought to TcnoWy foUte njiffen. For + fur (w. ace). Best + am beften. 5.
Anyhody, iemanb. Garden + ber ©arten, ^, -. 6. People say = one says,
man fagt. T7iat, conj., ba^ (bear in n)ind 344). To study + jlubi'eren,
wk. V. (see 108, 4). 7. They = one, man (see 98). 8. Somethingy etroas^*
Nothing at all, gar nic^t<3. 9. Patience, bie ©ebulb. 10. There were, t^
gab, or, in the inverted order, gab i^f and with elision, gab''<3 (see 100).
Stone + ber <Stetn, e^, e. Bread + \)0.^ S3 rot, e^, c or -c» 11. To lie, lay,
lain, + Ucgen, lag, gelegen. Germany, 2)eutf(^lanb. Shame, bie (3(^ma(^.
TF<?e, ber ©c^merj (see 100 and 63, 1). 12. The whole ofG. = all Germany
(see 100). Fatherland + ba^ SJaterlanb.
Exercise XVIII.
Remark. — The following three Exercises are intended to make the student ac-
quainted with the various changes of the strong verbs, as presented in paragraphs
120-133 of the Grammar. The mastery of these verbs will be most easily and con-
veniently obtained in connection with the reading and future grammar lessons.
The figures accompanying the verbs refer to the classes and divisions in the Gram-
mar, pp. 38-4:5.
120 to 123 — The nouns occurring in this exercise will he
found hy turning hach to Ex. 1-5.
1. The dog has bitten (I., 1) my brother. 2. We suffered
(I., 1) much while we were not under shelter. 3. The king
rode (I., 1) through the city. 4. (The) Night will yield (I., 1)
to (the) day. 5. The villain stole into the daughter's roomc
6. The eagle has torn the mouse. 7. Our guests have fought,
bravely. 8. The maid is cutting (L, 1) the fruit. 9. The
youth threw (I., 1) the salmon into the water. 10. The man
screamed (I., 2) like a child.
3. Whi^e, wci^renb (conj., requires the verb to stand at tlie end of the
sentence [344]). 3. Through + burc^ (w. ace). 5. To steal — sneak,
20 GERMA:Nr EXERCISES IX GRAMMAR. [I. Series.
fd^leid^en (I., 1). 6. To tear (to pieces), serreipen, jern§, s^erriffcn (I., 1). 7.
To fight = strive, ftreiten (I., 1). 9. Into, in (here w. ace). 10. Child, iia^
^xnt, e^, er.
Exercise XIX.
124 to 128 — For the nouns in this exercise see Ex, 1-10.
1. The leaves are sprouting (II., 1) on the trees. 2. The
Ehine was flowing (II., 1)" gently. 3. Charles has jumped
(III., 1) into the cold water. 4. The scholars found (III., 1)
this mineral in the Fichtel-moun tains. 5. Your general has
won (III., 2) the battle. 6. Who will help (III, 3) me ? 7.
Eecommend (IV.) me to the doctor, 8. Do not speak (IV.)
so loud. 9. The cows have eaten (V., 1) the flowers. 10.
The king was sitting (V., 2) on the throne.
1. Oti, auf (w. dat.). 2. Gently, xvi):)XQ,, 3. ©pringen, ^o ji^m^^, takes fein
for its auxiliary (266, 1). 5. Battle, bie ©c^lad^t, -, en. 6. -^elfen + to
help, governs the dative. 8. Loud + laut. /S? + fo.
Exercise XX.
129 to 133 — For the nouns in this exercise see Ex, 1-15.
1. My niece has driven (VI.) home. 2. They have not in-
vited (VI.) us. 3. The student caught (VII.,'l) a fish. 4.
Will you hold (VIL, 1) my shawl ? 5. Why did the people
run (VII., 2) out of the church ? 6. Your teacher has called
(VII., 2) you. 7. The smith lifted (VIII.) the anvil with one
hand. 8. The snow melts (§ 133) in the sun. 9. Has the
maid milked (§ 133) the cows? 10. The peasants have
thrashed (VIII.) the grain.
1. To drvoe = ride in a carriage, fa^ren (VI.). Home, m^ |)aufe, 4- ^e:m.
2. To invite, ctnlaben, lub ein, eingelaben (VI.). 3. Fish, n., + ber ^tfd^, e^, e.
5. People, ^te s^enfc^en. Out of, avi^, w. dat. 6. Teacher, ber ^i^xzx, ^, -.
Q. S'l.ow ^ ber <S(|nee, ^» Bun ^- bie (Sonne^
SECOND SERIES.
Exercise I.
Remark.— In the Exercises of the Second Series frequent reference is made to Ger-
man illustrations in the Grammar, which may serve the student as an aid in translat-
ing the English sentences into German. In such cases the paragraph containing such
German illustrations is given in ( ), at the end of the sentence, or referred to in the
foot-notes.
Words not explained in the foot-notes will be found in the Vocabulary, at the end
of the volume.
Syntax of the Article— IZ^, 141 to 146.
1. Humboldt and Goethe lived to an advanced age, but
Schiller died comparatively young (141). 2. Gold is more
precious than silver (141). 3. Will you give me a pound of
tea ? 4. The thread of thought is broken (142). 5. The
mixed throng of the ancient gods has vanished (142). 6.
Students often lead a jolly life. 7. I am ah^ady losing reason
and sense (143). 8. Xo earthly meat or drink suffices the
fool (143). 9. You may write with a style, chisel, or quill
(143). 10. We saw the great-grandmother, grandmother,
mother, and child together in the close room (143). 11.
AVhat is ^that for ? (267, 5). 12. Of what use is all joy and
sorrow! (144), 13. What a busy company you are! (144).
14. Of what nationality is he? (144). 15. Philoktetes, who
is all nature, leads Keoptolemus also back to nature (145).
16. Faust was called Magister, yea. Doctor (145).
1. Render limd to by erre^eit/ fol. by ace, to attain, + reach. Ad-
vanced, here ^oc^; see 71. last line. 3 and 4. For the construction, see
22 GERMAN EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. [II. Series.
350. 5. Mixed, here bunt. 6. To lead a jolly life, in (Bau^ unh SBrau^
libtn. 7. See Series I., Ex. II., 3. 8. Translate : Not earthly is the
fool's meat or drink. 9. May, use fonnen/ 135, 3. 10. In, in, here w.
dat. 11. Use the verb foUen ; see 267, 5. 12. Translate : of what use is,
by »a^ fott, etc. 13. What a, weldb ein. 14. Render: of what nationality,
by n)a^ fiir ein £anb(3mann. 15. For the word-order, see 344. Lead, here
bringen (119, 2). 16. To he called, ^eipen, str. VIL, 2. SSJlagi'jler, !Do'ctor,
the same as in English.
Exercise II.
Syntax of the Article continued — 147 to 150—110, 115.
1. The Guelfs lost the throne of Hanover. 2. The bust
of Schiller is more beautiful than the bust of Socrates. 3. If
you had been to Henry, what Henry was to you, you would
now be the best [of] friends (147, 1). 4. He allows himself
to be called Wallenstein (147, 1 ; 201). 5. This evening
they play Minna von Barnhelm ; Mr. S. plays [the part of]
Tellheim. 6. The [statue of] Hercules is damaged (147, 1).
7. Moldavia and Wallachia are the Danubian Principalities.
8. The source of the Danube is in the Black-Forest. -9.
^'Winter is a man of honor" (147, 4). 10. In January we
move into Kaiser-street (147, 4). 11. " My tears gush forth ;
the earth takes back her child" (148). 12. Even the Mame-
luke exhibits courage ; but obedience is the ornament of the
Christian (149). 13. The message I hear, but faith is want-
ing (me) (149). 14. Blood has been shed. 15. Let [them]
reach me a cup of the best wine in [a vessel of] pure gold
(150).
1. Q-uelf, pi. Guelfs (a princely family), ber SBelf, en, en. Hanover,
^anno'^er. 2. The gen. of (Sc^iUer is (Sd)iIIer$, used without the article ;
while ©cerate^, which has the gen. like the nom., should be preceded by
the article (see 147, 1, fourth line). 3. To Henry is here best translated
by bcm ^cinric^r as|)einric^, without the article, would be ambiguous (147. 1).
II. Series.] GERMAK EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. 23
4. Allows, translate by lajTen, str. VII., 1. To be called, see 290, 3, b.
5. This evening, use the ace. They, here man; see 341, 2, and 343, d.
M. V. B., title of a comedy by Leasing. 8. To be, here jtc^ kfinben, str.
III., 1. 10. Move^ when meaning to change one's residence, is jte^en, str.
II., 2; see 341, 2, and 343, d. 11. From B. Taylor's translation of
Faust. Say : The tear gushes forth, the eoHh has me again. 13. To be
wanting, fe^len, with dat. of person. 14. Has been shed = has flowed.
Exercise III.
Syntax of the Article continued — 151 to 158.
1. Why are the people running through the streets? (151).
2. The cavalry had reached the river, but the infantry was
far behind (151). 3. "The little god o' the world sticks to
the same old way" (152). 4. The God who made the iron
grow created no slaves (152). 5. Their language was full of
noble sentiments. 6. There were better times. 7. Old Bar-
barossa keeps himself concealed in the mountain. 8. The
cheeks of the marble [statue] are cold (153). 9. His head
aches (154). 10. They have taken my coat. 11. She gently
touched his shoulder (154). 12. Eggs cost one mark a dozen
(156). 13. We see each other four times a year (156). 14.
You have been the teacher and friend of my son. 15. The
uncle and the god-father of the child were [present] at the
baptism (158).
2. Far behind, njeit ba^inten. 3. Sticks, etc.. = remains ever of the
same kind. Same, gleic^. 4. Render made by (iejj (from lajTen). For the
order, see 341, 3, and 344. 5. Full of + »olI, followed by gen. (182).
6. Tliere was, there were, ed gab, followed by ace. (236, 4). 7. Barba-
rossa + SRotbart, surname of Emperor Frederic I. (1152-1190). Himself,
jt(^. Concealed, ijerborgen. Sn, here w. dat. 9. Render : the head aches
to him. 11. Similar to the preceding sentence. 15. At, bet, w. dat.
24 GERMAIN EXERCISES 12^ GRAMMAR. [U. Series.
Exercise IV.
Syntax of the Gender— 159 to 163.
Remaek.— The gender of nouns has to be learned mainly by practice, and the stu-
dent should therefore endeavor to learn with each German noun the article (ber, t>ie, or
ta5) belonging to it. The rules in the Grammar (169, fF.)i however, will be of great
service ; some in a practical way ie,g., 159, 161, 3, 164), and others, because they
will help the student in getting an insight into the "genius of the language."
Wherever a large number of examples are given, as in these paragraphs, it will
hardly repay the beginner to learn the meanings of all of them ; the nouns under 160
might be mentioned, with their meanings, by the teacher, letting the pupil state the
gender ; while the gender of those under 161 may be determined by their form alone,
without reference to their meaning.
1, (The) Queen Louisa was a noble woman. 2. The Danube,
the Oder, the Elbe, the Weser, and the Ehine are the largest
rivers of Germany. 3. Many prefer beautiful Spain to colder
France. 4. The little boy lies in the cradle. 5. Thou art a
heathen. 6. The witches were dancing on the heath. 7. The
workman has placed his earnings in the bank. 8. The merit
of the minister is great. 9. The boy has again lost his knife.
10. Bring me the third volume of Bancroft's history. 11. Is
not this blue ribbon too dark ? 12. The knighfc has a shield,
the merchant a sign-board. 13. What a fool you are ! 14.
In the gate [there] is a small door. 15. The marble of
Carrara is white. 16. "Bands of robbers move about. ^'
3. Prefer, ^te^en — vor (see 137 ; 350). 4. Little lay, \ia^ iTnabletn
(lei, 3). 5. Heathen, see 162, 3 (435, 3), where also some of the nouns
in the following sentences are to be found. 7. Placed, here gebrac^t.
Earnings, p. 59. In, here auf, w. ace. 13. What a, see 92, 2, 3. For
word-order, see 3. sentence.
Exercise V.
Syntax of the Gender continued — 164 to 169.
1. Humility and geatleness are Christian virtues ; yet pride
is also found even among Christians. 2. On Wednesday the
city was illuminated. 3. What is your answer? 4. The girl
II. Series.] GERMAK EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. 25
has taken leave ; all trace of her is lost. 5. Hermann has
chosen the exiled maiden (166). 6. The angel said to Mary:
Blessed [art] thou among women (166). 7. The young lady,
as a guest, was treated with especial esteem. 8. Mary Stuart
said to Elizabeth: I am your hing ; and the Hungarian
nobility exclaimed : We will die for our king, Maria Theresa !
9. They step forward, a lady here, a gentleman there ; they
wish to dance. 10. All are running, saving, rescuing (168).
11. '^Then may delight and distress, and worry and success,
alternately follow, as best they can.'' 12. He spoke while
leaving the room. 13. The bishop was preaching ; all list-
ened in silence, each returning to his own thoughts. 14.
The fair one descended from her stately castle. 1 5, Bismarck
has accomplished great things for Germany.
1. Is also found, translate : one finds also, using the inverted order
(after bennod)). Among, here I)ei. 2. On Wednesday, am SiJiittJDod^* The
adverbial phrase introducing the sentence, the inverted order is required
(343, d) 4. AU trace of her, translate : her trace. 6. Blessed, gekne^
beiet; the k-, in the obsolete verb benebeien, to Uess, is of course no prefix,
but the first syllable of the Latin 5e?ie (benedicere) ; hence the prefix
ge- in the p. p. (see 168). 7. Touiig lady, ba^ junge 2Kabd)en (see 167).
8. Mary, as a historical name, 9)Zari'a; in other cases usually SJJari'e.
9. 8tep forward may be rendered by ^crijorfommen (see 168 ; 137).
11. B. T.'s version of F., 1756-8 (see 168). To follow alternately, ntU ein^
anber wec^feln (lit. to exchange with each other). 12. While leaving=wh.i\e
(tnbem) he left. Bear in mind that inbent introduces a dependent clause
(341, 3, and 344). 12 and 13. See 168, last sentence. In silence, fttIl-=
fd^tvetgenb. Uac7i returning = while each returned. To his own thoughts
= into himself. 14. The words ^olbe ©(^one (gracious fair one) in 169
are perhaps best rendered hj fair one alone. 15. Great things, ®roge^
(169).
Exercise VI.
Syntax of Singular and Plural — 170 to 177.
1. We are reading the history of Germany under the
Henrys and Ottos. 2. Will your grace be present at the
26 GERMAIN EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. [n. Series.
representation of " Wallenstein ^' ? 3. Most of the gentry
were in the country. 4. Here is a list of the conflagrations
and deaths during the week. 5. We have our vacation about
Easter. 6. Nearly three hundred thousand men were besieg-
ing tbe city .(175). 7. His father is bent with old age ; he
is over ninety years old. 8. Germany lies between the forty-
seventh and fifty-fifth degrees, north latitude. 9. The third
and fourth verses are usually omitted. 10. Why do these
pupils hold their hands before their mouths? 11. Three
hundred miners have lost their lives. 12. All raised their
hands.
1. Under + wnter, here w. dat. ©te |)etnrt(^e, Me Dttonen. 2. Your
grace, (Euer ®naben, usually abbreviated into (Sw. ®naben. To he 'present
at, beiwo^nen (sep. comp.), w. dat. In regard to tbe number of the verb,
see 311, 2. 3. In the country, auf bem I' ante (as opposed to in the city).
7. Bent with old age, ijor '^Iter o^iHdi (175, 353). 8. Between, jn)ifc|en,
here w. dat. (see 177). 9. See 177. Are omitted, translate are not sung
(njerben, etc.). 10. Do — hold = hold (see I. Series, Ex. II.. 3). See
177, 343, a.
Exercise VII.
Syntax of the Cases, Nominative— -11%, 179, 270.
1. The ages of the past are to us a book [closed] with seven
seals. 2. To stroll with you, (Sir) Doctor, is honor and profit
[uuto me]. 3. The decrees of Heaven are the best for man.
4. Henry will become [a] soldier. 5. Everybody imagines
himself to be a wise man ; but this fancy does not make one
wise. 6. I come as [a] messenger of the court. 7. Which
prince is called the '' silent" ? And which the ** conqueror" ?
8. He is looked upon as a good-for-nothing fellow. 9. I dare
not call myself a favorite of Fortune. 10. It is better to be
called a thief than to be one.
1 and 2. See 178. 3-6. See 179, 1. 3. For man, fiir ben 3)?enf{i^cn.
4. / shall become, \^ tuerbe tverben. IwiU become, t(^ will wcrben. 5. Wise
11. SERras.] GERMAN EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. 27
marly to be rendered by the adjective used substantively. Translate : does
not make one wise = makes not the wise [man] (162, 3). 7. I7ie " silent"
ber ©(^ttjeiger (see 179, 2). 9 and 10. To call, in a bad sense, may be ren-
dered by fc^elten, str. III., 3. To be one, einer ju fein.
Exercise VIII.
Syntax of the Cases continued, Genitive — 180 to 183.
1. The love of God surpasses all understanding. 2. The
poets speak frequently of the invisible hand of Fate. 3.
Leasing admired the taste of the ancient artists. 4. You are
a dead man ! 5. Humboldt found that a certain height of
the water was of the same age as certain rude monuments of
human industry. 6. The maiden offered them the best of all
gifts, the most beautiful of all flowers. 7. Five [members] of
the order had fallen the victims of their teraerity. 8. Three
Prussians fought their way through a hundred of the enemy.
9. I will show you something beautiful. 10. Does not this
forged paper show that they wish to pledge us to no good
[purpose] ? 11. Are you not tired of the long quarrel ? 12.
The dead are freed from their bodies. 13. Our horses are
impatient for the stable.
1. Surpasses, \\t l^o^er al^ (or benn). 2. Of, ijott; w. dat. Fate + baa
%aium (180, 4). 3. The use of the possessive pronoun, as in the last
sentence, 180, 4, is not to be imitated. 4. A dead man, in this phrase,
bee 2;obea (180,5). 5. Height of the water, htx SBalTerjlanb (see 180, 5).
The same, here ein* 6. Offer, here barMeten, str. II., 2 (see 180, 7). 8.
Fight one's way through, jt(^ bur(^fd)lac;en/ sep. , str. VI. Enemy, use the
plural. 9. Something beautiful, see 181, (230). 10. See p. 66, second
line. .^^0 good (purpose), ni^t^ ©ute^. 11-13. See 181 and 183.
Exercise IX,
Syntax of the Cases ; Genitive continued — 184 to 188.
1. Not all those who scoff at their chains are free. 2.
Eelease me from a proof of my nobility. 3. In 1848 many
28 GERMAN EXERCISES IK GRAMMAR. [H. Series.
Germans were exiled. 4. One cannot always banish gloomy
thoughts. 5. The shepherd pitied the old nobleman. 6. '' A
righteous man regardeth the life of his beast." 7. Early in
the morning the birds sing the most sweetly. 8. In the after-
noon we usually go out for a walk. 9. '^ Oh the Frenchman/'
exclaims Lessing, ^^who had no understanding to consider
this, and no heart to feel this!" 10. Oh the unfortunate
prisoner, to whom it is not granted to breathe the fresh air !
2. Belease from, entlajTen, w. gen. (str. VIL, 1). Proof of nobility, bie
5l^nenprok. 3. In I84S (see 226, 1). 4. Banish, here jtd^ entfc^Iagen, w.
gen. (str. VI. ; see 185). 5. Nobleman, ber ©belmanttf or (poetically) ber
^o'^e ^err (see 186;. 6. ''Regardeth the life of" = pities, ftd^ erbarmeitr w.
gen. 7. Early in the morning, see 187 (under Time). The most sweetly,
see 300, 2. Sweet, here fd)on. 8. Go out for a i^a^A;, fpajteren ge^en; ic^ gel^e
f»ajteren, etc. (290, 2). 9 and 10. See 188.
Exercise X.
Syntax of the Cases; Dative — 189, 190.
1. Life's unmixed joy has fallen to the share of no mortal.
2. License, exempt from punishment, mocks at morals. 3.
He defends them, instead of accusing them. 4. One can
wrench nothing from Nature with levers and screws. 5.
Faust cursed everything that ensnares the soul with enticing
visions. 6. The governor bore Tell a grudge. 7. Shall we
yield to this impulse ? 8. The images of the night receded
before the dawning day. 9. Do not defy the king's com-
mands. 10. Take care whom you trust ! 11. The minister
gives place to the prince. 12. The mother watched the play
of her children.
1. Compare with these sentences the German examples under 190,
p. 69 (see also 350). Exempt from punishment, jlraflo^. 5. Enticing
visions (B. T.), Sod^ unb ©aufelmer!. 6 To hear a grudge, groUen, w. dat.
II. Series.] GEEMAN EXERCISES IK GRAMMAR. 29
10. Proverb : Zxam, fd^aue mm* (The verbs are in the imperative :
Trust, (but) look whom (you trust). 11. Give place to, m<^^i^n, str. VI.,
w. dat.
Exercise XI.
Syntax of the Cases ; Dative continued — 191 to 197 — Accusa-
tive—!^^ to 202.
1. Hide from me the surging crowd. 2. Nobody should
forfeit the right which Nature has given him. 3. The Turks
have their swords set with diamonds. 4. It was hard for the
emperor in hot and in cold weather. 5. Fortune favored their
wishes in the beginning. 6. The black suit is not becoming
to him. 7. Will you pay me now ? 8. I have paid the money
to your father. 9. How often do we imagine life [to be] other
than it is! 10. "You see a man, as others be" (198). 11.
Teach me to do what is right. 12. You must send for the
physician. 13. He will give you the lie. 14. I feel as though
I were born an avenger of my kinsman. 15. The ridicule of
the foreigners grieves me to the very heart.
2. Should, pret. of foUen, 135, 5. GweUy here ttergonnt. 3. Sword, ber
<Sabel, ^, - ; the plural ^BdhtU, which occurs in Lessing, is colloquial and
incorrect (60). The ethical dative, bit, in this example (192), has very
much the force of the English I tell you, 4. It is hard for, e^ tDirb fauer,
w. dat. In, here bet. 5. In the heginning, anfang^. 6. Becoming, pafTenb
(see 195). 7 and 8. See 196. 9. Imagine, benfen (see 197). Other,
translate by the adv. anber^. 13. To give the lie, iGugen jlrafen. 14. Born
+ geborcn (see 127). Translate : I feel myself born as the a. of my k.
15. To the very heart, in tiefffer <Seele.
Exercise XII.
Syntax of the Cases ; Accusative continued — 203 to 209.
1. Her jealousy proved stronger than her sympathy. 2.
The Saxons sided with the French. 3. The boy told you a
30 GERMAN EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. [11. Sk
lie on his own account. 4. Your honor and his happiness ar
at stake (207).^ 5. I shall not retreat one step. 6. We saw
a few wanderers travel along this road ; but the main body
marched down the upper valley. 7. The messenger may be
here at any moment. 8. Alexander von Humboldt travelled
for years. 9. The general made [the soldiers] attend prayers
early in the morning. 10. You must leave town this very
night. 11. Mceros, with a dagger concealed under his gar-
ment, stole up to Dionysius, the tyrant. 12. The culprit
knelt upon his cloak, his neck already bared.
1. To prove stronger than^ e^ gewinncn iiber (w. ace). 2. To side with,
e^ fatten mtt (see 236, 6). 3. I'o tell one a lie, ©ittem etwa^ ijorlittjen. On
one's own account, auf eigene ^lec^nung. 5. Not — one, fetn. 6. Travel, when
speaking of a number of persons, may be rendered by jie^en (str. II., 2).
Along this road (see 207, 2. Main body, ber ^aufe. 7. At any moment
— eyevj moment (ace). 8. Travel, here retfen; not, as in 6, jie^en. For
years, ^a^xt lang. 9. Made, here to be translated by laffeit. To attend
prayers, SSetflunbe ^alten. Early, here gleicl (immediately). 10. This very
night, no(^ biefe 5'?ad)t. 11. Moeros = 5)^oro^, a proper name. With a
dagger, etc., use the absolute ace. (see 209). Stole up to, pret. of f(i)lei(|en
(str. I., 1), followed by ju.
Exercise XIII.
Syntax of the Adjective — 210 to 212.
1. The delivery at the post-office of this city takes place
every hour. 2. He has fed us on dainties and cooling froth.
3. Doctor Faust's dog was a very droll animal. 4. The marks-
man fired at random. 5. Three Ehenish feet are somewhat
more than three English feet ; and ten Flemish pounds are
equal to ten kilograms. 6. The Dutch were a good-natured,
orderly, commercial people ; they enjoyed the luxurious fruits
of their hlessed industry and were watchful over the laws,
which were their benefactors. 7. The government of the
II. Series.] GEEMAK EXERCISES li^ GRAMMAR. 31
grand-ducliy of Baden is very liberal. 8. Woe to you, if you
touch his worthy ancestral lumber. 9. They talk nothing
but nonsense.
1. Of this city, to be rendered by the adj. ^teftg* Takes place every
hour = is an hourly one (see 211, 1). 2. Oriy here mit (after na^ren).
3. Very droll, ^ubelncirrifd^; "t)ubel is occasionally used as an intensive"
(Ha.). 5. Rhenish feet, etc (see p. 75, second line). Somewhat more,
etwa^ me§r (see 175). 7. The government of the g.-d. of B. (see 212, 3).
8. Ancestral lumber ; this is B. T.'s translation of ^au^rat, in the sense
of old furniture. 9. Nothing 'but, lauter (indeclinable).
Exercise XIV.
Syntax of the Adjective continued — 213 to 217.
1. One fine day the cage was empty. 2. The Egyptian
pyramids have been called [the] silent keepers of lifeless
treasures. 3. Such an excellent monarch, as (the) Emperor
William, is dear to his people. 4. In the army, there is many
an ofi&cer of great courage and bloody fame. 5. He who never
ate his bread in sorrow does not know you, ye heavenly
powers. 6. I salute you, noble lords, and you, fair ladies !
7. You lazy fellows are now kept on short allowance. 8. Since
the acquisition of the two large houses we have room for one
hundred guests. 9. The count treated us to good white wine.
10. [The] following pretty song is by Heine.
1. One fine day, may be expressed by the adverbial genitive (followed,
of course, by the inverted order). 2. Have been called = one has called,
etc. 3. Su^h, see 91, 3. Bear to his people, M t>em S5olfc Beliebt. 4. ITiere
is, gieM e^ (followed by the ace; see 205, Rem.). Many a + mand^ cin»
Great = high. 5. He who = whoever, 93, 3. In sorrow = with tears.
To know, fennen (119). 6. I salute you = be saluted {hj"] me (dat.). Lord,
tcr ^err, it/ en. And you, fair ladies, repeat the p. p. gegrit^t (= saluted,
you, fair ladies !). 7. To keep on s. a., (Stnem ben 33rotforb '^o^cr ^arigen (see
216, 2, last sentence), lit. to hang the bread-basket higher for any one,
9. To treat to + traftieren mit (w. dat.). 10. By, ijon* Heine, the German
lyric poet.
32 GERMAN EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. [H. Series
Exercise XV.
Syntax of the Adjective continued — 218 to 221.
1. My desire is great, but my power is weak. 2. Your
faith will save you. 3. Who could hate this kind old man?
4. If I am fortunate enough to get possession of them, I shall
send them to you. 5. The soldiers fought hand to hand.
6. Her life was full of sorrows and sickness. 7. People begin
with little things and end with great ones. 8. Korners
Sword-song begins with the words : " Thou sword at my
left [side]." 9. Birds of a feather flock together. 10. She
has spoken English from her childhood. 11. How is this in
French ? 12. High officials have been discharged. 13. The
new servant has an agreeable appearance. 14. He translated
the verse into his beloved German (220).
3. 'Who could . . . , tt)er fonnte . ♦ . Hate = be enemy to, fetnb fetn (w.
dat.). 4. See 219. To get possession of, ^ab^aft tverben (w. gen.), 5. To
fight hand to hand^f^anh^trndn tDerben. 6. Full of, see 219, 1. 7. People,
man (one). Little things, great ones, to be rendered by the adjective-
substantive in the singular (see 220). 9. Birds, etc. = like loves like =
like and like associate gladly (see 220). 10. From childhood, i)on flein an,
9cn Sugenb auf, ijon ^inb auf» 11. In, auf. 12. High — in a high position,
^0(|9e|iellt (see 221, 4).
Exercise XVI.
Syntax of Comparative and Superlative — 222 to 225 — (341
to 345, tlie largest type).
1. When was the theatre the most crowded ? — When Booth
played Richelieu. 2. This fact points to a highly interesting
natural phenomenon. 3. The German word "Fiirst" is
originally a superlative, and, like the English "first/' signifies
the foremost. 4. The noun '^Eltern'^ is a comparative.
n. Semes.] GERMAN EXERCISES IX GRAMMAR. 33
5. We study the modern languages. 6. I am more to blame
than he. 7. The peasant was more stupid than malicious.
8. The larger of these two houses belongs to my parents.
9. The mill is running. 10. If the wind is blowing, the mill
runs. 11. Yesterday the mill was not running, because the
wind did not blow the whole day. 12. If I were not
Alexander, I should like to be Diogenes.
1. When? (interrogative adv.) + tt>ann? When (subord. conj.) = al^.
2. To point to, beuten auf (w. ace). Natural phenomenon, ba^ 9'^atur*'
ereignti3, -\\t^, -ffe. 3. Order : and signifies, like the E. '* first" the foremost.
Like, n)te. 6. To he to blame, f^ulb fein. 8. Use the superlative (225).
Two,u^Q^ix\)i* 9. 7b rwTi, here ge^en. 11. The whole day, ben ganjen 3:ag.
13. I should like to be, t(^ mijc^te fein (but in what order ?).
Exercise XVII.
Syntax of the JVumerals-'22Q to 228— 79— (229, three lines).
1. The testimony of two witnesses always establishes the
truth. 2. Goethe was born on August 28, 1749. 3. What
time is it ? It is a quarter past five. 4. We will meet at a
quarter of six, ten minutes before the train leaves. 5. There
were twelve of them, when they arrived (227). 6. One says
jokingly: Eleven means (the) sin, because it transgresses the
ten commandments. 7. It belongs to [the character of] a
gi-eat man, both to treat trifles as trifles, and important mat-
ters as important matters. 8. Give me eight yards and a half
of this cloth. 9. This package weighs two pounds and a half.
10. The transatlantic cable was laid between 1860 and 1870.
11. My friend is a man about fifty years old. 12. Bring me a
bottle of the wine of the year 1852.
1. Testimony, ber ^m\), ca> (This term occurs in the proverb under
236.) Translate always by the adjective all, with the German equivalent
of truth. To establish, here funb t^un (or mad)en). 3. What time is it f 2Btc
Jotel ijl bic Vi)^x ? 4. Before (subord. conj.), e^e. To leave (of a train, etc.).
34 GEKMAiq- EXERCISES 11^ GRAMMAR. [H. Series.
abfa^ren^ str. VI., sep. 6. Means — is, i)l. 7. Both — and, beibe^, see
228, 1. 8. Eight and a half, see 229 and 175. 9. Two and a half, see
229 and 175. 10. Between 1860 and 1870, in ben \i^mtx Sa^ven. 11. A
man about fifty years old, ein ^iinfjiger. 12. Wine of the year 1852, %^i*
je^n^unbcrtjnjeiunbfunfjiger*
Exercise XVIII.
Remark. — The following Exercises on the pronouns involve mainly what is printed
In the largest type in the Grammar ; whenever other topics are involved, special atten-
tion is called to it in the foot-notes.
Exercises to he written in connection with the paragraphs in smaller type will he
found in the Fourth Series.
Syntax of the Fronou7is— 230, 1, 2, 233, 234, (231).
1. " Spirit sublime, thou gay'st me, gav'st me all for which
I prayed." 2. How old are you, if I may ask? 3. Please,
tell me where you are living at present. 4. I have heard
nothing of him. 5. No greeting to my sweetheart ! I won't
consent to it. 6. When you go to school, be well prepared.
7. What do you think of the matter ? 8. I do not think much
of it. 9. This pen is poor ; I cannot write with it. 10. Do
not open the cage ; there is a bird in it. 11. This is a useful
book ; you can learn a great deal from it. 12. Yonder is his
house ; an oak-tree stands near it.
1. For which, voamm (lit. wherefore). 2. May, barf; use <Bit for the
subject. 3. Translate please by the adverb gefaHtgjl (after the indirect
object itttr); use 'Bit for the subject. 4. While of him is to be translated
literally, by the prep, with the pers. pron., to it, in the following- sen-
tence, of it, with it, etc, in 8, 9, and ff. examples, should be rendered by
ba^on, bamitf etc. (234). 5. No greeting is in the ace, a transitive verb
(such as brtngen) being understood. I won't consent to it = I won't listen
to it, t(^ Witt ba^ott md^tiS ^oren. B. T. has : I'll resent it. 6. When =
whenever + ttJenn (subord. conj.). To, in, w. ace. Be well prepared =
have yourself well prepared ; use i|r for the subject. 7. To think of,
l^atten »on ; use bu for the subject. 8. Of it = thereof. 9. Poor, here
11. Series.] GEKMAi^ EXERCISES 11^ GRAMMAR. 35
f(^le(^t» With it = therewith (of course to be placed before the infinitive ;
350). 10. Do not open — open not. In it = therein. 11. This + bte^r
or ba^. A great deal = much. From it = there — out. 12. ]}iear, bei.
Exercise XIX.
Syntax of the Pronouns continued— 2S5, 236, including the
small type under 4.
1. It had been raining and freezing, so that the roads were
[very] slippery ; but now it is thawing. 2. We had company
yesterday ; there was dancing, singing, and playing. 3. " Now,
whither shall we go ? '' 4. Three students went across the
Ehine. 5. His youthful companion walked briskly at his
side. 6. There are wheels that are made of paper. 7. There
were many ladies who did not dance. 8. " Hey, there we
(they) had Westphalian ham." 9. He is afraid, and he
repents having been so wicked. 10. In this sense, you may
venture it. 11. She thinks you are gone; and half and half
you are so. 12. He wished to be a senator, and now he is one.
1. It had been raining = it had rained. So that, fo ha^* The roads
are slippery may be rendered by the imp. verb e^ glattetjl (see 547, 1, 2).
Notice that the second clause is dependent, and that the order in the
third clause should be inverted, on account of now. 2. There was, etc.,
to be rendered by the passive voice with the imp. subject e^ (236, 2).
3. In place of we use the imp. e^. 4. Students, here 33urf(^e. Went,
translated by jie^en (str. II., 2). Across, iiber, here w. ace. 5. Youthful,
here blit^enb. At his side, i^m jur ©ette. 6. There are, 236, 4. In the
relative clause the verb stands, of course, at the end. 7. Bid not dance,
see 274, 6. (What is said of the Present applies to the Preterite as
vrell.) 8. We (they) had = there was. 9. / am afraid, c^ ijl mir bange.
I repent, e^ reut mid^. Saving been . . . = that he has been ... 11. You
are, use the subjunctive. Gone may be rendered by the p. p. of cntfliel^en»
str. II., 2, to escape. So, see 236, 6. 12, Translate one by e^.
36 GERMAN^ EXERCISES IK GRAMMAR. II. Series.
Exercise XX.
Syntax of the Pronouns continued— 2S7, 238, 239 {including
1 and 2), 240, 241.
1. The humble [person] conquers himself. 2. Humility
does not boast. 3. He is taking liberties. 4. Hermann and
Dorothea nodded to each other and greeted each other in the
mirror of the water. 5. The king and the emperor made war
upon each other. 6. Mine and thine are the causes of all
contention. 7. Did you see your father ? 8. Whither will
your presumption lead you ? 9. Behold the arrogance of the
man whom you have led through your bridal room to the
throne ! 10. You have done your duty; I shall do mine (240).
3. To take liberties = to permit one's self liberties. 5. To make war
upon, ^efe^beit; befriegen^ w. ace. 6. Put the verb in tlie singular (239).
7. Tour father, S^r ^err ®ater (polite). Especial attention is called to the
caution in 239, 2. Sentences 8-10 may each be given in three different
ways, with h\x, ®ie, i^r.
Exercise XXI.
Syntax of the Pronouns continued — 244, 245 {including 1 ),
246-248.
1. [Much] as I yearn to see you, I have a secret horror of
that man. 2. Voltaire's works are written in a skeptical
spirit ; woe to him who does not read them with a skeptical
spirit ! 3. The voice of this young woman is much admired.
4. William and Charles do not agree about the weather ; the
latter desires it dry, the former damp. 5. He urges the
validity of this paper, 6. Is that your neighbor ? 7. Mephis-
topheles said to Faust : That is the way to deal with witches.
8. Who else, but you in Vienna, is to blame for that ? 9. The
[II. Series. GERMAN^ EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. 37
minstrel is silent with regard to that ; politeness compels him
to be so. 10. According to this you are right; but I have an
entirely different reading. 11. Those who have got their
lessons may go to the theatre. 12. She spent the alms with
the same fidelity as before ; the poor enjoyed them.
1. Ofy t)or. (For the attributive adjective, see 212, 1.) 2. Notice that
are written denotes a state or condition, not action ; hence, fein (and not
tt)erben) should be used (273, 1 and 2). 3. Young woman, basJ junge
f^rauenjimmer (see 159, 1). Is admired ; in this case an action is ex-
pressed (= people admire), and not a state or condition ; hence, the
passive voice (werben, not fein) is required. 4. Bo not agree about, jtttb
nic^t berfelkn §{nft(^t iiber (w. ace). 5. To urge the ^oalidity of, geltenb madden
(245). 8. Buty m. For that, see 246. 9. With regard to that = of
that. To he so = to be that. 10. To be right + rec^t ^aktt. 11. Those
who, see 247, Got, Qimad)U Mag, use fonnen* To, in (w. ace).
Exercise XXII.
Syntax of the Pronouns continued — 249 {including 1 and 2),
250 to 253.
1. Nathan was generosity itself. 2. He who digs a pit for
others falls into [it] himself. 3. Even the friends did not
approve of the union, because the young people were too
unequal. 4. Eefl.ection tells me that I am not able to pursue
this course ; benevolent powers ! show me the right way !
5. What do I care in whose forest we are ? 6. Who has
robbed the lioness of her young? 7. What is the meaning of
your speech ? 8. What monstrous deed do you demand from
me ? 9. What kind of paper is that ^ 10. What a beautiful
painting ! 11. See, what beautiful cloth I have bought for
you.
1. Use the article before generosity (149, page 54). 4. Reflection, use
the article. To be able, ijermogen (compound of tnogen, 135, 4). To pursue
a course, einen SScg verfolgen* 5. What do I care, wa^ fiimmert i^ mic^.
38 GERMAN EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. [U. Series.
6. To rob one of something, ©inem et»a^ rauben, or (Sinen einer ®ac^e berauben^
8. Monstrous deed, ba^ Unge^eure* 11. Cloth, here ber ©tojf (e^/ e). i^(?r
yow, eitlier fiir bic^f or the dat. without preposition.
Exercise XXIII.
Syntax of the Pronouns continued — 255, 256 {including ^),
257 to 263.
1. A person who puts on rouge is disgusting to me (255).
2. He who will not listen [to advice] must suffer. 3. A
splendid word is at [your] command for what enters, or does
not enter, the human brain. 4. You must earn [anew] what
you have inherited from your ancestors, in order [really] to
possess it. 5. Pitch defileth. 6. Whoever wants to become
a master must practise while young. 7. A thing, whose design
is so obvious, cannot be called accidental. 8. Wallenstein
speaks of moments when man is nearer the soul of the world
than usual. 9. There was a time when the land of the Swiss
was not free. 10. Tell me something else. 11. He earns at
least something. 12. I have bought a pound of cherries. Do
you want some? 13. Did he say anything? 14. Many are
called, but few are chosen. 15. I have much to tell you.
1. To jmt on rouge, W fc^nttnfen. 2. He icho — whoever (93, 3).
Translate suffer by ful)lett» 3. To be at — command, ju 1)ien)len fle^en
(256). Notice that breingebcn (= bareinge^en) means to enter it ; hence, if
a prepositional phrase is used, brein must be omitted. 5. Render : He
who touches pitch soils himself. To touch, angieifen; str. I., 1. 6. See
256, 8. Must practise = practises. WJtlle young — early. 7. A thing—
that + ba^ (257). To be obvious, in bie ^Tugen leud^ten. 8. When, see 258.
Man, man. 8oul of the world (God\ bcr SSeltoiei)!. Usual = at other
times, fonjl. 9. There is, e5 oielu (205). When, see 258. 10. Sorns-
thing else, etwa^ (ma^) anber(e)^ (260). 11. At least something, ttjenigj^en^
etwa^, or bed) tmmer h?a^. 12. Some, referring to a noun mentioned,
ml^tx, t, e^ (260). 15. Use 1^<kUx[ with the infinitive preceded by ju.
II. Semes.] GERMA:N^ EXERCISES II!^ GRAMMAR. 39
Exercise XXIV.
Syntax of the FerZ>— 264 to 266. S^^yltn and ^tin.
1. The groom rode up and down [for] an hour. 2. The
pedestrian has been in the city ; he went there and back in
one hour. 3. The watch went once, but now it stops.
4. The children have gone to school ; school has commenced.
5. That has pleased him very much. 6. The carpenter fell
from the roof ; his assistant probably fell too. 7. The horse
has drawn the wagon into the barn, 8. The cranes have gone
south. 9. We moved yesterday (266). 10. The travellers
have not yet arrived. 11. The rope broke, and the light went
out. 12. The apprentice fell asleep and slept [for] three
hours. 13. If the fellow had not drunk so much, he would
not have fallen into the lake and been drowned. 14. All this
has happened before. 15. No consolation has been left me.
1. The compound tenses (perf. or pluperf.) should be used in this and
the following sentences. Up and dowrij "^tn unb I)cr/ lit. anf unb niebcr.
2. There and hack, \}\\\ itnb t)er, or ^in unb juriicf ♦ 4 To school, in, w. ace. and
def. art. 5. Very much, fe^r. 6. Prohably fell too, to be expressed by the
future perfect (279 ; 266). 8. Have gone, perf. tense of jte^en (str. II.,
2). South + nad^ ©iiben (266). 13. If, etc., tt>enn, w. plup. subj. To he
drowned, ertrtnfen (266, 2). 14. Has happened hefore = has already
been there (266, 3). 15. To he left = to remain (266, 3).
Exercise XXV.
Syntax of the Verb— 267, 1, 2, 3, 135. ^bnnert— IDurfen—
1. He conld not [do] otherwise. 2. They might draw yon
into their toils. 3. Do you know Italian ? 4. Do you know
this gentleman? 5. Do you know who this gentleman is?
40 GERMAN EXERCISES IK GRAMMAR. [II. Series.
6. Then, too, you may show yourself without restraint.
7. JSTobody is allowed to hunt without [a] license. 8. Posterity
very likely will hesitate to subscribe to this judgment. 9. The
sighfc of the works of God gives strength to the angels, though
nobody can comprehend them (267, 3). 10. You may keep
the goblet. 11. Who may that fellow in a green coat be ?
12. I like to grant her whatever is consistent with my duty.
13. I should not like to have him hear of it. 14. The child
is not fond of soup.
2. Mighty pret. subj. of fonnen. To draw into one's toils, in fetn ®artt
jte^en* 3, 4, 5. To know, when practical ability is implied (such as to
speak a language) = fonnen ; to know, in the sense of he acquainted with
— fennen ; to know, meaning to have learned hy heart = njiffen. Ex. : 3c^
fenne bav ®cb{d)t, I am acquainted with the poem ; t(^ mx^ ha^ ®», I have
memorized the poem ; id) !ann ha^ ®., I can recite the poem (the latter
two being, in this case, equivalent). SBiffen usually takes a clause or its
equivalent for its object : 3($ tod^f too er JDO^nt ; id) n)et§ fein |)au^ (know
vrhere it is) ; ic^ f :nne fein |)aua (am acquainted with it, can tell it). 6. This
is a free version of the example under 267, 2, 1. Without restraint,
fret* 7. License (to hunt), ber Sagbfc^ein, ^, e, 8. See 267, 2, 4. 11. Fel-
low in a green coat, ber ©runrocf, ^, -e» 13. To hear (?/(what has been
said), wieber erfa^ren (str. VI.). To hxive him hear of it = that he should
hear of it (267, 3). 14. To lefond of = to ]ike, moQtn.
Exercise XXVI.
Syntax of the Verb continued — 267, 4, 5, 6, 7. ^Jlujfen —
©oKen — SCoHen — '^a^m.
Special attention is called to the important idiomatic phrases under 267, 6
{small type).
1. You must not let the dog run into the street without a
muzzle. 2. No sound shall strike upon my ear a second
time, unless ifc should convey a special meaning. 3. A miller,
who never thought of wandering, must be a poor miller. 4. A
metre of this velvet is to cost eight thaler, 5. The treasure
II. Series.] GEBMAI^ EXERCISES 11^^ GRAMMAR. 41
of the Xibelungen is said to lie [buried] in the Ehine.
6. Should you see him, tell him we could not wait any
longer. 7. What are you going to do mth the dagger?
8. Jhe prince was about to die when the news arrived.
9. The witness claims to have seen the defendant. 10. The
witness is said to have seen the defendant. 11. He claims to
have deceived me for a good purpose. 12. The poor woman
did not utter a complaint.
1. Bemark. — Of two infinitives the one dependent upon the other,
stands first, hence : laufen laffen. 2. Strike upon my ear = resound,
erfc^atten (w. dat. of pers. pron.). Meaning, here Sinn. Convey, here
Ibegriinben. 3. Wlio never thought of = to whom . . . never occurred,
etnfalten (w. dat.). See 267, 4. According to the regular order ftel would
stand last. 5. JSfibelungen, the people, or family, in possession of the
Nibelungen hoard. 6. We could not wait any longer = we had (subj.)
not been able to wait [any] longer ; see the remark under 1, in this
exercise. 7. Are you going to do, to be rendered by the present tense of
iDoHen. 8. Was about to, see 267, 6. When, al^. 9, 10. (See 267, 5, 6.)
11. For a good purpose, ju einem guten 3tt)e(fe^ 12. Did not utter = let
resound no, etc.
Exercise XXVII.
Syntax of the Verb continued — 268 to 273. Tlie Passive.
Special attention is caMed to the use of the reflexive in 272, and to tTie
examples under 273, 2,
1. If assistance is rendered them, they can carry on the
business. 2. All were happy ; there was much laughing and
singing. 3. Yesterday they did not play. 4. The letter was
delivered through a porter ; it was read by the whole family
(269). 6. We were early taught to respect old age. 6. The
girls were taught dancing. 7. Of what was he accused, of
theft or of high-treason ? 8. The poor should always be
remembered (271). 9. That is easily said, but not so easily
done. 10. ^^Keleased from ice are brook and river." 11. The
42 germa:n^ exekcises i:iir gkammab. [n. series.
basin is bordered by mountains. 12. A contrast of perfections
and imperfections is required to [produce] the ridiculous.
13. This point has been much contested. 14. Homer was
without doubt diligently read in olden times. 15. The spy
was without ceremony fastened to a branch and hanged.
1. To render assistance = to help + l^elfen, str. III., 3 (w. dat.). 2. There
was, etc., to be expressed by the passive. 3. Use the passive with the
subject e^r or, placing the adverb first, withoat subject. 5. To teach,
It^nn ; use the passive with e^ for subject and the dat. of person. (The
construction in the example under 270, 1, is not to be imitated.) 6. T'o
teach something, unterrid)ten in ctncr Sac^e. 7. Of what, gen. of toa^. 9. Use
lafTen. See 272. 10. See 273, 2. Released, l^efrett. In 10 and 11 no
action, but a state or condition, is expressed. 14. In this sentence fein or
tperben may be used, with scarcely any difference of meaning, but present
usage would favor n)arb. Without doubt, unftretttg ; but no doubt, o^ne
Bweifel. In olden times, ijOT Sitter^. (In other instances, the substitution
of fein for werben may essentially change the meaning of the sentence,
e, g., bte (Btabt »> n r b e ijerbrannt = people were burning it, it was on fire ;
bie ©tabt mar »erbrannt = lay in ashes.) 15. Without ceremony, o^ne
tt>eiterei3. To, an, w. ace.
Exercise XXVIII.
Syntax of the Verb continued — 274, 275. Tenses.
1. How bright is the sun, how smiling the field ! 2. He
that goes borrowing, goes sorrowing. 3. They imitate the
example set at Linz ; the armies desert him ; they curse the
memory of the traitor. 4. I have (already) been here seven
days. 5. I have only been here seven days. 6. Who knows
who will command iis to-morrow ? (274, 5.) 7. He does no
longer rummage in empty words. 8. Our friends were for-
merly living in the country, but at present they are working
in the city. 9. The doctor went out to the steward^s and
found the young man on the floor among Charlotte's children ;
11. Series.] GERMAJS" EXEECISES IK GRAMMAE. 43
some of them were crawling over him, others were teasing
him. 10. That was a bold word !
2. Say : To borrow makes sorrows (274, 2 ; 288). 3. Set, gegekn.
Linz, a city in Austria. The example set at Linz ; gegebeit, being used
attributively, must precede the noun and be declined ; ju )Btnj depends
upon gegekn, and therefore must precede it (353). Hence, we have to
render tlie phrase ; '* The at Linz given example." 4 and 5. See 274, 4.
This use of the present tense is one to which most students find it diffi-
cult to accustom themselves. The adverb fc^on, in such cases, implies
that the time mentioned seems long^ while the adverb erj^ conveys the
opposite idea. Analogous to this use of the present tense is the use of
the preterite (in German) for the pluperfect (in English) ; e, g., We had
already been there three days, tuir )[i?aren fc^on brei Sra(]e \)a, 7. Exception-
ally, the English emphatic form (with do) may be retained in German
(see 274, 6). 8. Were living, are working, see 274, 6. In the cmmtryy
auf bem :Banbe, 9. Doctor, physician, ber ^Irjt, ber X)oftor (ber SP^ebicu^)* To
crawl over, ^erumfra^^eln auf^ here with dat.
Exercise XXIX.
Syntax of the Verb continued — 276 to 279. Tenses.
1. I have enjoyed the happiness of this earth. 2. Schiller
has written a history of the Eevolt of the United Netherlands.
3. The king raised his camp at Schwedt and marched toward
Frankfurt on the Oder, when Tilly had scarcely commenced
his retreat. 4. What will become of you ? 5. Who is knock-
ing ? It is probably the servant. 6. You shall not go to-day
(278, 3). 7. The soldiers will in vain have sacrificed them-
selves for their general. 8. I shall make use of this paper
when a deed shall have been done that bears incontestable
evidence of high-treason. 9. What are they going to elicit by
their questions, if the man is innocent ? 10. It is to be hoped
that the imperial diet at Augsburg will mature our projects.
1. Of this earth = earthly. 2. BewU of the U. N., ber Slbfall ber »er=^
einigten S'lteberlanbe. 3. To commence, antreten (str. V., 1), sep., lit. to enter
44 GERMAN EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. [II. Series.
on. 4 Of, au^ (w. dat.), 5. Probably y see 278, 2. 8. To make use of,
brauc^en, SliaU ham been done may be expressed by the perfect (see 279,
2). To bear evidence of, bejeugen* Incontestable, use the adverb. 9. See
279, 3. To elicit by questions, l^erau^ijer^oren* 10. For a free translation
of this sentence, see 279, 3. The German adverb l^offentUc^ has to be
rendered by the phrase it is to be hoped. Imperial diety ber fUti^^ia^, t^, c»
Exercise XXX.
Syntax of the Verb — 280, 281, 282. Te7ises continued.
Bxplanation. — In the sentences of this Exercise, the figures at the end
of the clauses indicate whether one or two forms of the verb are possi-
ble ; the reason, in each case, should be assigned by reference to g§ 280,
281 (for sentences 1-5) and to § 282 (for the remaining sentences).
Aside from these variations, the conditional clauses (with if) may be
rendered in two ways, either with mm expressed, or by indicating its
omission by the inverted order (see 343, c).
1. If you had not advised me so (1), I should not have done
it (2). 2. What would you do in my place (2) ? 3. If you
had been here (1), my brother would not have died (2). 4. The
fever would from now on gradually disappear (1), if the patient
would take his medicine regularly (1). 5. Nobody would be-
lieve him upon oath (1). 6. The herdsman says the trees are
charmed (1). 7. People believe that the hand of him who
injures trees will grow out of the grave (1). 8. The herds-
man said the trees were charmed (2). 9. Egmont affirmed
that the whole matter was nothing but a jest made at the
dinner-table (2). 10. The boy says he has not done it (1).
11. The boy said he would not have done it (2), if he had not
been misled by his comrades. 12. If they forgave him (2), he
said, he would not do it again (2). 13. The witness swore
that he had seen the defendant (2). 14. The guide told us,
those were the planets (2) which control destiny (2). 15. We
thought you would explain the mystery (1).
1. Translate so by the pronoun e^. 2. In my place, an metner ©telle*
4 From now on, von biefer <3tunbe an. 5. Upon oath, auf etnen Sib.
11. Series.] GERMAN^ EXERCISES 11^ GRAMMAR. 45
6. Charmed, geknnt* 7. People, bie £eute* That the hand, etc., = tliat
whoever (wer) injures . . . his (= to him the) hand, etc. Will grow, pres.
subj. 8. The herdsman, in making the statement, used the present
tense ; hence, in this indirect speech, the present subj. is correct (282) ;
but also the preterit subj. (282, 1). 9. The whole matter, ba^ ®anje«
Nothing hut, nic^ta al^* Jest . . . table, ber 3:afelfc^erj, e^^ e» 14. Those
were, baig, etc. (245, 1). If the pret. subj. ** controlled" is used, the rela-
tive clause expresses the guide's opinion only ; ** control " pres. ind.
denotes a general statement or fact.
Exercise XXXI.
Syntax of the Yerl contimied — 284,285 — 103, 110. Moods.
1. Let all be silent, let each incline his ear to solemn tones.
2. Let each one take care how he acts and how he fares.
3. Will the gentleman please enter, 4. May a gi^acious fate
lead you through this stormy life ! 5. " full [and splendid]
Moon . . . would thy glow for the last time beheld my woe ! "
6. harmless staff, would that I never had exchanged thee
for the sword ! 7. I make rhyme tolerably well, I should
think, what belongs together. 8. How is it possible to write
everything ? 9. Whether you are a good or a bad fellow, go
to bed. 10. Everything might be excellently settled, if things
could be done over again. 11. You would be a dead man.
12. Yes, said the lantern to the moon, what would men do if
we were not [there] ? Thereupon it went out.
1. All + SrHea (see 168). 2. To take care, fe^en, str. V., 1. Translate :
" Let each one see how he manages it, let each one see what become of
him." What become of him = where he remain. 3. Third person plur.
pres. subj. of eintreten, str. V., 1. Please, gefdlligjl, adv. 5. Full [and
splendid] moon, cotter 3J?onbenf(^ein. Thy glow = thou. To behold, fe^en
auf (w. ace). Would is to be expressed by the pret. subj. of the principal
verb. 7. To make rhyme, jufammenrcimeti, sep. 1 should think, pret. subj.
of to think. 8. Use the pret. subj. of laffen, with the reflexive pronoun
(see Examples under 284, 3). 9. Whether, to be omitted (284, 4). To
46 GERMAN EXERCISES IK GRAMMAR. [II. Series.
go to bed, here colloquially, ft(^ auf^ D^r legen, for the classical : ju S5ett(e)
gel^cn. 10. Might be, use the pret. subj. of laijeu, with the reflexive pro-
noun. To do over again, jweimal ijerric^ten* 11. J. cJeacZ man, be^ 2^obc^»
Exercise XXXII.
Syntax of the Verb continued — 286 to 290. Moods — Lnpera-
tive,
1. Beat the drum, and take the field ! 2. George, you stay
with me. 3. No man ought to be obliged [to do a thing].
4. He wanted to see the pedlar. 5. He must have seen the
pedlar. 6. He claims to have seen the pedlar. 7. He was
forced to call the police. 8. One must not count the chickens
before they are hatched. 9. Then they separated. 10. You
do nothing but complain. 11. Shall we walk out, or drive ?
12. Bid him be silent, and teach him to do what is pleasing to
God. 13. They saw him first suspended over the abyss, and
afterwards the guide found his dead body lying at the foot of
the rock. 14. What has the Tyrolese sticking on his hat ?
15. "Fve often heard it said, a preacher might learn, with a
comedian for a teacher.'' 16. That would be tempting God.
1. UsG the past participle. To take the field, \rC^ ^elb jtejen, str. II., 2.
2. With, bei (w. dat.) or urn (w. ace). 3. Use muffen twice in this sen-
tence. 4-7. See 288, 1. 7. To be forced, muffen. 8. The German
proverb is : " One must (foil or mup) not praise the day before the even-
ing," which may be substituted for this sentence. 9. One version of
this sentence is found in 290, third example. 11. Walk out (for exer-
cise), fpajteren 9e"^en ; in the same way, fpajtercn fa^rcn, reiten (290, 2).
12. What is pleasing to God = according to tlie pleasure (ba^ SSolIge^*
fatteit) of God. 13. To be suspended, fc^n)eben. 15. Say : A comedian could
teach a preacher. For said here = boasted. 16. Would be, pret. subj.
of ^ei§en, VII., 1.
II. Sbmes.] GERMAN EXERCISES I:N^ GRAMMAR. 47
Exercise XXXIII.
Syntax of the Verb continued — 291 to 293. Moods — Infinitive.
1. That cannot be helped. 2. That remains still to be
considered. 3. The youth felt impelled to win the prize.
4. We have dug a new bed in order to turn aside the current
of the river. 5. Instead of coming nearer he ran away.
6. They did not delay, but began to hoe and dig. 7. N^obody
thinks of granting him the favor. 8. It is dangerous to play
with the lion. 9. Lessing was too proud to reap without
having sown. 10. My brother is ready to keep you company.
11. If he has done nothing all his life, one can hardly say
that he is resting from his work. 12. The countess has
diamonds which are known to be diamonds. 13. No smoking
here. 14. The student began translating the poem ; but it
was almost untranslatable (291, 2). 15. The heirs were
weeping ; but their weeping was a secret laughing.
1. Bear in mind that possibility may be expressed by the infinitive
(291). 2. Bemains, in this connection, may be rendered by fettlr bleikttr
or fle^en. 3. Felt impelled = it (some power) impelled the youth.
7. Thinks of granting = thinks of it, to grant ; of it to be rendered by
an adverb. 10. To keep one company^ ©efellfc^aft letjlen (w. dat.) ; Sinem
jur ®efettf(^aft ^ier (ba) bleiben. 11. All his life, fetnen SeMag. A clause with
ba§ is preferable to the ace. w. the inf. (292). 12. Which are known =
which one knows, or, of (ijon) which one knows that ... 13. Smoking
is forbidden here.
Exercise XXXIV.
Syntax of the Verb continued — 294 to 300. Participles.
1. From the gable of the house, which commanded an ex-
tensive view, we could see the steeples of the city. 2. The
matter is important, but if you are in ill-health we will wait
48 GERMAN EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. [H. Series.
(294, 2). 3. The air is glowiog as though [it came] from the
mouth of a furnace. 4. Give me some boiling water. 5. The
ships under sail, with their masts encircled with wreaths,
vanished in the distance. 6. A handsome squire came riding
along the way. 7. I call that lying (296, 2). 8. Well begun
is half done (296, 2). 9. Was the whole family present? All,
except the youngest daughter. 10. You have read Lessing^s
Laocoon ; if you now apply those principles to works of art
you will become a better critic. 11. She spoke of her child,
her eyes dim with tears. 12. Faust had powerfully attracted
the spirit. 13. "The lofty works, uncomprehended, are
bright as on the earliest day." 14. ^^To Him above bow
down.'' 15. ^^ The Woman-soul leadeth us upward and on.''
1. Translate the relative clause by the pres. part, of wettfd^auert (294, 1).
3. Air, the German equivalent is sometimes used in the plural. A8
thougJi, rok. 5. Under sail = p. p. of aBfe^eln + to sail off (295, 1).
Encircled with wreaths, laubumfrcinjt. 10. If you now apply, to be ren-
dered by the p. p. absolute (297). 11. Dim, etc., = dimmed from weep-
ing. 13-15. See 299 ; 299, 1 and 3. Uncomprehended = incompre-
hensibly. Bow down = stand bowed ; use flel^en. 15. Woinan-soiUy
B. T.'s version of ba^ Stt)ig=*2Beibli(^e. To lead on and upward, l^inanjtekn*
Exercise XXXV.
Syntax of the Preposition— {ZOl), 302, 303.
1. Instead of songs, a stream of blood rose from his breast.
2. The son became head of the family by virtue of the ring
[in his possession]. 3. The grenadiers wept on account of
the doleful intelligence. 4. We shall start in spite of the bad
weather. 5. For his sake I will explain myself more clearly
(302, 14). 6. In company with you 1 defy our whole genera-
tion (303, 9). 7. Next to life we implore the blessing of God.
8. The count, together with all his men, offered himself to
the duke. 9. Since that unhappy day every mouth is silent
II. Series.] GEEMAI^" EXEKCISES I]N^ GRAMMAB. 49
(to me). 10. From Easter to Pentecost is fifty days. 11. The
general saw tj|at he was deceived by his officers. 12. A Ger-
man song begins with the words : At Strassburg, on the
bulwark, etc. 13. They said they would make him presi-
dent; but they made only a fool of him. 14. The prisoner
had no coffee with his rye bread and sausage. 15. We shall
go either at Easter or on Trinity-Sunday.
1. To rise, here :^oc^ auffpringen, str. III., 1, sep. 2. (302, 5.) 3. (302,
8.) 6. To defy, in bie (Sc^rattfcn forbern (lit. to challeage, or summon, into
the lists). Generation, ba^ ©efc^tec^t, here ba^ 3a^r^unbert (in this sense a
poetical and hyperbolic expression). 8. To offer one's self = to bring
one's self. 12. See 303, 16. Etc., u. f. ii?. = unb fo tweitev. 13. To make
a fool of one, ©inensum bcilen ^aben.
Exercise XXXVI.
Syntax of the Preposition continued — 304.
1. The Ii^dian was wounded by an arrow. 2. Scissors are
no playthings for children. 3.< Truth does not exist for him.
4. In the war no substitute will take the soldier's place. 5. He
did not wish to bind himself (toward me). 6. Against stupid-
ity even the gods struggle in vain. 7. In comparison with
Eothschild you are a poor man. 8. The lords of the empire
were sitting around the emperor. 9. Several portraits of kings
surrounded the throne in a semicircle. 10. [According] to
you everything is to be had for money. 11. You have made a
mistake of six-pence. 12. We never play for money. 13. Do
not weep for the fallen heroes. 14. The loss of her fine hair
would be a pity. 15. I feel sorry for your aunt.
4. Translate substitute by anbeterf and take the place of by eintreten fiir
(str. v., 1). 5. To Und one's self ftc^ ^erpfltc^ten. 8. Lords of the empire,
bie ®rD§en ber ^rone. 9. Portraits of kings, ^onig^MIber. To surround,
urn ♦ . ♦ \jix jle^en (136). 10. To he had = to be for sale, feil feim 11. To
3
50 GERMAIN EXERCISES ItsT GRAMMAR. [H. Series.
make a mistake (in accounts), ft^ i^errec^nen. 14. Say : It would be a pity
about her fine pair. To he a pity, fc^abe feim 15. 1 feel sorry ^ e^ t^ut mir
leib.
Exercise XXXVII.
Syntax of the Preposition continued — 305, 306;, (307).
1. The university [of] Strassburg was re-opened in 1872.
2. Is your father out of town ? Yes^, he has gone to a water-
ing-place for a fortnight. 3. Medicine is needed for the emi-
grant who is suffering from the intermittent fever. 4. The
bear is led by a chain. 5. Can you recall the circumstances?
•6. The defendant was proud of his innocence, and angry with
his accuser. 7. One hundred pence make one mark (306, 3).
8. The hero's name is living, although his body has crumbled
into dust. 9. I was going to put on the belt, when it tore
into two pieces. 10. The heirs were astonished at the large
property of which the will disposed. 11. He is vexed with
me. 12. Sometimes a whole life is spent over a fine illusion.
13. Cambrai will, amid rejoicing, open her gates to the arch-
bishop. 14. None among the imperial officers came up to
Friedland. 15. She would like to guard against certain re-
membrances. 16. The boy was not able to see the woods for
all the trees.
1. In = in the year. 2. Out of town, ijerretfl. Gone, use retfett (see
266). 3. Is needed, e^ fe^U an (306, 1). 6. To be proud of tro^en anf,
ftolj fetn auU 9. Was going to, use vooUtn* 12. To be spent = pass away.
13. Cambrai, the name of a place. 14. To come up to = to be equal to,
reid^en an. Friedland — Wallenstein, duke of F. 15. Would like to, use
mogen. 16. See 306,9. All the, lauter (see Ex. XIIL, 10). Compare:
Not to see the city for all the houses.
THIRD SERIES,
Exercise I.
The Simple Sentence— ZO^ to 317.
1. Life is not the highest of goods. 2. ^' One sees that
in nothing no interest he has." 3. You have advanced the
work more in these three days, than it has formerly thriven
in many weeks. 4. Child, take care that yoa don't spill any-
thing. 5. Happiness is so near ; why will you wander farther
and farther ? 6. Such is the fate of the Beautiful on earth.
7. '^ Great cry and little wool." 8. Ill-humor and desire for
combat were gnawing his mind. 9. Eather let his contempo-
raries and posterity judge him. 10. His majesty has been
pleased to pension the privy counselor. 11. The master and
mistress are gone out. 12. The young band of reapers go
into the field. 13. Three huntsmen went a-shooting deer.
14. The world's history is the world's judgment. 15. Neces-
sity is the mother of invention. 16. Mars, the star of ill-
fortune, has often severed what Venus, the bringer of good-
fortune, had united.
1. Use the del art. 3. To ham interest in, 5(nteit nc^mcn an. 3. To take
care, ftc^ in $[(^t ne^men. 4. Not . . . anything — nothing. 6. Translate
such by that. 7. Great — much. 9. Let, use the pres. subj. of the
principal verb. 10. To he pleased (in this connection), geru^en. Pri'Gy
counselor, ber ge'^etme (|>oO 9^at. 11. Master and mistress, tie |)errf(i)aft.
13. To go a-shooiing deer, auf tie S3irf(^ jie^en. 16. Bringer^ see 317.
52 GERMAN EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. [HI. Series.
Exercise II.
The Compound Sentence — Co-ordinate Sentences — 318 to 322.
1. In part they drew him, in part he sank down. 2. We
will neither deny nor palliate the deed. 3. In the first place,
they wish it; and secondly, it is the custom. 4. I will either
act with absolute freedom, or not command at all. 5. The
fleet did not dare to attack the enemy, but returned without
having effected its purpose. 6. Lessing would like to call
Corneille "the gigantic" or "the prodigious," but not "the
great " (320, 2). 7. He is not a millionaire, but he is rich.
8. He is not rich, but poor. 9. The matter seems so plain,
and yet it is a mystery. 10. It was difficult to enlist more
soldiers ; for fortune had forsaken the army. 11. Wallenstein
had assumed the title of " Highness " ; therefore it was neces-
sary for him to keep soldiers. 12. Goetz yon Berlichingen had
one iron hand ; thus it was insensible to a kind pressure.
3. In the first place y erjlen^. 4. Absolute, here »ofl!ommen (complete).
5. Without hamng effected its purpose, unijcrri(^teter (Sad^e (adverbial gen.).
6. Would like, use pret. subj. of mogen. 11. Had assumed the title of =
had himself called (321). It was necesary for him = he must. To keep,
here ^alten, str. VII., 1. 12. Kind pressure, ^rucf ter ^kU (322). To,
ge^en, w. ace.
Exercise III.
The Compound Sentence continued — Subordinate Sentences —
Substantive and Adjective Clauses — 323 to 328.
1. The curse of an evil deed is that it brings forth evil
(324). 2. The student cheerfully carries home what he has
in black and white in his note-book. 3. '' Out of the abun-
dance of the heart the mouth speaketh " (324). 4. Can you
not understand that it is far more diffiicult to do right than
in.SEEiES.] GERMAK EXERCISES IN^ GRAMMAR. 53
to indulge in pious dreams ? (325, 2). 5. Have you [received]
information [of] what has happened in Schwyz ? (325, 2).
6. The day is almost spent, and you must explain yourself,
whether you will do without me or without your friend.
7. Has the ship sunk? Yes, but they still hope to raise it
again (325, 3). 8. Sweet peace, that art from heaven, come
into my heart ! 9. The church we visited last week has not
yet been dedicated (326, 327). 10. '' See that you most pro-
foundly gain what does not suit (in) the human brain " (327,
2). 11. (The) European governments have sometimes sent
to the United States people unable to support themselves.
12. The government, a year or two ago, complained of the
landing of paupers who were sent over.
2. In black and white, f(^tt)arj auf weip* 3. Say: Of what the heart is
full, of that the mouth flows over. To flow over, here ukrge^en (sep.).
4. To do rights gut ^anbeln. To indulge in pious dreams, anbac^ttg fc^warmen.
6. /« . . . spent, use ftd^ neigen. 10. Translate most profoundly by tief^
jtnnigr and gain by faffen^ 12. Ago, see 306, 9.
Exercise IV.
The Compound Sentence continued — Adverbial Glauses — 329
to 332.
1. When the weak [man] succumbs to his fate, the strong
conquers it. 2. ^^ Man, while he strive th, is prone to err "
(330). 3. As the king gave a sign with his hand, the [gate of
the] prison opened. 4. After the king had left the city, it
was found that he had taken the precaution of providing it
with a sufficient garrison (330, 2). 5. The beU-founder,
before letting the metal flow, spoke a short prayer ; then the
workmen rested from their hard work till the bell was cooled.
6. Often, where ideas fail, (there) words [will] offer themselves
[as substitutes] (331). 7. The lawyer, casting a furious glance
54 GERMAN EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. [IH. Series.
at his opponent, left the room (332). 8. We never go to
town without visiting our old aunt (332, 1). 9. Henry
studied German for two years without ever understanding
the principles of the language. 10. Instead of paying what
he owed, he contracted more debts.
1. Conquer^ here jnjtngcn, str. III., 1. % Is prone to err = errs. 3. To
give a sign with one's hand, mit bem i^inger n)infen. 4. It was found, see
272. Taken — had. Of providing, see 291, 4. 5. Say : Before tlie b.
let the metal flow, he . . . Short prayer, bcr fromme ©j)rud^. Rested
from . . . = let the . . . work rest. 6. To offer one's self here |t(^ ein*=
jleUen. 7. Casting = while (intern) he cast. Aty auf (w. ace). 10. To
contract debts, ©d^ulben ma(^en.
Exercise V.
The Compound Sentence — Adverbial Clauses continued —
333 to 335.
1. The slow progress of the war had been as advantageous
to the rebels as it had been injurious to the king (333). 2. He
had grown as fleshy as Doctor Luther. 3. Goliath was by
one head taller than all the rest. 4. His hair stood on end as
if the hand of Death had seized him. 5. The scholar seeks
knowledge as if he were for ever to live on this earth. 6. There
was a hissing as when water comes in contact with fire (333,
1). 7. We lived a more retired life than we had lived in
Philadelphia. 8. You are too good to expect such things of
us (333, 3). 9. The peace was concluded too hurriedly to be
of long duration. 10. Our provisions diminished more and
more ; and, of course, the less we had to eat, the more terrible
grew our hunger (334). 11. The tyrant was so detested by
the Swiss people, that he could no longer find any tool.
12. I would gladly bear the trouble, so important is the matter
to me (335, 1). 13. Do you consider him so unprincipled
that he should cheat a poor widow ?
m. Series.] GERMAK EXERCISES 11^ GRAMMAR. 55
1. To be advantageous = to bring advantage. To be injurious = to do
harm. 2. Translate literally ; a version of tliis sentence, in students'
slang, is found in F. 2129-30 (see 333). 3. AU the rest = all people.
4 and 5. The subordinate clauses may be given in two ways (see 343, <? ;
333, 1). For ever^ ett)ig. On this earth = here. 6. To corm in contact
with, jt(^ ntengen mit* 8. To expect^ use al^ ba^ with subj. (333, 3). 9. Of
long duration + bauer^aft^ adj., or »ott + dat., or genit. of characteristic.
Exercise VI.
The Compound Sentence — Adverbial Clauses continued —
336 to 340.
1. Poetry describes beings, and, in as far as these beings are
corporeal, it describes bodies. 2. I shall not go away, unless
you pay me what you owe me (336). 3. With the best inten-
tion 'I cannot accomplish much, because a thousand obstacles
stand in my way. 4. The minister will only be able to save
himself by speedily concluding peace. 5. (The) Man has been
endowed with understanding (for this), that he may reflect
upon that which he does. 6. Though the night is dark, our
right is as clear as the light of day (339). 7. However [much]
the human will may waver, the will of God is immutable.
8. Whatever position you may take, you will get talked about
(339). 9. Be ever so good, there will be somebody to slander
you (339, 1). 10. If (the) nations rebel against rightful
authority, prosperity will not be theirs (340). 11. Why
should I not avoid the utmost if I can escape it ? (340).
12. Bring me a few lilies if you find them on your way.
13. If the judge had been there, matters would never have
come so far. 14. As long as the deed is merely planned, it is
a crime ; if [once] carried out, it will be a grand enterprise.
1. Are corporeal = are bodies. 3. In any way, see 154. 4.
help. 5. Has been endowed with, use the verb ttjerben with the dat. of the
person (338). 6. Use no conjunction in the first clause. Is . , , day,
to be expressed simply by the verb leuc^ten. 8. Say : However you may
56 GERMAIN EXERCISES 11^ GRAMMAR. [ni.SBMBS.I
place (jletten) yourself. To get talked about, m^^ ®erebe fommen* 9. There -
wUl . . . be, see 236, 4. 10. Eebel . . . c^uthority — free themselves.
Will not be theirs = cannot thrive. 12, 13. Use no conjunction (340, 1).
Your, see 154. 13. Matters = it. To come so far, ba^infommeu (str. IV.,
Sep.), impersonal. 14. As long as; if, see 340, 4.
Exercise VII.
Word- Order— 3^1 to 343.
1. Once, warlike 'lordes were raging through this valley ;
may that day never return ! 2. " If you would know exactly
what is proper, you have only to inquire of noble women."
3. He pocketed the bracelets and rings as if they were toad-
stools. 4. Stand still, and the dog will leap up on you.
5. Where I feel a breath of thy spirit, there I am happy.
6. That Caylus should have read this passage, is impossible.
7. "Whatever brings [us] nearer to heaven," he said, ^^is no
delay." 8. " You are all very intelhgent," he began full [of]
cunning. 9. It is true, the limits of art are now incomparably
wider than they formerly were, but they do not comprise such
works. 10. The ward of the key is deftly wrought, but it
does not open the lock. 11. If it were not a universal super-
stition, nobody would admire the beauty of these paintings.
12. I cannot help you any more ; have I not given you my last
dollar! 13. The queen, indeed! is no better than a woman
of the middle class. 14. Why are you so modest, since he has
no advantage over you ?
2. KnoiD = learn, find out, erfa^ren, str. VI. If not to be translated.
Tou hate . . . to inquire, use the imperative. 4. Stand still, use the
pres. ind. (343, 3, small type). 6. Caylus, the name of a French critic.
The sentence should be translated by a single clause, beginning with the
perf.inf. (343, d). 8. To begin, here an^ekn, str. VI., VIII. 9. It is true,
Itoox (343, d, 2). 10. Deftly wrought, here frau^, lit. curly, complicated.
11. For the order in the principal clause, see 343, d, 3. 12. Have 1 not,
m. Sbkibs.] GERMAIN EXERCISES IIsT GRAMMAR. 57
eta, use boc^r and no negation (343, e). 13. Translate indeed by bo^*
A woman . . . class, ta^ ^ux^txmiK 14. The force of since may be ren-
dered by boc^^
Exercise VIII.
Word' Order continued — 344 to 349.
1. Proud as she is, she had to confess never having seen the
like (344). 2. How deeply the picture is imprinted on my
mind ! and yet I was not conscious of it, until the sound of
your voice called it up (344). 3. The teacher greatly con-
fused the girl ; [it is vstrange] that a well-meaning person
should he able to make one so confused! (345). 4. The presi-
dent declared he had been obliged to make the appointment
at once (345, 2, 1). 5. Everybody knows [that] you are to
blame for it. 6. We have learned from your letter how
strangely you have been misunderstood and misjudged (346).
7. [It is] impossible that he was present. 8. Perhaps (that)
he did not wish to suffer the tyranny. 9. Were I rich, how
glad would I be to assist the poor woman ! 10. How fortunate
that they remained in the country !
1. As, fo (at tlie beginning of the sentence). Having seen, to be ren-
dered by a clause ; see 325, 1 and 4. 2. To call up, here t»e(!en. 3. One,
see 98, 5. For if, see 234, lines 5 and 6. 6. In this and some of the
following sentences, the auxiliary may be dropped. 7, 8. Use the (pres.)
perf. Wish, tt)otten.
Exercise IX.
Word- Order continued — 350 to 353.
1. ]^o shield intercepted the murderous blow dealt by his
adversary (350, 353). 2. The Wagner-concert, [which was]
announced yesterday, did not take place. 3. The cholera
[which was] spreading drove us from the village (351, 353).
58 GEEMAiq" EXERCISES IK GRAMMAR. [III. Seribs.
4. Finally, the emperor ceased to delude the estates by a
promise of a long-wished-for peace (352, 353). 5. The two
prisoners were fixed upon to be the victims of the general
discontent. 6. The count has at all times devoted his services
to the imperial house. 7. We have told him so, but he has
not taken it to heart (352, e). 8. How can one imagine such
a thing ? 9. The armies occupied all [the] passes, in order to
close to them (viz., the enemy) the way to the Bohemian
capital. 10. The increased power of the government left
them (viz., the estates) no independence (352, e), 11. The
compulsion is disgraceful to him, -but we cannot release him
from it. 12. Shakspere's works are no maxims of virtue,
arranged in chapters and explained by speaking examples.
1. Bear in mind that participles, used attributively, are declined like
adjectives (294, 295). 2, 3. The modifiers of the subject should precede
the latter. 4. To delude by a promise of peace, ben ^^rieben jetgen (w. dat.).
Long-wished-for J lang ern^itnf^t. 5. Transl. : to the general discontent for
(ju) the sacrifice. 6. At all times, ftet^. 7. 8o^ see 236, 6. Use the
reflexive pronoun in the second clause. 9. In order tOy see 291.
11. Release Mm from it — remit it to him. 12. See 353. Place the
predicative nominative last, so that all its modifiers precede it. To
arrange^ here hingen (119).
Exercise X.
Word-Order corhtimied — Position of Clauses — 354 to 359.
1. My brother is still coughing a little ; his sickness has
exhausted him very much. 2. We listened to her in silence
[for] many minutes^ but we do not yet know what she really
wants. 3. To-day it is not pleasant to dance on this floor ; it
is too slippery. 4. The policeman left on the train yesterday
afternoon at fiNQ o'clock ; at seven, he was found drunk in the
mud on the road. 5. We shall soon celebrate in a splendid
I
m. Series.] GERMA]^ EXERCISES I]^ GRAMMAR. 59
manner the day of the Declaration of Independence. 6. What
you have in writing, and confirmed by a seal, is certainly secure.
7. I shall never refuse him the honor which is due to him.
8. When Antony had killed himself, Cleopatra, who saw that
Octavianus only spared her to make her appear at Kome in
his triumphal procession, took poison, or, according to other
reports, placed an asp on her bosom. 9. After casting away
his whole previous life, he put himself in harmony with
fate.
3. Use the reflexive form with e^* Pleasant, here gut, 6. In writ-
ing . . . seal, ijert)rteft unb ijerjtegelt. 8. For the order, see 343, d ; put
the relative clause immediately after its antecedent. According to other
reports = as others report, should follow the verb. To make appear =
to show. Her, see 154. 9. Fate, see 149 (page 54, line 4).
FOURTH SERIES.
Additional Exercises, involving Topics of especial
Difficulty, and Forms and Constructions of rare
Occurrence,
Exercise I.
Use of the Cases— 11^ to 20^— {also: 39, 41, 48, 61, 69, 60,
66, 68).
1. On Saturdays I have to give but one lesson, but next
Saturday I shall give two (39). 2. He has broken his leg, and
has to stay in bed the whole month (41). 3. Our gardens
and fields are situated an hour's walk from the city (48).
4. So many murders have been committed this year, that one
feels no longer secure (61). 5. The erection of these build-
ings cannot reasonably be approved (61). 6. A company of
one hundred men was sent in pursuit of the rujBSans (59).
7. His children and children's children will remember this
noble deed (60). 8. Tell Mary that I am sorry not to be able
to agree with her (66). 9. I am vexed that we ever called on
the Millers (68). 10. If anybody inquires after me, tell him
that I went down the avenue, and am coming back the same
way. 11. We will ask father for (191, 1) the knife he uses
for pruning trees. 12. Banish all gloomy thoughts.
4. Secure = sure of one's life (98). 8. See 353 ; whicli of the two
infinitives in this sentence depends upon the other? 11. For ; the
German prep, ju, after certain verbs and adjectives, denotes purpose,
use, etc.
IV. Series.] GERMAN^ EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. 61
Exercise II.
Use of the Prepositions — 301 to 306 — {also 40).
Remark.— The correct use of the prepositions, in any language, can only be acquired
by long observation and practice. The student, to perfect his knowledge of this diffi-
cult portion of the German language, should observe and learn many prepositional
phrases which he finds in his reading-lessons. The same is tvue of the topic treated in
the following Exercises (III. and IV.). No grammar can exhaust these subjects.
1. The lawyer has robbed the widow of her entire property.
2. When we play cards, we never play for money (304, 7).
3. We are going to Paris; come with [us]. 4. A year from
to-day you will meet again (306, 7). 5. The colonel ranks
above the captain. 6. The count took him from pity into his
house (303, 2). 7. N"ot far from the river a church has been
standing for many years (303 ; 274, 4). 8. This wine has a
taste of metal. 9. We knew you by the feather upon your
hat. 10. Mark well what I have told you (306, 4). 11. This
young man wants to become a soldier (306, 8). 12. In the
reign of Louis XIV. the French court was a model for all
other European courts.
3. The object of the prep, mit is frequently dropped when easily
understood from the context.
Exercise III.
SeparaUe and Inseparable Compound Verbs — 137, 360, 547,
648, (190, 198).
1. The conference took place as soon as the ambassadors
had breakfasted. 2. The king consulted with his minister
[for] two hours. 3. If we kept house, we should welcome our
friends in our own home. 4. It has been lightening all night
(274, 6). 5. I do not like to expose you to the laughter of
the company. 6. WilUam has beaten the dog to death.
62 GEKMAN EXERCISES liT GRAMMAR. [IV. Series.
7. Show me how to do ifc, and I will do it after you. 8. Many
prophecies were given to the Jews. 9. We always take a great
interest in your welfare. 10. The estates will assemble next
month (274, 5). 11. If you stay here, I will bring the chest
here ; if you go home, I will send it there. 12. The cashier
was a man forgetful of his duty.
5. Use the adv. gem {e, g., I like to read, i(^ lefe gem). 7. Use Jjo'rmac^en
and na'd^mac^enr both w. dat. 8. Say : Among the Jews there was much
prophesying (Passive ; see 236, 2). 9. Whenever the idea expressed in
English by a substantive is implied in the German verb, the modifying
adj. is, of course, changed into an adv. (here greatly).
Exercise IV.
Separable and Inseparable Compound Verbs continued — 649.
Remark. — As the verbs occurring in this Exercise are all translated in the Grammar
(549), they are not given in the Vocabulary. The figures, at the end of the sentences,
refer to the sections of § 549.
1. I have looked the book through, but I must have over-
looked that passage (1, 3). 2. After the teacher had repeated
the verse several times, without skipping a word, he found
that the child had not heard a considerable portion of it
(3, 8). 3. If you dare (= make bold) to go out without
putting on your cloak, your father will tell you to turn back
immediately (4, 5). 4. As we had taken a roundabout
course, it was so late that we had to spend the night in the
village (3, 4). 5. The ferry-man took the priest over [the
river] ; he will bring (= fetch) him back to-morrow (3, 8).
6. Fifty miners perished last week (4). 7. The boy has
deceived his mother, but he is now penetrated with the feel-
ing of his guilt (1, 2). 8. It was so easy to see through his
designs, that we could frustrate (= prevent) them before he
undertook to execute them (1, 2, 5, 6). 9. The two sisters
were seen in the water, as they embraced each other, and went
IV. Sbioes.] GEKMA]^ exercises IK GRAMMAIL 63
down together (4, 5). 10. The soldier contradicted and
resisted the officer, without considering that it was entirely
useless.
2. Notice that ii^erp'ren does not have the meaning of the Eng. (/oer-
hear. Without, see 291 (p. 115). 3. Da/re to go out, ft(| ^inau'^wagen =
to venture out. 7. With, »on.
Exercise V.
Use of^Bdn mid SSerben {Passive Voice), and certain German
equivalents for the English Passive — 268 to 273 {also 111,
631, 632, 633).
1. The city was built upon a rock; nevertheless, it was
taken by the enemy (273). 2. Yesterday our whole family
drove into the country ; you were mentioned in our conversa-
tion more than once. 3. The poor fellow was made to believe
that he was the heir. 4. No stopping here ! 5. The animals
will be fed at noon. 6. An answer is requested. 7. These
difficulties are easily overcome (291, 1). 8. It is to be hoped
that at least one-fourth of the company will remain (291, 1).
9. The paper is wound up by means of a spring (272, 302, 7).
10. Authors are often praised by those who have not read
their works (269, 88). 11. An author once said: We wish to
be less praised and more read. 12. To him wiio hath shall
be given. 13. You shall be helped if you will follow us (271).
14. The forefathers of fche French were conquered twice; first
by the Eomans, and afterwards by the Germans. 15. When
nearly all Europe was conquered by Napoleon, the emperor
was almost idolized by his nation.
2. Subject in the second clause : ®^. 3. Subject : ^Wan. 4. Passive.
Begin the sentence with here (see 236, 3, a, fourth line). 5. Subject :
5?lan (see 304, 7). 6. Subject: (£^. 11. Did the author wish for a
changed condition of things, or was the object of his wish an action f
Or may either be maintained ?
64 GEKMAi^ EXERCISES IK GRAMMAR. IV. Series.
Exercise VI.
Various Ways of rendering the English Participle (see 113).
1. Giving is better than receiving (291, 3). 2. Having
made the necessary arrangements for the journey, he counted
upon leaving the next morning ( 330, 2 ; 291, 2 ; 234 ).
3. This boy likes fishing, and dislikes studying (291, 2).
4. The Dutch are living in Holland (274, 6). 5. The chil-
dren came running to the spot where the knight lay bleeding
(296 ; 294, 3). 6. The senator kept us waiting a long time
(290, 2). 7. The royal palace is now building (274, 6).
8. The policeman saw the thief climbing through the win-
dow (330, 1 ; 290, 3). 9. The danger of the merchant losing
his way was great (325, 1). 10. The Judge being ill, the ses-
sion did not take place (337). 11. This said, they left the
room (330, 2). 12. The living and the dead will be judged
(107). 13. You will gain nothing by waiting. 14. The pupil
went out, without saying a word. 15. The boy went out, with-
out the teacher noticing it. 16. They spoke of his owing them
a large sum. 17. Many a man is proud of having defeated his
opponent. 18. In spite of your boasting [so] much, people
do not respect you.
1. Meceimng — taking. 2. Remark. — The Eng. pres. part., preceded
by a prep., must always be rendered by an infinitive or conjunctive
clause, preceded by such adverbs, as : baiJOH/ baran^ bamit, etc. (according to
the prep, required by the principal verb). A conjunctive clause must be
used whenever the subject of the participle is not the same as that of the
principal verb. 6. Kept = made. 8. To be translated in two ways.
11. Use the passive, or the active with man. 13. See note, under 2. 5D'?it
with the infin. may also be used here. 18. Whenever the Eng. participle
is translated by a verbal noun (infinitive, 288), the accompanying adverb
is, of course, changed into the corresponding adjective.
IV. SEMES.] GERMAN EXERCISES IH GRAMMAR. 65
Exercise VII.
Additional Sentences on the Pronouns — 230 to 2^3, small type
—{also 86, 87, 89, 118).
1. You will excuse my importunity, sir ! 2. It was amus-
ing to see how his Excellency was catechised by her Majesty.
3. I pray you, interest yourself for the poor orphan (232).
4. Show me the city of Paris upon this map ; put your finger
upon it (234). 5. Call yourself godlike, for aught I care;
but I am afraid it will not last long. 6. My friend is willing ;
so am I (236). 7. On a sudden, he resolved to live no longer
for himself. 8. They loved themselves, and hated each other
(238). 9. The teacher spoke with his pupil of his (viz., the
pupil's) future (242). 10. The teacher's words were so im-
pressive, that the boy will think of them all his life (243).
11. Clara Schumann was once a great pianist. 12. My poor
head is crazed, my poor mind disturbed.
4. City of Paris. Remark. — Proper names of countries, places, and
montlis, modifying a common noun, are in apposition with the latter.
Ex. : The kingdom of Prussia, ba^ ^ontgreid) 9)reu§en. 7. For himself,
dat. without prep. 12. For the translation, see 243, 3.
Exercise VIII.
Pronouns continued — 244 to 263, small type.
1. The fate of those who fell before Troy was sad ; but still
more sad was the end of those who returned (244, 1, c).
2. We took a walk, and talked of this thing and that thing
(245, 2). 3. The artist is painting on these two pictures ; he
will soon have this [one] done, but that [one] takes more
time. 4. It is difficult to comprehend how all this can be
worked into a novel. 5. This emigrant has been cheated by
66 GERMAlsr EXERCISES i:^ GRAMMAR. [IV. Series.
the porter ; the same porter has cheated me (248, 1). 6. Such
a braggadocio, who is constantly talking of virtue, gets warm
over his own thoughts (250, 2). 7. Would you not like to live
in such a hut overgrown with moss ? How gaily w^e might
adorn it ! 8. What a hero ! No wonder that everybody
honors him! (252). 9. One could not determine the child of
which mother it was (255, 1). 10. The old gentleman gave
his son and daughter instruction in dancing, which cannot
have been very becoming to him (256, 2). 11. " I stand up
for the party in whose service I am." 12. Mephistopheles
gave the student various precepts ; the latter felt quite stupid
from all he said.
3. To have done, fertig werbcn mtt. 4. Work into = knead into. 6. Who
. . . virtue = 3:ugenbf(^tt)a^er* 7. Would you not like, 267, 3. Might,
267, 1. 8. JVo wonder, xoa^ SCBunber^ (251, 1). 10. In dancing, see 288 ;
293. 11. Meaning of the German proverb, in 256, 4. 12. Felt, use
iDerbeitf with the dat. of the person, and t^ as subject. See 263, 1 ;
261, 1. All he said. Remakk. — The relative pronoun can never be
omitted in German (256).
YOCABULARY.
A, an, cin^ indef. art. (38).
about, untf
abyss, ber 3lbgrunb, -t^t -e»
accidental, pfdllt(^»
accomplish, ijoll^ringen, irr. (119,
2); Iei|!en,
according to, nad), w. dat.
accuse, annagen, sep.
accuser, ber Stnftdger, -^, -♦
ache, v.y n?e^ t{)un (136, 3).
acquisition (by purchase), ber 5(n^
fauf, -^f -e.
admire, ktijunbern.
adorn, aw^fc^murfenf sep.
advance, v, trans., forbern.
advantage, ber S^orteil, -^, -e ; to
have an — over one, ettwa^ ijor einem
ijorau^ ^akn,
adversary, ber ©egner, -^, -♦
advise, raten, str. F//., 1.
affirm, beteuern*
afraid, I am — , mir i|l l&ange.
afternoon, ber S'Jac^mtttagf -^, -e.
afterwards, nac^^er; fpdter.
again, wieber*
age, baa 5lUer, -^, - ; bie Beit, pi.
-en ; old — , ba^ filter, -^.
agree, ^eiftimmenr sep., w. dat,
agreeable, angene^m*
air, bie iCuft, pi. -e»
all + all (100) ; = the whole of,
gan^
almost, fafl, fd^ier*
alms, bie ®abett, n, pi.
already, f^on*
also, au(^»
although, ob9let($.
always, immer,
ambassador, ber ©efafibte, -n, -n*
among, itnter, kt,
amusing + amiifa'nt.
ancestors, bie ^dter*
ancient, alt*
and + unb*
angel + ber ©nget, -^, -♦
angry (with), erbofl (auf, w. ace.)*
animal, \)ii^ %m, -t^, -e*
announce, anfiinbtgen/ sep.
answer + bie 5tntn)ort, pi, -en»
Antony + ^tnto^niu^.
anybody, jemanb*
anything, etmasg; n?aa; trgenb cttt)a«,
trgenb n)a§*
appearance (=:exterior), bas^ ^u§ere»
apply, annjenben, irr. (119, 1), sep.
appointment, bie ©rnennung, pi. -en.
apprentice, ber ;Be6rling, -^, -e.
approve (of), billigen, w. ace.
archbishop + ber (£ri\6if(|of, -^, -e»
army + bie ^xmt't, pi. -n; bas^ ^eer,
-e^f -e.
arrangement, to make — s, 5lnjlalten
trefen, str. IV.
arrive, anfommen, str. IV., sep. ; tin'*
trejfen, str. IV. y sep.
arrogance, ber ttkrmutr -^*
68
VOCABULARY.
arrow, ber ^^fetl, -^, -t*
art, bie ^unft, pi. -e,
artist, ber tunftler, -^, -; (ber toi'jl,
-en, -en)»
as + al^ ; tnbem ; tok ; as — as, fo — aU ;
fo — mie; as if, aU ob; al^ t»enn; as
when, aU tvenn; n)te mm*
ask, fragen ; — for, bitten (urn, w.
ace), sir. V., 2.
asp, bie ^'^atter, pi. -n,
assemble, jufammen!ommenr str. iF.,
sep.
assist, l)elfen, str. III., 3, w. dat.
assistant, ber ®e^ulfe, -n, -n*
associate, ^., fi^ gefeHen.
astonish, to be — ed, ftu|en (306, 7).
attack, v., angretfen, str. Z , 1 ; sep.
attract, anjte^en, str. 11. , 2 ; sep.
aught, for — I care, meinettDegen*
August + ber 5lugu'|l.
aunt + bie Slante, pi. -n.
author, ber (Sc^riftjleller, -^, -♦
avenue, bie StUe'e, pi. -n»
avoid, meibett/ str. I., 2.
back, adv., juritd.
bad, fc^Iimm*
band (= troop), bie ^^adx, pi. -en;
poetical : ba^ S5olf, -e<^ ; — of rob-
bers + bie 9flaukrbanbe, pi. -n.
banish (= cast away), ftd) entfd^tagen,
str. VII., w. gen.
bank + bie S3an!, pi. -en.
baptism, bie S^aufe, pL -n*
bare, v., entMo§en*
barn, bie Sc^eune, pi. -n*
basin, topograph., ber ^effel, -^, -♦
bear, n., + ber S3dr, -en, -en.
bear, ^., tragen, str. VI. ; iiberne^^'men,
str. IV.
beast (= cattle), baig S^ie^, -e^.
beat to death, totf(^ta9en,«^r. VI, sep.
beautiful, Win*
beauty, bie ©c^iJn^eit, pi. -en.
because, mW {sudor d. conj.).
become, tDerben (110).
bed, n., + ha^ S3ett(e), -(e)a, -en.
before, adv.^ jui?or; conj.f^fQcx, efie;
prepos. + ijor*
begin, anfangen, str. VII., sep,
behold ! fteje !
being, n., ba§ SBefen, -^, ~*
believe, glau^en {w. dat. of person),
to make one — , einen glaukn
tttac^en.
bell, bie ®Io(!e, pi. -n*
bell-founder, ber ©locfengieper, -^, -♦
belong, gepren, w. dat.
beloved, gellebt.
belt, n., ber ®iirtel, -^, -♦
benefactor, ber S[Bo|lt^ater, -^, -*
benevolent, |ilfrei(^.
besiege, fcelagern.
better, best + ^effer, beft.
between + pifc^en (306, 10).
bid, 'd., \)Z\^tn, str, VII, 2.
bind + binben, str. Ill, 1 ; refl., |t(^
»erj)fli(^ten gegen, w. ace.
bird, ber SJogel, -^, -.
bishop + ber S3iWof, -^, -e.
black, fc^warj.
Black-Forest, ber (5^tt)ar^alb, -i^*
blame, to be to — for, fd)ulb fein an
{w. dat.).
bleed + Muten.
bless, fegnen.
blessing, berfSegen,-^.
blood + baa S5lut, -e^.
bloody + blutig.
blow, n., ber ©treic^, -e^, -e; mur-
derous — , ber 2)?orbflreid^.
blow, v., t^epn.
blue + blan.
boast, ^., (ftd)) rii^men; ^jra^Ien*
VOCABULARY.
69
body, ber ^orper, -^, -; (the human),
ber Sei^r -e^, -er ; dead — , ber Setc^^
nam, -^, -e.
Bohemian, adj., + Ibij^mifc^*
boil, v., !o(|en.
bold, fit^n*
book + ha^ ^u^, -ea, -er,
border, ^., Begrenjen*
born + geboren, p, p. of geMretir str.
IV.
bosom + ber SBufeit, -^, -♦
bottle, n., bie ^5laf(^e, pi. -n*
bow, to — down, biitfen*
boy, ber ^nabt, -n, -n*
bracelet, bie (Bpange, pi. -n*
braggadocio, ber ©ort^elb, -en,
-en*
brain, ba^ ®e^irn, -^, -u
branch, 7^., ber ^% -e^, -e ; ber
BtDcig, -ee, -e*
bread + ba^ 23rotf -t^, -t.
break, v., + Brec^en, str, 7F., (=
tear), jerrei^en, str. /., 1.
breakfast, v. , frii^jlucfen*
breast + bie ^xu% pi. -u
breath, ber ^an^, -e^»
breathe, atmen*
bridal, — room, ba^ S5rautgema(^, -e^,
-er*
bright, l^errlic^ ; to be — , glcinjen*
bring + t)ritt9en, irr. (119, 2) ; —
forth, gebaren, str. IV.; — here,
l^er^olen, sep.
brook, ber ^a^, -t^, -t.
brother + ber S3rnber, -^, -♦
build, kuen»
building, ber S3au (51).
bulwark, bie (Sd^anj(e), pi. -(e)n*
business, ba^ ©efd^aft, -e^, -e*
bust + bie S3itfief pi. -n*
busy, Qefc^aftig*
but, conj.y a^er ; attein ; fonbern
(320, 2, Remark); {— only),
nur.
buy, laufen*
cable, n., + ba^ ^aM, -^, -♦
cage + ber ^ciftgr -^, -e,
call, x).y rufen; berufen, str. VII. y 2;
nennen, irr. (119) : to — upon (=
pay a visit), I)efud)en.
camp, "iiCi^ Sager, -^, -♦
can, v. (= am able), + !i)nnen (135,
3).
capital, bie |)au^t|labt, pi. -e.
captain, ber ^auptmann, -^ (172).
card + bie ^arte, pi. -n*
carpenter, ber Bintmermanttf -^(172).
cashier + ber ^afft'rer, -^, -.
carry on, fo'rtfnjren; sep. ; — out,
ijoEfii'^ren*
cast, «., n)erfen, str. Ill, 3 ; —
away, n)egtr>erfenf sep.
castle, ba^ (Sc^lo§, @(^loffe^, ©(^lolTer*
catechise + !ated)ifteren*
cause, 7^., bie Urfad)e, _29^. -n; ber Va^
fprung, -^, -e (origin),
cavalry, bie 9ieiterei\
cease, aufboren, sep.
celebrate, feiern*
certain, — ly, gett>t§»
chain, n., + bie ^ctte,^?. -n*
chapter + ba^ ta^ji'tel -^, -♦
Charles + ^arL
Charlotte + d^arlo'tte, -n^ ; Sotte,
-na*
charm, tJ., bannen in II. S., Ex.
XXX.
cheat, «., Betrtigen, «^r. //., 2.
cheek, bie SEBange, p^. -n; bie a3adfef
^?. -n.
cheerfully, getrofl, 455, 3.
cherry + bie ^irfc^e, pi. -n»
chest + bie ^ifte, pi. -tt>
70
VOCABULARY.
child + bae ^inb, -e^, -er.
chisel, n. , ber 5DZet^eI, -^, -♦
cholera + bie S^olera.
choose, JDa^lettf emciMen.
Christian, ti., + ber Sferijl, -en, -en;
church + bie ^trc^^e, pi. -n*
circumstance, ber Umftanb; -e^, -e*
city, bie ©tabt, jpl. -e.
Cleopatra + ^leo'patra*
clear, — ly, + Har; beutltd^,
climb, jleigen, str. Z, 2.
cloak, ber SD'JanteU -^i -♦
close, adj.y bumpf*
close, «., fc^liefen, str. II., 1; ijer^
[(^liegen.
cloth, baa ^itd), -e^, e»
coat, ber 9fto(!, -e^, -e»
coffee + ber ^affee, -a*
cold + !alt, comp. falter; — weather,
bie ^dlte.
colonel, ber Dberjl, -en, -en*
come + fommen, str. IV.
comedian, ber ilommobia'nt, -en, -en»
command, n., ber S3efe^l, -a, -e.
command, «., kfel)len, str. IV. y w.
dot.
commandment, \i^^ ®e^ot, -eS, -e.
commence, anfangen, str. VII., 1,
Sep.
commercial, — people, \>0i^ |)anbcla^
ijolf, -e^, -er.
commit, I^ege^en (136) ; to be com^
mitted (= to happen), gefc^el^en,
str. v., 1.
companion, ber ®eno§, ©enoffen, ®e^
noffen*
company, bie ®efellf(^aft, pi. -en; (of
soldiers) + bie ^ompanie', pi. -en.
comparative, ber ©o'mparatiijf -a, -e*
comparatively, ioer^dltnipmafiG*
compel, jtDingett, str. Ill, 1,
complain, flagen ; to — of, ftc^ ^e^
fd^raeren iiber iv). ace).
complaint, bie ^lage, pi. -n.
comprehend, faffen; = fathom, er*=
gritnben.
comprise, einfd^liepen, str. II. , 1,
sep.
compulsion, ber BttJang, -e^*
comrade, ber ®efd^rte, -n, -n.
concert + ba^ donce'rt, -e^, -e*
conclude, fd)lie§en, str. II., 1.
conference ^- bie ^onfere'nj, pi. -en*
confess, geftetjen, str. VI.
conflagration, bie ^euer^brunfi (173).
confuse, make confused, verlegen
madden*
conquer, Bejn>inc|en, str. Ill, 1 ; (a
land), erobern; (a people), kftegen.
conqueror, ber ©roberer, -a, -.
conscious, ben?u§t {w. gen.).
consider, iikriegen ; {— estimate),
|)alten fitr {w. ace.), str. VII., 1;
yermeinen (rare).
considerable, bebeutenb.
consistent, to be — with, jtc^ Jjer^*
tragen ntit, str. VL
consolation, ber %xt^^, -e^*
consult, I)era'tf(^lagen (547, 2).
contemporaries, bie (9)iit) SSelt*
contention, ber Ban!, -e^*
contest, -y., Beftreiten, str. Z, 1.
contrast, n., + ber Sontra'fl, -e^, -e*
control, «., regieren*
cool, v. intr. , + |i($ aMii^Ien, sep. ;
jtc^ ijerfit^len.
cooling-, adj. part., + fii^Ienb; frifd).
cost, ^., 4- fofien*
cough, -y., ^ujlen*
count, n., ber ®raf, -en, -en.
count, ^., (upon), rec^nen (auf, w,
a/x.).
countess, bie ®rdftn, pi. -nen.
VOCABULARY.
71
country, ba^ Sanb, -c^^ -cr ; in the — ,
auf bent 2. ; into the — , auf ba^ C.
courage, ber WlnU -(e)^*
course, of — , natMid^*
court (of justice), ba^ ©ertd^t, -esg,
-e; (of a prince), ber |)of, -e^, -e*
cradle, n., bie SBtege^ pL -m
crane + ber ^rani^, -^, -t*
create, (er)f(^affenf str. VI.
crime, bci^ 3)er^re($en, -^, -♦
critic + ber ^ritifer, -^, -; ber Seur^
t^eiler, -^, -♦
crowd (in motion), ha^ ©ebrdngef -^.
crowded, ijoH,
crumble, jerfaHen, s^r. Fii! (w. fern).
cry, 7^., ba^ ©efd^ret, -e^»
culprit, ber ©c^ulbige, -tt, -n,
cunning, n.j bie 5lrgU)l.
cup, n., ber SSec^er, -^, -♦
current (of a river), bie Stxmun^,
pi. -en.
curse, 71., ber f5iu<i)f -c^f -^•
curse, v., fluc^en, w. dat. of person;
i)erflu(^en# w. ace.
custom, ber SBrauc^, -t^, -e.
dagger, ber t)ti\6), -i^, -e.
dainties, fiige ^oj!^
damage, i)., :6efc^abtgett.
damp, adj.y feuc^t.
dance, -y., + tanjem
danger, bie ®efa^r, pi. -en.
Danube + bie 2)onau.
Danubian Principalities, bie !Do*
nau^f^itrjlentitmer.
dare + bitrfen (135, 2).
dark, bunfel.
daughter + bie Zo^Xix, pi. -.
dawn, -y., + tagen.
day + ber %<xo,, -e^, -e; to-day, t)eute.
dead, n.y + ber STote, -n, -n.
dead, adj., + tot.
deal, 10., (a blow), ftt^i^en; — with,
nntge^en mit, sep.
dear + teuer.
death + ber %\ih, -ea (173).
deceive, ktriigen, str. II., 2 ; ^inter^
ge^en, str. VIL, in II. S, Ex. 35.
Declaration of Independence, bie
Unab^angtgfett^erllarung.
declare + erfldren.
decree, n., bie i^UQUng, pi. -en (dis-
pensation),
deed + bie %^at, pi. -en.
deep, -^ly, + ttef.
dedicate, etntt)et^en, sep.
defeat, v., ibeftegen.
defend, ba^ Sort reben {w. dat.).
defendant, ber ^IngeHagte, -n, -n.
defy, tro^en.
delay, n.y ber Stufent^alt, -eg.
delay, v. fdumen.
delight, n., ber ®en«g^ ©enuffe^, @e^
nitffe.
deliver (a letter, etc.), I^eforgen.
delivery + bte iQteferung, pi. -en; bie
5IugUeferung.
demand, v., to — something of
(from) one, (£tnem etwag anftnnen,
str. III., 2; sep.
deny, leugnen.
descend, !^eraHontnten, str. IV., sep.
describe, fd^ilbern.
desert, v., abfaHen (»on), str. VII., 1.
design, n., bie Slbfic^t, pi. -en; ber
9)Ian, -eg, -e.
desire, n., ber SBunfc^, -eg, -e; bie
;8ufl; — for combat, bie ^ampf*
kgier.
desire, v., kge^ren.
destiny, bag ®efc^i(f, -eg, -e*
determine, bejlimmen.
detest, ijerabfc^euen.
devote, n)ibnten.
72
VOCABULAKY.
diamond + ber T)iama'ntf -en, -en^
die, v., jlerkitr str. III., 3.
different, ijerfd^teben; anber^
difficult, [c^tper.
difficulty, bie <B^xom\^h\h pi. -en*
dig, grakn, str. VI.
diligently, peiiig.
dim, v.y trubem
diminish, [d)meljenf str. VIII.
disappear, i?erfc^n)ittben, str. III., 1.
discharge, -»., entlaffen, str. VII , 1.
discontent, ber UntDtlle, -n^.
disgraceful (to), fc^im^fltd^ {w. dat.).
disgusting, efltg; efeL
dislike {strongly), l^affen*
dispose (of), ijerfitgen (iiber),
distance, n., bie ^^erne*
distress, n., ber ©c^merj, -e^, -en»
do + t^un; — without, entbe^ren,
dog, ber ^unb, -e^, -e,
doleful, flaglic^*
dollar + ber 2)otta'r, -^, -^ {sUent).
door + bie %^\ix, pi. -en*
down, ^r^p., entlang*
dozen + ba^ Du^enb, -t^, -c.
draw, jie^en, s^r. II, 2.
drink, Ti., + ber Slranf, -e^, -e.
drink, «., + trinfen, «^r. ZC, 1.
drive, v., + XxtxltXi, str. 7., 2 ; (=ride),
fa|ren, str, VI.
drunk + ktrun!en»
dry, adj., + trodett*
due, to be — , ge^u^ren, w. dat.
duke + ber |)erjog, -^, -e*
duration + bie !l)auer*
during, tt)d|renb (302, 12).
dust, ber ©taub, -e^*
Dutch, n.y ber ^liebcrlanber, -^»
each other, einanber*
early, frii^»
earn, crtt>er0enr str. III, 3 ; i>erbteitetu
earnings, ber S^erbienfl, -e^, -e»
earth + bie Srbe, pi, -n*
earthly + irbifd^,
easily, leic^t*
Easter + Djlern (174, &).
easy, Iei(^t,
eat + effen, str. V., 1.
egg + ha^ (£t, -^, -er*
Egyptian, adj., + ag^ptifd^.
eight + ac^t*
either — or, entnjeber — ober.
Elbe + bie (£lk*
else, fonjl*
emigrant, ber STu^njanberer, -^, -♦
emperor, ber ^aifer, -^, -.
empty, adj., leer*
end, n.. + ba^ ©nbe, pi. -n*
end, v., aufloren, sep.
enemy, ber i^eiub, -e^, -e»
English, adj., + englifd^*
enjoy, geniepen, str. II., 1 ; ftd^ er^^
freuen, ^. ^67i. ; fcl)n)el9en in, w. dat.
enlist, njerben, str. III., 3.
ensnare, umfpannen*
enterprise, basg Unterne^'men, -^, -.
entire, — ly, ganj*
equal (to), gleic^, w. dat.
erection + bie ©rrtc^tung, -en*
err + irren*
escape, itmge'^en (136).
especial, kfonber {only used attribttr
tively [211]).
estates, bie <Stanbe (pi.).
esteem, 7^., bie ^Id^tung*
Europe + Suro'pa*
European + europa'ifc^*
even, felbjl (249, 1) ; foga'r*
evening + ber 5(knb, -ed, -e.
ever, ie ; — so, ttO(^ fo*
everybody, jeber, jebermann*
everything, atte^*
evil, n,y S3ofe^, H^ Sofc.
VOCABULAKY.
73
evil, adj., Bfe,
exactly, genau*
example, ba^ Seifptel, -<§, -e«
Excellency, bie ©xcelle'nj, pi. -en»
excellent, — ly, treflid)*
except, v., au^nc^men, s^r. /F., sep.
exchange, ^., ijertaufd^en; to — for,
i)ertauf(^en mit«
exclaim, rufen; au^rufett,5^r. F/Z,3;
Sep.
excuse, ^., entfc^ulbigen*
exhaust, angreifen, s^r. /., 1 ; 56j?.
exhibit, ^., jetgen*
exile, -y., ijerbannen; be^ Sanbe^ ijer^*
tunfen, s^r. /., 2; »ertreikn, str. Z, 2.
exist, ijorljanben fein,
expect, ermartem
explain, erflaren, erlautern,
expose, prei^geben, str. F., 1 ; sep.
fact, bte 21^atfa(|e, pi. -n.
fail + fe^len,
fair, fc^on; the — one, bte Sd)one.
faith, ber ®lau^e(n); see 46, 4.
fall, -y., 4- faHen, str. VII., 1 ; — to
the share of, ju tetl merben (190) ;
— into, ^ineinfaHenf sep.
fall asleep, einfc^lafen, str. VII., 1,
sep.
fame, bcr diul^m, -t^*
family + bie ^ami'Ue, pi. -n*
fancy, ber T)mtd, -5*
farther and farther, immer iretter.
far, not — from, unmeit (302, 10).
fasten, !nuj)fen»
fate, ba^ ©efcbicf, -e^, -c; ba^ <B^[d^
\aU -^, -e; + ba^ f^atunt, -^.
favor, ?i., bie (S)un|l,
favor, «., l^olb fein, «<). dat.
favorite, ber ©itnjllingf -^, -u
feather + bie ^eber, pi. -n*
feed, v., na^rett; + fiittern,
4
feel + fit^Ien; fpitren; ijerfpiiren.
feeling + ba^ ®efit^l, -^, -c»
fellow, ber SBurfc^e, -tt, -n, also str.
II. ; ber (55efeEe, -n, -n»
ferry-man + ber i^ci^rmann, -^, jp?.
i^a^rleute*
fever + ha^ ^ie^er, -^, -♦
few, a — , einigef tvenige*
fidelity, bie 2^reue«
field, bie ^lur, pi -en (poetical); ber
Mtx, -^, -; + bae i^elb, -e^, -er»
fight, v., + fec^ten, «^r. FZZT.
finally, enblid^.
fine, adj., + \mx, fd>on in II. S. Ex. 36.
find + finben, str. HI, 1.
finger + ber i^inger, -^, -.
fire, n., + ba^ ^euer, -$, -♦
fire, V. {= shoot), fd)iepen, str, ZZi, 1,
first, see 532, 1.
fix upon, kftimmem
fish, v., + fifc^en*
fleet, + bte ^^totte, pi. -n^
Flemish + flamif(^«
fleshy, bi(f.
floor, ber S3obett, -^, - ; ber ijuPobcnj
(bie (£rbe)«
flow, v., flte^en, s^r. iZ, 1; (^aA^«
aux. feinX
flower, bie 25lume, pi. -n*
following + folgenb,
fool, ber ^f)or, -en, -en; ber 5^arr, -en,
-en*
foot + ber %u^, -e^, -e.
for, conj. benn; prep. + fitr (304, 3).
forbid + »erMeten, str. II, 2.
forefathers, bie 35orfa^ren.
foreigner, ber trembling. -<3, -e,
foremost, ber erfle»
forfeit, v., »erf(^erjen*
/orge, -y., falf^en; ijerfdlfd^en.
Icrgetful of one's duty, pflfd^t^et*'
GclTen (548, 2, a).
74
VOCABULARY.
forgive + 'otx^tUn, str. V., 1.
former, the — the latter, biefer —
formerly, frii^er,
forsake, ^erlaffen, str. VIL
fortnight, ^ierje^n Slage,
fortunate, glucflid)*
fortune, bas^ ©IM, -e^,
four + ijier; — times, ijiermaU
fourth, n,y + \iCi^ fQ'mitX, -^, -
(532).
France + %x(inixd6^, -^*
free, adj,y + frei.
free, «., + Befreien*
freed (from), lebtg {w. gen.).
freeze + frieren, str. II., 2.
French, n. , see Frenchman.
French, adj., + franjoftfc^.
Frenchman + ber ^ranjofe, -n, -xu
frequently, oft.
fresh + frifd).
friend + ber i^reunb, -e^, -e.
from, ^oit (303, 15).
froth, ber ©c^auntr -e^.
fruit + bie ?^ruc^t, pi. -e.
full + iJOtt*
furious, tDutenb.
furnace, ber Dfen, -^, -♦
future, bic 3ufunft.
gable + ber ©ie^el, -^, -♦
gaily, lujltg.
gain, v., gewtnnen, str, iJJ., 3.
garment, ba^ ®ett>anb, -e^, -er.
garrison, bie SBefa^uttg, pi. -en.
gate, ba^ Ztir>x, -t^, -e.
general, n., ber ©eneral, -^, -e; ber
f^elb^err, -n, -eit.
general, adj., aUgemein.
generosity, bie ®ro§muU
gentleman, ber ^err, -it, -en*
gentleness, bie (Sanftmut.
gently, leife*
gentry, bie (Sbelleute (172).
George + ©eorg.
German, n.y ber Deutf(^e, -n, -n.
German, adj., beutfc^*
Germany, i)eutfc^lanb, -^*
gift + bie (3aU, pi. -n.
gigantic + gigantifd^*
give + gekn, str. F., 1.
glad, fro§.
gladly, germ
glance, n., ber S3U(f, -e^, -t*
gloomy, f(|tt)arj.
glow, v., + gluten.
gnav7 + nagen; to — one's mind,
(Sinem am ^erjen nagen*
go + ge^en (136); to — out, au^^
ge^en/ sep. ; (out of the room, etc.)
Itnau^ge^^en, sep.; (of light, fire,
etc.) erlof^en, str. VIII (133).
goblet, ber S3e(^er, -^, -♦
godfather, ber 9)at(^)e, -n, -n.
godlike, gotta^nlic^*
gold + ba^ ®olb, -ei3.
Goliath + ©o'Uat^.
good, n., + ba^ ®ut, -e^, -er.
good, adj., + gut.
good-for-nothing (fellow), ber
Zan^m^t^, -, -e.
good-natured, ptarttg.
government, bie Olegierungf pi. -en.
governor, ber Canbijogt, -e^, -e.
gracious, gnabtg.
gradually, aEnta()Ug.
grand, gro§, gro^artig.
grandmother, bie ®ro§mwtterf pi. -♦
grant, v., gewci^ren; 5?ergonnen.
grave, n., + ba^ ®xa^, -t^, -er.
great-grandmother, bie Urgrop*
mutter* pi. -.
greatly, fe^r.
greet + griipen.
VOCABULARY.
75
greeting + bcr ®Tm§, -e^, -e,
grenadier + ber ©rmabier, -^, -e*
grieve, [corner jen»
groom, n., htx ^BtaUfnt^t, -t^f -e.
grow, njad^fettf str. VI. ; (= become),
tverben*
guard, V, (against), fi(^ pteit VOX, w,
dat.
guest + ber ®af!, -zi, -€♦
guide, M., ber ^ii^rcr, -^, -♦
guilt, bie (5(^ulb, pi. -en = debts,
gush forth, (^ueUen, str. VIII. (133).
hair + basJ ^aar, -e^, -e^
half + i^alb; «ee 229*
ham, ber 'B^mkx^, -^p -•
hand + bie -^anb, ^^. - c.
handsome, fc^muc!.
hang + er^^angen (of persons).
happen, gefc^e^en, str. F., 1.
happiness, ba^ ®iM, -e^.
hard + ^art; jlreng (of work).
hardly, fautn*
harm, ber (B^ahtn, -$, " .
harmless, uttfc^ulbig; fromm.
harmony, bie (^inigfett.
hat + ber ^ut, -e^, -♦
hate + ^ajfett*
head, ber ^o^f, -e«, -e; {= chief) ba^
hear + pren*
heart -f baa ^erj, -en^, ctt; bie ©ruft*
heath 4- bie ^eibe, pL -n.
heathen + ber |)etbe, -tt, -n.
heaven, ber ^immel, -^, -.
heavenly, ^immlifc^*
heir, ber <SrBe,-n,-n (162, 3d group),
help + ^elfen, sir. III., 3.
Henry + ^einrid^,
herdsman + ber |>irte, -n, -n.
here + ^ier; here — there, §ier —
i>a (bort)«
hero, ber ^elb, -en, -en,
hesitate, S3ebenfen tragen, str. VI.
hey ! + ei !
hide, V. ^erptten*
high-treason, ber |)0(^venat, -$.
Highness, bie 2)urci^kud^t ; bie 'Bnxi^^
himself, felbfl (249), preceded by a
case of er^
hiss, V.J jifc^en; there was a hiss-
ing, ea stf(^te»
history, bie ®tf(^tc^te, pi. -en»
hoe, ^atfen*
hold + l^dten, str. VII, 1.
Holland + ^ollanb, -^.
home, n., + ba^ ^eim, -e^, -c; \)ci^
|)aua, -ea, -er^
home, adv., nad) |)aufc.
Homer + |)ome'r,
honor, n., bie ^^v.\
honor, ■??., e^ren,
honorable, e^rcn^otf^
hope + l^offen*
horde + bie |)orbe, pl.y -n,
horror, baa ®rauen, -a.
horse, baa 9!>ferb, -^a, -e,
hot + |ei§ ; — weather, bie ^i^c»
hour, bie Stunbe, pi. -n; an — 's
walk, eine ^tunbe SBegea^
house + ta^ ^aua, -ea, -er»
how? + tt>ie?
however, t»ie auc^; J»ie tmmn; —
much, n)ie an(^,
human, ntenfd^Ud^*
humble, bcmitttg^
humility, bie 2)emut»
humor, ill — , ber ttnmut, -a,
hundred + ^unbert
Hungarian, adj., + ungarifc^*
hunger + ber ^Junger, -a.
hunt, v., jagen; auf bie Sagb gc^cn^
huntsman, ber S^gcr, -a, -♦
76
VOCABULARY,
hurriedly, fc^nell; ciUg,
hut + tie ^iitte, pi., -n,
ice + ba^ Si^, -c^.
idea, ber S^egrif, -e^, -e»
idolize, ijergottern.
if, tt>mn.
ill (= sick), franf*
ill-fortune, ba^ Ungliiif, -^»
ill-humor, ber Itmnut, -^*
illuminate, erleu(|ten.
illusion, ber ^<x\xi, -^^*
imag-e, 'iSk^ ®ebtlbe, -^, -♦
imagine, jic^ benfcn (119), w. dot,; to
— one's self, jtc^ biinfen*
imitate, Xii!i6:^a1:}mtti, sep.
immediately, fofo'rt, fogtei'^,
immutable, imtt>anbclBar»
impatient (for), begierig (na^).
impel, treiben, «^r. Z, 2.
imperfection, bie Uuijollfommeti^eitf
pi -en,
imperial, !ai[erU(|.
implore, erfle^en,
important, tpid^tig.
importunity, bie 3u'bnngli(|!eit.
impossible, unmogltc^,
impressive, einbr«(f^sjott,
imprint (on), eii^jragen (w. dat.), sep.
impulse, ber !Drang, -e^*
in + tit (305, 1, 5).
incline, iteigeiu
incomparably, itngletd^.
incomprehensibly, itnbegreiflid^.
incontestably, unwiberfprec^Uc^,
increase, !oergro§ern,
independence, bie UnaBl^angigfett,
Indian + ber 3nbia'ner, -^, -♦
industry, ber ^leifr-e^^ ber Stm^i^
fletp; -e^.
infantry, ba^ i^u^ijotf, -e^.
information, bie ^uitbe^
inherit, erBen; ererkn,
innocence, bie Unf^ulb.
innocent, unf^ulbig,
inquire (of), attfragen (6ei); — after,
frogeu uac^,
insensible, itnem^ftttblic^.
in spite of, see 302, 9.
instead + anfiatt.
instruction, ber Hnterrid)!, -C,
intelligence (= news), bie ^unbe.
intelligent, !lug, inteKtge^nt.
intention, bie §{^ji(|t, pi. -n; ber
SBitte, -n^, -n,
intercept, auffangen, sir. VII., 1; sep.
interest, to take an — in, teilttel^men
att, Sftr. IV., Sep.
interest, to — one's self for one, jic^
jemanbc^ anne^mem str. IV., sep.
interesting, intereffa'm,
intermittent, — fever, ba^ SBed^fel*'
fiet>er, -^, -♦
into, in, w. ace.
invention, bie Srftnbung, pi. -en*
invisible, itn|i(^tkr»
iron, n., + ba^ ©ifen, -^, -♦
iron, adj.y + eifern,
itself, felbfi (249).
January + ber Sanuar, -4*
jealousy, bie ©iferfui^t,
Jew + ber 3ube, -n, -n.
jokingly, im Od^erj*
journey, bie 9fteife, pi. -n,
joy, bie 2u|i; bie i^reube,^^. -n.
judge, 71., ber IRx6^tix, -^, -.
judge, -p., rid)tem
judgment, ha^ Xixttxl, -t^, -e; ha^
®eri(^t, -e^, -e»
keep, fatten, str. VII., 1 ; to — house
+ lau^^alten, sep.
keeper, ber fitter, -^, -♦
VOCABULARY.
77
key, ber ©^luffeX/ -^r -♦
kill, toten^
kilogram + ba^ ^ilogramm, -(3, -e.
kind, n,t bie ^xi, pi, -en; ber ©c^Iag,
-e^, -e*
kind, adj.y gut; freunblid).
king + ber ^onig, -^, -e,
knead + fneten*
kneel + fnieem
knife, ha^ 9)ieffer, -^r -♦
knight, ber Skitter, -^f -♦
knock, flopfen*
know, tr>tffen (135) ; (= to recognize
by), erfennen (an)»
knowledge, bie 3Biffenfd)aft.
landing + bie !2anbung.
language, bie ©prad^e, pi, -n.
lantern + bie Caterne, pi. -n,
large, gro§.
last, nd;., + le^t*
last, -p., bauern.
late, fpaU
latter + ber le^tere; tlie former —
the latter, biefer — jener.
laugh + tac^en*
laughter + ba^ ©elac^ter, -^, -,
law, ha^ ®efe|r -c^, -e*
lawyer, ber 5lbi?oca't/ -en, -en»
lay + legen*
lazy, fauL
lead, ^., fu^ren*
leap up, l^inauffpringen (an), str. III.,
1 ; sep.
learn + lernen; erfa^ren, str. VL
least, at — , tDenigften^*
leave, n., ber ^bfc^ieb, -^; to take
— , ^^fd^ieb ne^men.
leave, v.y Iciffen, str. YILy 1 ; to —
over, iibrtg laffen; (a place), »er=^
laffen, ^m^i^.; abfa^ren, str. VI. t sep.,
intrans.
less, weniger^
lesson, bie ^(ufgabe, p^. -n; to give a
— , eine <Stunbe geben.
let + laffen, str. VII. , 1.
lever, ber ^ebel, -^, -♦
liberal, adj., liberal.
liberty, bie ^rei^eit, pi. -en.
license, w,, 'ti'xi ^rei^ett, p?. -en; bie
Srlaubni^.
lie (lay, lain) + Uegen, str, V., 2.
life + ba^ ^tbtxif -^.
lifeless + leblo^; toU
light, n., + ta^ 2id)tf -e^, -er.
lighten, j»etterleud^ten»
like, the — , bergleic^en*
like, «?., Iteben, mogen.
lily + bie ;2tlie, pi. -n.
limit, n.y bie ®renje, pi. -n»
lion + ber £ott>e, -n, -n; ber Seu (poeti-
cal).
list + bie Sifie, pi. -n.
listen, i^oren; p^oren, sep., to, dat.;
an'^oren, sep., w. ace.
little, fletn; a — , ein mnig*
lock, n., ha^ ©c^log, e^loffe^, ^c^lof*'
fer.
lofty, ^0(^*
long + lang; no longer, nlc^t me^r;
no longer any (w, substantive), fein
. . . nte^r; a — time, lange.
look, to — upon, betrac^ten.
lose, «., + ijerlteren, str, 11,2.
Louis + 2ubtt)ig, -^*
luxurious, uppig*
maiden + ba^ SWabc^en, -^, -.
Majesty + bie Mait\id^t, pi. -en.
make + madden.
malicious, :§cimtu(ftfd).
man + ber Mam, -e^, -er; abstract:
ber ?Dlen[c^, -en, -en.
manage, treiben, str, I., 2.
many a, see 262.
78
VOCABULARY.
map, bte ^arte, pi. -n,
marble + ber 5!?iarmor, -^,
march, -y., + ntarfc^ie'ren, riiden in
II. S. Ex. 29.
mark (coin = 24 cents) + bte 9)^ar!»
mark well, see 306, 4.
marksman, ber ^&)\x^i, -n, -n*
mast + ber 5Wajl, -e^, -en (for -e)»
master + ber 3)?eij!er, -^, -♦
matter (= thing), n., bte (Sad^e, pi.
-n; ba^ 2>tn5, -e^, -e^
mature, v., m 9leife bringen (119, 2),
maxim of virtue, bie 2^ugenble'^re, pi.
-n.
may + mag {inf, mogen, 135. 4).
me + mir, m\6) (81j.
meaning, ber ©inn; -e^.
meat (food), bie ©peife, pi. -n.
meet, i). (o/ persons), jtc^ treffen, s^r.
/F. ; to — again, jt(^ wieberfe^en,
str. IV.j 1; sep.
medicine + bie 3}Zebiji^tt, pi. -en,
memory, ba^ 5litbenfcn, -^, -♦
mention in one's conversation,
fpred^en (str. IV.) »on; erwa^nen (w.
gen.).
merchant, ber i?aufmamt, -^, pi.
(172).
merely, Mo^; \\m\
merit, n.y ba^ S^erbtenjl, -e^, -e.
message, bie SBotfc^aft, pi. -en.
messenger, ber ©efanbte, ein ©efanb^^
ter {see 220) ; ber 33Dte, -n, -n.
metal + ba$ mtta'U, -i^, -e.
metre + ba^ 3)Jeter, -€^, -♦
mill + bie 5Witp, ^^. -n.
miller + ber SJJitHer, -^, -♦
millionaire + ber 53?iIItonar, -^, -e.
mind, ha^ ®cmiit(&), -e^, -er.
miner, ber SBergmann, -^, pi. (172).
minister + ber 9)iini^fler, -^, -♦
minstrel, ber danger, -^, -•
minute + bie 3)?inu'te, pi. -n.
mirror, t^., ber Spiegel, -^, -.
mislead, ijerleiten*
misjudge, ijerfennen (119).
misunderstand, mi§^erjle:^en, str.
Vl.y 546, 2, i?i56;?.
mock at, ^o^n fprei^en, w. dat.
model, n.y ba^ S)orbilb, -t^, -er,
modest, befc^eiben.
modern + mobe^rn ; the — languages,
bte ncueren (Bprad^en.
Moldavia + bie 3)'?oIbau.
moment, ber ^ugenBUcf, -^, -e.
monarch + ber 9)Jona'r(^, -en, -en.
money, ha^ ®elb, -e^, -er»
month 4- ber 3)?onat, -e^, -e.
monument, ba^ T)tntmai, -§, -er,
moon + ber 2Jlonb, -e^, -c.
morals, bie Sitten (pi.).
more + nte^r; — and — , tmmerme^r.
morning, + ber WloxQ^n, -5, -♦
mortal, jlerMic^.
moss + ba^ SWoo^, -e^, -e»
most + bie meijlen (pL).
mother + bie 3)?utter, pi. -.
mountain, ber 33erg, -e^, -e.
mouth, ber 2)?unb, -e^, pi. 9J?iinbe,
9}?vtnbe, ?D^itnber; ber Slacken, -^, -.
move (change one's residence), um^
jie'^en, str. Il.y sep. ; — about, um==
le'rjte^en, sep.
much, many, ijtel, »iele»
mud, ber ^xtd, -e^.
murder, n., + ber !Korb, -e^ (51).
murderous + ntorberif(^; — blow,
ber 3}^orbftreic^, -e^, -e.
muzzle, n., ber 2JZaul!orb, -e^, -e.
my + mein (85).
mystery, ba^ 0idtfel, -a, -.
nation + bie 5?atio'n, pi. -en.
nature + bie 9?atu'r, pi. -en.
VOCABULAKY.
79
near, na^c {comp. na|er, aup, nac^fl)*
w. dat
nearly, fajl; Beina^c.
necessary, nottg.
necessity, bte 9Zot, pi. -e (rare).
neck, ber ^oX^f -e^, -e»
neighbor — ber 9Za(^barf -^, -n»
neither — nor, tceber — noc^»
never, nie,
nevertheless, benno(^«
new + neu, frtfi^.
news, bie S'^ac^rtclt, ^?. -en.
next + na(^j^»
night + bte S^lad^t, p?. -e,
nine + neun,
no, indef. numeral, fein (95).
nobility, ber 5lbel, -^.
noble, ebel (71).
nobody, niemanb (97).
nod, to — to one, jutt)in!ettf w. dat.,
Sep,; jumden; w. dat., sep. (Ex.
XX., II. Series).
none, fetner (95).
nonsense, ber Unftnn, -a.
noon, ber Mitta^, -^, -e.
not, nic^t; not at all, gar ntc^t*
note-book, ba^ |)eft, -e^, -e.
nothing, ni^t^*
nothing but, lauter.
notice, v., kmerfen*
noun, ha^ ^auptivort, -e^, -er»
novel, n.y ber Oioma'n, -^, -e»
now, ie^t ; + nun*
oak-tree + bie (£t($e, pi. -n*
obedience, ber ©e^orfam, -(3.
obliged, to be — , mitffen (135, 6).
obstacle, ha^ ^inbernt(3, -niffe^, -niffe.
occupy, kfe^en*
o'clock, at . . . ~, urn ♦ ♦ ♦ U|r,
Oder 4- bte Dber*
of, ijon (303, 15).
officer + ber Dfftji'er, -^, -e.
official, n., ber S3eanite, -n, -n; ein
^tartiitx, pi. S3eamte.
often + oft.
old + alt*
once, einmal; +einfl (formerly); feiner
Beit (443, 2); at—, foglei'c^; fofo'rt.
one, indef. pron.y man.
only, nur*
open, v., + offnen; ft(^ ijffnen*
opponent, ber ©egner, -^, -♦
order (= fraternity) + ber Drben, -^f
-; in — to, urn lu, w. inf.
orderly, geftttet.
originally, itrfpritngttcf).
ornament, ber ©c^muc!, -e^.
orphan, ber (bie) SBaife, -n* -n.
other + anber; + anber^ (adv.).
otherwise + anber^.
over + iikr (306, 7).
overcome, itberminben, str. III., 1.
overgrown with moss, moo^U^
tDad^fen.
owe, fc^ulben; fc^ulbig fein.
own, adj., + eigen*
package + ha^ ^adt't, -t^, -e,
paint, v., ntalen*
painting, bas^ ©emalbe, -^, -♦
palace + ber ^aia'% -c^/ -c.
palliate, ^efd^omgen.
paper + ba^ ^a\}x'tx, -^, -e; sheet
of — , baa a3Iatt; -e^, -er»
parents, bie ©Item.
Paris + 3)ari'a*
part, in — , teil^, l^alb»
patient, n., ber ^ranfe (220).
pass, n., + ber 9)a§, 9)affea, mfK
pass away, v., ba^in ge^en.
passage (in a book), bte (BttUt, pi. -n.
pauper, ber 5lrme (220).
pay, v., besa^Icn.
80
VOCABULARY.
peace, bcr ^riebe (46, 4).
peasant, ber 33auer, -n or -^, -n.
pedestrian, ber i^u^ganger, -^r-; ber
©c^nelllaufer, -^, -♦
pedlar, ber ^aufi^-er, -4, -♦
pen, bie ^eber, pi. -n.
pence, see penny,
penny + ber S^fennig, -^, -e.
pension, v,, + penftonieren,
Pentecost + ^^ftngjlen,
people, t»a^ 2^olf,-e^» -er; bie iCeute;
the young — , bie jungen Seute*
perfection, bie SJoUfommen^eit, pi.
-en*
perhaps, »iellei'c^t,
permit, v., erlauku.
person + bie 9)erfo'nr pi. -en; ber
^m\^, -en, -en.
physician, ber 5(rjt, -t^, "e.
pianist, ber ^latjt'erfpieler, -^, -; bie
^kijierfpieleritt, pL -ncn»
picture, ba^ 23ilb, -e^, -er.
piece, n., ha^ ^tM, -e^, -e.
pit, 71., bie <?3ruBe, _p?., -n.
pity, n., ha^ WxtUib, -a.
pity, V,, erkrmen; ftd) erbarmen.
place, to take — , flattftnben, sir. Ill.y
1 ; Sep.
place, -p., fe^en (upright) ; legen.
plain {= clear), flar.
plan, v., entwerfen, str. III., 3.
planet, ber ^Jlane't, -en, -en.
play, n.y ba^ <Spiel, -e^, -e.
play, v., fpielen.
plaything, ba^ Spieljeug, -e^, -e.
please, gefatten, str. VIZ, 1 ; w. dat.
pledge, i)., verlnnben. str. III., 1.
pocket, V. , ein)lrei(^en, str. /., 1 ; sep.
poet, ber Dic^ter, -^, -.
poetry, bie ^oefte', pi. -n.
point, 71., ber 9)unft, -e^, -e»
poison, ba^ (^ift, -e^, -c.
police, n., bie ^olijci'.
policeman, ber ^JoUsi'fi, ~<Xi, -en*
politeness, bie ^oflit^feit, pi. -en.
poor, arm; biirftig.
porter, ber 2)ien|lmannf -^, -er.
portion, ber Sleil, -e^, -e.
possess, kfi^en, str. V., 2.
posterity, bie ^la^^mlu
post-office + bie ^o^, pi. -en.
pound + ha^ 3>funb, -e^, e (175).
power, bie ilraft, pi. -e; bie 2)iad^t,
pi. -e.
powerful, — ly, mdc^tig.
practise, fic^ iiben.
praise, loben.
pray, Mtten, str. F.,2.
preach + prebigen.
preacher + ber 5>rebiger, -^ ; S^farrer,
-(3.
precaution, bie f^iirforge.
precept, bie lOe^re, pi. -n.
precious, foflbar.
prepare + praparieren.
present, at — , je^t; to be — , babei^
fein, Sep.
president + ber ^Jrafibe'nt, -en, -en.
presumption, bie S^ermeffen^it.
pretty, p^fc6; niebUd^.
previous, ijor^e'rge^enb.
pride, ber ^oc^mut, -a.
priest + ber ^^nefler, -a, -.
principle + baa ^^rinji'p, -a, -ien; ber
©runbfa^r -ea, -e.
prison, ber Btt?tnger, -a, -.
prisoner, ber ©efangene, -n, -n.
prize, n., ber 9)reta, -ea, -e.
prodigious, unge^euer.
profit, ber ®ett)inn, -ea, -c.
progress, n,, ber ^ortfi^ritt, -ea, -e;
ber ®ang, -t^, -e.
project, n., + baa 5)roje'ct, -ea, -e.
proper, to be — , ftd) jiemen.
VOCABULAEY.
81
property, M SJermogen, -^, -.
prophesy, tpetffagen*
prosperity, tie SBo^lfa^rt
proud, fiolj*
provide, i?erfe^ettf sir. V., 1.
provisions, ber S^orrat, -^, -t*
prune, «., Befd^neiben, str. Z, 1.
Prussian + ber 9)reuper -n, -n*
pupil, ber (B^ixkx, -^, ~.
pure, rein, + 1)ur*
put, fe|en (upriglit) ; legen ; — on,
am^un, sep. (136, 3).
pursuit, to send in — of, nad^fenben
(119), w. daL
pyramid + bie ^^rami'be, pL -n.
quarrel, ber ^aber, -^; ba^ ^aberm -<3.
queen, bie ^onigittf pi. -nen^
quill, bie ^eber, pi, -n.
quite, gait^
rage, tokn.
rain, v., + regncn.
raise, l^eben; auf^eBen, str. YIIL, f^ep.
random, at — , auf gut ®lu(f .
rank, to — above, fte^en (136) iibcr*
rather, e^er*
reach, i?., + retc^en, erretd^en*
read, lefcn, str. V.,1.
reading {e. g , various readings in
several editions), bie Se^artr pi.
-en*
ready + Bereit*
really, eigentUc^*
reap, ernten; einernten, Bep*
reaper, ber ©d^nitter, -^, -♦
reason, n., ber Berftanb, -e^»
reasonably, see 187.
recall, t?., |t(^ bejinnen (auf), str.IIT., 2.
rebel, ti., ber OieBc'IIr -eur -en*
recede (before), »et(^ettr «^r. Z, 1;
reflect, nac^benfen (119, sep.) iiber, ^c.
reflection, bie UeBerle'gung*
refuse, ijertweigern*
regularly, regelntci^ig*
reign, n., bie 9?egicrung, pi -en; in
the — , see 306, 8.
rejoicing, ber Subel, -^ ; ber freubige
Buruf,
remain, Bleikn, str, Z, 2.
remember, gebenfen (119, 2), w. gen. ;
ftd^ ertnnern, w. gen.
'remembrance, bie Srinnerungr^?.-en»
remit, erlaffen, str. VIL
re-open, mteber erofnen.
repent, reuen*
report, -y., beric^ten*
representation, bie S^orjleEung, j)^-
-en*
request, to — something, urn etwa^
Bitten, str, F., 2.
require, erforbern*
resolve, ft(^ entfc^Iiefen, str. 11. , 1.
resound, fc^alten; erft^alten, wk., also
str. vni.
respect, v,, ac^ten.
rest, «., ru^en.
retired, to live a — life, juriitf gejogen
leBen*
retreat, n., ber 9?iitfmarf(^, -e^, -e*
retreat, «., jurucftreten, str. F., 1 ;
sep.
return, «. , juriicf fe^ren, sep. ; wieber"
fe^reUf sep,\ fe^ren (poetical),
Rhenish + r^etnifd),
Rhine + ber SfJ^ein, -c^*
ribbon, ba(3 S3anb, -e^, -er.
ride, v., + reiten, st7\ Z, 1.
ridicule, n., ber ©pott, -e^.
ridiculous, lad^erlic^*
right, n.y + ba^ fRt^t, -e^, -e»
right, adj., + rec^t*
82
VOCABULAEY.
righteous + gerec^t; the — (man),
t)er ©erec^te (220).
ring + ber S^tng, -t^, -e*
river, ber gluf, %Mt^, dim*
road, hit ©tra§e, pi. -n.
rob, to — one of something, Sineit
urn tttoa^ Brtttgcn (119).
rock, ber gelfen, -«3, -.
Roman + ber fRmtx, -^, -♦
Rome + 9iom.
room (= space) + ber fftaum, -e^, -e;
ber 9)la^, -e^, -e; (= dwelling-
room), bie <Stu^er ^^. -n; ha^ 3xm^
Mter, -^, -.
royal, !omgIt(^»
rude, ro^»
ruffian, ber S5ofett)i(^t, -e^, -e (-er)»
rummage, framen.
run, «., laufeUf str. VII., 2; to —
away, weglaufen, str, VII., 2. ;
sep.
rye-bread, ta^ (Sc^warjbrot, -e^, lit.
black-bread.
sacrifice, v., o^)fern»
sacrifice, n.^ ba^ Opfer, -^, -•
sad, traurig.
salute, D., grii^em
same, the — , berfetbc (91).
Saturday, ber ©onnabenb, -^, -e; ber
(Samjlag, -^, -e»
sausage, bie SSurjl, p^. -.
save, feltg madjtn*
Saxon + ber (Bac^fe, -n, -n.
say + fagen*
scholar, ber (SJeleBrte, -n, -n»
school -f bie @(^ule, p?. -n.
Schwyz -t- ©c^nj^j (one of the can-
tons of Switzerland),
scissors + bie (Bc^eere, pi. -n,
scoff at, fpotten, w. gen.
screw + bie <B^xauht, pi. -n.
seal 4- bag (Siegel, -g, -♦
secondly, jn)eiteng,
secret, ge^eim; Jeimlid^,
secure + ft(^er,
see + fe^eti, str. F., 1 ; fc^auerif in
II. S., Ex. 21.
seek + fu(^en,
seize, |alten, str. Vll.y 1 ; fa|]en.
semicircle, ber ^albfrei^, -<^, -e.
senator + ber ©enator, -g, -en {see
63, 2).
send + fenben (119) ; fc^icfen; to —
there, ^infc^icf en^ sep. ; to — over,
^^eriikrfci^icfen, sep. ; to — for, fom^
men laffen,
sense, ber ©inn, -eg, -e,
sentiment, bag ©efu^I, -g, -e.
separate, trennen,
servant, ber 2)iener, -g, -; ber S3e**
biente, -tt, -n»
service, ber !Dienft, -eg, -e.
session, bie ©i^ung, pi. -en,
set (to — with gems, etc.), befe^en,
settle, fc^li^ten,
sever, jerrei^en, str. J, 1.
several, me^rere; ■— times, me^rmalg,
shepherd, ber ^trte, -n, -n,
shield + ber <S(^tlb, -eg, -e,
shoulder + bie ©d^ulter, pi. -n*
show, v.y jeigen,
sickness, bie ^ranf^eit, pi. -en*
sight, ber 5lnbli(f, -g, -e»
sign-board, bag vBc^ilb, -eg, -er.
signify, bebeuten.
silence, in — , fdjwetgenb*
silent, fiumm; to be—, fd^tpctgen, str.
1,2.
silver + bag (Stiber, -g,
since + feit (303, 14).
sink -f- ftnfen, str. Ill, 1 ; untergc^en
(136, 1), Sep.; I^inftnfen (sink
down), sep.
VOCABULARY.
83
Sir! 3)^cttt|)err; ber ^crr (230, 8);
(£tD. SBo^lQe^oren (86).
sister + bie ^6^m^tx, pi. -n,
sit + fi^ettr str. F., 2.
situated, to be — , liegen, str. F., 2.
skeptical + ffepttfc^*
slander, v., »erlewmbett»
slave + ber <S!la»e, -n, -n*
sleep + fc^Iafen, str. VILA {266, 2).
slippery, glatt,
slow, langfam ; trage.
smiling, to be — {= lovely), kd^ett*
smoke, -y., rauc^en, + fc^mauc^en.
soil, v., kfubeltt*
soldier + ber Solbat, -en, -en ; ber
^nec^t, -e^, -e (rare),
solemn, ernjl*
somebody, jemanb*
something, etwa^.
sometimes, jun)eUen ; ^t^njeilen.
son + ber ©o^n, -e^, -e*
song, ha^ £ieb, -t^, -er^
soon, ^alb ; as — as, fobatb a(^.
sorrow, n., ber (Sc^merj, -e^, -en.
sorry, to be — , I)ebauern ; leib t^un
(imp.), w. dat.
soul 4- bie (Secle, pi. -n.
sound, n., ber ^lang, -e^, -e.
soup + bie ©up^e, pi. -n.
source, bie DueUe, pi. -n.
sow, «., + fden*
spare, ^., [(^onem
speak + fprec^en, str. IV. ; reben.
special, Befonber*
speech, bie 9?ebe, pi., -n.
speedily, [(^leunigft*
spend, ijerwenben (119).
spill, ijergiegen, str. II, 1.
spirit, ber ®eijl, -ee, -er,
splendid, ^jrcic^tig ; in a — manner,
gropartig*
spot, n., bie ©tette, pi. -n.
spread, iJ. (of epidemics, etc.), iiber**
^anb ne^mett^ 5^r. /F.
spring, n., bie i^eber, _p^. -tt*
spy + ber <Spton, -^, -e.
squire, ber ©belfnec^t, -e^, -e* ■-.
stable, ber <3taII, -e^, -e.
staff + ber ©tab, -e^, -e»
stake, to be at — , e^ gilt.
stand + jle^en, str. VI. ; to — on
end (of the hair), ftc^ jlraukn.
star + ber ©tern, -i^, -e.
start, 'G.y abfa^reit/ str. VI.
stately + jlattUc^ ; jlolj.
stay, v., Utxbm, str. Z, 2.
steeple, ber ^irc^turm, -e^, -€♦
step, 7z., ber ©c^rttt, -e^, -e.
steward, ber totntann, -^, -er»
stick, v., + jletfen.
still, adv., no(^.
stop {intrans.), piU fte:^en (136, 2).
stormy + fturmifc^ ; t»ilb ktoegt (of
life).
strangely, feltfant/ fonberbar.
stream of blood, ber 33lutftra^Ir -^»
street + bie ©trage, pi. -m
strength, bie <Starfe^
strive + ftre^en.
stroll, v., fpajieren.
strong, ftarf.
struggle, v., fam^)fen.
student + ber ©tube'nt, -en, -en.
study + ftubieren.
stupid, bumm*
stupidity, bie ©umm^eit, pi. -en.
style (writing-instrument), ber ©rif**
fel, -^, -.
sublime, er'&aben.
subscribe to, unterfc^reiben, str. I, 2
{w. ace).
success, ber (Srfctgr -e^; -e ; ha^ ®e^
Ungen, -sJ.
succumb, unterltegen, str. V., 2.
84
VOCABULARY.
such + fold^ ; such things, fo et=*
sudden, on a — , ^nall nv^ %<iU.
suffer, leiben, str. I., 1 ; bulben,
sufficient, l^intdngltc^.
suit (of clothes), ber ^njug, -e^, -e.
suit, v., paffen^
sum, bie (Bumme, pL -«♦
superlative + ber <Bu'ptxlati^, -^,
-e»
superstition, ber SlbetglauBe, -n^,
support, v., ernd^rem
sure + |id)cr, w. gen.
surge, v., vooo^m*
swear + fc^moren.
sweet H- fug,
sweetheart, ha^ iQteSc^en, -^, -♦
Swiss, n.,+ ber ^(^tr>eijer, -^, - ; the
— people, ba^ fSolt ber ©c^tDeijer*
sword + ba^ (Bi^xotxt, -e^, -er*
sword-song, ba^ <Sc^tt)ertIieb.
sympathy + bie ©i^mpat^tef pi. -en,
take, ne^mett, str, IV, ; to — a city,
eU. , einne^men, sep. ; to — place,
ftattjtnben, str. III., 1 ; sep.; to —
to heart, ju ^erjen ne^men.
talk, ^., reben ; fprec^en, sir. IV. ;
f(^ma^en^
tall, grop ; lang,
taste, 7i., ber ©efc^macfr -^, -e ; to
have a — of, fc^mecfen nac^.
tea + ber St^ee, -^, -a.
teach, Ie|ren.
teacher, ber £e|rer, -^, -♦
tear, «., jerret§en, str. 1, 1.
tear, n.y bie S^'^rdtie, 2^?. -n*
tease, «., neden.
tell, fagen; (= relate), erja^Ien.
temerity, fii^ner 3)?ut(^)»
tempt, i)erfud^em
terrible, f iirc^terUci& ; fd^rctfltd^.
testimony, ba$ Beugni^, -ffe^, -ffc*
thaw, i)., + tauen.
the — the, je — bejlo.
theatre + ba^ Sl^ea'ter, -^, -.
theft, ber 2)tebfia^U -^, -e,
their, i^r (85).
then + banm
there + ba; expletive : e^.
therefore, barum; brunts
Theresa + St^erefta.
thereupon + barauf; \>(i\ bann.
thief + ber ^teb, -e^, -e.
think + benfen (119, 2); meinen*
this + biefer (90).
thought, n., ber ®ebattfe,-n^, -n»
thread, n.y ber f^abett, -^, -; (with-
out umlaut) = fathoms.
three + brei*
thrive, gebei^en, str. J., 3.
throne + ber %'^xm, -t^, -t.
through + bur(^ (304, 2).
thus, fo, ba^er,
till, adv., V\^^
time, bie Beit, pi. -en; several l;imes,
nte^rmal^.
tired, miibe, *
to + ivi, w. dot.
toadstool, ber 9)ftfferUn9, -^, -e.
together, beifammen.
to-morrow + morgen.
tone + ber 2:on, -ii, -e»
too + JU.
tool, ba^ SSerfjeug, -ea, e,
touch, ^., ^erii|ren (^. ace.) ; rit^ren
an («^. ace).
toward, gegen (304, 4).
town, bie ©tabt, pi. -e»
trace, t^., bie ©pur, ^^. -en.
train (railway — ), ber Bug^ -c^r -^ ;
on the — , per Sifenba^n.
traitor, ber S5errdter, -^, -.
transatlantic + tran^atknttfd^.
VOCABULAEY.
85
transgress, itberfc^reitett, &tr. Z, 1.
translate, uberfe^en.
traveller, ber 0leifenbe (220).
treason, high — , ber ^o(^»errat, -^.
treasure, 7i., ber ©(|a^, -e^, ^e,
treat, v., ^e^anbelm
trifle, n., bie ^leiniglett, pi, -en,
Trinity-Sunday, 'iio.^ S^rtnita^t^fejl
{in a popular song : ^^rinitat).
triumphal procession, ber Slriumpl^^
pg, -e^, -e.
trouble, n., bie ^vi^t, pi. -n ; bie
^\a^i, pi. -n,
Troy + %xii\Ci, -^,
truth, bie 2Ba:^r|eit, pi. -en.
Turk + ber Sitrfe, -n, -n»
turn aside, trans, v., aWittn, sep.
twice, see 531, 2.
tyranny + bie 3^^rannei\
tyrant + ber Sl^ra'nn, -en, -en,
Tyrolese + ber Sl^ro'ler, -^, -•
unable, unfd^ig*
uncle + ber Dnfel, -^, - ; ber D^txm,
-^f -e.
under + unter (306, 8).
understand, i)er|le|ett (136, 2); be*'
greifen, str. Z, 1.
understanding, ber SJerfianb, -e^ ;
bie SDernunft (reason),
unequal, unglei(^*
unfortunate, unglitcfUc^.
union, bie S^erMnbung, pi. -en,
unite, ijerbinben, str. III., 1 ; Binben,
inlll. S., Ex. 1.
United States, bie SJeretnigten <Btaa^
ten,
universal, aUgemein,
university + bie Uniijerfttci't, pi. -en,
unmixed 4- ungemifd^t,
unprincipled (ojne ©runbfa^e) ; fc^led^t,
until, bi^.
untranslatable, unitberfe^bar (422,
6).
upper + okr,
use, -»., ftc^ bebienen, w. gen.
useful, nii^Iic^,
useless, nnnu^,
usually, getDo^nlic^,
utmost, auferj^,
vacation, bie i^erien (pi; see 174,
6).
vain, in — , ijergeben^,
valley, ba^ %^al, -t^, -er,
vanish, »erf^tt)inben, str. III., 1 {aux.
fein),
velvet, ber 8ammt, -e^, -e,
venture, v.y n>a9en,
verse + ber S^er^, -e^, -e,
very, fe|r ; — much, adv., fe^r,
vexed, to be — , t)erbrte§en (imp., w.
ace.) ; ji^ argern iikr, w. ace.
victim, \)ix^ Opfer, -^/ -,
Vienna + SBien,
village, ba^ 2)orf, -e^, -er.
virtue, bie Slugenb, pi. -en,
visit, v., befuci^en,
voice, n., bie (Stimnte, pi. -n.
volume, ber S3anb» -e^, -e.
wagon + ber SGDagen, -^, -♦
wait, tvarten,
walk, to take a — , fpajieren ge^en
a36).
walk, «., ge^ctt (136) ; fc^reiten, str,
/., 1.
Wallachia + bie SSattad^ct'.
wander + wanbern; fd^tt)etfen.
wanderer + ber S©anberer, -^, -,
want, «. (= wish), motten (135, 7) ;
tt)iinfc^en,
war, ber ^rieg, -ed; -e,
warlike, friegerifd^,
ward (of a key), ? er SBart, -c3, -e*
se
VOCABULAEY.
warm, to get — over, ftd) mormen an
(w. dat.).
watch, n. (time-piece), bie U^r, pi.
-en.
watch, «. (= look on), jufe^en, sir.
F., 1 ; Sep. (w. dat.).
watchful, tt)a(^fam (auf, w. ace.).
water + ba^ SSaffer, -^, -♦
watering-place, ba^ 33ab, -e^, "er.
waver, toanhxL
way + ber SSeg, -e^, -e ; bie ^xt,
-en.
weak + fc^wad^ ; — man, ber (B^m6)^
ling, -^, -e.
weather + ba^ SKetter, -^.
week + bie SBoc^e, pZ, -n.
weep, tpeinen.
weigh + iDiegen, sir. 11., 2 {see 133
and 124).
welcome, ^., + Bemi^IIfommen.
welfare, ba^ 2Bo|lerge^enr -^.
well-meaning + tt)o^lmeinenb.
Weser + bie SBefer.
Westphalian + njejlfoiUfc^.
what ? + n)a^ ?
whatever, xool^*
when ? + njann ? {conj.), al^.
wheel, n.y ba^ 9lab, -es^, ^r.
where + IDO.
which + m\^ (92, 2).
while, C6>7y., tr>a^renb; fo lange al^.
white + n)ei§.
whither ? njo^in ?
who (r^^f. pron.), ber; toelc^er (93).
whole, ganj.
why ? tt)arum ? n>a^ ?
vricked, bofe.
wide + weiU
widow 4- bie SSittroe, p?. -n.
will, the last — , ba^ Sleflante'nt,
- e^, -e.
will, u, 4- WoUen (135, 7).
William + Sil^etm.
willing + njillig.
win, erttjerkn, str. III., 3.
wind + ber 2Binb, -e^, -e.
wind up, aufwinben, str. III., 1 ;
Sep.
window, ha^ ^enjler; -^, -♦
wine + ber SBein, -e^, -e.
winter + ber SBinter, -^, -.
wise + ttjetfe ; — man, ber SBeife
(220).
wish, n., + ber 2Bunfc^, -e^^ "e; bie
wish, v., n)oIIen (135, 7); + wiin^
fd^en.
witch, bie |)ere, pi. -n.
without, o^ne (304, 5).
witness, n., ber Beuge, -n, -n.
woe, n., + baa 2Be^, -e^ ; bie
^ein.
woe 1 + tr>e^e I (w. dat.).
woman, ha^ SBeib, -e^, -cr; bie grau,
pi. -en.
wool + bie SBoHe.
work, n., + ba^ 2Ber!, -ee, -e; — of
art, baa ^unflwerf.
work, v., arbeiten*
workman, ber 5(rbeiter, -a, -♦
V70rks (the — of an author), + bie
SBerfe; bie (Sc^riften.
world + bie SBelt, pi. -en ; the — 's
history, bie SBeltgefc^i^te; the — 's
judgment, ha^ SSeltgerid^t.
worry, n., ber SJerbru^, S^erbruffea^
worthy + tvurbig.
wound, v., + ijermunben,
wrench (from), abjmingen, str. III.,
w. dat.
write, f(^reiben, str. Z, 2.
yard, bie ©He, pi. -tt»
ye + i^r.
VOCABULARY.
87
yea, ^ar.
year + ba^ 5a^r, -<^, -c» •
yearn, ftd^ fe^nen*
yesterday + geftern,
yet, bo^, bennod) ; of time : nod^; not
yet, nod) nic^t*
yield (= obey), ge^orc^en; w. dat.
yonder, borU
you, ©ie, 4- ibr,
young + iung ; the — people, bie
iungen !2eute ; — of an animal, ba^
Sunge, cin Sunge^, see 220.
youth (= young man), + ber Siing^
ling, -^f -e»
x00w-7,'39(402.s)
THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY
iip
^^ ^ 'l >\' \' V I
f!^mm
;><•:■•